《出家经》的注释巴利
1. Pabbajjāsuttavaṇṇanā
408 “我将赞说出家”就是《出家经》。它的缘起是什么?据说,世尊住在舍卫城时,具寿阿难心里生起这样一个念头:“舍利弗等大弟子的出家已经被赞说,比丘们和近事男们都知道。可是世尊的出家却没有被赞说,我何不把它赞说出来呢?”于是,他在祇树给孤独园的座位上坐下,拿起棕榈叶扇,为比丘们赞说世尊的出家,而诵出了这部经。巴利
408.Pabbajjaṃkittayissāmīti pabbajjāsuttaṃ. Kā uppatti? Bhagavati kira sāvatthiyaṃ viharante āyasmato ānandassa parivitakko udapādi – ‘‘sāriputtādīnaṃ mahāsāvakānaṃ pabbajjā kittitā, taṃ bhikkhū ca upāsakā ca jānanti. Bhagavato pana akittitā, yaṃnūnāhaṃ kitteyya’’nti. So jetavanavihāre āsane nisīditvā cittabījaniṃ gahetvā bhikkhūnaṃ bhagavato pabbajjaṃ kittento imaṃ suttamabhāsi.
在这里,因为赞说出家的人应当说明他是怎样出家的,所以应当赞说这一点。而赞说他是怎样出家时,还应当说明他是怎样经过审察而对出家产生欢喜认同的。因此,说了“我要赞说出家”之后,接着就说“他如何出家”等话。“具眼者”的意思是:具有五种眼,具备眼力。其余开头偈颂的部分,意思很浅显。巴利
Tattha yasmā pabbajjaṃ kittentena yathā pabbaji, taṃ kittetabbaṃ. Yathā ca pabbaji, taṃ kittentena yathā vīmaṃsamāno pabbajjaṃ rocesi, taṃ kittetabbaṃ. Tasmā ‘‘pabbajjaṃ kittayissāmī’’ti vatvā ‘‘yathā pabbajī’’tiādimāha. Cakkhumāti pañcahi cakkhūhi cakkhumā cakkhusampannoti attho. Sesamādigāthāya uttānameva.
409 现在,为了说明“如何审察”这个意思,他说了“这是狭隘的”这句话。在这里,“狭隘”是指因为被妻子儿女等逼迫、被烦恼逼迫,没有行善的空间。“尘垢之处”是指像剑波等地之于马等一样,是贪等尘垢生起的地方。“空旷处”是前面所说“狭隘”的反面,像虚空一样开阔无碍。他这样观察之后,就出家了。这是说:他在居家与出家二者之中,被病、老、死更强烈地逼迫着内心,审察了过患和利益之后,作出了伟大的出离;他离家出走,来到阿诺摩河畔,用剑斩断头发,就在那时,须发变成了刚好两指长、适合沙门的样子;他接受了嘎帝咖拉梵天带来的八种资具;没有人教他“应该这样穿,应该这样披”,而是凭着自己无数生中积累的出家习性,被训练着,就这样出家了。他穿上一件袈裟,再搭上一件郁多罗僧,又将一件衣搭在肩上,把陶钵挂在肩头,就这样确立了出家者的威仪。这就是经文所说的意思,其余部分在这里很清楚。巴利
409. Idāni ‘‘yathā vīmaṃsamāno’’ti tamatthaṃ pakāsento āha ‘‘sambādhoya’’nti. Tattha sambādhoti puttadārādisampīḷanena kilesasampīḷanena ca kusalakiriyāya okāsarahito. Rajassāyatananti kambojādayo viya assādīnaṃ, rāgādirajassa uppattideso. Abbhokāsoti vuttasambādhapaṭipakkhabhāvena ākāso viya vivaṭā. Iti disvāna pabbajīti iti gharāvāsapabbajjāsu byādhijarāmaraṇehi suṭṭhutaraṃ codiyamānahadayo ādīnavamānisaṃsañca vīmaṃsitvā, mahābhinikkhamanaṃ nikkhamitvā , anomānadītīre khaggena kese chinditvā, tāvadeva ca dvaṅgulamattasaṇṭhitasamaṇasāruppakesamassu hutvā ghaṭikārena brahmunā upanīte aṭṭha parikkhāre gahetvā ‘‘evaṃ nivāsetabbaṃ pārupitabba’’nti kenaci ananusiṭṭho anekajātisahassapavattitena attano pabbajjāciṇṇeneva sikkhāpiyamāno pabbaji. Ekaṃ kāsāvaṃ nivāsetvā ekaṃ uttarāsaṅgaṃ karitvā ekaṃ cīvaraṃ khandhe karitvā mattikāpattaṃ aṃse ālaggetvā pabbajitavesaṃ adhiṭṭhāsīti vuttaṃ hoti. Sesamettha uttānameva.
410 410. 这样赞叹了世尊的出家之后,为了进一步说明他离开阿诺摩河岸、出家后精勤修行的过程,他接着说了“出家后,以身……”等全部偈颂。其中,“以身远离恶业”是指远离了三种身恶行。“远离语恶行”是指远离了四种语恶行。“清净活命”是指舍弃邪命,只依正命而活。巴利
410. Evaṃ bhagavato pabbajjaṃ kittetvā tato paraṃ pabbajitapaṭipattiṃ anomānadītīraṃ hitvā padhānāya gamanañca pakāsetuṃ ‘‘pabbajitvāna kāyenā’’tiādiṃ sabbamabhāsi. Tattha kāyena pāpakammaṃ vivajjayīti tividhaṃ kāyaduccaritaṃ vajjesi. Vacīduccaritanti catubbidhaṃ vacīduccaritaṃ. Ājīvaṃ parisodhayīti micchājīvaṃ hitvā sammājīvameva pavattayi.
411 411. 他这样清净了以正命为第八的戒之后,在七天之内从阿诺摩河对岸走了三十由旬的路程,佛陀来到了王舍城。在那里,虽然当他前往王舍城时还没有成佛,但因为是佛陀成佛前的修行事迹,所以也可以这样说,就像世俗习惯的说法“国王生在这里,在这里执掌王权”一样。“摩揭陀的”是指摩揭陀地区的城市。“山城”也是它的名字。因为它坐落在般度山、灵鹫山、毗婆罗山、仙吞山、维补罗山这五座山的中间,像畜栏一样,所以称为“山城”。“去托钵”是指为了乞食在那座城里行走。据说他站在城门口想:“如果我去向频婆娑罗王通报自己的到来,说‘净饭王的儿子、名叫悉达多的太子来了’,他一定会给我很多资具。但对我这个出家人来说,先通报再接受资具并不合适。我还是去托钵吧。”于是他披上天授的粪扫衣,拿着陶钵,从东门进城,挨家挨户地步行乞食。因此阿难尊者说“去托钵”。“布满殊胜相”是指他身上像被撒满了一样遍布殊胜的相好,或者说具有广大殊胜的相好。因为“广大”也可以说成“布满”。正如所说:“布满贪欲的人,就像被乳母的布涂满了一样。”意思是广大的贪欲。巴利
411. Evaṃ ājīvaṭṭhamakasīlaṃ sodhetvā anomānadītīrato tiṃsayojanappamāṇaṃ sattāhena agamā rājagahaṃ buddho. Tattha kiñcāpi yadā rājagahaṃ agamāsi, tadā buddho na hoti, tathāpi buddhassa pubbacariyāti katvā evaṃ vattuṃ labbhati – ‘‘idha rājā jāto, idha rajjaṃ aggahesī’’tiādi lokiyavohāravacanaṃ viya. Magadhānanti magadhānaṃ janapadassa nagaranti vuttaṃ hoti. Giribbajanti idampi tassa nāmaṃ. Tañhi paṇḍavagijjhakūṭavebhāraisigilivepullanāmakānaṃ pañcannaṃ girīnaṃ majjhe vajo viya ṭhitaṃ, tasmā ‘‘giribbaja’’nti vuccati. Piṇḍāya abhihāresīti bhikkhatthāya tasmiṃ nagare cari. So kira nagaradvāre ṭhatvā cintesi – ‘‘sacāhaṃ rañño bimbisārassa attano āgamanaṃ nivedeyyaṃ, ‘suddhodanassa putto siddhattho nāma kumāro āgato’ti bahumpi me paccayaṃ abhihareyya. Na kho pana me taṃ patirūpaṃ pabbajitassa ārocetvā paccayagahaṇaṃ, handāhaṃ piṇḍāya carāmī’’ti devadattiyaṃ paṃsukūlacīvaraṃ pārupitvā mattikāpattaṃ gahetvā pācīnadvārena nagaraṃ pavisitvā anugharaṃ piṇḍāya acari. Tenāha āyasmā ānando – ‘‘piṇḍāya abhihāresī’’ti. Ākiṇṇavaralakkhaṇoti sarīre ākiritvā viya ṭhapitavaralakkhaṇo vipulavaralakkhaṇo vā. Vipulampi hi ‘‘ākiṇṇa’’nti vuccati. Yathāha – ‘‘ākiṇṇaluddo puriso, dhāticelaṃva makkhito’’ti (jā. 1.6.118; 1.9.106). Vipulaluddoti attho.
412 他见到了他。据说,在那之前的七天里,城里已经宣布了星宿节。到了那一天,又敲响鼓声宣告:星宿节已经结束,该开始工作了。于是大众聚集在王宫广场上。国王也想:我要去安排事务了。他打开狮子窗,望着军队,正好看见这位大士在托钵而行。因此,具寿阿难说:频婆娑罗王站在宫殿上,见到了他。讲说了这番含义:这是他对大臣们说明了这件事的意义。巴利
412.Tamaddasāti tato kira purimāni satta divasāni nagare nakkhattaṃ ghositaṃ ahosi. Taṃ divasaṃ pana ‘‘nakkhattaṃ vītivattaṃ, kammantā payojetabbā’’ti bheri cari. Atha mahājano rājaṅgaṇe sannipati. Rājāpi ‘‘kammantaṃ saṃvidahissāmī’’ti sīhapañjaraṃ vivaritvā balakāyaṃ passanto taṃ piṇḍāya abhihārentaṃ mahāsattaṃ addasa. Tenāha āyasmā ānando – ‘‘tamaddasā bimbisāro, pāsādasmiṃ patiṭṭhito’’ti. Imamatthaṃ abhāsathāti imaṃ atthaṃ amaccānaṃ abhāsi.
413 现在,为了说明他对那些大臣所说的话是什么意思,他说道:“诸位,请看这位。”其中,“这位”是那位国王在指示菩萨;“诸位”是在称呼大臣们。“请看”就是看。“端严”是指肢体端正、看起来悦目。“梵”是指身材高大而匀称。“清净”是指肤色纯净光洁。“行步”是指他走路的样子。巴利
413. Idāni taṃ tesaṃ amaccānaṃ bhāsitamatthaṃ dassento āha – ‘‘imaṃ bhonto’’ti. Tattha imanti so rājā bodhisattaṃ dasseti, bhontoti amacce ālapati. Nisāmethāti passatha. Abhirūpoti dassanīyaṅgapaccaṅgo. Brahmāti ārohapariṇāhasampanno. Sucīti parisuddhachavivaṇṇo. Caraṇenāti gamanena.
414-5 “像出身低贱家庭的人一样”:意思是,他并不是像出身低贱家庭的人那样出家。“ma”是连接音节的助词。“这位比丘要去哪里?”:国王的使者们应当赶快去,弄清楚这位比丘要去哪里、今天要住在哪里;他是带着“我们想见到这位比丘”这个意图才这样说的。“守护根门”:因为双目低垂;“善加防护”:因为具足正念。或者说,因为正念而守护根门,因为穿着僧伽梨衣的端庄威仪而善加防护。巴利
414-5.Nīcakulāmivāti nīcakulā iva pabbajito na hotīti attho. Makāro padasandhikaro. Kuhiṃ bhikkhu gamissatīti ayaṃ bhikkhu kuhiṃ gamissati, ajja kattha vasissatīti jānituṃ rājadūtā sīghaṃ gacchantu. Dassanakāmā hi mayaṃ assāti iminā adhippāyena āha. Guttadvāro okkhittacakkhutāya, susaṃvuto satiyā. Guttadvāro vā satiyā, susaṃvuto pāsādikena saṅghāṭicīvaradhāraṇena.
416 他因为具足正知、正念,不拿超过所需的分量,心里想“这么多就够了”,以这种知足的心态,很快就装满了钵。
“牟尼”:他因为正在修行以成就牟尼的境界,所以即使还没真正达到牟尼的境地,也可以称为牟尼;或者按世间的习惯叫法,世人看到出家人,即使还没达到牟尼的境界,也会叫他“牟尼”。
“登上般度婆山”:就是登上了那座山。据说他问人们:“这座城里,出家人住在哪里?”他们告诉他:“在般度婆山上朝东的山坡那边。”他心想:“那里应该有地方住。”于是就登上了那座般度婆山。巴利
416.Khippaṃ pattaṃ apūresīti sampajānattā patissatattā ca adhikaṃ agaṇhanto ‘‘alaṃ ettāvatā’’ti ajjhāsayapūraṇena khippaṃ pattaṃ apūresi. Munīti monatthāya paṭipannattā appattamunibhāvopi muniicceva vutto, lokavohārena vā. Lokiyā hi amonasampattampi pabbajitaṃ ‘‘munī’’ti bhaṇanti. Paṇḍavaṃ abhihāresīti taṃ pabbataṃ abhiruhi. So kira manusse pucchi ‘‘imasmiṃ nagare pabbajitā kattha vasantī’’ti. Athassa te ‘‘paṇḍavassa upari puratthābhimukhapabbhāre’’ti ārocesuṃ. Tasmā tameva paṇḍavaṃ abhihāresi ‘‘ettha vāso bhavissatī’’ti evaṃ cintetvā.
419-23 “就像老虎、公牛王、狮子待在山洞里”这句话的意思是:他就像老虎、公牛王、狮子一样,安坐在山洞里。因为这三种兽类最为殊胜,已经远离了恐惧和怖畏,所以待在山洞里,因此作了这样的比喻。“以殊胜的车乘”:就是乘象、马、车、轿等最好的交通工具。“走遍了车乘能到的地面”:凡是乘象、马等交通工具能够到达的地方,都已经走过了。“走近”:就是到达、来到旁边。“坐下”:就是安坐。“年轻”:具有青春。“年幼”:从出生来说还很年轻。“初生之子”:这只是对前面“年轻”和“年幼”两者的修饰。“年轻之子”:意思是极其年轻。“初生者”:以最初的青春姿态而出现。“虽然年幼”:虽然年纪还小,却显现得像婴儿一样。巴利
419-23.Byagghusabhova sīhova girigabbhareti giriguhāyaṃ byaggho viya usabho viya sīho viya ca nisinnoti attho. Ete hi tayo seṭṭhā vigatabhayabheravā girigabbhare nisīdanti, tasmā evaṃ upamaṃ akāsi. Bhaddayānenāti hatthiassarathasivikādinā uttamayānena. Sayānabhūmiṃ yāyitvāti yāvatikā bhūmi hatthiassādinā yānena sakkā gantuṃ, taṃ gantvā. Āsajjāti patvā, samīpamassa gantvāti attho. Upāvisīti nisīdi. Yuvāti yobbanasampanno. Daharoti jātiyā taruṇo. Paṭhamuppattiko susūti tadubhayavisesanameva. Yuvā susūti atiyobbano. Paṭhamuppattikoti paṭhameneva yobbanavesena uṭṭhito. Daharo cāsīti sati ca daharatte susu bālako viya khāyasīti.
424-5 “军阵”就是军队,也就是军中的前锋。在“我施与财富,你享用吧”这句话里,应该这样理解其中的关联:“在鸯伽和摩揭陀境内,凡是你想要的,我就把相应的财富施给你。你带着这些财富,以象群为前导,把军阵装点得威风堂堂,尽情享用吧。”说到“国土正直的国王”时,事情是这样的:国王问“我施你财富,你享用吧,说说你的出身”,菩萨听了便想:“我要是贪图王位,连四大天王都会拿他们各自的王位来邀请我,我哪怕待在家里,也能像转轮王一样治理天下。可这位国王不知道这些,才这么问——那就让我来让他明白吧。”于是他抬起手臂,指向自己来的方向,说了“国土正直的国王”等话。其中说“在雪山旁边”,是为了表明那里农作物绝不会歉收。因为靠着雪山,连长在岩石缝隙里的大娑罗树都能以五种方式增长,更何况种在田里的庄稼呢。说“具足财富与勇力”,是为了表明七宝样样不缺,也说明他有勇士守护,别的国王根本动不了他。说“世代居住在憍萨罗”,是为了否认他是新立的国王。因为新立的王不能叫“世代居住”。只有从最初起就世代相传、一直住在这片国土上的人,才叫“世代居住”。净饭王正是这样的国王,就是针对他才说“世代居住在憍萨罗”。这也说明他的财富是世代传承下来的。巴利
424-5.Anīkagganti balakāyaṃ senāmukhaṃ. Dadāmi bhoge bhuñjassūti ettha ‘‘ahaṃ te aṅgamagadhesu yāvicchasi, tāva dadāmi bhoge. Taṃ tvaṃ sobhayanto anīkaggaṃ nāgasaṅghapurakkhato bhuñjassū’’ti evaṃ sambandho veditabbo. Ujuṃ janapado rājāti ‘‘dadāmi bhoge bhuñjassu, jātiṃ akkhāhi pucchito’’ti evaṃ kira vutto mahāpuriso cintesi – ‘‘sace ahaṃ rajjena atthiko assaṃ, cātumahārājikādayopi maṃ attano attano rajjena nimanteyyuṃ, gehe ṭhito eva vā cakkavattirajjaṃ kāreyyaṃ. Ayaṃ pana rājā ajānanto evamāha – ‘handāhaṃ, taṃ jānāpemī’’’ti bāhaṃ uccāretvā attano āgatadisābhāgaṃ niddisanto ‘‘ujuṃ janapado rājā’’tiādimāha. Tattha himavantassapassatoti bhaṇanto sassasampattivekallābhāvaṃ dasseti. Himavantañhi nissāya pāsāṇavivarasambhavā mahāsālāpi pañcahi vuddhīhi vaḍḍhanti, kimaṅgaṃ pana khette vuttāni sassāni. Dhanavīriyena sampannoti bhaṇanto sattahi ratanehi avekallattaṃ, pararājūhi atakkanīyaṃ vīrapurisādhiṭṭhitabhāvañcassa dasseti. Kosalesu niketinoti bhaṇanto navakarājabhāvaṃ paṭikkhipati. Navakarājā hi niketīti na vuccati. Yassa pana ādikālato pabhuti anvayavasena so eva janapado nivāso, so niketīti vuccati. Tathārūpo ca rājā suddhodano, yaṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘kosalesu niketino’’ti. Tena anvayāgatampi bhogasampattiṃ dīpeti.
426 到这里,已经展示了自己的财富圆满,又用“姓为日种,出身释迦族”说明了种族圆满。接着,对于国王所说的“我施给你财富,你享用吧”,他加以拒绝,说道:“我从那个家族出家,不贪求诸欲。”这里的意思是:如果我贪求诸欲,就不会舍弃那样一个财富与勇力具足、有八万二千英雄勇士围绕的家族而出家了。巴利
426. Ettāvatā attano bhogasampattiṃ dīpetvā ‘‘ādiccā nāma gottena, sākiyā nāma jātiyā’’ti iminā jātisampattiñca ācikkhitvā yaṃ vuttaṃ raññā ‘‘dadāmi bhoge bhuñjassū’’ti, taṃ paṭikkhipanto āha – ‘‘tamhā kulā pabbajitomhi, na kāme abhipatthaya’’nti. Yadi hi ahaṃ kāme abhipatthayeyyaṃ, na īdisaṃ dhanavīriyasampannaṃ dvāsītisahassavīrapurisasamākulaṃ kulaṃ chaḍḍetvā pabbajeyyanti ayaṃ kirettha adhippāyo.
427 427. 这样拒绝了国王的话之后,接着为了说明自己出家的原因,说道:“看见诸欲的过患,看出离为安稳。”这句话应当和“我已出家”连起来理解。其中“看出”就是“看见之后”。这里以及前面那些偈颂中,凡是每一处没有加以详细解释的,都应当知道是因为文义已经浅显明白,所以没有再加解释。这样说明了自己出家的原因之后,因为想去精进修行,便告知国王,说道:“我将去精进修行,我的心意乐在其中。”这句话的意思是:大王,因为我看出离为安稳而出家,所以我希求那究竟的出离——涅槃甘露,它在一切法中以最上之义而称为“精进”。我将为了这精进而去,我的心意乐在精进中,而不乐于诸欲。据说听了这番话后,国王对菩萨说:“尊者,我先前就听说过:‘净饭王之子悉达多太子,见到四种前兆后出家,将会成佛。’尊者,我见到您的志向,便生起这样的信心:‘您必定会证得佛果。’善哉,尊者,当您证得佛果后,请先来到我的国土。”巴利
427. Evaṃ rañño vacanaṃ paṭikkhipitvā tato paraṃ attano pabbajjāhetuṃ dassento āha – ‘‘kāmesvādīnavaṃ disvā, nekkhammaṃ daṭṭhu khemato’’ti. Etaṃ ‘‘pabbajitomhī’’ti iminā sambandhitabbaṃ. Tattha daṭṭhūti disvā . Sesamettha ito purimagāthāsu ca yaṃ yaṃ na vicāritaṃ, taṃ taṃ sabbaṃ uttānatthattā eva na vicāritanti veditabbaṃ. Evaṃ attano pabbajjāhetuṃ vatvā padhānatthāya gantukāmo rājānaṃ āmantento āha – ‘‘padhānāya gamissāmi, ettha me rañjatī mano’’ti. Tassattho – yasmāhaṃ, mahārāja, nekkhammaṃ daṭṭhu khemato pabbajito, tasmā taṃ paramatthanekkhammaṃ nibbānāmataṃ sabbadhammānaṃ aggaṭṭhena padhānaṃ patthento padhānatthāya gamissāmi, ettha me padhāne rañjati mano, na kāmesūti. Evaṃ vutte kira rājā bodhisattaṃ āha – ‘‘pubbeva metaṃ, bhante, sutaṃ ‘suddhodanarañño kira putto siddhatthakumāro cattāri pubbanimittāni disvā pabbajitvā buddho bhavissatī’ti, sohaṃ, bhante, tumhākaṃ adhimuttiṃ disvā evaṃpasanno ‘addhā buddhattaṃ pāpuṇissathā’ti. Sādhu, bhante, buddhattaṃ patvā paṭhamaṃ mama vijitaṃ okkameyyāthā’’ti.
《精勤经》注释第2篇巴利
2. Padhānasuttavaṇṇanā
428 “那是我为精进努力所投入的”是《精进经》。它产生的缘由是什么?具寿阿难以“我要去精进,我的心在这里欢喜”结束了《出家经》。世尊坐在香室里思惟:“我六年里渴望精进,修了难行的苦行,今天我要对比丘们讲这件事。”于是他从香室出来,坐在佛座上,以“那是我为精进努力所投入的”开头,说了这部经。巴利
428.Taṃmaṃ padhānapahitattanti padhānasuttaṃ. Kā uppatti? ‘‘Padhānāya gamissāmi, ettha me rañjatī mano’’ti āyasmā ānando pabbajjāsuttaṃ niṭṭhāpesi. Bhagavā gandhakuṭiyaṃ nisinno cintesi – ‘‘mayā chabbassāni padhānaṃ patthayamānena dukkarakārikā katā, taṃ ajja bhikkhūnaṃ kathessāmī’’ti. Atha gandhakuṭito nikkhamitvā buddhāsane nisinno ‘‘taṃ maṃ padhānapahitatta’’nti ārabhitvā imaṃ suttamabhāsi.
在这里,他用“那”和“我”这两个词,指的就是他自己。“热切精进者”是指为了涅槃而把心投入,或者已经舍弃了自身。“前往尼连禅河”是在说明特征,因为热切精进者所依止的就是尼连禅河,所以这里用了宾格。这句话的意思是“在尼连禅河”,也就是在尼连禅河的岸边。“极力奋斗后”是指极其努力之后。“禅修”是指修习无息禅那。“为了证得离轭安稳”是指为了证得从四种轭中解脱出来的涅槃。巴利
Tattha taṃ manti dvīhipi vacanehi attānameva niddisati. Padhānapahitattanti nibbānatthāya pesitacittaṃ pariccattaattabhāvaṃ vā. Nadiṃ nerañjaraṃ patīti lakkhaṇaṃ niddisati. Lakkhaṇañhi padhānapahitattāya nerañjarā nadī. Teneva cettha upayogavacanaṃ. Ayaṃ panattho ‘‘nadiyā nerañjarāyā’’ti, nerañjarāya tīreti vuttaṃ hoti. Viparakkammāti atīva parakkamitvā. Jhāyantanti appāṇakajjhānamanuyuñjantaṃ . Yogakkhemassa pattiyāti catūhi yogehi khemassa nibbānassa adhigamatthaṃ.
429 那木支就是魔罗。因为他不会放过那些想离开他掌控范围的天和人,还会给他们制造障碍,所以被称为“那木支”。“说悲悯的话”是指说充满同情的话。“一边说着话一边走近”这句意思很直白。那他为什么走近呢?据说大士有一天这样想:“如果总是为了找食物而活着,对生命还有所依赖,就不可能证得不死。”于是他就开始断食,因此变得消瘦、面容憔悴。那时魔罗不知道这条路是不是通向正觉,心想:“他修这么极端的苦行,万一哪天超越了我的掌控范围……”他感到害怕,盘算着“我要说些话拦住他”,就来了。因此他说:“你又瘦又憔悴,死亡就在你身边。”巴利
429.Namucīti māro. So hi attano visayā nikkhamitukāme devamanusse na muñcati, antarāyaṃ nesaṃ karoti, tasmā ‘‘namucī’’ti vuccati. Karuṇaṃ vācanti anuddayāyuttaṃ vācaṃ. Bhāsamāno upāgamīti idaṃ uttānameva. Kasmā pana upāgato? Mahāpuriso kira ekadivasaṃ cintesi – ‘‘sabbadā āhāraṃ pariyesamāno jīvite sāpekkho hoti, na ca sakkā jīvite sāpekkhena amataṃ adhigantu’’nti . Tato āhārupacchedāya paṭipajji, tena kiso dubbaṇṇo ca ahosi. Atha māro ‘‘ayaṃ sambodhāya maggo hoti, na hotīti ajānanto atighoraṃ tapaṃ karoti, kadāci mama visayaṃ atikkameyyā’’ti bhīto ‘‘idañcidañca vatvā vāressāmī’’ti āgato. Tenevāha – ‘‘kiso tvamasi dubbaṇṇo, santike maraṇaṃ tavā’’ti.
430 430. 这样说完之后,为了让他知道死亡已经逼近,又说道:“死亡有千分,你的生命只有一分。”这句话的意思是:具有千个部分的,就是“千分”。那是什么的千分呢?是死亡的因缘,这是省略的说法。只有一个部分的,就是“一分”。这里说的是:这无息禅那等千分,是你死亡的因缘,而其中只有一分是你的生命,也就是说,死亡已经离你这么近了。这样告知死亡已经逼近之后,接着为了鼓励他活下去,又说道:“活下去吧,先生!活着更好。”为什么更好呢?因为活着你就能修积福德。巴利
430. Evañca pana vatvā athassa maraṇasantikabhāvaṃ sāvento āha – ‘‘sahassabhāgo maraṇassa, ekaṃso tava jīvita’’nti. Tassattho – sahassaṃ bhāgānaṃ assāti sahassabhāgo. Ko so ? Maraṇassa paccayoti pāṭhaseso. Eko aṃsoti ekaṃso. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – ayaṃ appāṇakajjhānādisahassabhāgo tava maraṇassa paccayo, tato pana te eko eva bhāgo jīvitaṃ, evaṃ santike maraṇaṃ tavāti. Evaṃ maraṇassa santikabhāvaṃ sāvetvā atha naṃ jīvite samussāhento āha ‘‘jīva bho jīvitaṃ seyyo’’ti. Kathaṃ seyyoti ce. Jīvaṃ puññāni kāhasīti.
431 接着,为了显示他自己所认可的福德,说道:“当你行持梵行……”这里说的“梵行”,是指苦行者们时常远离淫欲。“祭祀”,指正在行祭祀的人。其余的意思在这里很清楚。巴利
431. Atha attanā sammatāni puññāni dassento āha – ‘‘carato ca te brahmacariya’’nti. Tattha brahmacariyanti kālena kālaṃ methunaviratiṃ sandhāyāha, yaṃ tāpasā karonti. Jūhatoti juhantassa. Sesamettha pākaṭameva.
432 “难行的道”这半颂,是为了激发对精进的厌离而说的。其中,因为无息禅定等极为深奥难入,必须艰难地行进,所以叫“难行”;因为必须以身心痛苦的方式修持,所以叫“难做”;即使以那样濒临死亡的方式也难以达到,所以叫“难以证得”——应当这样理解它的含义。此后,魔罗说了这些偈颂,“立于佛前”这半颂,是结集者们所说。也有人认为整首偈颂都是魔罗所说。然而,世尊似乎是以如同指称他人般的方式指称自己,这里所说的一切都是关于这一类情形的说明——这是我们的理解。其中,“立”就是站立。其余的意义很清楚。巴利
432.Duggo maggoti imaṃ pana aḍḍhagāthaṃ padhānavicchandaṃ janento āha. Tattha appāṇakajjhānādigahanattā dukkhena gantabboti duggo, dukkhitakāyacittena kattabbattā dukkaro, santikamaraṇena tādisenāpi pāpuṇituṃ asakkuṇeyyato durabhisambhavoti evamattho veditabbo. Ito paraṃ imā gāthā bhaṇaṃ māro, aṭṭhā buddhassa santiketi ayamupaḍḍhagāthā saṅgītikārehi vuttā. Sakalagāthāpīti eke. Bhagavatā eva pana paraṃ viya attānaṃ niddisantena sabbamettha evaṃjātikaṃ vuttanti ayamamhākaṃ khanti. Tattha aṭṭhāti aṭṭhāsi. Sesaṃ uttānameva.
433 第六颂中“以什么目的”这句话的意思是:邪恶者,你是为了给他人制造障碍,把这当作自己的目的才来的。其余部分意思很清楚。巴利
433. Chaṭṭhagāthāya yenatthenāti ettha paresaṃ antarāyakaraṇena attano atthena tvaṃ, pāpima, āgatosīti ayamadhippāyo . Sesaṃ uttānameva.
434 世尊驳斥“你活着就能造作福德”这句话时,说了“即使微少”这个偈颂。其中“以福德”一词,是就魔罗所说的导向轮回的福德而说的。其余的意思很清楚。巴利
434. ‘‘Jīvaṃ puññāni kāhasī’’ti idaṃ pana vacanaṃ paṭikkhipanto ‘‘aṇumattopī’’ti imaṃ gāthamāha. Tattha puññenāti vaṭṭagāmiṃ mārena vuttaṃ puññaṃ sandhāya bhaṇati. Sesaṃ uttānameva.
435 现在,针对“你的生命只有一分”这句话,为了震慑魔罗,世尊说了“有信”这首偈。这里的意思是:喂,魔罗,如果有人对无上寂静安稳的境界没有信心,或者有信心却懈怠,或者有信心、也精进,但智慧低劣,那么你去追问他寿命的事,倒还说得过去。可是我对无上寂静安稳的境界有坚定不移的信心,同样也具备被称为身心不懈怠之努力的精进,还有如金刚般的智慧。对于这样已发奋努力、志向最高的人,你为什么还要追问寿命?为什么问活命?“还有我的智慧”这句里的“还”字,也包含了念和定。既然如此,具备这五根、一一不缺而证得涅槃的人,像我这样发奋努力,你为什么还要追问活命?难道不是这样说的吗——坚定精进修行的人,活一天也胜过……有智慧、修禅那、观照生灭的人……巴利
435. Idāni ‘‘ekaṃso tava jīvita’’nti idaṃ vacanaṃ ārabbha māraṃ santajjento ‘‘atthi saddhā’’ti imaṃ gāthamāha. Tatrāyamadhippāyo – are, māra, yo anuttare santivarapade assaddho bhaveyya, saddhopi vā kusīto, saddho āraddhavīriyo samānopi vā duppañño, taṃ tvaṃ jīvitamanupucchamāno sobheyyāsi, mayhaṃ pana anuttare santivarapade okappanasaddhā atthi, tathā kāyikacetasikamasithilaparakkamatāsaṅkhātaṃ vīriyaṃ, vajirūpamā paññā ca mama vijjati, so tvaṃ evaṃ maṃ pahitattaṃ uttamajjhāsayaṃ kiṃ jīvamanupucchasi, kasmā jīvitaṃ pucchasi. Paññāca mamāti ettha ca saddena sati samādhi ca. Evaṃ sante yehi pañcahi indriyehi samannāgatā nibbānaṃ pāpuṇanti, tesu ekenāpi avirahitaṃ evaṃ maṃ pahitattaṃ kiṃ jīvamanupucchasi? Nanu – ekāhaṃ jīvitaṃ seyyo, vīriyamārabhato daḷhaṃ (dha. pa. 112). Paññavantassa jhāyino, passato udayabbayanti (dha. pa. 111, 113).
436-8 436-8. 这样威慑魔罗之后,为了显示自己身体与心的运作情况,说了“即使诸河……”这三首偈。就含义来说,这已经很明白了。不过这里要解说它的深层用意:在我身体里流动的这股风,是由无息禅那的精进之力所激起的,它甚至能让世间恒河、耶牟那河等诸河的水流干涸,那么对于我这样发奋精进的人,它怎么会不把大约四升的血弄干呢?不仅我的血会干,血干的时候,随行于身体、分为已结与未结的胆汁会干,覆盖所食所饮的、大约四升的痰会干,同样量的尿和食素也会干。这些干涸时,肌肉也消耗掉。我的肌肉就这样逐渐消耗,而我的心却更加清净,绝不会因此沉没。你不了解我这样的心境,只看到身体就说:“你消瘦憔悴,死亡就在你附近了。”不仅我的心更加清净,而且我的念、慧和定也更加稳固,连一丝一毫的放逸、迷惑或心散乱都没有。我这样安住时,任何沙门或婆罗门,无论在过去、未来还是现在,通过精勤而感受到的感受,我所达到的,正是这些感受中最殊胜的——以此为证。就像别人被苦触及时,心期待乐;被寒冷触及时,心期待热;被炎热触及时,心期待凉;被饥饿触及时,心期待食物;被口渴触及时,心期待水。同样,对五种欲乐,我的心连一种欲乐都不期待。像“啊,我要是吃了美食,好好睡一觉就好了”这种样子的心念,在我这里从未生起。魔罗,你看,这就是众生的清净。巴利
436-8. Evaṃ māraṃ santajjetvā attano dehacittappavattiṃ dassento ‘‘nadīnamapī’’pi gāthāttayamāha. Tamatthato pākaṭameva. Ayaṃ pana adhippāyavaṇṇanā – yvāyaṃ mama sarīre appāṇakajjhānavīriyavegasamuṭṭhito vāto vattati, loke gaṅgāyamunādīnaṃ nadīnampi sotāni ayaṃ visosaye, kiñca me evaṃ pahitattassa catunāḷimattaṃ lohitaṃ na upasoseyya. Na kevalañca me lohitameva sussati, apica kho pana tamhi lohite sussamānamhi baddhābaddhabhedaṃ sarīrānugataṃ pittaṃ, asitapītādipaṭicchādakaṃ catunāḷimattameva semhañca, kiñcāparaṃ tattakameva muttañca ojañca sussati, tesu ca sussamānesu maṃsānipi khīyanti, tassa me evaṃ anupubbena maṃsesu khīyamānesu bhiyyo cittaṃ pasīdati, na tveva tappaccayā saṃsīdati. So tvaṃ īdisaṃ cittamajānanto sarīramattameva disvā bhaṇasi ‘‘kiso tvamasi dubbaṇṇo, santike maraṇaṃ tavā’’ti. Na kevalañca me cittameva pasīdati, apica kho pana bhiyyo sati ca paññā ca samādhi mama tiṭṭhati, aṇumattopi pamādo vā sammoho vā cittavikkhepo vā natthi, tassa mayhaṃ evaṃ viharato ye keci samaṇabrāhmaṇā atītaṃ vā addhānaṃ anāgataṃ vā etarahi vā opakkamikā vedanā vedayanti, tāsaṃ nidassanabhūtaṃ pattassa uttamavedanaṃ. Yathā aññesaṃ dukkhena phuṭṭhānaṃ sukhaṃ, sītena uṇhaṃ, uṇhena sītaṃ, khudāya bhojanaṃ, pipāsāya phuṭṭhānaṃ udakaṃ apekkhate cittaṃ, evaṃ pañcasu kāmaguṇesu ekakāmampi nāpekkhake cittaṃ. ‘‘Aho vatāhaṃ subhojanaṃ bhuñjitvā sukhaseyyaṃ sayeyya’’nti īdisenākārena mama cittaṃ na uppannaṃ, passa, tvaṃ māra, sattassa suddhatanti.
439-41 世尊这样显示了自己的清净之后,为了粉碎魔罗“我要阻止他”的企图,通过描述魔军、显示自己不为魔军所胜,说出“欲是你的第一军”等六首偈。巴利
439-41. Evaṃ attano suddhataṃ dassetvā ‘‘nivāressāmi ta’’nti āgatassa mārassa manorathabhañjanatthaṃ mārasenaṃ kittetvā tāya aparājitabhāvaṃ dassento ‘‘kāmā te paṭhamā senā’’tiādikā cha gāthāyo āha.
在这里,最初,众生还在家时,会被感官欲望上的烦恼欲所迷惑;等他们战胜这些烦恼欲、出家之后,住在偏远林野的住处,或者于种种增上善法中,心里却会生起不乐。正如经中所说:“贤友,对出家者来说,喜乐是很难的。”接着,因为他们靠别人生活,饥渴就会逼迫他们;被饥渴逼迫的人,心中求取的渴爱使心疲惫;心疲惫之后,昏沉睡眠就趁虚而入。再下来,那些还没有获得殊胜成就的人,住在难以到达的阿兰若、林野住处时,会生起带有惊怖想的畏惧胆怯;他们心怀疑虑、疑惧,长久地享受着远离之乐而安住时,会生起“这恐怕不是正道吧?”的疑惑;去除彼疑而安住者,也会因少许殊胜成就而生起慢、覆藏、骄矜;去除这些而安住后,又依靠更殊胜的成就,生起利养、恭敬、名声;贪著利养等,显示似法之物,获得邪誉,安住其中,以种姓等抬高自己,贬低他人。因此,应当知道欲等是(烦恼军的)第一支军队。巴利
Tattha yasmā āditova agāriyabhūte satte vatthukāmesu kilesakāmā mohayanti, te abhibhuyya anagāriyabhāvaṃ upagatānaṃ pantesu vā senāsanesu aññataraññataresu vā adhikusalesu dhammesu arati uppajjati. Vuttañcetaṃ ‘‘pabbajitena kho, āvuso, abhirati dukkarā’’ti (saṃ. ni. 4.331). Tato te parapaṭibaddhajīvikattā khuppipāsā bādheti, tāya bādhitānaṃ pariyesanataṇhā cittaṃ kilamayati, atha nesaṃ kilantacittānaṃ thinamiddhaṃ okkamati. Tato visesamanadhigacchantānaṃ durabhisambhavesu araññavanapatthesu senāsanesu viharataṃ utrāsasaññitā bhīru jāyati, tesaṃ ussaṅkitaparisaṅkitānaṃ dīgharattaṃ vivekarasamanassādayamānānaṃ viharataṃ ‘‘na siyā nu kho esa maggo’’ti paṭipattiyaṃ vicikicchā uppajjati, taṃ vinodetvā viharataṃ appamattakena visesādhigamena mānamakkhathambhā jāyanti, tepi vinodetvā viharataṃ tato adhikataraṃ visesādhigamaṃ nissāya lābhasakkārasilokā uppajjanti, lābhādimucchitā dhammapatirūpakāni pakāsentā micchāyasaṃ adhigantvā tattha ṭhitā jātiādīhi attānaṃ ukkaṃsenti, paraṃ vambhenti, tasmā kāmādīnaṃ paṭhamasenādibhāvo veditabbo.
442-3 像这样把十种魔军一一说明之后,因为这支军队具备黑法,能帮助黑魔那木支,所以就把它指为“你的军队”,说:“这是你魔罗的军,是黑魔的进击军。”这里“进击军”,意思是杀害、摧碎沙门和婆罗门,也就是制造障碍。所谓“非勇士不能胜它,胜了才能得到乐”,意思是:对你的这支军队,一个对身体和生命还有牵挂的非勇士不能战胜它;但勇士能战胜它,战胜之后就能得到道之乐和果之乐。正因为能得到乐,所以我这个希求乐的人,也戴上了文阇草。在战场上不退转的人,为了表明自己不退转,会把文阇草绑在头上、旗帜上或武器上;我也这样佩戴,就是表明:请认定我是这样的人。如果被你的军队打败,那我这条命还不如死了好。所以要这样认定:在战场上战死更好;如果活着却被打败,与其带着这种被击败的生命活着,不如在战场上和你这个障碍正行者的魔罗战斗而死更好。这就是“战死更好”的意思。巴利
442-3. Evametaṃ dasavidhaṃ senaṃ uddisitvā yasmā sā kaṇhadhammasamannāgatattā kaṇhassa namucino upakārāya saṃvattati, tasmā naṃ tava senāti niddisanto āha – ‘‘esā namuci te senā, kaṇhassābhippahārinī’’ti. Tattha abhippahārinīti samaṇabrāhmaṇānaṃ ghātanī nippothanī, antarāyakarīti attho. Na naṃ asūro jināti, jetvā ca labhate sukhanti evaṃ tava senaṃ asūro kāye ca jīvite ca sāpekkho puriso na jināti, sūro pana jināti, jetvā ca maggasukhaṃ phalasukhañca adhigacchati. Yasmā ca labhate sukhaṃ, tasmā sukhaṃ patthayamāno ahampi esa muñjaṃ parihareti. Saṅgāmāvacarā anivattino purisā attano anivattanakabhāvaviññāpanatthaṃ sīse vā dhaje vā āvudhe vā muñjatiṇaṃ bandhanti, taṃ ayampi pariharaticceva maṃ dhārehi. Tava senāya parājitassa dhiratthu mama jīvitaṃ, tasmā evaṃ dhārehi – saṅgāme me mataṃ seyyo, yañce jīve parājito, yena jīvitena parājito jīve, tasmā jīvitā tayā sammāpaṭipannānaṃ antarāyakarena saddhiṃ saṅgāme mataṃ mama seyyoti attho.
444 有人问:为什么说死了更好?因为就在这魔军里,有些沙门婆罗门陷了进去,沉没、淹没、深陷其中,再也看不见了;他们不能靠戒等功德显发光明,就像掉进黑暗里一样。这些人虽然这样陷在里面,就算偶尔像溺水的人冒出头来,用“善哉,信”之类的方式浮露一下,可因为被你的魔军压住,他们还是不知道那条通往涅槃安稳的道路——而一切佛、独觉佛等,都是沿着那条路走的,他们才称得上善修苦行。魔罗听了这首偈颂,什么也没再说,就离开了。巴利
444. Kasmā mataṃ seyyoti ce? Yasmā pagāḷhettha…pe… subbatā, ettha kāmādikāya attukkaṃsanaparavambhanapariyosānāya tava senāya pagāḷhā nimuggā anupaviṭṭhā eke samaṇabrāhmaṇā na dissanti, sīlādīhi guṇehi nappakāsanti, andhakāraṃ paviṭṭhā viya honti. Ete evaṃ pagāḷhā samānā sacepi kadāci ummujjitvā nimujjanapuriso viya ‘‘sāhu saddhā’’tiādinā nayena ummujjanti, tathāpi tāya senāya ajjhotthaṭattā tañca maggaṃ na jānanti khemaṃ nibbānagāmīnaṃ, sabbepi buddhapaccekabuddhādayo yena gacchanti subbatāti. Imaṃ pana gāthaṃ sutvā māro puna kiñci avatvā eva pakkāmi.
445-6 魔离去之后,大士继续修那种难行的苦行,却始终没有证得任何殊胜的成果。他渐渐想到:“说不定还有别的路能通向觉悟呢?”于是便吃粗食,恢复体力。在毗舍佉月满月那天清晨,他先吃了善生女供养的乳糜,然后在贤善林中坐下,作白天的禅修,就在那里修成八种等至,这样过了一天。傍晚时,他朝大菩提场走去,把吉祥草师给的八把草散在菩提树下,受到一万世界天人的恭敬供养——巴利
445-6. Pakkante pana tasmiṃ mahāsatto tāya dukkarakārikāya kiñcipi visesaṃ anadhigacchanto anukkamena ‘‘siyā nu kho añño maggo bodhāyā’’tiādīni cintetvā oḷārikāhāraṃ āhāretvā, balaṃ gahetvā, visākhapuṇṇamadivase pageva sujātāya pāyāsaṃ paribhuñjitvā, bhadravanasaṇḍe divāvihāraṃ nisīditvā, tattha aṭṭha samāpattiyo nibbattento divasaṃ vītināmetvā sāyanhasamaye mahābodhimaṇḍābhimukho gantvā sotthiyena dinnā aṭṭha tiṇamuṭṭhiyo bodhimūle vikiritvā dasasahassalokadhātudevatāhi katasakkārabahumāno –
就算皮肤、筋、骨头都干枯了,只剩下一团内脏留在体内
愿我身体里的血肉全都干枯耗尽。巴利
‘‘Kāmaṃ taco ca nhāru ca, aṭṭhi ca avasissatu; Upasussatu nissesaṃ, sarīre maṃsalohita’’nti. –
他下定决心提起四种精进,立下誓言:“今天如果不证得佛果,我就绝不起座。”说完就坐在不败座上。魔罗——那个邪恶者——知道后心想:“今天悉达多立下誓言坐下了,今天就得让他这个誓言落空。”于是从菩提道场一直到铁围山那么远,发动了宽十二由旬、向上高九由旬的魔军,自己骑上一头高一百五十由旬的象王吉利魅卡拉,化出千条手臂,拿着各种武器,嘴里喊着“抓住!打!杀!”,又像《旷野经》里说的那样,变现出种种灾变之雨。可这些灾变一到大人面前,就都变成了经里说的那种样子。接着,魔罗用金刚钩敲打大象的额头,把象赶到大人跟前,说:“喂,悉达多,从座上起来!”大人说:“魔罗,我不起来。”然后环视四周的军队,说出这些偈颂:“四面八方,军队……”巴利
Caturaṅgavīriyaṃ adhiṭṭhahitvā ‘‘na dāni buddhattaṃ apāpuṇitvā pallaṅkaṃ bhindissāmī’’ti paṭiññaṃ katvā aparājitapallaṅke nisīdi. Taṃ ñatvā māro pāpimā ‘‘ajja siddhattho paṭiññaṃ katvā nisinno, ajjeva dānissa sā paṭiññā paṭibāhitabbā’’ti bodhimaṇḍato yāva cakkavāḷamāyataṃ dvādasayojanavitthāraṃ uddhaṃ navayojanamuggataṃ mārasenaṃ samuṭṭhāpetvā diyaḍḍhayojanasatappamāṇaṃ girimekhalaṃ hatthirājānaṃ āruyha bāhusahassaṃ māpetvā nānāvudhāni gahetvā ‘‘gaṇhatha, hanatha, paharathā’’ti bhaṇanto āḷavakasutte vuttappakārā vuṭṭhiyo māpesi, tā mahāpurisaṃ patvā tattha vuttappakārā eva sampajjiṃsu. Tato vajiraṅkusena hatthiṃ kumbhe paharitvā mahāpurisassa samīpaṃ netvā ‘‘uṭṭhehi, bho siddhattha, pallaṅkā’’ti āha. Mahāpuriso ‘‘na uṭṭhahāmi mārā’’ti vatvā taṃ dhajiniṃ samantā vilokento imā gāthāyo abhāsi ‘‘samantā dhajini’’nti.
这里,“有旗者”指军队。“已备”指已奋起。“带车乘者”指与象王吉利魅卡拉一起。“我要上前迎战”意思是:我要以威光正面向上冲去,而不是用身体。为什么?意思是说:别把我从这座位上赶走,别让魔罗把我从这不败座上动摇。“不能忍受”指无法承受,也无法压倒。“生罐”指未烧制的陶罐。“以石”指用石头。这里其余的内容都很清楚。巴利
Tattha dhajininti senaṃ. Yuttanti uyyuttaṃ. Savāhananti girimekhalanāgarājasahitaṃ. Paccuggacchāmīti abhimukho upari gamissāmi, so ca kho tejeneva, na kāyena. Kasmā? Mā maṃ ṭhānā acāvayi, maṃ etasmā ṭhānā aparājitapallaṅkā māro mā cālesīti vuttaṃ hoti. Nappasahatīti sahituṃ na sakkoti, nābhibhavati vā. Āmaṃ pattanti kācajātaṃ mattikābhājanaṃ. Asmanāti pāsāṇena. Sesamettha pākaṭameva.
447-8 现在,为了说明“破除了你这支魔军之后,我将成为战胜者,获得法王的灌顶,然后做这件事”,而说了“调伏思惟”等话。其中,“调伏思惟”是指:通过修习道,完全舍弃一切邪思惟,只让正思惟持续生起,这样就调伏了思惟。“善建立念”是指在身、受、心、法这四个念处上,把自己的念很好地建立起来。这样调伏了思惟、善建立了念之后,我将从一个国游化到另一个国,在人与天当中教导众多弟子。这些弟子受到我的教导后,不放逸……不再忧愁,那就是涅槃、不死的意思。巴利
447-8. Idāni ‘‘etaṃ te mārasenaṃ bhinditvā tato paraṃ vijitasaṅgāmo sampattadhammarājābhiseko idaṃ karissāmī’’ti dassento āha ‘‘vasīkaritvā’’ti. Tattha vasīkaritvā saṅkappanti maggabhāvanāya sabbaṃ micchāsaṅkappaṃ pahāya sammāsaṅkappasseva pavattanena vasīkaritvā saṅkappaṃ. Satiñca sūpatiṭṭhitanti kāyādīsu catūsu ṭhānesu attano satiñca suṭṭhu upaṭṭhitaṃ karitvā evaṃ vasīkatasaṅkappo suppatiṭṭhitassati raṭṭhā raṭṭhaṃ vicarissāmi devamanussabhede puthū sāvake vinayanto. Atha mayā vinīyamānā te appamattā…pe… na socare, taṃ nibbānāmatamevāti adhippāyo.
449-51 这时,魔罗听了这些偈颂后问道:“比丘,看到这样的阵容,你不害怕吗?”回答:“是的,魔罗,我不害怕。”又问:“你为什么不害怕?”回答:“因为我修过布施等波罗蜜的福德。”又问:“谁知道你做过布施这些事?”回答:“邪恶者,这哪里需要什么证人?再说,就在某一世中,我身为须大拏时所做的布施,凭那布施的威力,这大地就七次以六种方式震动,这大地本身就是证人。”这话一说完,大地就以水为界震动起来,发出可怕的声音。魔罗听到后,像被雷劈了一样,惊恐万分,收起旗帜,带着眷属逃走了。随后,这位大丈夫在三个时段中证得三明,黎明升起时说出了这段优陀那:“轮回无数生……已尽渴爱。”魔罗听到优陀那的声音后,心想:“这个人自称‘我是佛’,来吧,我要跟着他,看看他的举止。只要他身或语上有任何失误,我就要去烦扰他。”于是,他先是在菩萨阶段跟了六年,成佛后又跟了一年。结果在世尊身上找不到任何失误,便说出了“七年……”这些厌离偈。巴利
449-51. Atha māro imā gāthāyo sutvā āha – ‘‘evarūpaṃ pakkhaṃ disvā na bhāyasi bhikkhū’’ti? ‘‘Āma, māra, na bhāyāmī’’ti. ‘‘Kasmā na bhāyasī’’ti? ‘‘Dānādīnaṃ pāramipuññānaṃ katattā’’ti. ‘‘Ko etaṃ jānāti dānādīni tvamakāsī’’ti? ‘‘Kiṃ ettha pāpima sakkhikiccena, apica ekasmiṃyeva bhave vessantaro hutvā yaṃ dānamadāsiṃ, tassānubhāvena sattakkhattuṃ chahi pakārehi sañjātakampā ayaṃ mahāpathavīyeva sakkhī’’ti. Evaṃ vutte udakapariyantaṃ katvā mahāpathavī kampi bheravasaddaṃ muñcamānā, yaṃ sutvā māro asanihato viya bhīto dhajaṃ paṇāmetvā palāyi saddhiṃ parisāya. Atha mahāpuriso tīhi yāmehi tisso vijjā sacchikatvā aruṇuggamane ‘‘anekajātisaṃsāraṃ…pe… taṇhānaṃ khayamajjhagā’’ti imaṃ udānaṃ udānesi. Māro udānasaddena āgantvā ‘‘ayaṃ‘buddho aha’nti paṭijānāti, handa naṃ anubandhāmi ābhisamācārikaṃ passituṃ. Sacassa kiñci kāyena vā vācāya vā khalitaṃ bhavissati, viheṭhessāmi na’’nti pubbe bodhisattabhūmiyaṃ chabbassāni anubandhitvā buddhattaṃ pattaṃ ekaṃ vassaṃ anubandhi. Tato bhagavato kiñci khalitaṃ apassanto ‘‘satta vassānī’’ti imā nibbejanīyagāthāyo abhāsi.
其中,“可乘之机”指裂缝、空隙。“没能找到”就是没有获得。“如脂之色”就是像脂团一样。“四处游走”就是从这边到那边到处走。“柔软”就是软。“让我们得到”就是让我们证得。“滋味”就是美味。“乌鸦从这儿”就是乌鸦从这里。其余部分在这里已经很清楚了。巴利
Tattha otāranti randhaṃ vivaraṃ. Nādhigacchissanti nādhigamiṃ. Medavaṇṇanti medapiṇḍasadisaṃ. Anupariyagāti parito parito agamāsi. Mudunti mudukaṃ. Vindemāti adhigaccheyyāma. Assādanāti sādubhāvo. Vāyasettoti vāyaso etto. Sesamettha pākaṭameva.
这里的关联是这样:我为了找机会,跟着世尊整整七年,步步紧跟,一刻也没离开过,可就算这样跟着,也始终没找到机会。就像一只乌鸦,把一块颜色像肥肉的石头当成肥肉,从一边用嘴去啄,没尝到味道,心想:“说不定这里有软的地方,说不定能从这里尝到点滋味。”于是它绕着石头到处啄,转来转去,结果哪里都尝不到滋味,终于明白“这就是块石头”,就厌烦地飞走了。同样,我用自己那点可怜的智慧当嘴,在世尊的身业等方面到处啄、到处转,心想:“说不定能在哪里找到不清净的身行之类的软处,说不定能从哪儿尝到点滋味。”可我们现在什么滋味都尝不到,就像那只乌鸦碰到石头一样,对乔达摩厌烦了,对乔达摩感到厌倦,就离开了。据说,魔罗说这番话的时候,因为七年的辛苦全都白费了,生起了强烈的忧愁。正因为这样忧愁,他四肢瘫软,那把名叫“贝卢瓦般度”的琴从腋下滑落下来。这把琴如果由擅长弹奏的人来弹,能连续四个月发出美妙的声音;后来帝释天拿去送给了五髻。可它掉下来的时候,魔罗竟然没有察觉。因此世尊说:巴利
Ayaṃ pana yojanā – satta vassāni bhagavantaṃ otārāpekkho anubandhiṃ katthaci avijahanto padāpadaṃ, evaṃ anubandhitvāpi ca otāraṃ nādhigamiṃ. Sohaṃ yathā nāma medavaṇṇaṃ pāsāṇaṃ medasaññī vāyaso ekasmiṃ passe mukhatuṇḍakena vijjhitvā assādaṃ avindamāno ‘‘appeva nāma ettha mudu vindema, api ito assādanā siyā’’ti samantā tatheva vijjhanto anupariyāyitvā katthaci assādaṃ aladdhā ‘‘pāsāṇovāya’’nti nibbijja pakkameyya, evamevāhaṃ bhagavantaṃ kāyakammādīsu attano parittapaññāmukhatuṇḍakena vijjhanto samantā anupariyagā ‘‘appeva nāma katthaci aparisuddhakāyasamācārādimudubhāvaṃ vindema, kutoci assādanā siyā’’ti, te dāni mayaṃ assādaṃ alabhamānā kākova selamāsajja nibbijjāpema gotamaṃ āsajja tato gotamā nibbijja apemāti. Evaṃ vadato kira mārassa satta vassāni nipphalaparissamaṃ nissāya balavasoko udapādi. Tenassa visīdamānaṅgapaccaṅgassa beluvapaṇḍu nāma vīṇā kacchato patitā. Yā sakiṃ kusalehi vāditā cattāro māse madhurassaraṃ muñcati, yaṃ gahetvā sakko pañcasikhassa adāsi. Taṃ so patamānampi na bujjhi. Tenāha bhagavā –
他已经被悲伤彻底吞没,琵琶从腋下滑落下来。
那位亚卡心里很不高兴,就从那里消失了。巴利
‘‘Tassa sokaparetassa, vīṇā kacchā abhassatha; Tato so dummano yakkho, tatthevantaradhāyathā’’ti.
有些人说这是结集者说的,但我们不认同这种说法。巴利
Saṅgītikārakā āhaṃsūti eke, amhākaṃ panetaṃ nakkhamatīti.
3. 《善说经》的注释巴利
3. Subhāsitasuttavaṇṇanā
“如是我闻”这句,是《善说经》的开头。这部经的起因,来自世尊自己的意愿。因为世尊喜爱善说,他为了展示自己善巧说法的行为方式,同时阻止众生造作不善的言语行为,所以说了这部经。其中,“如是我闻”等话,是结集者所说。在这部经里,“那时,世尊……尊者”以及“那些比丘”这些内容,是之前没有出现过的,其余部分则按照已经解释过的方式来理解。因此,为了解释这些新出现的词句,这里说:“那时”是标明说法的时间和地点。它指出:世尊住在某个时间、某个地点,住在哪座园林。或者说,它标明适合说法的时间和地点,因为世尊从不在不适合的地点或时间说法。“此时不是时候,婆醯”等经文可以证明这一点。“确实”这个词,只是用来补足句子,或者是一个表示决定等时间意义的虚词。“世尊”是标明世间所尊崇的人。“比丘”是标明适合听法的人。“告”的意思是呼唤、说法、使对方知道。巴利
Evaṃme sutanti subhāsitasuttaṃ. Attajjhāsayato cassa uppatti. Bhagavā hi subhāsitappiyo, so attano subhāsitasamudācārappakāsanena sattānaṃ dubbhāsitasamudācāraṃ paṭisedhento imaṃ suttamabhāsi. Tattha evaṃ me sutantiādi saṅgītikāravacanaṃ. Tattha tatra kho bhagavā…pe… bhadanteti te bhikkhūti etaṃ apubbaṃ, sesaṃ vuttanayameva. Tasmā apubbapadavaṇṇanatthamidaṃ vuccati – tatrāti desakālaparidīpanaṃ. Tañhi yaṃ samayaṃ viharati, tatra samaye, yasmiñca ārāme viharati, tatra ārāmeti dīpeti. Bhāsitabbayutte vā desakāle dīpeti. Na hi bhagavā ayutte dese kāle vā dhammaṃ bhāsati. ‘‘Akālo kho, tāva, bāhiyā’’tiādi (udā. 10) cettha sādhakaṃ. Khoti padapūraṇamatte avadhāraṇādikālatthe vā nipāto. Bhagavāti lokagaruparidīpanaṃ. Bhikkhūti kathāsavanayuttapuggalaparidīpanaṃ. Āmantesīti ālapi abhāsi sambodhesi.
“比丘们”这个称呼,是在说明呼唤的方式。之所以这样说,是因为他们具备乞食等德行。借此开示他们不亲近卑劣之人、也不亲近高贵之人的生活方式,从而制止他们心中生起的掉举和怯弱。用“比丘们”这个称呼,以慈悲流露、柔和之心为先导而说出的话语,把他们的注意力引到自己面前;又以表示想要说法的话语,引发他们想听的意愿;同时以呼唤的意义,让他们认真听闻和作意。因为教法的成就,就取决于认真听闻和作意。如果有人问:当时也有其他天人和人在场,为什么只呼唤比丘呢?因为比丘最为年长、最为殊胜、最为靠近、常随不离。这个说法是面向全体大众的,不是针对个别人的。在大众中,比丘最先产生,所以最为年长;他们以出家为起点,随学佛陀的修行,领受整个教法,所以最为殊胜;在场坐着的人中,他们离佛陀最近,所以最为靠近;他们常时亲近佛陀,所以是常随者。因此,世尊在宣说面向一切大众的法时,只呼唤比丘。再者,对于这些法,他们正是能依教奉行的人,所以也呼唤他们。“尊者”是表示恭敬的称呼。“那些比丘”,就是世尊所呼唤的比丘们,他们这样回应世尊,说“尊者”。巴利
Bhikkhavoti āmantanākāraparidīpanaṃ. Tañca bhikkhanasīlatādiguṇayogasiddhattā vuttaṃ. Tena nesaṃ hīnādhikajanasevitaṃ vuttiṃ pakāsento uddhatadīnabhāvaniggahaṃ karoti. ‘‘Bhikkhavo’’ti iminā ca karuṇāvipphārasommahadayanayananipātapubbaṅgamena vacanena te attano mukhābhimukhe karitvā teneva kathetukamyatādīpakena vacanena tesaṃ sotukamyataṃ janeti, teneva ca sambodhanatthena vacanena sādhukasavanamanasikārepi te niyojeti. Sādhukasavanamanasikārāyattā hi sāsanasampatti. Aparesupi devamanussesu vijjamānesu kasmā bhikkhū eva āmantesīti ce? Jeṭṭhaseṭṭhāsannasadāsannihitabhāvato. Sabbaparisasādhāraṇā hi ayaṃ dhammadesanā, na pāṭipuggalikā. Parisāya ca jeṭṭhā bhikkhū paṭhamuppannattā, seṭṭhā anagāriyabhāvaṃ ādiṃ katvā satthu cariyānuvidhāyakattā sakalasāsanapaṭiggāhakattā ca. Āsannā tattha nisinnesu satthu santikattā, sadā sannihitā satthu santikāvacarattā. Tena bhagavā sabbaparisasādhāraṇaṃ dhammaṃ desento bhikkhū eva āmantesi. Apica bhājanaṃ te imāya kathāya yathānusiṭṭhaṃ paṭipattisabbhāvatotipi te eva āmantesi. Bhadanteti gāravādhivacanametaṃ. Te bhikkhūti ye bhagavā āmantesi, te evaṃ bhagavantaṃ ālapantā bhagavato paccassosunti.
“具备四种支分”:是指四种原因,或者四种组成部分。远离妄语等,确实是善说之语的四种原因;说真实语等四种,则是它的组成部分。这里的“支”字,是在“原因”的意思上使用的。“四种”这个词,在表示原因时是直接从格,在表示组成部分时则是工具格。“具备”:就是拥有、现起、相应。“语”:是指言说之语,也就是在“语、说、言路”以及“柔和、悦耳”等经文中出现的那种语。然而,在“由语所造之业”中作为表知,在“对四种语恶行离、远离……乃至……这称为正语”中作为离,在“粗恶语,诸比丘,若被习行、修习、多修,则导致地狱”中作为思,如此以“语”而出现的那种语,这里并非所指。为什么?因为不可说故。“是善说”:就是善加说,借此显示它带来利益。“非恶说”:就是非恶加说,借此显示它不带来无利益。“无过”:就是远离被称为过的贪等过失,借此显示它的原因清净及所说过失不存在。“无可指责”:就是解脱于指责,借此显示它一切行相圆满。“智者”:就是有智慧者,借此显示在谴责与称赞中愚者无足轻重。巴利
Catūhiaṅgehīti catūhi kāraṇehi avayavehi vā. Musāvādāveramaṇiādīni hi cattāri subhāsitavācāya kāraṇāni. Saccavacanādayo cattāro avayavā, kāraṇatthe ca aṅgasaddo. Catūhīti nissakkavacanaṃ hoti, avayavatthe karaṇavacanaṃ. Samannāgatāti samanuāgatā pavattā yuttā ca. Vācāti samullapanavācā. Yā sā ‘‘vācā girā byappatho’’ti (dha. sa. 636) ca, ‘‘nelā kaṇṇasukhā’’ti (dī. ni. 1.9; ma. ni. 3.14) ca evamādīsu āgacchati. Yā pana ‘‘vācāya ce kataṃ kamma’’nti (dha. sa. aṭṭha. 1 kāyakammadvāra) evaṃ viññatti ca, ‘‘yā catūhi vacīduccaritehi ārati virati…pe… ayaṃ vuccati sammāvācā’’ti (dha. sa. 299; vibha. 206) evaṃ virati ca, ‘‘pharusavācā, bhikkhave, āsevitā bhāvitā bahulīkatā nirayasaṃvattanikā hotī’’ti (a. ni. 8.40) evaṃ cetanā ca vācāti āgacchati, sā idha na adhippetā. Kasmā? Abhāsitabbato. Subhāsitā hotīti suṭṭhu bhāsitā hoti. Tenassā atthāvahanataṃ dīpeti. Na dubbhāsitāti na duṭṭhu bhāsitā. Tenassā anatthānāvahanataṃ dīpeti. Anavajjāti vajjasaṅkhātarāgādidosavirahitā. Tenassā kāraṇasuddhiṃ vuttadosābhāvañca dīpeti. Ananuvajjā cāti anuvādavimuttā. Tenassā sabbākārasampattiṃ dīpeti. Viññūnanti paṇḍitānaṃ. Tena nindāpasaṃsāsu bālā appamāṇāti dīpeti.
“以哪四种?”这是想问的人提出的问题。“在此”:就是在这个教法里。“比丘们”:这是对想对他们说法的人的称呼。“比丘”:是指出说上述那种话的人。“只说善说”:这是在以人为立足点的说法中,对四种语支中某一支的解说。“不说恶说”:是阻止说与该语支相反的话,由此否定了“有时也该说妄语等”的见解。或者,“不说恶说”表明断除邪语,“善说”则表明已断除邪语的人应当说的语的特征。同样,不造恶、具足善。不过,为了说明各支分,未先说不应说的,而直接说应说的。这个道理在“只说正法”等处也一样适用。巴利
Katamehi catūhīti kathetukamyatāpucchā. Idhāti imasmiṃ sāsane. Bhikkhaveti yesaṃ kathetukāmo, tadālapanaṃ. Bhikkhūti vuttappakāravācābhāsanakapuggalanidassanaṃ. Subhāsitaṃyeva bhāsatīti puggalādhiṭṭhānāya desanāya catūsu vācaṅgesu aññataraṅganiddesavacanaṃ. No dubbhāsitanti tasseva vācaṅgassa paṭipakkhabhāsananivāraṇaṃ. Tena ‘‘musāvādādayopi kadāci vattabbā’’ti diṭṭhiṃ nisedheti. ‘‘No dubbhāsita’’nti iminā vā micchāvācappahānaṃ dīpeti, ‘‘subhāsita’’nti iminā pahīnamicchāvācena satā bhāsitabbavacanalakkhaṇaṃ. Tathā pāpassa akaraṇaṃ, kusalassa upasampadaṃ . Aṅgaparidīpanatthaṃ pana abhāsitabbaṃ pubbe avatvā bhāsitabbamevāha. Esa nayo dhammaṃyevātiādīsupi.
在这里,“只说善说,不说恶说”这句话,是说明远离离间过失、能促成和睦的言语;“只说正法,不说非正法”这句话,是说明远离杂秽过失、不背离正法的贤圣言语;其余两句,则是说明远离粗恶过失的可爱真实言语。接着,用“以这些……”等话直接指出这些支分之后,就归结赞叹那种言语。这里特别要指出:当说到“比丘们,具备这四种支的言语才是善说”时,有些人以为,只要言语具备支分、名词、性、数、格、时态、作者等种种圆满,就是“善说”,而佛陀从正法的角度否定了这种看法。因为即使具备那些支分,如果带有离间语等过失,那仍然是恶说,会给自己和他人带来无益。相反,具备这四种支的言语,即使是蛮族语,或者属于陶工女之歌谣一类,也仍然是善说,因为它能带来世间与出世间的利益和安乐。这里有一个例证:在锡兰岛,一位锡兰婢女在路边守护庄稼时,用锡兰语唱着与生、老、死相关的歌,六十位正在路上行走的观修比丘听到后,当场证得阿罗汉果。又如一位名叫帝沙、已开始观修的比丘,他走近莲花池,一再折断池中的莲花——巴利
Ettha ca ‘‘subhāsitaṃyeva bhāsati no dubbhāsita’’nti iminā pisuṇadosarahitaṃ samaggakaraṇavacanaṃ vuttaṃ, ‘‘dhammaṃyeva bhāsati no adhamma’’nti iminā samphadosarahitaṃ dhammato anapetaṃ mantāvacanaṃ vuttaṃ, itarehi dvīhi pharusālikarahitāni piyasaccavacanāni vuttāni. Imehi khotiādinā pana tāni aṅgāni paccakkhato dassento taṃ vācaṃ nigameti. Visesato cettha ‘‘imehi kho, bhikkhave , catūhi aṅgehi samannāgatā vācā subhāsitā hotī’’ti bhaṇanto yadaññe paṭiññādīhi avayavehi nāmādīhi padehi liṅgavacanavibhattikālakārakādīhi sampattīhi ca samannāgataṃ vācaṃ ‘‘subhāsita’’nti maññanti, taṃ dhammato paṭisedheti. Avayavādisampannāpi hi pesuññādisamannāgatā vācā dubbhāsitāva hoti attano paresañca anatthāvahattā. Imehi pana catūhi aṅgehi samannāgatā sacepi milakkhubhāsāpariyāpannā ghaṭaceṭikāgītikapariyāpannā vā hoti, tathāpi subhāsitā eva lokiyalokuttarahitasukhāvahattā. Sīhaḷadīpe maggapasse sassaṃ rakkhantiyā sīhaḷaceṭikāya sīhaḷakeneva jātijarāmaraṇapaṭisaṃyuttaṃ gītaṃ gāyantiyā sutvā maggaṃ gacchantā saṭṭhimattā vipassakabhikkhū cettha arahattaṃ pattā nidassanaṃ. Tathā tisso nāma āraddhavipassako bhikkhu padumasarasamīpena gacchanto padumasare padumāni bhañjitvā bhañjitvā –
清晨盛开的红睡莲,被阳光照得凋谢了;
就这样,投生为人的众生,被衰老的猛烈力量所摧残。巴利
‘‘Pāto phullaṃ kokanadaṃ, sūriyālokena bhajjiyate; Evaṃ manussattagatā sattā, jarābhivegena maddīyantī’’ti. –
有位婢女唱着这首歌,他听了之后证得阿罗汉果。另外,在无佛出世的时代,有一个男子带着七个儿子从林中出来,听见一个女人正用杵捣米——巴利
Imaṃ gītaṃ gāyantiyā ceṭikāya sutvā arahattaṃ patto, buddhantare ca aññataro puriso sattahi puttehi saddhiṃ vanā āgamma aññatarāya itthiyā musalena taṇḍule koṭṭentiyā –
这个身体被衰老折磨,依附在干枯的皮肤和皮肉上;
这个身体被死亡摧毁,是死神口中的食物。
这是蛆虫的窝,塞满了各种各样的腐尸烂肉;
这个不净的容器,就像芭蕉树干一样。巴利
‘‘Jarāya parimadditaṃ etaṃ, milātachavicammanissitaṃ; Maraṇena bhijjati etaṃ, maccussa ghasamāmisaṃ. ‘‘Kimīnaṃ ālayaṃ etaṃ, nānākuṇapena pūritaṃ; Asucissa bhājanaṃ etaṃ, kadalikkhandhasamaṃ ida’’nti. –
听了这首歌之后,他和儿子们一起证得了辟支菩提;还有其他以类似方法证得圣者境界的人,这也是例证。不过这并不稀奇:世尊善于了解众生的意向和潜在倾向,五百位比丘听了以“一切行无常”等方式所说的偈颂后,就证得了阿罗汉果;还有许多人听了与蕴、处等相关的开示后,也有无数人和天神证得了果位。所以,具备这四种要素的言语,即使属于蛮族的语言,或者出自陶匠女之歌,也应当知道它是“善说”。正因为是善说,所以它没有过失,无可指责,对于有智慧、追求利益、以义为依归而不以文辞为依归的善男子来说,是应当依止的。巴利
Imaṃ gītikaṃ sutvā saha puttehi paccekabodhiṃ patto, aññe ca īdisehi upāyehi ariyabhūmiṃ pattā nidassanaṃ. Anacchariyaṃ panetaṃ, yaṃ bhagavatā āsayānusayakusalena ‘‘sabbe saṅkhārā aniccā’’tiādinā nayena vuttā gāthāyo sutvā pañcasatā bhikkhū arahattaṃ pāpuṇiṃsu, aññe ca khandhāyatanādipaṭisaṃyuttā kathā sutvā aneke devamanussāti. Evaṃ imehi catūhi aṅgehi samannāgatā vācā sacepi milakkhubhāsāpariyāpannā, ghaṭaceṭikāgītikapariyāpannā vā hoti, tathāpi ‘‘subhāsitā’’ti veditabbā. Subhāsitattā eva ca anavajjā ca ananuvajjā ca viññūnaṃ atthatthikānaṃ kulaputtānaṃ atthapaṭisaraṇānaṃ, no byañjanapaṭisaraṇānanti.
世尊说此,意思是:世尊宣说了这具备善说特征的话语。善逝说了此之后,导师接着又说此,意思是:善逝说了这个特征之后,导师又说了另一个这个。现在,结集者显示了应当说的偈颂之后,讲述了以上全部内容。其中,“另一个”是针对偈颂的句式而说的。它有两种:一种是针对后来才到集会的大众,为了让他们没听过的能听到、听过的能牢固记住等,而只是阐明其含义;另一种是通过阐明先前因某种原因而遗漏的含义,来显示特殊的义理,就像“人出生时,斧头就生在口中”等例子那样。但在这里,只是阐明其含义这一种。巴利
Idamavocabhagavāti idaṃ subhāsitalakkhaṇaṃ bhagavā avoca. Idaṃ vatvāna sugato, athāparaṃ etadavoca satthāti idañca lakkhaṇaṃ vatvā atha aññampi etaṃ avoca satthā. Idāni vattabbagāthaṃ dassetvā sabbametaṃ saṅgītikārakā āhaṃsu. Tattha aparanti gāthābandhavacanaṃ sandhāya vuccati. Taṃ duvidhaṃ hoti – pacchā āgataparisaṃ assavanasussavanaādhāraṇadaḷhīkaraṇādīni vā sandhāya tadatthadīpakameva ca. Pubbe kenaci kāraṇena parihāpitassa atthassa dīpanena atthavisesadīpakañca ‘‘purisassa hi jātassa, kuṭhārī jāyate mukhe’’tiādīsu (su. ni. 662) viya. Idha pana tadatthadīpakameva.
453 这里,“santo”指的是佛陀等圣者。因为他们确实赞叹善说为“最上、最胜”。至于第二、第三、第四,这是依据前面已经指明的次第来说的。而在偈颂结束时,鹏耆舍长老对世尊的善说生起了净信。巴利
453. Tattha santoti buddhādayo. Te hi subhāsitaṃ ‘‘uttamaṃ seṭṭha’’nti vaṇṇayanti. Dutiyaṃ tatiyaṃ catutthanti idaṃ pana pubbe niddiṭṭhakkamaṃ upādāya vuttaṃ. Gāthāpariyosāne pana vaṅgīsatthero bhagavato subhāsite pasīdi.
结集者们为了展示他所表现出的净信之相,以及世尊所说的那些话,就说了“那时,具寿……”等等。其中,“paṭibhāti maṃ”的意思是:我的辩才显现出来了。“Paṭibhātu taṃ”的意思是:愿你的辩才显现出来。“Sāruppāhi”的意思是:以相称的话语。“Abhitthavī”的意思是:称赞了。巴利
So yaṃ pasannākāraṃ akāsi, yañca vacanaṃ bhagavā abhāsi, taṃ dassentā saṅgītikārakā ‘‘atha kho āyasmā’’tiādimāhaṃsu. Tattha paṭibhāti manti mama bhāgo pakāsati . Paṭibhātu tanti tava bhāgo pakāsatu. Sāruppāhīti anucchavikāhi. Abhitthavīti pasaṃsi.
454 不以追悔去折磨人,也不该去折磨;不伤害人,是指不破坏彼此关系、不压迫别人。那样的话,才确实就是善说。到这里,他就是在用不两舌的话来称赞世尊。巴利
454.Na tāpayeti vippaṭisārena na tāpeyya. Na vihiṃseyyāti aññamaññaṃ bhindanto na bādheyya. Sā ve vācāti sā vācā ekaṃseneva subhāsitā. Ettāvatā apisuṇavācāya bhagavantaṃ thometi.
455 “Paṭinanditā”是说:以欢喜的心迎上前去,欢喜、珍爱。“Yaṃ anādāya pāpāni, paresaṃ bhāsate piyaṃ”的意思是:说话时不取用他人的罪恶、不可爱、令人反感、粗恶语,只说意义和音韵都甜美、令人喜爱的话,这就是可爱语;也就是说,应当只说可爱语。他以这首偈颂,用可爱语赞颂了世尊。巴利
455.Paṭinanditāti haṭṭhena hadayena paṭimukhaṃ gantvā nanditā sampiyāyitā. Yaṃ anādāya pāpāni, paresaṃ bhāsate piyanti yaṃ vācaṃ bhāsanto paresaṃ pāpāni appiyāni paṭikkūlāni pharusavacanāni anādāya atthabyañjanamadhuraṃ piyameva vacanaṃ bhāsati, taṃ piyavācameva bhāseyyāti vuttaṃ hoti. Imāya gāthāya piyavacanena bhagavantaṃ abhitthavi.
456 “不死”是指它像甘露一样,因为本质甜美。经中也这样说:“真实确实比各种滋味更甜美。”或者,因为它是证得涅槃不死的因缘,所以叫不死。“这是永恒的法”是说:这被称为真实语,是自古以来的法则,是世代相传的修行传统;古人就是这样做的,他们从不说妄语。因此他说:“圣者们安住于真实、利益和法中。”在这里,因为安住于真实,所以安住于自己和他人的利益;因为安住于利益,所以应知道他们安住于法。或者,后面这两者应理解为对真实的进一步说明:安住于真实,是安住于怎样的真实呢?是安住于利益和法中。也就是说,不舍弃他人的利益,因此做不损害他人利益的事;虽然做不损害他人的事,但也不离开法,因此只成办符合法的利益。通过这首偈颂,他以真实语赞叹世尊。巴利
456.Amatāti amatasadisā sādubhāvena. Vuttampi cetaṃ ‘‘saccaṃ have sādutaraṃ rasāna’’nti (saṃ. ni. 1.73; su. ni. 184). Nibbānāmatapaccayattā vā amatā. Esa dhammo sanantanoti yāyaṃ saccavācā nāma, esa porāṇo dhammo cariyā paveṇī, idameva hi porāṇānaṃ āciṇṇaṃ, na te alikaṃ bhāsiṃsu. Tenevāha – ‘‘sacce atthe ca dhamme ca, ahu santo patiṭṭhitā’’ti. Tattha sacce patiṭṭhitattā eva attano ca paresañca atthe patiṭṭhitā. Atthe patiṭṭhitattā eva ca dhamme patiṭṭhitā hontīti veditabbā. Paraṃ vā dvayaṃ saccavisesanamicceva veditabbaṃ. Sacce patiṭṭhitā. Kīdise? Atthe ca dhamme ca, yaṃ paresaṃ atthato anapetattā atthaṃ anuparodhaṃ karotīti vuttaṃ hoti. Satipi ca anuparodhakaratte dhammato anapetattā dhammaṃ, yaṃ dhammikameva atthaṃ sādhetīti vuttaṃ hoti. Imāya gāthāya saccavacanena bhagavantaṃ abhitthavi.
457 “安稳”是指无畏、没有灾祸。凭什么这么说呢?为了证得涅槃、彻底终结痛苦,也就是说,它能使烦恼般涅槃,并带来轮回之苦的终结。或者也可以这样理解:佛陀为了证得涅槃、彻底终结痛苦——也就是为了两种涅槃界——而开示安稳之道,所以他说的是安稳之语。而“sā ve vācānamuttamā”意思是,那话语是一切话语中最殊胜的。这里的含义应当这样理解。通过这首偈颂,他以智慧之语称赞世尊,并以阿拉汉果为顶点结束了这次说法。以上就是对前面未解释词句的注释,其余部分应按前面已说的方法来理解。巴利
457.Khemanti abhayaṃ nirupaddavaṃ. Kena kāraṇenāti ce? Nibbānappattiyā dukkhassantakiriyāya, yasmā kilesanibbānaṃ pāpeti, vaṭṭadukkhassa ca antakiriyāya saṃvattatīti attho. Atha vā yaṃ buddho nibbānappattiyā dukkhassantakiriyāyāti dvinnaṃ nibbānadhātūnamatthāya khemamaggappakāsanato khemaṃ vācaṃ bhāsati, sā ve vācānamuttamāti sā vācā sabbavācānaṃ seṭṭhāti evamettha attho veditabbo. Imāya gāthāya mantāvacanena bhagavantaṃ abhitthavanto arahattanikūṭena desanaṃ niṭṭhāpesīti ayamettha apubbapadavaṇṇanā. Sesaṃ vuttanayeneva veditabbanti.
4. 供养饼经(孙陀利迦婆罗堕阇经)的注释巴利
4. Pūraḷāsasutta-(sundarikabhāradvājasutta)-vaṇṇanā
“如是我闻”等语,就是《供养饼经》。它的起因是什么?世尊在午饭后应做的事都做完之后,用佛眼观察世间,看见孙陀利迦婆罗堕阇婆罗门已经具备了证得阿罗汉果的亲近依止缘,并且知道:“如果我到那里去,就会展开一场对话;对话结束时,这位婆罗门听我说法之后,会出家并证得阿罗汉果。”于是世尊就去了那里,主动引出话题,然后宣说了这部经。巴利
Evaṃme sutanti pūraḷāsasuttaṃ. Kā uppatti? Bhagavā pacchābhattakiccāvasāne buddhacakkhunā lokaṃ volokento sundarikabhāradvājabrāhmaṇaṃ arahattassa upanissayasampannaṃ disvā ‘‘tattha mayi gate kathā pavattissati, tato kathāvasāne dhammadesanaṃ sutvā esa brāhmaṇo pabbajitvā arahattaṃ pāpuṇissatī’’ti ca ñatvā tattha gantvā kathaṃ samuṭṭhāpetvā imaṃ suttamabhāsi.
这里,“如是我闻”等话,是结集经典的人说的。“是什么出身”等话,是那位婆罗门说的;“我不是婆罗门”等话,是世尊说的。把这一切合在一起,就称为《供养饼经》。其中,和前面已经说过的内容相同,就按前面说过的方式理解;还没说的,我们来解释,但只解释那些含义不浅显的词句。“在憍萨罗”中,憍萨罗是指一些地方上的王子。他们居住的某一个地区,也依照习惯用语被称为“憍萨罗”。这里就是指在那个憍萨罗国。不过,有些人这样解释:“从前,有位大帕那达王子,看了种种戏剧表演等,却连一点微笑都没有。国王听说后下令:‘谁能让我儿子笑,我就用一切璎珞庄严他。’于是人们扔下犁具,聚集了一大群人。那些人花了超过七年时间,表演种种游戏等,还是没能让他笑。于是帝释天派来一位天界舞者,他表演了天界戏剧,才让王子笑了。之后,那些人各自朝自己住处的方向散去。途中遇到亲朋好友,就互相问候:‘朋友,你安乐吗?朋友,你安乐吗?’因此,依据‘安乐’这个音声,那个地方就被称为‘憍萨罗’。”在名为孙陀利迦的河岸边……巴利
Tattha evaṃ me sutantiādi saṅgītikārakānaṃ vacanaṃ. Kiṃjacco bhavantiādi tassa brāhmaṇassa, na brāhmaṇo nomhītiādi bhagavato. Taṃ sabbampi samodhānetvā ‘‘pūraḷāsasutta’’nti vuccati. Tattha vuttasadisaṃ vuttanayeneva veditabbaṃ, avuttaṃ vaṇṇayissāma, tañca kho uttānatthāni padāni anāmasantā. Kosalesūti kosalā nāma jānapadino rājakumārā. Tesaṃ nivāso ekopi janapado ruḷhisaddena ‘‘kosalā’’ti vuccati. Tasmiṃ kosalesu janapade. Keci pana ‘‘yasmā pubbe mahāpanādaṃ rājakumāraṃ nānānāṭakādīni disvā sitamattampi akarontaṃ sutvā rājā āṇāpesi ‘yo mama puttaṃ hasāpeti, sabbābharaṇehi naṃ alaṅkaromī’ti. Tato naṅgalāni chaḍḍetvā mahājanakāyo sannipati. Te ca manussā atirekasattavassāni nānākīḷikādayo dassentāpi taṃ nāsakkhiṃsu hasāpetuṃ. Tato sakko devanaṭaṃ pesesi, so dibbanāṭakaṃ dassetvā hasāpesi. Atha te manussā attano attano vasanokāsābhimukhā pakkamiṃsu. Te paṭipathe mittasuhajjādayo disvā paṭisanthāramakaṃsu ‘kacci bho kusalaṃ, kacci bho kusala’nti . Tasmā taṃ ‘kusala’nti saddaṃ upādāya so padeso ‘kosalo’ti vuccatī’’ti vaṇṇayanti. Sundarikāya nadiyā tīreti sundarikāti evaṃnāmikāya nadiyā tīre.
那时,世尊想要调伏那位婆罗门,就前往那条河的岸边,用袈裟连头一起盖住,在一棵树下坐下,安住在坐姿的威仪中。“孙陀利迦婆罗堕阇”:那位婆罗门住在河边,也供奉火;“婆罗堕阇”是他的姓,所以这样称呼他。“供奉火”:指把供物投进火里,让火烧起来。“侍奉火供”:指通过清扫、涂抹火坛、施食等来侍奉火坛。“谁能吃这剩下的供物呢?”据说,那位婆罗门向火献供之后,看见剩下的乳粥,就这样想:“投进火里的乳粥已经被大梵天吃了,可这里还有剩下的。如果我能把它布施给从梵天口中出生的婆罗门,那父亲和儿子就都得到满足了,通往梵天的路也会被很好地清净。那我就去找一位婆罗门吧。”于是,为了见到婆罗门,他从座位上起身,向四方张望,心想:“谁能吃这剩下的供物呢?”巴利
Tena kho panāti yena samayena bhagavā taṃ brāhmaṇaṃ vinetukāmo gantvā tassā nadiyā tīre sasīsaṃ pārupitvā rukkhamūle nisajjāsaṅkhātena iriyāpathavihārena viharati. Sundarikabhāradvājoti so brāhmaṇo tassā nadiyā tīre vasati aggiñca juhati, bhāradvājoti cassa gottaṃ, tasmā evaṃ vuccati. Aggiṃ juhatīti āhutipakkhipanena jāleti. Aggihuttaṃ paricaratīti agyāyatanaṃ sammajjanūpalepanabalikammādinā payirupāsati. Ko nu kho imaṃ habyasesaṃ bhuñjeyyāti so kira brāhmaṇo aggimhi juhitvā avasesaṃ pāyāsaṃ disvā cintesi – ‘‘aggimhi tāva pakkhittapāyāso mahābrahmunā bhutto, ayaṃ pana avaseso atthi. Taṃ yadi brahmuno mukhato jātassa brāhmaṇasseva dadeyyaṃ, evaṃ me pitarā saha puttopi santappito bhaveyya, suvisodhito ca brahmalokagāmimaggo assa, handāhaṃ brāhmaṇaṃ gavesāmī’’ti. Tato brāhmaṇadassanatthaṃ uṭṭhāyāsanā catuddisā anuvilokesi – ‘‘ko nu kho imaṃ habyasesaṃ bhuñjeyyā’’ti.
在树林中某一棵树下:在那片树林里最殊胜的一棵树下。连头覆盖:连同头部一起把身体覆盖起来。可是世尊为什么这样做呢?难道他即使具有那罗延力,也不能抵挡降霜和寒风吗?这确实是有原因的。因为诸佛并不是一切都作身体保养,世尊这样做是为了引发交谈,他想:婆罗门来了,我就露出头来;婆罗门见到我之后,会怎么开口呢?我就顺着他的话题为他说法。见到后,从左方……便走近:据说那位婆罗门见到世尊后,把他认作婆罗门,心想:这个人连头覆盖着,整夜精勤修习,我给他布施净水,再把这份祭余给他吧。他就这样走近了。这位尊者是光头,这位是光头哩。头刚一露出来,看见发际,就说光头。接着更仔细地看,连一点发髻也看不见,于是轻蔑地说光头哩。婆罗门们的见解就是这样的。然后从那里:他从站立的那个地方看见,从那个地方起,也有因某种原因而剃头者。巴利
Aññatarasmiṃ rukkhamūleti tasmiṃ vanasaṇḍe seṭṭharukkhamūle. Sasīsaṃ pārutanti saha sīsena pārutakāyaṃ. Kasmā pana bhagavā evamakāsi, kiṃ nārāyanasaṅkhātabalopi hutvā nāsakkhi himapātaṃ sītavātañca paṭibāhitunti? Atthetaṃ kāraṇaṃ. Na hi buddhā sabbaso kāyapaṭijagganaṃ karonti eva, apica bhagavā ‘‘āgate brāhmaṇe sīsaṃ vivarissāmi, maṃ disvā brāhmaṇo kathaṃ pavattessati, athassa kathānusārena dhammaṃ desessāmī’’ti kathāpavattanatthaṃ evamakāsi. Disvāna vāmena…pe… tenupasaṅkamīti so kira bhagavantaṃ disvā brāhmaṇo ‘‘ayaṃ sasīsaṃ pārupitvā sabbarattiṃ padhānamanuyutto, imassa dakkhiṇodakaṃ datvā imaṃ habyasesaṃ dassāmī’’ti brāhmaṇasaññī hutvā eva upasaṅkami. Muṇḍo ayaṃ bhavaṃ, muṇḍako ayaṃ bhavanti sīse vivaritamatteva kesantaṃ disvā ‘‘muṇḍo’’ti āha. Tato suṭṭhutaraṃ olokento parittampi sikhaṃ adisvā hīḷento ‘‘muṇḍako’’ti āha. Evarūpā hi nesaṃ brāhmaṇānaṃ diṭṭhi. Tato vāti yattha ṭhito addasa, tamhā padesā muṇḍāpīti kenaci kāraṇena muṇḍitasīsāpi honti.
458 “我不是婆罗门”这句话里,na 这个字表示否定,no 这个字表示确定,就像“na no samaṃ”等句子里的用法一样。由此说明:我绝不是婆罗门。“我不是王族子弟”,是说我不是刹帝利。“我不是吠舍”,是说我也不是吠舍。“我不是任何人”,是说我也不属于任何首陀罗或旃陀罗之类。这样就断然否定了种姓出身的一切说法。为什么呢?因为就像河流一旦流入大海,出身良家而出家的人们,就舍弃了从前的名字和族姓。《巴哈拉达经》在这里正可以作证明。世尊这样否定了种姓出身之说以后,为了如实显示自己,便说:“已遍知世间人的族姓,我无所执取,以慧行于世间。”怎么算是遍知族姓呢?世尊以三种遍知遍知了五蕴,五蕴既已遍知,族姓也就随之被遍知了。又因为贪等所依之物已不存在,所以他是无所执取者;以智慧了知之后,便以随智而转的身业等行于世间,因此说:“遍知族姓……行于世间。”所谓 manta,说的就是智慧,他正是以这个而行,所以说“mantaṃ carāmi loke”(我以慧行于世间),只是为了随顺音律而把长音缩成了短音。巴利
458.Na brāhmaṇo nomhīti ettha nakāro paṭisedhe, nokāro avadhāraṇe ‘‘na no sama’’ntiādīsu (khu. pā. 6.3; su. ni. 226) viya. Tena nevamhi brāhmaṇoti dasseti. Na rājaputtoti khattiyo namhi. Na vessāyanoti vessopi namhi. Udakoci nomhīti aññopi suddo vā caṇḍālo vā koci na homīti evaṃ ekaṃseneva jātivādasamudācāraṃ paṭikkhipati. Kasmā? Mahāsamuddaṃ pattā viya hi nadiyo pabbajjūpagatā kulaputtā jahanti purimāni nāmagottāni. Pahārādasuttañcettha (a. ni. 8.19) sādhakaṃ. Evaṃ jātivādaṃ paṭikkhipitvā yathābhūtamattānaṃ āvikaronto āha – ‘‘gottaṃ pariññāya puthujjanānaṃ, akiñcano manta carāmi loke’’ti. Kathaṃ gottaṃ pariññāsīti ce? Bhagavā hi tīhi pariññāhi pañcakkhandhe pariññāsi, tesu ca pariññātesu gottaṃ pariññātameva hoti. Rāgādikiñcanānaṃ pana abhāvena so akiñcano mantā jānitvā ñāṇānuparivattīhi kāyakammādīhi carati. Tenāha – ‘‘gottaṃ…pe… loke’’ti. Mantā vuccati paññā, tāya cesa carati. Tenevāha – ‘‘mantaṃ carāmi loke’’ti chandavasena rassaṃ katvā.
459-60 世尊这样把自己的身份表明之后,现在为了把责难推到那位婆罗门身上,指出“你连这么明显的特征都看见了,却还是不知道什么该问、什么不该问”,于是说道:“穿着僧伽梨……问姓。”在这里,按照裁剪和缝合的意思,三件衣都叫作“僧伽梨”;穿着、披着这些衣的人,就是“穿僧伽梨者”。“无家”就是没有家,意思是断除了渴爱。至于世尊在祇园里的大香舍、迦雷利圆堂、憍赏弥小屋、栴檀花鬘堂等各种住处,跟这个词并不对应。“剃除须发”,就是去除了须发,意思是已经剃掉了须发。“极其寂静者”,就是内心极其寂静、止息了热恼,或者说是防护其心者。“于此不被这些人所染着”,由于舍弃了对资具的贪爱,所以不被人们染着、不与世人混杂,完全独居。“婆罗门,我不堪”,即我这样穿着僧伽梨……于此不被这些人所染着,婆罗门啊,你却问我这种原本的名称姓氏,对于已经出家的人来说,这是不合适的问姓。巴利
459-60. Evaṃ attānaṃ āvikatvā idāni ‘‘evaṃ oḷārikaṃ liṅgampi disvā pucchitabbāpucchitabbaṃ na jānāsī’’ti brāhmaṇassa upārambhaṃ āropento āha – ‘‘saṅghāṭivāsī…pe… gottapañha’’nti. Ettha ca chinnasaṅghaṭitaṭṭhena tīṇipi cīvarāni ‘‘saṅghāṭī’’ti adhippetāni, tāni nivāseti paridahatīti saṅghāṭivāsī. Agahoti ageho, nittaṇhoti adhippāyo. Nivāsāgāraṃ pana bhagavato jetavane mahāgandhakuṭikarerimaṇḍalamāḷakosambakuṭicandanamālādianekappakāraṃ, taṃ sandhāya na yujjati. Nivuttakesoti apanītakeso, ohāritakesamassūti vuttaṃ hoti. Abhinibbutattoti atīva vūpasantapariḷāhacitto, guttacitto vā. Alippamāno idha māṇavehīti upakaraṇasinehassa pahīnattā manussehi alitto asaṃsaṭṭho ekantavivitto. Akallaṃ maṃ brāhmaṇāti yvāhaṃ evaṃ saṅghāṭivāsī…pe… alippamāno idha māṇavehi, taṃ maṃ tvaṃ, brāhmaṇa, pākatikāni nāmagottāni atītaṃ pabbajitaṃ samānaṃ appatirūpaṃ gottapañhaṃ pucchasīti.
听到这话,婆罗门为了摆脱责难,说道:贤者们,婆罗门们确实会跟婆罗门一起互相问:“你是婆罗门吧?”这里“是婆罗门吗”的意思就是“你是婆罗门吧”。这话是说:贤者,我不是在问不合适的问题。因为在我们婆罗门的规矩里,婆罗门们聚在一起时,就会这样问:“尊驾是婆罗门吗?尊驾是跋勒德瓦哲吗?”像这样来问出身和姓氏。巴利
Evaṃ vutte upārambhaṃ mocento brāhmaṇo āha – pucchanti ve, bho brāhmaṇā, brāhmaṇebhi saha ‘‘brāhmaṇo no bhava’’nti. Tattha brāhmaṇo noti brāhmaṇo nūti attho. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – nāhaṃ bho akallaṃ pucchāmi. Amhākañhi brāhmaṇasamaye brāhmaṇā brāhmaṇehi saha samāgantvā ‘‘brāhmaṇo nu bhavaṃ, bhāradvājo nu bhava’’nti evaṃ jātimpi gottampi pucchanti evāti.
461-2 听完这番话,世尊为了让那位婆罗门的心变得柔软,就展示自己在吠陀咒语方面的精通,说道:“如果你自称是婆罗门……二十四音节。”这段话的意思是:如果你说“我是婆罗门”,却称我为非婆罗门,那么我就向你这位尊者请教那三句、二十四音节的萨维谛,请你告诉我。这里,世尊是针对以三皈依为本质的圣萨维谛——它是一切胜义吠陀、三藏的根本,为诸胜义婆罗门、一切诸佛所宣说,具足义与具足文——“我皈依佛,我皈依法,我皈依僧”——而发问。即使那位婆罗门说别的,世尊也必定会指出那不是圣者律中的萨维谛,显示其无实质,而在此处令他安立。然而,那位婆罗门一听到“我请教那三句、二十四音节的萨维谛”这句由梵音发出、依他自己宗派所成立的萨维谛相与文的言语,就断定:“这位沙门确实已通达婆罗门宗义,而我却因无知以为‘这是非婆罗门’而轻蔑了他,这位正是善巧的、通达咒语的婆罗门。”于是为了问祭祀仪轨和应供者仪轨,问及此义,说出这三句不规则偈颂:“依何……于世间。”这段话的意思是:依何、以何为意趣、希求何,仙人们、刹帝利们、婆罗门们以及其他人们,为了诸天之义而举行祭祀。Yaññamakappayiṃsu中的ma是连词。Akappayiṃsu即安排、作。Puthū即众多,以施食施饮等种种差别而多种多样,众多仙人、人们、刹帝利、婆罗门依何而举行祭祀。他们问:“他们的那业如何成就?”就是以这样的意趣发问。巴利
461-2. Evaṃ vutte bhagavā brāhmaṇassa cittamudubhāvakaraṇatthaṃ mantesu attano pakataññutaṃ pakāsento āha – ‘‘brāhmaṇo hi ce tvaṃ brūsi…pe… catuvīsatakkhara’’nti. Tassattho – sace tvaṃ ‘‘brāhmaṇo ahaṃ’’ti brūsi, mañca abrāhmaṇaṃ brūsi, tasmā bhavantaṃ sāvittiṃ pucchāmi tipadaṃ catuvīsatakkharaṃ, taṃ me brūhīti. Ettha ca bhagavā paramatthavedānaṃ tiṇṇaṃ piṭakānaṃ ādibhūtaṃ paramatthabrāhmaṇehi sabbabuddhehi pakāsitaṃ atthasampannaṃ byañjanasampannañca ‘‘buddhaṃ saraṇaṃ gacchāmi, dhammaṃ saraṇaṃ gacchāmi, saṅghaṃ saraṇaṃ gacchāmī’’ti imaṃ ariyasāvittiṃ sandhāya pucchati. Yadipi hi brāhmaṇo aññaṃ vadeyya, addhā naṃ bhagavā ‘‘nāyaṃ, brāhmaṇa, ariyassa vinaye sāvittīti vuccatī’’ti tassa asārakattaṃ dassetvā idheva patiṭṭhāpeyya. Brāhmaṇo pana ‘‘sāvittiṃ pucchāmi tipadaṃ catuvīsatakkhara’’nti idaṃ attano samayasiddhaṃ sāvittilakkhaṇabyañjanakaṃ brahmassarena nicchāritavacanaṃ sutvāva ‘‘addhāyaṃ samaṇo brāhmaṇasamaye niṭṭhaṃ gato, ahaṃ pana aññāṇena ‘abrāhmaṇo aya’nti paribhaviṃ, sādhurūpo mantapāragū brāhmaṇova eso’’ti niṭṭhaṃ gantvā ‘‘handa naṃ yaññavidhiṃ dakkhiṇeyyavidhiñca pucchāmī’’ti tamatthaṃ pucchanto ‘‘kiṃnissitā…pe… loke’’ti imaṃ visamagāthāpadattayamāha. Tassattho – kiṃnissitā kimadhippāyā kiṃ patthentā isayo ca khattiyā ca brāhmaṇā ca aññe ca manujā devatānaṃ atthāya yaññaṃ akappayiṃsu. Yaññamakappayiṃsūti makāro padasandhikaro. Akappayiṃsūti saṃvidahiṃsu akaṃsu. Puthūti bahū annapānadānādinā bhedena anekappakāre puthū vā isayo manujā khattiyā brāhmaṇā ca kiṃnissitā yaññamakappayiṃsu. Kathaṃ nesaṃ taṃ kammaṃ samijjhatīti iminādhippāyena pucchati.
463 463. 于是世尊为了解答他这个问题,说出剩下的两句:“在祭祀之时,若已达究竟者、极智者获得供养,我说他的祭祀得以成就。”这里,“yadantagū”就是“yo antagū”,把 o 音变成 a 音,再加上连接音 da,就像在“asādhāraṇamaññesa”等句中的 m 音那样。它的意思是:凡是凭借三种遍知,已经到达轮回之苦的尽头,所以叫“达究竟者”;又凭借四种道智,穿透烦恼而到达,所以叫“极智者”。这样的人,在祭祀之时,仙人、人、刹帝利、婆罗门中任何一人的祭祀,面对任何食物,哪怕只是林中的叶子、根、果实等,只要获得供养——也就是得到某种应当布施之物,那么,那位施主的祭祀之业就会成就、圆满,成为大果。我说的就是这个意思。巴利
463. Athassa bhagavā tamatthaṃ byākaronto ‘‘yadantagū vedagū yaññakāle. Yassāhutiṃ labhe tassijjheti brūmī’’ti idaṃ sesapadadvayamāha. Tattha yadantagūti yo antagū, okārassa akāro, dakāro ca padasandhikaro ‘‘asādhāraṇamaññesa’’ntiādīsu (khu. pā. 8.9) makāro viya. Ayaṃ pana attho – yo vaṭṭadukkhassa tīhi pariññāhi antagatattā antagū, catūhi ca maggañāṇavedehi kilese vijjhitvā gatattā vedagū, so yassa isimanujakhattiyabrāhmaṇānaṃ aññatarassa yaññakāle yasmiṃ kismiñci āhāre paccupaṭṭhite antamaso vanapaṇṇamūlaphalādimhipi āhutiṃ labhe, tato kiñci deyyadhammaṃ labheyya, tassa taṃ yaññakammaṃ ijjhe samijjheyya, mahapphalaṃ bhaveyyāti brūmīti.
464 464. 这时,婆罗门听了世尊这番开示——它契合究竟义,深奥难测,音声极其甜美,毫无瑕疵,圆满具足韵味——又想到世尊身体相好所显示的一切功德圆满,心中生起喜悦与欢欣,便说了一首偈颂:“确实如此……”其中,“婆罗门”一语是结集者所说的话,其余则是婆罗门自己说的。它的意思是:确实,我这次的供养已经成功了;今天我这份应当布施的法一定会成就、会圆满,会结出大果,因为我已经见到了这样一位通达吠陀的圣者。正因为我见到了像您这样殊胜的通达吠陀者,所以只有您才是那位通达吠陀者,没有别人。可是从前,因为见不到像您这样通达吠陀、达到究竟的圣者,像我们这样的人在祭祀中准备好的富罗腊萨、饭粥和糕饼,却被别人吃掉了。巴利
464. Atha brāhmaṇo taṃ bhagavato paramatthayogagambhīraṃ atimadhuragiranibbikārasarasampannaṃ desanaṃ sutvā sarīrasampattisūcitañcassa sabbaguṇasampattiṃ sambhāvayamāno pītisomanassajāto ‘‘addhā hi tassā’’ti gāthamāha. Tattha iti brāhmaṇoti saṅgītikārānaṃ vacanaṃ, sesaṃ brāhmaṇassa. Tassattho – addhā hi tassa mayhaṃ hutamijjhe, ayaṃ ajja deyyadhammo ijjhissati samijjhissati mahapphalo bhavissati yaṃ tādisaṃ vedagumaddasāma, yasmā tādisaṃ bhavantarūpaṃ vedaguṃ addasāma. Tvaññeva hi so vedagū, na añño. Ito pubbe pana tumhādisānaṃ vedagūnaṃ antagūnañca adassanena amhādisānaṃ yaññe paṭiyattaṃ añño jano bhuñjati pūraḷāsaṃ carukañca pūvañcāti.
465 465. 此后,世尊知道这位婆罗门对自己已生起净信,也已准备好接受教言。为了让婆罗门能清楚明白,世尊想用种种方式说明什么样的人值得供养,于是说出“所以,在此你……”这一偈颂。它的意思是:因为你对我有净信,所以,婆罗门啊,你才来到这里亲近我、向我提问——世尊这样说,是在指自己。现在,前面“求义者”这个词要和后面的词连起来理解:求义者,就是与求义之举相应的人,因为烦恼之火已完全熄灭,所以是“寂静”;因为瞋恚之烟已完全消散,所以是“无烟”;因为没有任何痛苦,所以是“无恼”;因为没有任何种种欲求,所以是“无求”。这样的人,你必定能在这里亲自见到;或者说,在这教法之中,你一定能找到、证得那位具足妙慧的漏尽应供者。另一种理解是:因为你对我有净信,所以,婆罗门啊,作为求义者,你应当来亲近、请问那位寂静、无烟、无恼、无求的圣者——这是世尊在指自己。当你这样请问时,必定能在这里找到具足妙慧的漏尽应供者。这里的文句应当这样连接来理解。巴利
465. Tato bhagavā attani pasannaṃ vacanapaṭiggahaṇasajjaṃ brāhmaṇaṃ viditvā yathāssa suṭṭhu pākaṭā honti, evaṃ nānappakārehi dakkhiṇeyye pakāsetukāmo ‘‘tasmātiha tva’’nti gāthamāha. Tassattho – yasmā mayi pasannosi, tasmā pana iha tvaṃ, brāhmaṇa, upasaṅkamma pucchāti attānaṃ dassento āha. Idāni ito pubbaṃ atthenaatthikapadaṃ parapadena sambandhitabbaṃ – atthena atthiko tassa atthatthikabhāvassa anurūpaṃ kilesaggivūpasamena santaṃ, kodhadhūmavigamena vidhūmaṃ, dukkhābhāvena anīghaṃ, anekavidhaāsābhāvena nirāsaṃ appevidha ekaṃsena idha ṭhitova idha vā sāsane abhivinde lacchasi adhigacchissasi sumedhaṃ varapaññaṃ khīṇāsavadakkhiṇeyyanti. Atha vā yasmā mayi pasannosi, tasmātiha, tvaṃ brāhmaṇa, atthena atthiko samāno upasaṅkamma puccha santaṃ vidhūmaṃ anīghaṃ nirāsanti attānaṃ dassento āha. Evaṃ pucchanto appevidha abhivinde sumedhaṃ khīṇāsavadakkhiṇeyyanti evampettha yojanā veditabbā.
466 这时,婆罗门按照教导去做,对世尊说:“我乐于祭祀……请告诉我。”其中,“祭祀”“供养”“布施”在意义上是一回事。所以意思是:我乐于布施,正因为乐于布施,所以想行布施,但我并不知道该怎么做;请尊者教导这样无知的我。而在教导时,请用浅显易懂的方式告诉我:布施在什么情况下才能成就。这里的义理连接应当这样理解。也有版本写作“如其祭祀”。巴利
466. Atha brāhmaṇo yathānusiṭṭhaṃ paṭipajjamāno bhagavantaṃ āha – ‘‘yaññe ratohaṃ…pe… brūhi meta’’nti. Tattha yañño yāgo dānanti atthato ekaṃ. Tasmā dānarato ahaṃ, tāya eva dānārāmatāya dānaṃ dātukāmo, na pana jānāmi, evaṃ ajānantaṃ anusāsatu maṃ bhavaṃ. Anusāsanto ca uttāneneva nayena yattha hutaṃ ijjhate brūhi metanti evamettha atthayojanā veditabbā. ‘‘Yathāhuta’’ntipi pāṭho.
467 于是,世尊想要回答他,便说道:“那么……我将为你宣说。”对于这位侧耳倾听的婆罗门,世尊为了教诫他,先说了“莫问出身”这个偈颂。其中,“莫问出身”的意思是:如果你期望布施得以成就、布施获得大果报,那就不要问他的出身。因为出身确实不是考察应供者的依据。而应当问他的“行”——更进一步说,要问他在戒行等功德上的差别。因为这才是考察应供者的依据。巴利
467. Athassa bhagavā vattukāmo āha – ‘‘tena hi…pe… desessāmī’’ti. Ohitasotassa cassa anusāsanatthaṃ tāva ‘‘mā jātiṃ pucchī’’ti gāthamāha. Tattha mā jātiṃ pucchīti yadi hutasamiddhiṃ dānamahapphalataṃ paccāsīsasi, jātiṃ mā puccha. Akāraṇañhi dakkhiṇeyyavicāraṇāya jāti. Caraṇañca pucchāti apica kho sīlādiguṇabhedaṃ caraṇaṃ puccha. Etañhi dakkhiṇeyyavicāraṇāya kāraṇaṃ.
现在,为了说明这个道理,他举了一个例子:“火确实是从木柴中生出来的”等等。这里的意思是:在这个世界上,火从木柴中生出,但并不是从婆罗树等好木柴中生出的火就能发挥火的作用,从狗舌草、木槽等劣质木柴中生出的火就不能发挥火的作用;而是因为火自身具备了光焰等特质,所以才能发挥作用。同样地,并不是生在婆罗门等高贵家族就一定能成为应受供养的人,也不是生在旃陀罗等低贱家族就不能成为应受供养的人。相反,无论出身低贱还是高贵,只要他是漏尽了的牟尼,具足坚定与惭耻之心,就是真正的良马。正是以坚定和惭耻为首的功德成就,使具足这些功德的人成为最上等的应受供养者。因为他以坚定持守功德,以惭耻遮止过失。正如所说的:“因为有惭耻,寂静的圣者们不做恶事。”因此我对你说——巴利
Idānissa tamatthaṃ vibhāvento nidassanamāha – ‘‘kaṭṭhā have jāyati jātavedo’’tiādi. Tatrāyamadhippāyo – idha kaṭṭhā aggi jāyati, na ca so sālādikaṭṭhā jāto eva aggikiccaṃ karoti, sāpānadoṇiādikaṭṭhā jāto na karoti, apica kho attano acciādiguṇasampannattā eva karoti. Evaṃ na brāhmaṇakulādīsu jāto eva dakkhiṇeyyo hoti, caṇḍālakulādīsu jāto na hoti, apica kho nīcākulīnopi uccākulīnopi khīṇāsavamuni dhitimā hirīnisedho ājāniyo hoti, imāya dhitihiripamukhāya guṇasampattiyā jātimā uttamadakkhiṇeyyo hoti. So hi dhitiyā guṇe dhārayati, hiriyā dose nisedheti. Vuttañcetaṃ ‘‘hiriyā hi santo na karonti pāpa’’nti. Tena te brūmi –
别问出身,要问行为。
火确实是从木柴里生出来的。
即使出身低贱的家族,只要他是牟尼且意志坚定,
他是良马,被惭耻所制止。巴利
‘‘Mā jātiṃ pucchī caraṇañca puccha, Kaṭṭhā have jāyati jātavedo; Nīcākulīnopi munī dhitīmā, Ājāniyo hoti hirīnisedho’’ti. –
这是简要说明,详细内容则应依照《阿摄惒经》(《中部》2.401以下)来理解。巴利
Esa saṅkhepo, vitthāro pana assalāyanasuttānusārena (ma. ni. 2.401 ādayo) veditabbo.
468 468. 世尊这样以四种姓清净来教导之后,现在为了说明在哪里供养能成就、以及怎样供养能成就,说了“以真谛调御者”等偈颂。其中,“以真谛”是指以胜义谛。因为证得胜义谛的人就是已调御的人,所以说“以真谛调御者”。“具足调伏”是指具备诸根的调伏。“达吠陀边际”是指通过吠陀到达了烦恼的尽头,或者是指到达了吠陀的尽头,即第四道智。“已修梵行”是指因为再也没有需要修行的了,所以已经完成了道上的梵行。“适时向他献应施”:了知自己应施之法现前的时机,以及那位应供者现前的时机,把握恰当时机,向如是的应供者献上应施之物,令布施成就。巴利
468. Evametaṃ bhagavā cātuvaṇṇisuddhiyā anusāsitvā idāni yattha hutaṃ ijjhate, yathā ca hutaṃ ijjhate, tamatthaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘saccena danto’’tiādigāthamāha. Tattha saccenāti paramatthasaccena. Tañhi patto danto hoti. Tenāha – ‘‘saccena danto’’ti. Damasā upetoti indriyadamena samannāgato. Vedantagūti vedehi vā kilesānaṃ antaṃ gato, vedānaṃ vā antaṃ catutthamaggañāṇaṃ gato. Vūsitabrahmacariyoti puna vasitabbābhāvato vutthamaggabrahmacariyo. Kālena tamhi habyaṃ paveccheti attano deyyadhammaṭṭhitakālaṃ tassa sammukhībhāvakālañca upalakkhetvā tena kālena tādise dakkhiṇeyye deyyadhammaṃ paveccheyya, paveseyya paṭipādeyya.
469-71 “欲”指的是事欲和烦恼欲。“诸根善摄”意思是诸根被很好地收摄,也就是诸根不散乱。就像月亮从罗睺的吞捉中解脱出来,同样,那些从烦恼的吞捉中解脱的人,极其闪耀而且炽盛。“具念”指具足正念。“我所执取之物”指被渴爱和邪见所执取的东西。巴利
469-71.Kāmeti vatthukāme ca kilesakāme ca. Susamāhitindriyāti suṭṭhu samāhitaindriyā, avikkhittaindriyāti vuttaṃ hoti. Candova rāhuggahaṇā pamuttāti yathā cando rāhuggahaṇā, evaṃ kilesaggahaṇā pamuttā ye atīva bhāsanti ceva tapanti ca. Satāti satisampannā. Mamāyitānīti taṇhādiṭṭhimamāyitāni.
472 从“若人离诸欲”这一句开始,是就他自己而说的。其中,“离诸欲”是指舍弃了烦恼欲。“行于克胜”是指因为那些烦恼欲已被断除,所以他对事欲成为克胜而行的人。“生与死的终点”称为涅槃,他以自己智慧的力量了知了它。“犹如清凉的湖水”,就像在雪山中有阿耨达池、耳环池、造车者池、六牙池、鹍鸟池、慢达基尼池、狮子崖池这七个大湖,这些湖的水因为不被火和太阳的热恼所触及而恒常清凉,同样地,这位烦恼的热恼已经彻底息灭的人,就像那些清凉的湖水那样清凉。巴利
472.Yo kāme hitvāti ito pabhuti attānaṃ sandhāya vadati. Tattha kāme hitvāti kilesakāme pahāya. Abhibhuyyacārīti tesaṃ pahīnattā vatthukāme abhibhuyyacārī. Jātimaraṇassa antaṃ nāma nibbānaṃ vuccati, tañca yo vedi attano paññābalena aññāsi. Udakarahado vāti ye ime anotattadaho kaṇṇamuṇḍadaho rathakāradaho chaddantadaho kuṇāladaho mandākinidaho sīhappapātadahoti himavati satta mahārahadā aggisūriyasantāpehi asamphuṭṭhattā niccaṃ sītalā, tesaṃ aññataro udakarahadova sīto parinibbutakilesapariḷāhattā.
473 “等同”就是相等。“与等同者”是指与毗婆尸佛等诸佛等同。因为他们证悟的程度完全一样,所以被称为“等同者”。在他们应当证得的功德,或者应当断除的过失方面,彼此之间没有差别;但在时间长短、寿命、族姓、身量、出离方式、精进时长、菩提树、身光这八个方面,他们之间是有差别的。
也就是说:在最低限度上,他们用四不可数劫加百千劫来圆满波罗蜜;在最高限度上,则用十六不可数劫加百千劫来圆满。这是他们时间长短的差别。在最低限度上,他们出现在人寿百岁的时候;在最高限度上,则出现在人寿十万岁的时候。这是他们寿命的差别。他们或者出生在刹帝利家,或者出生在婆罗门家。这是他们族姓的差别。他们的身量有的高大,达到八十八肘;有的矮小,为十五肘或十八肘。这是他们身量的差别。他们出离时,有的乘象、马、车、轿等,有的从空中出离。比如:毗婆尸佛和拘留孙佛是乘马车出离的,尸弃佛和拘那含佛是乘象背出离的,毗舍婆佛是乘轿出离的,迦叶佛是从空中出离的,释迦牟尼是乘马背出离的。这是他们出离方式的差别。他们有的精勤七天,有的精勤半个月、一个月、两个月、三个月、四个月、五个月、六个月,或者一年、两年、三年、四年、五年、六年。这是他们精进时长的差别。他们的菩提树,或者是毕钵罗树,或者是榕树等其他树中的某一种。这是他们菩提树的差别。他们具足一寻光、八十肘光或无边的光明。其中,一寻光或八十肘光是所有佛陀都一样的,但无边的光明则有远有近:有的照一伽浮他、二伽浮他、一由旬、多由旬,乃至到达轮围世界的边际。吉祥佛的身光则照遍一万个轮围世界。尽管如此,一切佛陀的光明其实都是随心念而转的:哪位佛陀想要照多远,光就能到达多远。这是他们光明的差别。
除了这八种差别之外,在他们应当证得的功德或应当断除的过失等其他方面,彼此之间完全没有差别,因此才被称为“等同者”。就这样,他等同于这些等同者。巴利
473.Samoti tulyo. Samehīti vipassiādīhi buddhehi. Te hi paṭivedhasamattā ‘‘samā’’ti vuccanti. Natthi tesaṃ paṭivedhenādhigantabbesu guṇesu, pahātabbesu vā dosesu vemattatā , addhānaāyukulappamāṇābhinikkhamanapadhānabodhirasmīhi pana nesaṃ vemattatā hoti. Tathā hi te heṭṭhimaparicchedena catūhi asaṅkhyeyyehi kappasatasahassena ca pāramiyo pūrenti, uparimaparicchedena soḷasahi asaṅkhyeyyehi kappasatasahassena ca. Ayaṃ nesaṃ addhānavemattatā. Heṭṭhimaparicchedena ca vassasatāyukakāle uppajjanti, uparimaparicchedena vassasatasahassāyukakāle. Ayaṃ nesaṃ āyuvemattatā. Khattiyakule vā brāhmaṇakule vā uppajjanti. Ayaṃ kulavemattatā. Uccā vā honti aṭṭhāsītihatthappamāṇā, nīcā vā pannarasaaṭṭhārasahatthappamāṇā. Ayaṃ pamāṇavemattatā. Hatthiassarathasivikādīhi nikkhamanti vehāsena vā. Tathā hi vipassikakusandhā assarathena nikkhamiṃsu, sikhīkoṇāgamanā hatthikkhandhena, vessabhū sivikāya, kassapo vehāsena, sakyamuni assapiṭṭhiyā. Ayaṃ nekkhammavemattatā. Sattāhaṃ vā padhānamanuyuñjanti, aḍḍhamāsaṃ, māsaṃ, dvemāsaṃ, temāsaṃ, catumāsaṃ, pañcamāsaṃ, chamāsaṃ, ekavassaṃ dviticatupañcachavassāni vā. Ayaṃ padhānavemattatā. Assattho vā bodhirukkho hoti nigrodhādīnaṃ vā aññataro. Ayaṃ bodhivemattatā. Byāmāsītianantapabhāyuttā honti. Tattha byāmappabhā vā asītippabhā vā sabbesaṃ samānā, anantappabhā pana dūrampi gacchati āsannampi, ekagāvutaṃ dvigāvutaṃ yojanaṃ anekayojanaṃ cakkavāḷapariyantampi, maṅgalassa buddhassa sarīrappabhā dasasahassacakkavāḷaṃ agamāsi. Evaṃ santepi manasā cintāyattāva sabbabuddhānaṃ, yo yattakamicchati, tassa tattakaṃ gacchati. Ayaṃ rasmivemattatā. Imā aṭṭha vemattatā ṭhapetvā avasesesu paṭivedhenādhigantabbesu guṇesu, pahātabbesu vā dosesu natthi nesaṃ viseso, tasmā ‘‘samā’’ti vuccanti. Evametehi samo samehi.
“远离不等同者”是指:不等同,就是不相同;独觉佛等其余一切众生。因为和这些不等同者完全不相似,所以说“远离”。即使整个赡部洲都坐满了独觉佛,一个紧挨一个结跏趺坐,他们的功德加起来也比不上一位正自觉者功德的十六分之一,更何况声闻等人呢。因此说“远离不等同者”。“是如来”这一句,应当和“远离”连起来理解,两个词合在一起说。“有无边慧”就是智慧没有限度。拿世间凡夫的智慧和第八位圣者的智慧相比,第八位圣者的智慧更殊胜;拿第八位圣者的智慧和入流者的智慧相比,入流者的智慧更殊胜。这样一层层比上去,直到拿阿拉汉的智慧和独觉佛的智慧相比,独觉佛的智慧更殊胜;但拿独觉佛的智慧和如来的智慧相比,就不能说“更殊胜”,只能说如来的智慧“没有边际”。因此说“有无边慧”。“无染着”是指不被渴爱和邪见的污垢所染污。“在此世或彼世”是指在此世或在他世。这里的连接关系是:如来与等同者相同,与不等同者远离。为什么呢?因为如来有无边慧、无染着,在此世或彼世,所以如来值得供养。巴利
Visamehidūreti na samā visamā, paccekabuddhādayo avasesasabbasattā. Tehi visamehi asadisatāya dūre. Sakalajambudīpaṃ pūretvā pallaṅkena pallaṅkaṃ saṅghaṭṭetvā nisinnā paccekabuddhāpi hi guṇehi ekassa sammāsambuddhassa kalaṃ nāgghanti soḷasiṃ , ko pana vādo sāvakādīsu. Tenāha – ‘‘visamehi dūre’’ti. Tathāgato hotīti ubhayapadehi dūreti yojetabbaṃ. Anantapaññoti aparimitapañño. Lokiyamanussānañhi paññaṃ upanidhāya aṭṭhamakassa paññā adhikā, tassa paññaṃ upanidhāya sotāpannassa. Evaṃ yāva arahato paññaṃ upanidhāya paccekabuddhassa paññā adhikā, paccekabuddhassa paññaṃ pana upanidhāya tathāgatassa paññā adhikāti na vattabbā, anantā icceva pana vattabbā. Tenāha – ‘‘anantapañño’’ti. Anūpalittoti taṇhādiṭṭhilepehi alitto. Idha vā huraṃ vāti idhaloke vā paraloke vā. Yojanā panettha – samo samehi visamehi dūre tathāgato hoti. Kasmā? Yasmā anantapañño anupalitto idha vā huraṃ vā, tena tathāgato arahati pūraḷāsanti.
474 “凡无幻诈之处”这一颂,以及其它类似这样的偈颂,应当理解为:是为了断除对具有幻诈等过失的婆罗门生起“他们是应受供养者”这种想法的目的而说的。其中,“无我所”是指在有情诸行中,已经断除了“这是我的”这种我所执取的状态。巴利
474.Yamhina māyāti ayaṃ pana gāthā aññā ca īdisā māyādidosayuttesu brāhmaṇesu dakkhiṇeyyasaññāpahānatthaṃ vuttāti veditabbā. Tattha amamoti sattasaṅkhāresu ‘‘idaṃ mamā’’ti pahīnamamāyitabhāvo.
475 所谓“住所”,就是渴爱和邪见的住处。因为有了它,心就住在三种生命存在状态里,所以它被称为“心的住所”。或者说,因为舍弃不了它、没法离开它,心就住在那里,因此也叫“住所”。“执取”就是渴爱和邪见本身,或者是被它们所执取的法。“任何”就是哪怕极少、微不足道的。“不执取”就是因为那些住所和执取都不存在,所以对任何法都不执取。巴利
475.Nivesananti taṇhādiṭṭhinivesanaṃ. Tena hi mano tīsu bhavesu nivisati, tena taṃ ‘‘nivesanaṃ manaso’’ti vuccati. Tattheva vā nivisati taṃ hitvā gantuṃ asamatthatāya. Tenapi ‘‘nivesana’’nti vuccati. Pariggahāti taṇhādiṭṭhiyo eva, tāhi pariggahitadhammā vā. Kecīti appamattakāpi. Anupādiyānoti tesaṃ nivesanapariggahānaṃ abhāvā kañci dhammaṃ anupādiyamāno.
476 他安住在由道所生的定中。已渡越,就是已经超越了。了知法,就是了知一切应当了知之法。以最殊胜的见,就是以一切知智。巴利
476.Samāhito maggasamādhinā. Udatārīti uttiṇṇo. Dhammaṃ caññāsīti sabbañca ñeyyadhammaṃ aññāsi. Paramāya diṭṭhiyāti sabbaññutaññāṇena.
477 有漏是指与有的渴爱、对禅那的贪著、常见相应的贪。语是指言语。粗恶是指粗野、刺耳的言语。已灭尽是指已被烧毁。已达义是指已经达到意义。不存在是指因为已被灭尽、已达义,所以不存在。这两组词应当互相搭配来理解:于一切处是指在一切蕴、处等之中。巴利
477.Bhavāsavāti bhavataṇhājhānanikantisassatadiṭṭhisahagatā rāgā. Vacīti vācā. Kharāti kakkhaḷā pharusā. Vidhūpitāti daḍḍhā. Atthagatāti atthaṅgatā. Na santīti vidhūpitattā atthaṅgatattā ca. Ubhayehi pana ubhayaṃ yojetabbaṃ sabbadhīti sabbesu khandhāyatanādīsu.
478 “被慢所缠缚的众生”是指那些被慢黏住的人。“遍知苦”是指以三种遍知彻底了知轮回之苦。“连同田与地”是指连同它的因和缘,也就是说,连同业与烦恼一起。巴利
478.Mānasattesūti mānena laggesu. Dukkhaṃ pariññāyāti vaṭṭadukkhaṃ tīhi pariññāhi parijānitvā. Sakhettavatthunti sahetupaccayaṃ, saddhiṃ kammakilesehīti vuttaṃ hoti.
479 不依止于渴爱,就是说不执著渴爱。见远离,就是见涅槃。为他人所领解,就是必须由别人告知才能了知。已超越邪见,就是已经超越了六十二种邪见。所缘,就是缘,也就是说,是后有之因。巴利
479.Āsaṃ anissāyāti taṇhaṃ anallīyitvā. Vivekadassīti nibbānadassī. Paravediyanti parehi ñāpetabbaṃ. Diṭṭhimupātivattoti dvāsaṭṭhibhedampi micchādiṭṭhiṃ atikkanto. Ārammaṇāti paccayā, punabbhavakāraṇānīti vuttaṃ hoti.
480 “胜劣”:指殊胜与低劣、美好与丑恶。“胜”或指外在的,“劣”指内在的。“已证知”:以智慧通达。“诸法”:指蕴、处等诸法。“于取尽解脱”:在涅槃中,以涅槃为所缘而解脱,意思是获得了以涅槃为所缘的解脱。巴利
480.Paroparāti varāvarā sundarāsundarā. Parā vā bāhirā, aparā ajjhattikā. Sameccāti ñāṇena paṭivijjhitvā. Dhammāti khandhāyatanādayo dhammā. Upādānakhaye vimuttoti nibbāne nibbānārammaṇato vimutto, nibbānārammaṇavimuttilābhīti attho.
481 见结灭尽与生灭尽的人:就是看见结的灭尽,也看见生的灭尽。这里,结的灭尽指的是有余涅槃界,生的灭尽指的是无余涅槃界。因为“灭尽”这个词,就是彻底灭尽、完全断除的意思。这里没有像“远离所生的喜乐”等语句中那样省略鼻音。“那位遣除者”,就是那位驱除者。“贪路”,指以贪为所缘,或者就是指贪本身。贪也是通往恶趣的道路,所以像“业道”一样被称为贪路。“清净、无过、无垢、无瑕”:因为身的行为等清净,所以是清净。人们说“这些众生因贪而有过、因嗔而有过、因痴而有过”,因为那些过失不存在,所以是无过。因为去除了八种人的污秽,所以是无垢。因为没有随烦恼,所以是无瑕。被随烦恼染污的人,就叫做有瑕。或者,因为清净所以无过,因为无过所以无垢,因为无垢所以无瑕。有垢的人就叫做有瑕。又或者,因为无垢所以不造作过失,因此是无瑕。造作过失会造成伤害,那种行为就叫做瑕。巴利
481.Saṃyojanaṃjātikhayantadassīti saṃyojanakkhayantadassī jātikkhayantadassī ca. Saṃyojanakkhayantena cettha saupādisesā nibbānadhātu, jātikkhayantena anupādisesā vuttā. Khayantoti hi accantakhayassa samucchedappahānassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Anunāsikalopo cettha ‘‘vivekajaṃ pītisukha’’ntiādīsu viya na kato. Yopānudīti yo apanudi. Rāgapathanti rāgārammaṇaṃ, rāgameva vā. Rāgopi hi duggatīnaṃ pathattā ‘‘rāgapatho’’ti vuccati kammapatho viya. Suddho nidoso vimalo akācoti parisuddhakāyasamācārāditāya suddho. Yehi ‘‘rāgadosā ayaṃ pajā, dosadosā, mohadosā’’ti vuccati. Tesaṃ abhāvā nidoso. Aṭṭhapurisamalavigamā vimalo, upakkilesābhāvato akāco. Upakkiliṭṭho hi upakkilesena ‘‘sakāco’’ti vuccati. Suddho vā yasmā niddoso, niddosatāya vimalo, bāhiramalābhāvena vimalattā akāco. Samalo hi ‘‘sakāco’’ti vuccati. Vimalattā vā āguṃ na karoti, tena akāco. Āgukiriyā hi upaghātakaraṇato ‘‘kāco’’ti vuccati.
482 他不观自己有我:当他以与智相应的心修观时,在自己的诸蕴中看不到另一个所谓的我,只看到诸蕴本身。那种“我以自己了知自己”的见解,视之为真实、坚固而生起——因为这种见解不存在,所以他不观自己有我,而是以智慧观见诸蕴。他依道定而入定;因为没有身谄曲等,所以正直;因为不为世间法所动摇,所以心坚住;因为不存在渴爱所说的动摇、五种心的荒芜和八处疑惑,所以无动摇、无荒芜、无疑惑。巴利
482.Attano attānaṃ nānupassatīti ñāṇasampayuttena cittena vipassanto attano khandhesu aññaṃ attānaṃ nāma na passati, khandhamattameva passati. Yā cāyaṃ ‘‘attanāva attānaṃ sañjānāmī’’ti tassa saccato thetato diṭṭhi uppajjati, tassā abhāvā attano attānaṃ nānupassati, aññadatthu paññāya khandhe passati. Maggasamādhinā samāhito, kāyavaṅkādīnaṃ abhāvā ujjugato, lokadhammehi akampanīyato ṭhitatto, taṇhāsaṅkhātāya ejāya pañcannaṃ cetokhilānañca aṭṭhaṭṭhānāya kaṅkhāya ca abhāvā anejo akhilo akaṅkho.
483 “痴之终结”:因为痴,以痴为条件,这是一切烦恼的别名。“于一切法有智见”:指已经亲证一切知智的人。因为对一切法的智,世尊已经以“我已证得”亲自作证并安住,所以说“于一切法有智见”。“正觉”指阿罗汉果。“无上”指不与独觉佛和声闻弟子共通。“安稳”指安全、无灾患、有庄严。“人”指男子。“清净”指纯净。在这里,因为无痴,所以没有一切过失;由此断尽轮回之因,持有最后之身;由于有智见,所以具足一切功德;由此证得无上正觉,从此以后再也没有应当断除或应当证得的东西。因此说:“到此为止,就是人的清净。”巴利
483.Mohantarāti mohakāraṇā mohapaccayā, sabbakilesānametaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Sabbesu dhammesu ca ñāṇadassīti sacchikatasabbaññutaññāṇo. Tañhi sabbesu dhammesu ñāṇaṃ, tañca bhagavā passi, ‘‘adhigataṃ me’’ti sacchikatvā vihāsi. Tena vuccati ‘‘sabbesu dhammesu ca ñāṇadassī’’ti. Sambodhinti arahattaṃ. Anuttaranti paccekabuddhasāvakehi asādhāraṇaṃ. Sivanti khemaṃ nirupaddavaṃ sassirikaṃ vā. Yakkhassāti purisassa. Suddhīti vodānatā. Ettha hi mohantarābhāvena sabbadosābhāvo, tena saṃsārakāraṇasamucchedo antimasarīradhāritā, ñāṇadassitāya sabbaguṇasambhavo. Tena anuttarā sambodhipatti, ito parañca pahātabbamadhigantabbaṃ vā natthi. Tenāha – ‘‘ettāvatā yakkhassa suddhī’’ti.
484 听世尊这样说后,那位婆罗门对世尊生起了更加深厚的净信,便以表达净信的方式说道:“我所供奉的……”这句话的意思是:我以前为了梵天而投入火中供养的那些东西,到底是真的供养还是假的,我并不知道。但今天,愿我这份供养成为真实的供养,愿它确实是真实的供养——他这样祈求着说。我得到了那样一位具明行足的圣者,因为我就安住在这里,便得到了眼前这位具明行足的圣者。梵天可以作证,您就是眼前的梵天。因此他说:“愿世尊接受,愿世尊享用我的满饼。”他这样把剩下的祭品献了上去。巴利
484. Evaṃ vutte brāhmaṇo bhiyyosomattāya bhagavati pasanno pasannākāraṃ karonto āha ‘‘hutañca mayha’’nti. Tassattho – yamahaṃ ito pubbe brahmānaṃ ārabbha aggimhi ajuhaṃ, taṃ me hutaṃ saccaṃ vā hoti, alikaṃ vāti na jānāmi. Ajja pana idaṃ hutañca mayhaṃ hutamatthu saccaṃ, saccahutameva atthūti yācanto bhaṇati. Yaṃ tādisaṃ vedagunaṃ alatthaṃ, yasmā idheva ṭhito bhavantarūpaṃ vedaguṃ alatthaṃ. Brahmā hi sakkhi, paccakkhameva hi tvaṃ brahmā, yato paṭiggaṇhātu me bhagavā, paṭiggahetvā ca bhuñjatu me bhagavā pūraḷāsanti taṃ habyasesaṃ upanāmento āha.
487 于是,世尊按照《耕田婆罗堕阇经》里说过的方式,讲了两首偈颂。接着,那位婆罗门没有正确理解偈颂的意思,他心里想:“这个人并不是为自己求什么,而是另有所指地说‘应当用食物和饮料来侍奉圆满者、大仙、漏尽者、已止息悔恨的人’。”为了弄明白其中的含义,他说道:“善哉,世尊。”这里的“善哉”是表示请求的语气词。“那样”是指您所说的那种方式。“我能了知”就是我能明白。“那位”是指您在祭祀时寻求并应当供养的应供者,这是补足的文意。“达到”就是抵达。“您的教诫”就是您的教导。这段话的意思是:善哉,世尊,我依照您的教诫就能那样了知,请您告诉我那位圆满者;如果有人能受用像我这样的人所供养的食物,也就是我在祭祀时寻求并应当供养的那位应供者,请您指示给我,如果您自己不受用的话。巴利
487. Atha bhagavā kasibhāradvājasutte vuttanayena gāthādvayamabhāsi. Tato brāhmaṇo ‘‘ayaṃ attanā na icchati, kampi caññaṃ sandhāya ‘kevalinaṃ mahesiṃ khīṇāsavaṃ kukkuccavūpasantaṃ annena pānena upaṭṭhahassū’ti bhaṇatī’’ti evaṃ gāthāya atthaṃ asallakkhetvā taṃ ñātukāmo āha ‘‘sādhāhaṃ bhagavā’’ti. Tattha sādhūti āyācanatthe nipāto. Tathāti yena tvamāha, tena pakārena. Vijaññanti jāneyyaṃ. Yanti yaṃ dakkhiṇeyyaṃ yaññakāle pariyesamāno upaṭṭhaheyyanti pāṭhaseso. Pappuyyāti patvā. Tava sāsananti tava ovādaṃ. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti. Sādhāhaṃ bhagavā tava ovādaṃ āgamma tathā vijaññaṃ ārocehi me taṃ kevalinanti adhippāyo. Yo dakkhiṇaṃ bhuñjeyya mādisassa, yaṃ cāhaṃ yaññakāle pariyesamāno upaṭṭhaheyyaṃ, tathārūpaṃ me dakkhiṇeyyaṃ dassehi, sace tvaṃ na bhuñjasīti.
488-90 488-90. 于是,世尊用浅显明白的方式指出什么样的人值得供养,说了“sārambhā yassa”等三首偈颂。其中,“sīmantānaṃ vinetāraṃ”里的“sīmā”指界限,也就是善人所行持的范围;这个界限的尽头、终点、后分,就叫做“sīmantā”,指的是烦恼;能引导人去除这些烦恼的人,就是这个词的意思。也有人说,“sīmantā”指佛陀所应教化的有学圣者和凡夫,能引导、调御他们的人,也是这个词的意思。“jātimaraṇakovidaṃ”指对“如是生,如是死”通达善巧者;“moneyyasampannaṃ”指慧具足,或具足身牟尼等;“bhakuṭiṃ vinayitvānā”指去除某些智浅之人见到乞者便皱眉的举动,而变得和颜悦色。“Pañjalikāti paggahitaañjalino hutvā”指举起合掌。巴利
488-90. Athassa bhagavā pākaṭena nayena tathārūpaṃ dakkhiṇeyyaṃ dassento ‘‘sārambhā yassā’’ti gāthāttayamāha. Tattha sīmantānaṃ vinetāranti sīmāti mariyādā sādhujanavutti, tassā antā pariyosānā aparabhāgāti katvā sīmantā vuccanti kilesā, tesaṃ vinetāranti attho. Sīmantāti buddhaveneyyā sekkhā ca puthujjanā ca, tesaṃ vinetārantipi eke. Jātimaraṇakovidanti ‘‘evaṃ jāti evaṃ maraṇa’’nti ettha kusalaṃ. Moneyyasampannanti paññāsampannaṃ, kāyamoneyyādisampannaṃ vā. Bhakuṭiṃ vinayitvānāti yaṃ ekacce dubbuddhino yācakaṃ disvā bhakuṭiṃ karonti, taṃ vinayitvā, pasannamukhā hutvāti attho. Pañjalikāti paggahitaañjalino hutvā.
491 这时,婆罗门赞叹着世尊,说了“buddho bhava”这首偈颂。其中,“āyāgo”的意思是应当被供养的人;或者,供物从各处带来而在此处献祭,所以叫“āyāgo”,也就是说,它是布施物品的依托之处。这里以及前面几首偈颂中没有解释的部分,因为意思已经很明显,就算不解释也能明白,所以没有加以注释。从这里往后,则完全按照《耕田婆罗堕阇经》里所说的方式来理解。巴利
491. Atha brāhmaṇo bhagavantaṃ thomayamāno ‘‘buddho bhava’’nti gāthamāha. Tattha āyāgoti āyajitabbo, tato tato āgamma vā yajitabbametthātipi āyāgo, deyyadhammānaṃ adhiṭṭhānabhūtoti vuttaṃ hoti . Sesamettha ito purimagāthāsu ca yaṃ na vaṇṇitaṃ, taṃ sakkā avaṇṇitampi jānitunti uttānatthattāyeva na vaṇṇitaṃ. Ito paraṃ pana kasibhāradvājasutte vuttanayamevāti.
《摩伽经》的注释巴利
5. Māghasuttavaṇṇanā
如是我闻这句是《摩伽经》的开头。它的起因是什么?就是在这部经的序分里已经说过的那个因缘。这位摩伽青年是个乐善好施的施主。他心里这样想:“布施给有财者、穷困者等等,布施出去到底有大果报,还是没有大果报?我要去问沙门乔达摩这件事——听说沙门乔达摩了知过去、未来和现在。”于是他就去到世尊那里请问,世尊按照他问的内容作了回答。结集经典的人把摩伽青年的话和世尊的话这三方面合在一起,所以称为《摩伽经》。巴利
Evaṃme sutanti māghasuttaṃ. Kā uppatti? Ayameva yāssa nidāne vuttā. Ayañhi māgho māṇavo dāyako ahosi dānapati. Tassetadahosi – ‘‘sampattakapaṇaddhikādīnaṃ dānaṃ dinnaṃ mahapphalaṃ hoti, udāhu noti samaṇaṃ gotamaṃ etamatthaṃ pucchissāmi, samaṇo kira gotamo atītānāgatapaccuppannaṃ jānātī’’ti. So bhagavantaṃ upasaṅkamitvā pucchi. Bhagavā cassa pucchānurūpaṃ byākāsi. Tayidaṃ saṅgītikārānaṃ brāhmaṇassa bhagavatoti tiṇṇampi vacanaṃ samodhānetvā ‘‘māghasutta’’nti vuccati.
在这里,“rājagaha|王舍城”就是指那座叫这个名字的城市。它因为曾被曼陀多王和大典尊等人占据,所以叫做“王舍城”。对此也有人用别的说法来解释。管他们怎么说呢,这不过是那座城市的名字罢了。不过,这座城市在佛陀的时代和转轮王的时代是城市,其他时候则是空的,被夜叉占据,成了他们的游乐林。这样说明了世尊乞食的村落之后,接着指出他居住的地方:“在灵鹫山”。应当知道,因为秃鹫曾栖息在这座山的山峰上,或者它的山峰形状像秃鹫,所以叫做“灵鹫山”。巴利
Tattha rājagaheti evaṃnāmake nagare. Tañhi mandhātumahāgovindādīhi pariggahitattā ‘‘rājagaha’’nti vuccati. Aññepettha pakāre vaṇṇayanti. Kiṃ tehi, nāmametaṃ tassa nagarassa? Taṃ panetaṃ buddhakāle ca cakkavattikāle ca nagaraṃ hoti, sesakāle suññaṃ hoti yakkhapariggahitaṃ, tesaṃ vasantavanaṃ hutvā tiṭṭhati. Evaṃ gocaragāmaṃ dassetvā nivāsaṭṭhānamāha – ‘‘gijjhakūṭe pabbate’’ti. So ca gijjhā tassa kūṭesu vasiṃsu, gijjhasadisāni vāssa kūṭāni, tasmā ‘‘gijjhakūṭo’’ti vuccatīti veditabbo.
再说“那时……说了”这里,“摩伽”是那位婆罗门的名字。“青年”这个称呼,是因为他还没有结束在学生住处的生活,但按出生来说,他已经很老了。也有人说,这是出于“过去的习惯”,就像宾吉耶青年一样。他确实已经超过两百岁,但因为过去的习惯,还是被称为“宾吉耶青年”。其余内容跟前面说的一样。巴利
Atha kho…pe… avocāti ettha māghoti tassa brāhmaṇassa nāmaṃ. Māṇavoti antevāsivāsaṃ anatītabhāvena vuccati, jātiyā pana mahallako. ‘‘Pubbāciṇṇavasenā’’ti eke piṅgiyo māṇavo viya. So hi vīsavassasatikopi pubbāciṇṇavasena ‘‘piṅgiyo māṇavo’’ tveva saṅkhaṃ agamāsi. Sesaṃ vuttanayameva.
在“乔达摩贤者啊……我布施”这一段里,“施与者、施主”是指既是施与者又是施主。如果有人受别人差遣,拿别人的东西去布施,那他也是施与者,但因为对那份布施没有自主权,所以不算施主。而这个人是用自己的东西来布施,所以他说:“乔达摩贤者啊,我是施与者,是施主。”这里的意思就是这样。不过在别的地方,也可以按“偶尔被吝啬压倒的是施与者,没被压倒的是施主”这样的方式来解说。“知言者”:是指能听懂乞求者话的人——他们一开口,我就能以“此人应得此,彼人应得彼”来分辨,或以能感知大恩惠的心去了解。“可乞求者”:是指值得乞求的人。如果有人一看到乞求者就皱眉,说粗恶语等,那他就不是可乞求者。而我并非如此,以此显示。“依法”:远离不与取、欺骗等不正当方式,以乞食行来求取,也就是靠乞求——因为乞求是婆罗门寻求财富的法,而他们乞求时,由他人出于帮助之意所施与的财富,才名为法得、法获。他也是这样寻求而获得的。所以他说:“我依法寻求财富……以法所得。” “我更多地施与”:是指我比那更多地施与,没有限量,这里显示我是按所得财富的限量来施与。巴利
Ahañhi, bho gotama…pe… pasavāmīti ettha dāyako dānapatīti dāyako ceva dānapati ca. Yo hi aññassa santakaṃ tenāṇatto deti, sopi dāyako hoti, tasmiṃ pana dāne issariyābhāvato na dānapati. Ayaṃ pana attano santakaṃyeva deti. Tenāha – ‘‘ahañhi, bho gotama , dāyako dānapatī’’ti. Ayameva hi ettha attho, aññatra pana antarantarā maccherena abhibhuyyamāno dāyako anabhibhūto dānapatītiādināpi nayena vattuṃ vaṭṭati. Vadaññūti yācakānaṃ vacanaṃ jānāmi vuttamatteyeva ‘‘ayamidamarahati ayamida’’nti purisavisesāvadhāraṇena bahūpakārabhāvagahaṇena vā. Yācayogoti yācituṃ yutto. Yo hi yācake disvāva bhakuṭiṃ katvā pharusavacanādīni bhaṇati, so na yācayogo hoti. Ahaṃ pana na tādisoti dīpeti. Dhammenāti adinnādānanikativañcanādīni vajjetvā bhikkhācariyāya, yācanāyāti attho. Yācanā hi brāhmaṇānaṃ bhogapariyesane dhammo, yācamānānañca nesaṃ parehi anuggahakāmehi dinnā bhogā dhammaladdhā nāma dhammādhigatā ca honti, so ca tathā pariyesitvā labhi. Tenāha – ‘‘dhammena bhoge pariyesāmi…pe… dhammādhigatehī’’ti. Bhiyyopi dadāmīti tato uttaripi dadāmi, pamāṇaṃ natthi, ettha laddhabhogappamāṇena dadāmīti dasseti.
“确实”这个词,是表示确定无疑的语气。因为布施确实受到一切佛、独觉佛和声闻弟子的称赞,哪怕只是布施给畜生也一样。经里就是这么说的:“布施在一切地方都受到称赞,布施从来没有在任何地方被指责过。”所以世尊也是用完全肯定的语气称赞他,说道:“青年,你确实……积累。”剩下的部分意思很明白。就这样,世尊说了“他积累很多福德”之后,那位婆罗门还想进一步听关于供养因受供者而清净的道理,就继续问世尊。因此结集者说:“那时,摩伽青年以偈颂请问世尊。”这段话的意思和前面说的一样。巴利
Tagghāti ekaṃsavacane nipāto. Ekaṃseneva hi sabbabuddhapaccekabuddhasāvakehi pasatthaṃ dānaṃ antamaso tiracchānagatānampi dīyamānaṃ. Vuttañcetaṃ ‘‘sabbattha vaṇṇitaṃ dānaṃ, na dānaṃ garahitaṃ kvacī’’ti. Tasmā bhagavāpi ekaṃseneva taṃ pasaṃsanto āha – ‘‘taggha tvaṃ māṇava…pe… pasavasī’’ti. Sesaṃ uttānatthameva. Evaṃ bhagavatā ‘‘bahuṃ so puññaṃ pasavatī’’ti vuttepi dakkhiṇeyyato dakkhiṇāvisuddhiṃ sotukāmo brāhmaṇo uttari bhagavantaṃ pucchi. Tenāhu saṅgītikārā – ‘‘atha kho māgho māṇavo bhagavantaṃ gāthāya ajjhabhāsī’’ti. Taṃ atthato vuttanayameva.
492 在“我问……”这些偈颂里,“知言者”是指懂得语言的人,也就是说,他能以一切方式了解众生所说的话背后的用意。“净化”是指因为应供者而变得清净,成为大果报。这里的文义衔接是这样的:一位值得被乞求的施主,作为在家者,为了求福德而把食物和饮料布施给其他人,以此作供养,而不是只把一撮供品丢进火里;而且他只是为了求福德,并不是为了期待对方回报、好名声或赞誉等。像这样一位供养者,他的供养怎样才能清净呢?巴利
492.Pucchāmahantiādigāthāsu pana vadaññunti vacanaviduṃ, sabbākārena sattānaṃ vuttavacanādhippāyaññunti vuttaṃ hoti. Sujjheti dakkhiṇeyyavasena suddhaṃ mahapphalaṃ bhaveyya. Yojanā panettha – yo yācayogo dānapati gahaṭṭho puññatthiko hutvā paresaṃ annapānaṃ dadaṃ yajati, na aggimhi āhutimattaṃ pakkhipanto, tañca kho puññapekkhova na paccupakārakalyāṇakittisaddādiapekkho, tassa evarūpassa yajamānassa hutaṃ kathaṃ sujjheyyāti?
493 493. “以应供者令欢喜成就”中的“如是者”,是指具有这样性质、堪受乞求的人,应以应供者令其欢喜、成就、净化;唯有这样,才能使那供养有大果报,而不是别的意思。通过这句话,就回答了他所问的“行供养者的供养如何得以清净”。巴利
493.Ārādhaye dakkhiṇeyyebhi tādīti tādiso yācayogo dakkhiṇeyyehi ārādhaye sampādaye sodhaye, mahapphalaṃ taṃ hutaṃ kareyya, na aññathāti attho. Imināssa ‘‘kathaṃ hutaṃ yajamānassa sujjhe’’ iccetaṃ byākataṃ hoti.
494 世尊,请为我说明应供者。在此处,若谁是适合乞求者,他布施给他人而供养,请世尊为我说明应供者,应当这样理解其关联。巴利
494.Akkhāhi me bhagavā dakkhiṇeyyeti ettha yo yācayogo dadaṃ paresaṃ yajati, tassa me bhagavā dakkhiṇeyye akkhāhīti evaṃ yojanā veditabbā.
495 当时,世尊用种种理趣开示应受供养者,诵出了“ye ve asattā”等偈颂。其中,“asattā”是指不被贪等结缚所粘着;“kevalino”是指所作已办;“yatattā”是指心已善加守护。巴利
495. Athassa bhagavā nānappakārehi nayehi dakkhiṇeyye pakāsento ‘‘ye ve asattā’’tiādikā gāthāyo abhāsi. Tattha asattāti rāgādisaṅgavasena alaggā. Kevalinoti pariniṭṭhitakiccā. Yatattāti guttacittā.
496-7 已调伏,是以无上的调伏而调伏;已解脱,是以慧解脱和心解脱而解脱;无恼,是因为未来已没有轮回之苦;无求,是因为现在已没有烦恼。应当知道,这首偈的第二偈,是以阐明修习威力的方式来说的。这里有一部经可以证明:“诸比丘,一位专心投入修习的比丘在安住时,即使他心里没有生起这样的欲求:‘但愿我的心能不执著而从诸漏中解脱!’他的心仍然会不执著地从诸漏中解脱。”巴利
496-7.Dantā anuttarena damathena, vimuttā paññācetovimuttīhi, anīghā āyatiṃ vaṭṭadukkhābhāvena, nirāsā sampati kilesābhāvena. Imissā pana gāthāya dutiyagāthā bhāvanānubhāvappakāsananayena vuttāti veditabbā. ‘‘Bhāvanānuyogamanuyuttassa, bhikkhave, bhikkhuno viharato kiñcāpi na evaṃ icchā uppajjeyya ‘aho vata me anupādāya āsavehi cittaṃ vimucceyyā’ti (a. ni. 7.71), atha khvāssa anupādāya āsavehi cittaṃ vimuccatī’’ti idaṃ cettha suttaṃ sādhakaṃ.
498-502 对贪……中略……在他们当中没有幻诈……中略……不陷溺于渴爱:就是说不倾心于欲爱等渴爱。应度越:意思是已经度越。渴爱:指色爱等六种渴爱。于有非有:指为常见或为断见。或者也可以理解为“有的无有”,即为了后有的生起。于此界或彼界:这是对“于任何世间”这一句的详细展开说明。巴利
498-502.Rāgañca…pe… yesu na māyā…pe… na taṇhāsu upātipannāti kāmataṇhādīsu nādhimuttā. Vitareyyāti vitaritvā. Taṇhāti rūpataṇhādichabbidhā . Bhavābhavāyāti sassatāya vā ucchedāya vā. Atha vā bhavassa abhavāya bhavābhavāya, punabbhavābhinibbattiyāti vuttaṃ hoti. Idha vā huraṃ vāti idaṃ pana ‘‘kuhiñci loke’’ti imassa vitthāravacanaṃ.
504 已离贪……(中略)……已寂灭的人,就是已经止息的人,意思是使烦恼平息下来的人。由于已经寂灭,所以他们是离贪的,也是没有嗔恨的。在这里,“已经舍弃”是指在当前这个世间舍弃了正在运作的五蕴之后,从此再也没有要去的地方——这就是这句话的意思。此后,也有人诵出这样一首偈颂:“那些舍弃了欲乐、不再执著而行的人,因为善于自我约束,就像梭子一样正直。”巴利
504.Yevītarāgā…pe… samitāvinoti samitavanto, kilesavūpasamakārinoti attho. Samitāvitattā ca vītarāgā akopā. Idha vippahāyāti idhaloke vattamāne khandhe vihāya, tato paraṃ yesaṃ gamanaṃ natthīti vuttaṃ hoti. Ito paraṃ ‘‘ye kāme hitvā agahā caranti, susaññatattā tasaraṃva ujju’’nti imampi gāthaṃ keci paṭhanti.
506-8 “已舍弃”就是舍弃的意思。也可以读作“Jahitvānā”,意思一样。“自依”是说,那些诸漏已尽的人,只以自己的功德作为自己的依靠而游行世间,所以被称为自依。“那些于此”里的“ha”是虚词,只是用来补足音节。它的意思是:他们对这当中的蕴、处、界等相续,如实了知这些蕴、处、界等的本质,以无常等方式去了知。他们了知“这是最后一生,不再有后有”,也就是“这是我的最后一生,现在不再有后有”。巴利
506-8.Jahitvāti hitvā. ‘‘Jahitvānā’’tipi pāṭho, ayamevattho. Attadīpāti attano guṇe eva attano dīpaṃ katvā vicarantā khīṇāsavā vuccanti. Ye hetthāti hakāro nipāto padapūraṇamatte. Ayaṃ panattho – ye ettha khandhāyatanādisantāne yathā idaṃ khandhāyatanādi tathā jānanti, yaṃsabhāvaṃ taṃsabhāvaṃyeva sañjānanti aniccādivasena jānantā. Ayamantimā natthi punabbhavoti ayaṃ no antimā jāti, idāni natthi punabbhavoti evañca ye jānantīti.
509 世尊现在就是就自己而说这首偈颂:所谓“通达吠陀者”。其中,“具念”是指具足六种常住处之念。“达到正觉”是指证得一切智。“众多天与人的皈依处”是指通过破除众多天与人的怖畏,而成为他们的皈依处。巴利
509. Yo vedagūti idāni attānaṃ sandhāya bhagavā imaṃ gāthamāha. Tattha satimāti chasatatavihārasatiyā samannāgato. Sambodhipattoti sabbaññutaṃ patto. Saraṇaṃ bahūnanti bahūnaṃ devamanussānaṃ bhayavihiṃsanena saraṇabhūto.
510 婆罗门听到关于应受供养者的这番话后,心里很欢喜,说道:“确实没有白费。”这里说“你在此处确实如实了知这一切”,意思是:你在这世上,对这一切应当了知的事物,都如实了知,都按它们真实的样子了知,它们是什么样,你就了知它们是什么样。又说“因为你确实通达了这法”,意思是:你确实已经善巧通达了这法界;正因为善巧通达了这法界,所以无论你想了知什么,都能了知——这就是这段话的用意。巴利
510. Evaṃ dakkhiṇeyye sutvā attamano brāhmaṇo āha – ‘‘addhā amoghā’’ti. Tattha tvañhettha jānāsi yathā tathā idanti tvañhi ettha loke idaṃ sabbampi ñeyyaṃ yathā tathā jānāsi yāthāvato jānāsi, yādisaṃ taṃ tādisameva jānāsīti vuttaṃ hoti. Tathā hi te vidito esa dhammoti tathā hi te esā dhammadhātu suppaṭividdhā, yassā suppaṭividdhatā yaṃ yaṃ icchasi, taṃ taṃ jānāsīti adhippāyo.
511 婆罗门这样称赞世尊之后,从应受供养者的圆满功德中了解了祭祀的圆满,接着又想听闻由施主圆满而六支具足的祭祀圆满,于是进一步问道:“那位应求而施的人……”这里的连接意思是:世尊,请告诉我,那位应求而施、施与他人而举行祭祀者的祭祀圆满。巴利
511. Evaṃ so brāhmaṇo bhagavantaṃ pasaṃsitvā dakkhiṇeyyasampadāya yaññasampadaṃ ñatvā dāyakasampadāyapi taṃ chaḷaṅgaparipūraṃ yaññasampadaṃ sotukāmo ‘‘yo yācayogo’’ti uttaripañhaṃ pucchi. Tatrāyaṃ yojanā – yo yācayogo dadaṃ paresaṃ yajati, tassa akkhāhi me bhagavā yaññasampadanti.
512 512. 于是世尊用两首偈颂为他开示。这里的义理连接是:摩伽,你应当祭祀;作为祭祀者,要在一切处令心清净,在三个时段都令心净信。这样,你的这……巴利
512. Athassa bhagavā dvīhi gāthāhi akkhāsi. Tatthāyaṃ atthayojanā – yajassu māgha, yajamāno ca sabbattha vippasādehi cittaṃ, tīsupi kālesu cittaṃ pasādehi. Evaṃ te yāyaṃ –
布施之前就先心怀欢喜,布施时也要让心平静安稳;
布施之后,心里感到满意,这就是祭祀的圆满。巴利
‘‘Pubbeva dānā sumano, dadaṃ cittaṃ pasādaye; Datvā attamano hoti, esā yaññassa sampadā’’ti. (a. ni. 6.37; pe. va. 305) –
已经说了祭祀的成就,具足这项成就的祭祀就会圆满。在这里,也许有人会问:怎样才能让心清净?靠舍断嗔恚。怎样才是舍断嗔恚?以祭祀为所缘。对祭祀者来说,这个祭祀就是所缘:他的心以慈爱为先导,以正见之灯驱散无明的黑暗,所施之物就叫应施之法。他依止这个祭祀所缘而安住,因此舍断以应施之法为因的贪、以受施者为因的嗔,以及以这两者为根源的无明。这样就把三种根源都舍断了,也就是舍断嗔恚。如此一来,他对财物离贪,对众生也应当断除嗔恚。因为舍断了嗔恚,他就舍断了五盖。然后,他以遍满无量众生,或者对一个众生无余遍满的方式,依次修习无量慈心,达到近行定与安止定的区分。为了让修习不断增长,他日夜不间断,在一切威仪中都不放逸,以名为慈禅那的所缘,遍满一切方向,这就叫无量。巴利
Yaññasampadā vuttā, tāya sampanno yañño bhavissati. Tattha siyā ‘‘kathaṃ cittaṃ pasādetabba’’nti? Dosappahānena. Kathaṃ dosappahānaṃ hoti? Yaññārammaṇatāya. Ayañhi ārammaṇaṃ yajamānassa yañño ettha patiṭṭhāya jahāti dosaṃ, ayañhi sattesu mettāpubbaṅgamena sammādiṭṭhipadīpavihatamohandhakārena cittena yajamānassa deyyadhammasaṅkhāto yañño ārammaṇaṃ hoti, so ettha yaññe ārammaṇavasena pavattiyā patiṭṭhāya deyyadhammapaccayaṃ lobhaṃ, paṭiggāhakapaccayaṃ kodhaṃ, tadubhayanidānaṃ mohanti evaṃ tividhampi jahāti dosaṃ. So evaṃ bhogesu vītarāgo, sattesu ca pavineyya dosaṃ tappahāneneva pahīnapañcanīvaraṇo anukkamena upacārappanābhedaṃ aparimāṇasattapharaṇena ekasatte vā anavasesapharaṇena appamāṇaṃ mettaṃ cittaṃ bhāvento puna bhāvanāvepullatthaṃ, rattindivaṃ satataṃ sabbairiyāpathesu appamatto hutvā tameva mettajjhānasaṅkhātaṃ sabbā disā pharate appamaññanti.
514 那时,婆罗门不知道这慈心就是“通往梵天之路”,只是听到了一种超越自己境界的慈心修习,就对世尊生起了更强的“一切智”的崇敬。因为他自己一心向往梵天,以为往生梵天就是清净和解脱,于是为了问通往梵天之路,说了“谁得清净”这首偈颂。其中,针对修集能往生梵天的福德的人,他说“谁得清净、解脱”;针对不修集的人,他说“并且被系缚”。“以何自我”就是以什么原因。“今日亲见梵天为证”就是今天我已亲见梵天为证。“真实语”是指以极大的恭敬,对着与梵天等同的世尊发誓。“如何往生”同样是以极大的恭敬再次追问。“光耀者”是对世尊的称呼。巴利
514. Atha brāhmaṇo taṃ mettaṃ ‘‘brahmalokamaggo aya’’nti ajānanto kevalaṃ attano visayātītaṃ mettābhāvanaṃ sutvā suṭṭhutaraṃ sañjātasabbaññusambhāvano bhagavati attanā brahmalokādhimuttattā brahmalokūpapattimeva ca suddhiṃ muttiñca maññamāno brahmalokamaggaṃ pucchanto ‘‘ko sujjhatī’’ti gāthamāha. Tatra ca brahmalokagāmiṃ puññaṃ karontaṃ sandhāyāha – ‘‘ko sujjhati muccatī’’ti, akarontaṃ sandhāya ‘‘bajjhatī cā’’ti. Kenattanāti kena kāraṇena. Sakkhi brahmajjadiṭṭhoti brahmā ajja sakkhi diṭṭho. Saccanti bhagavato brahmasamattaṃ ārabbha accādarena sapathaṃ karoti. Kathaṃ upapajjatīti accādareneva punapi pucchati. Jutimāti bhagavantaṃ ālapati.
在这里,如果有比丘以慈心修到第三禅或第四禅,再以这个禅那作为观禅的基础来修观,最终证得阿罗汉果,那么他就是清净的、解脱的,但这样的人不会往生梵天。反过来,如果有人以慈心修到第三禅或第四禅之后,用“这才是寂静”等方式去贪著那个禅那,他就会被系缚。禅那不退失的人,就以那个禅那往生梵天。所以世尊对于清净解脱的人,不认可他往生梵天,因此根本不提这种人;对于被系缚的人,则指出他以那个禅那往生梵天。世尊就这样以适合婆罗门的方式,说出了“他祭祀”这首偈颂。巴利
Tattha yasmā yo bhikkhu mettāya tikacatukkajjhānaṃ uppādetvā tameva pādakaṃ katvā vipassanto arahattaṃ pāpuṇāti, so sujjhati muccati ca, tathārūpo ca brahmalokaṃ na gacchati. Yo pana mettāya tikacatukkajjhānaṃ uppādetvā ‘‘santā esā samāpattī’’tiādinā nayena taṃ assādeti, so bajjhati. Aparihīnajjhāno ca teneva jhānena brahmalokaṃ gacchati, tasmā bhagavā yo sujjhati muccati ca, tassa brahmalokagamanaṃ ananujānanto anāmasitvāva taṃ puggalaṃ yo bajjhati. Tassa tena jhānena brahmalokagamanaṃ dassento brāhmaṇassa sappāyena nayena ‘‘yo yajatī’’ti imaṃ gāthamāha.
515 这里说的“三种”,是针对三个时段的净信而说的。由此显示施者方面的三支。所谓“他应通过应供者达成”,意思是:那样的人,具有那样的性质,能成就三种圆满,他应通过应供者——诸漏已尽的圣者——来成就、圆满三种祭祀的圆满。由此显示受施者方面的三支。这样如法祭祀之后,他具足祈求,意思是:他以该祭祀作为慈心禅那足处的方式,如法祭祀了具足六支的祭祀之后,他求乞相应;依靠这六支祭祀作为亲依止,以慈心禅那,我说他往生梵天。这样鼓励那位婆罗门之后,结束了这段说法。其余所有偈颂的意义都浅显易懂。从这里往后,也都是前面所说的方式。巴利
515. Tattha tividhanti tikālappasādaṃ sandhāyāha. Tena dāyakato aṅgattayaṃ dasseti. Ārādhaye dakkhiṇeyyebhi tādīti tañca so tādiso tividhasampattisādhako puggalo tividhaṃ yaññasampadaṃ dakkhiṇeyyehi khīṇāsavehi sādheyya sampādeyya. Iminā paṭiggāhakato aṅgattayaṃ dasseti. Evaṃ yajitvā sammā yācayogoti evaṃ mettajjhānapadaṭṭhānabhāvena chaḷaṅgasamannāgataṃ yaññaṃ sammā yajitvā so yācayogo tena chaḷaṅgayaññūpanissayena mettajjhānena upapajjati brahmalokantibrūmīti brāhmaṇaṃ samussāhento desanaṃ samāpesi. Sesaṃ sabbagāthāsu uttānatthameva. Ito parañca pubbe vuttanayamevāti.
《萨毗耶经》的注释巴利
6. Sabhiyasuttavaṇṇanā
“如是我闻”这一段,就是《萨毗耶经》。它的缘起是什么?就是在这部经的序分里已经说过的那个。至于释义的次第,也和前面那部经一样,可以按照前面讲过的方法来理解。对于其中新出现的内容,我们会跳过那些意思明显的词句,只解释难懂的地方。
“在竹林迦兰陀饲养处”:“竹林”是那座园林的名字。据说那座园林四周被竹子环绕,还有十八肘高的围墙,配有门楼、大门和瞭望台,泛着青绿色的光泽,令人愉悦,因此叫做“竹林”。又因为人们在那里给迦兰陀投放食物,所以叫做“迦兰陀饲养处”。所谓“迦兰陀”,指的就是黑鼠。据说从前有一位国王,到那座园子里游玩,喝醉了酒,白天就在那里睡着了。他的随从们心想“国王睡着了”,于是被花果等吸引,四散走开了。这时,因为酒气,一条黑蛇从一棵空心树里爬出来,朝国王游过去。一位树神看见了,心想“我要救国王的命”,就变成黑鼠的样子,来到国王耳边发出声响。国王被惊醒了,那条黑蛇也退了回去。国王看到这一幕,心想:“是这只黑鼠救了我的命。”于是他为黑鼠们在那里设置了食物,还宣告了无畏令。从此以后,那个地方就被称为“迦兰陀饲养处”了。巴利
Evaṃme sutanti sabhiyasuttaṃ. Kā uppatti? Ayameva yāssa nidāne vuttā. Atthavaṇṇanākkamepi cassa pubbasadisaṃ pubbe vuttanayeneva veditabbaṃ. Yaṃ pana apubbaṃ, taṃ uttānatthāni padāni pariharantā vaṇṇayissāma. Veḷuvane kalandakanivāpeti veḷuvananti tassa uyyānassa nāmaṃ. Taṃ kira veḷūhi ca parikkhittaṃ ahosi aṭṭhārasahatthena ca pākārena, gopuradvāraṭṭālakayuttaṃ nīlobhāsaṃ manoramaṃ, tena ‘‘veḷuvana’’nti vuccati. Kalandakānañcettha nivāpaṃ adaṃsu, tena ‘‘kalandakanivāpo’’ti vuccati. Kalandakā nāma kāḷakā vuccanti. Pubbe kira aññataro rājā tattha uyyānakīḷanatthaṃ āgato surāmadena matto divāseyyaṃ supi. Parijanopissa ‘‘sutto rājā’’ti pupphaphalādīhi palobhiyamāno ito cito ca pakkāmi. Atha surāgandhena aññatarasmā susirarukkhā kaṇhasappo nikkhamitvā rañño abhimukho āgacchati. Taṃ disvā rukkhadevatā ‘‘rañño jīvitaṃ dassāmī’’ti kāḷakavesena āgantvā kaṇṇamūle saddamakāsi. Rājā paṭibujjhi, kaṇhasappo nivatto. So taṃ disvā ‘‘imāya mama kāḷakāya jīvitaṃ dinna’’nti kāḷakānaṃ tattha nivāpaṃ paṭṭhapesi, abhayaghosanañca ghosāpesi. Tasmā taṃ tato pabhuti ‘‘kalandakanivāpo’’ti saṅkhaṃ gataṃ.
“萨毗耶游方者”中,萨毗耶是他的名字;因为依止外道出家,所以称为游方者。“宿昔同血统的天神”并不是指他的母亲或父亲,而是说这位天子怀着像母亲、父亲那样希望他得益的心,所以被称为“宿昔同血统的天神”。据说,迦叶世尊般涅槃后,金塔建成时,有三位善男子在世尊亲传弟子跟前出家,取了与自身修行相应的业处,前往边地,在森林中修行沙门法,间或为了礼塔和听法而进城。后来有一段时间,他们连在森林里短暂离开也不愿意,就一直在那里不放逸地安住修行。可即便这样修行,他们也没有证得任何殊胜成就。于是他们想:“我们托钵乞食时,对生命还有所顾恋;而对生命有所顾恋,就不可能证得出世间法;凡夫命终也是苦的。来吧,我们绑好梯子,爬上这座山,不顾身体和性命,修行沙门法。”他们就照这样做了。巴利
Sabhiyassa paribbājakassāti sabhiyoti tassa nāmaṃ, paribbājakoti bāhira pabbajjaṃ upādāya vuccati. Purāṇasālohitāya devatāyāti na mātā na pitā, apica kho panassa mātā viya pitā viya ca hitajjhāsayattā so devaputto ‘‘purāṇasālohitā devatā’’ti vutto. Parinibbute kira kassape bhagavati patiṭṭhite suvaṇṇacetiye tayo kulaputtā sammukhasāvakānaṃ santike pabbajitvā cariyānurūpāni kammaṭṭhānāni gahetvā paccantajanapadaṃ gantvā araññāyatane samaṇadhammaṃ karonti, antarantarā ca cetiyavandanatthāya dhammassavanatthāya ca nagaraṃ gacchanti. Aparena ca samayena tāvatakampi araññe vippavāsaṃ arocayamānā tattheva appamattā vihariṃsu, evaṃ viharantāpi na ca kiñci visesaṃ adhigamiṃsu. Tato nesaṃ ahosi – ‘‘mayaṃ piṇḍāya gacchantā jīvite sāpekkhā homa, jīvite sāpekkhena ca na sakkā lokuttaradhammo adhigantuṃ, puthujjanakālakiriyāpi dukkhā, handa mayaṃ nisseṇiṃ bandhitvā pabbataṃ abhiruyha kāye ca jīvite ca anapekkhā samaṇadhammaṃ karomā’’ti. Te tathā akaṃsu.
这时,他们当中的大长老因为具足了宿世善根,就在当天证得了阿罗汉果,并具足六神通。他以神通力前往雪山,在阿耨达池洗了脸,又到北郁单越托钵乞食,吃完饭后,再到别的地方把钵装满,还取了阿耨达池的水和龙蔓树的齿木,然后回到他们那里,说道:“贤友们,看看我的神通力吧。这是从北郁单越乞来的团食,这是从雪山取来的水和齿木。你们吃了这些,继续修行沙门法吧,我会一直这样照顾你们。”他们听了之后说:“尊者,您已经完成了修行,就算只是和您说几句话,对我们来说也是障碍。从今以后,请您不要再回到我们这里来了。”大长老没办法让他们接受,就离开了。巴利
Atha nesaṃ mahāthero upanissayasampannattā tadaheva chaḷabhiññāparivāraṃ arahattaṃ sacchākāsi. So iddhiyā himavantaṃ gantvā anotatte mukhaṃ dhovitvā uttarakurūsu piṇḍāya caritvā katabhattakicco puna aññampi padesaṃ gantvā pattaṃ pūretvā anotattaudakañca nāgalatādantapoṇañca gahetvā tesaṃ santikaṃ āgantvā āha – ‘‘passathāvuso mamānubhāvaṃ, ayaṃ uttarakuruto piṇḍapāto, idaṃ himavantato udakadantapoṇaṃ ābhataṃ, imaṃ bhuñjitvā samaṇadhammaṃ karotha, evāhaṃ tumhe sadā upaṭṭhahissāmī’’ti. Te taṃ sutvā āhaṃsu – ‘‘tumhe, bhante, katakiccā, tumhehi saha sallāpamattampi amhākaṃ papañco, mā dāni tumhe puna amhākaṃ santikaṃ āgamitthā’’ti. So kenaci pariyāyena te sampaṭicchāpetuṃ asakkonto pakkāmi.
从那以后,他们当中的一位过了两三天,证得了五神通和不来果。他也同样去照顾另一位,又被对方拒绝,也照样离开了。那位拒绝了他之后努力修行,从登山那天算起,到第七天还没证得任何殊胜成就就死了,投生到天界。那位漏尽长老也在同一天般涅槃,而那位不来者则投生到了净居天。
那位天子在六欲天中顺次和逆次享受天界的福报,在我们的世尊出世的时候,从天界命终,投生到一位游方女的胎中。据说这位游方女是某个刹帝利家的女儿,她的父母为了让女儿“了解其他宗派的教义”,把她交给了一位游方者。那位游方者的一个弟子和她发生了不正当关系,她因此怀了孕。其他游方女见她怀孕,就把她赶了出去。她只好去别处,走到半路,在一个集会厅里生下了孩子,因此给他取名叫“萨毗耶”。萨毗耶长大后,出家做了游方者,学了各种学说,成了大辩论师。他因为辩才无敌,遍游整个赡部洲也找不到对手,就在城门附近建了一座修行园,在那里教刹帝利青年等人技艺。巴利
Tato tesaṃ eko dvīhatīhaccayena pañcābhiñño anāgāmī ahosi. Sopi tatheva akāsi, itarena ca paṭikkhitto tatheva agamāsi. So taṃ paṭikkhipitvā vāyamanto pabbataṃ āruhanadivasato sattame divase kiñci visesaṃ anadhigantvāva kālakato devaloke nibbatti. Khīṇāsavattheropi taṃ divasameva parinibbāyi, anāgāmī suddhāvāsesu uppajji. Devaputto chasu kāmāvacaradevalokesu anulomapaṭilomena dibbasampattiṃ anubhavitvā amhākaṃ bhagavato kāle devalokā cavitvā aññatarissā paribbājikāya kucchimhi paṭisandhiṃ aggahesi. Sā kira aññatarassa khattiyassa dhītā, taṃ mātāpitaro ‘‘amhākaṃ dhītā samayantaraṃ jānātū’’ti ekassa paribbājakassa niyyātesuṃ. Tasseko antevāsiko paribbājako tāya saddhiṃ vippaṭipajji. Sā tena gabbhaṃ gaṇhi. Taṃ gabbhiniṃ disvā paribbājikā nikkaḍḍhiṃsu. Sā aññattha gacchantī antarāmagge sabhāyaṃ vijāyi, tenassa ‘‘sabhiyo’’tveva nāmaṃ akāsi. Sopi sabhiyo vaḍḍhitvā paribbājakapabbajjaṃ pabbajitvā nānāsatthāni uggahetvā mahāvādī hutvā vādakkhittatāya sakalajambudīpe vicaranto attano sadisaṃ vādiṃ adisvā nagaradvāre assamaṃ kārāpetvā khattiyakumārādayo sippaṃ sikkhāpento tattha vasati.
那时,世尊已经转起殊胜的法轮,次第游行来到王舍城,住在竹林精舍的松鼠觅食处。萨毗耶却不知道佛陀已经出世。当时,一位净居天的梵天从定中出来,这样观察:“我证得这种殊胜境界,是依靠谁的威德?”他回忆起在迦叶世尊的教法中修习沙门法的事,以及那些同伴,又观察:“他们当中一位已经寂灭,另一位现在在哪里?”他得知“那位从天界死后,投生在赡部洲,却连佛陀出世都不知道”,于是想:“来吧,我要让他去亲近佛陀。”便准备了二十个问题,在夜间来到萨毗耶的修行处,站在空中喊道:“萨毗耶,萨毗耶!”萨毗耶正在睡觉,听到这声音三遍后,走出来看见光明,便合掌站立。于是梵天对他说:“萨毗耶,我为了你的事带来了二十个问题,你要记住它们。如果有沙门或婆罗门被问到这些问题时能解答,你就应该在他身边修习梵行。”正是针对这位天子,才说“由过去同血统的天神所提示的问题”。“提示”是指只以概要的方式说出,并没有详细分别解释。巴利
Atha bhagavā pavattitavaradhammacakko anupubbena rājagahaṃ āgantvā veḷuvane viharati kalandakanivāpe. Sabhiyo pana buddhuppādaṃ na jānāti. Atha so suddhāvāsabrahmā samāpattito vuṭṭhāya ‘‘imāhaṃ visesaṃ kassānubhāvena patto’’ti āvajjento kassapassa bhagavato sāsane samaṇadhammakiriyaṃ te ca sahāye anussaritvā ‘‘tesu eko parinibbuto, eko idāni katthā’’ti āvajjento ‘‘devalokā cavitvā jambudīpe uppanno buddhuppādampi na jānātī’’ti ñatvā ‘‘handa naṃ buddhupasevanāya niyojemī’’ti vīsati pañhe abhisaṅkharitvā rattibhāge tassa assamamāgamma ākāse ṭhatvā ‘‘sabhiya, sabhiyā’’ti pakkosi. So niddāyamāno tikkhattuṃ taṃ saddaṃ sutvā nikkhamma obhāsaṃ disvā pañjaliko aṭṭhāsi. Tato taṃ brahmā āha – ‘‘ahaṃ sabhiya tavatthāya vīsati pañhe āhariṃ, te tvaṃ uggaṇha. Yo ca te samaṇo vā brāhmaṇo vā ime pañhe puṭṭho byākaroti, tassa santike brahmacariyaṃ careyyāsī’’ti. Imaṃ devaputtaṃ sandhāyetaṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘purāṇasālohitāya devatāya pañhā uddiṭṭhā hontī’’ti. Uddiṭṭhāti uddesamatteneva vuttā, na vibhaṅgena.
听完这番话,萨毗耶只凭一次听闻就按顺序把那些问题记了下来。那时,那位梵天虽然知道佛陀已经出世,却没有告诉他。他心里想:这位游方者寻求真理时,自己就会认出导师。而且,也要让他知道外头那些沙门、婆罗门是空洞无实的。正是出于这个用意,他才这样说:如果有沙门或婆罗门……你就在他身边修习梵行。不过,《长老偈》第四集解说萨毗耶长老的本生故事时,却是这样说的:他的母亲回想自己的过失,对那件事心生厌离,生起禅那之后投生到梵天界,那些问题就是由那位梵天神提示的。巴利
Evaṃ vutte ca ne sabhiyo ekavacaneneva padapaṭipāṭiyā uggahesi. Atha so brahmā jānantopi tassa buddhuppādaṃ nācikkhi. ‘‘Atthaṃ gavesamāno paribbājako sayameva satthāraṃ ñassati. Ito bahiddhā ca samaṇabrāhmaṇānaṃ tucchabhāva’’nti iminā panādhippāyena evamāha – ‘‘yo te sabhiya…pe… careyyāsī’’ti. Theragāthāsu pana catukkanipāte sabhiyattherāpadānaṃ vaṇṇentā bhaṇanti ‘‘sā cassa mātā attano vippaṭipattiṃ cintetvā taṃ jigucchamānā jhānaṃ uppādetvā brahmaloke uppannā, tāya brahmadevatāya te pañhā uddiṭṭhā’’ti.
“Ye te”这些,是现在要说的内容的提纲式复述。“沙门、婆罗门”:指出家修行的人和世间公认为沙门、婆罗门的人。“有徒众的”:就是拥有众人跟随的人。“有团体的”:指那些自称“我们是一切知者”的导师。“众师”:指通过教授、提问等方式,教导出家或在家人徒众的老师。“知名的”:就是非常有名、声名远播、广为人知。“有名声的”:指利养丰厚、随从众多。“创建教派的”:指那些为追随者建立见解据点、让人陷入沉溺的人。“被大众认为善好的”:意思是大众认可他们,说“这些人是善人、寂静的人、贤善的人”。巴利
Ye teti idāni vattabbānaṃ uddesapaccuddeso. Samaṇabrāhmaṇāti pabbajjūpagamanena lokasammutiyā ca samaṇā ceva brāhmaṇā ca. Saṅghinoti gaṇavanto. Gaṇinoti satthāro, ‘‘sabbaññuno maya’’nti evaṃ paṭiññātāro. Gaṇācariyāti uddesaparipucchādivasena pabbajitagahaṭṭhagaṇassa ācariyā. Ñātāti abhiññātā, vissutā pākaṭāti vuttaṃ hoti. Yasassinoti lābhaparivārasampannā. Titthakarāti tesaṃ diṭṭhānugatiṃ āpajjantehi otaritabbānaṃ ogāhitabbānaṃ diṭṭhititthānaṃ kattāro. Sādhusammatā bahujanassāti ‘‘sādhavo ete santo sappurisā’’ti evaṃ bahujanassa sammatā.
“所谓‘他们’”,意思是“哪些是他们呢?”,这是表达这个意思的不变词。富兰那是名,迦叶是姓。据说他生来就是奴隶,出生时正好凑满一百个奴隶,所以人们给他取名叫“富兰那”。后来他逃走了,在裸形外道中出家,宣称自己姓“迦叶”,还自称是一切知者。末伽梨是名,因为出生在牛栏里,所以也叫拘舍梨。据说他也是生来就是奴隶,逃走后出家,也自称一切知者。阿耆多是名,因为少欲,穿着用头发编成的衣服,所以也叫翅舍钦婆罗,他也自称一切知者。波拘陀是名,迦旃延是姓。因为少欲,又认为水中有生命,所以拒绝洗澡、洗脸等,他也自称一切知者。散若耶是名,他的父亲是毗罗梨,因此叫毗罗梨子,他也自称一切知者。尼乾陀是出家后的名字,随父亲的名字叫若提子。据说若提是一个人的名字,他的儿子就叫若提子,他也自称一切知者。他们全都有五百个弟子随从。这里的“他们”指那六位导师。“他们的问题”指那二十个问题。“他们”指那六位导师。“不能解答”就是回答不了。“愤怒”指心与心所变得混乱的状态。“嗔恨”指心被污染的状态,这两者都是对有轻微与强烈之分的嗔怒的称呼。“不满”指不高兴,说的是忧受。“表现出来”指通过身体和语言的行为显示出来,让他们变得明显。巴利
Seyyathidanti katame teti ce-iccetasmiṃ atthe nipāto. Pūraṇoti nāmaṃ, kassapoti gottaṃ. So kira jātiyā dāso, dāsasataṃ pūrento jāto. Tenassa ‘‘pūraṇo’’ti nāmamakaṃsu. Palāyitvā pana naggesu pabbajitvā ‘‘kassapo aha’’nti gottaṃ uddisi, sabbaññutañca paccaññāsi. Makkhalīti nāmaṃ, gosālāya jātattā gosālotipi vuccati. Sopi kira jātiyā dāso eva, palāyitvā pabbaji, sabbaññutañca paccaññāsi. Ajitoti nāmaṃ, appicchatāya kesakambalaṃ dhāreti, tena kesakambalotipi vuccati, sopi sabbaññutaṃ paccaññāsi . Pakudhoti nāmaṃ, kaccāyanoti gottaṃ. Appicchavasena udake jīvasaññāya ca nhānamukhadhovanādi paṭikkhitto, sopi sabbaññutaṃ paccaññāsi. Sañcayoti nāmaṃ, belaṭṭho panassa pitā, tasmā belaṭṭhaputtoti vuccati, sopi sabbaññutaṃ paccaññāsi. Nigaṇṭhoti pabbajjānāmena, nāṭaputtoti pitunāmena vuccati. Nāṭoti kira nāmassa pitā, tassa puttoti nāṭaputto, sopi sabbaññutaṃ paccaññāsi. Sabbepi pañcasatapañcasatasissaparivārā ahesuṃ. Teti te cha satthāro. Te pañheti te vīsati pañhe. Teti te cha satthāro. Na sampāyantīti na sampādenti. Kopanti cittacetasikānaṃ āvilabhāvaṃ. Dosanti paduṭṭhacittataṃ, tadubhayampetaṃ mandatikkhabhedassa kodhassevādhivacanaṃ. Appaccayanti appatītatā, domanassanti vuttaṃ hoti. Pātukarontīti kāyavacīvikārena pakāsenti, pākaṭaṃ karonti.
“低劣”是指在家人的身份。因为和出家相比,在家人的身份在戒等功德上更低劣,或者因为享受低劣的欲乐,所以被称为“低劣”。而出家则是崇高的。“返回”就是退堕、退缩。“享受欲乐”就是受用感官欲乐。据说,他正是因为看到那些自称一切知者的出家众如此空虚,才生起了这个念头。又正是以生起的寻思之力而来,反复考察,于是游方者沙毗耶心中这样想:“这位沙门也是……”“那些尊敬的尊者们也是……”“沙门年轻也不该轻视……”等等。这里,“衰老”等词句即如前所说。“长老”是指在各自沙门法中已经达到坚固的人;“久知者”是指知宝者,他们宣称“我们了知涅槃宝”,并以此获得世间的认可,或者是指了知诸多岁月者。出家已久者,就是指这些长久出家之人。“不应轻视”就是不应轻蔑,不应看低,意思是说不应把他看得低贱。“不应蔑视”就是不应轻侮,不应以“他怎么能知道什么”这样的方式来看待,这就是所说的意思。巴利
Hīnāyāti gahaṭṭhabhāvāya. Gahaṭṭhabhāvo hi pabbajjaṃ upanidhāya sīlādiguṇahīnato hīnakāmasukhapaṭisevanato vā ‘‘hīno’’ti vuccati. Uccā pabbajjā. Āvattitvāti osakkitvā. Kāme paribhuñjeyyanti kāme paṭiseveyyaṃ. Iti kirassa sabbaññupaṭiññānampi pabbajitānaṃ tucchakattaṃ disvā ahosi. Uppannaparivitakkavaseneva ca āgantvā punappunaṃ vīmaṃsamānassa atha kho sabhiyassa paribbājakassa etadahosi – ‘‘ayampi kho samaṇo’’ti ca ‘‘yepi kho te bhonto’’ti ca ‘‘samaṇo kho daharoti na uññātabbo’’ti cāti evamādi. Tattha jiṇṇātiādīni padāni vuttanayāneva. Therāti attano samaṇadhamme thirabhāvappattā. Rattaññūti ratanaññū, ‘‘nibbānaratanaṃ jānāma maya’’nti evaṃ sakāya paṭiññāya lokenāpi sammatā, bahurattividū vā. Ciraṃ pabbajitānaṃ etesanti cirapabbajitā. Na uññātabboti na avajānitabbo, na nīcaṃ katvā jānitabboti vuttaṃ hoti. Na paribhotabboti na paribhavitabbo, ‘‘kimesa ñassatī’’ti evaṃ na gahetabboti vuttaṃ hoti.
516 有疑、犹豫:萨毗耶和世尊互相欢喜地问候时,就这样赞叹世尊以相貌圆满、寂静、清净所显示出来的一切知性,去掉掉举之心后说道——“有疑、犹豫”。其中,“有疑”是对这些问题的解答有疑惑,心想:“我到底能不能得到这些回答?”“犹豫”是对这些问题本身的含义有疑惑,心想:“这个问题和那个问题的意思到底是什么?”或者,对这些问题的含义,疑惑微弱就叫“有疑”,疑惑强烈时反复思量却只是困顿,无法确定,就叫“犹豫”。渴望,就是非常热切地希求。成为这些问题的终结者,就是成为这些问题的终结者。为了表示“愿您也这样成为”,他说:“您被我问了问题……请为我解答。”其中,“您被我问了问题”就是问题由我提出。“被问”就是被询问。次第,就是按问题的顺序。如法,就是顺着义理把经文组织起来。请为我解答,就是为我解答。巴利
516.Kaṅkhī vecikicchīti sabhiyo bhagavatā saddhiṃ sammodamāno evaṃ bhagavato rūpasampattidamūpasamasūcitaṃ sabbaññutaṃ sambhāvayamāno vigatuddhacco hutvā āha – ‘‘kaṅkhī vecikicchī’’ti. Tattha ‘‘labheyyaṃ nu kho imesaṃ byākaraṇa’’nti evaṃ pañhānaṃ byākaraṇakaṅkhāya kaṅkhī. ‘‘Ko nu kho imassimassa ca pañhassa attho’’ti evaṃ vicikicchāya vecikicchī. Dubbalavicikicchāya vā tesaṃ pañhānaṃ atthe kaṅkhanato kaṅkhī, balavatiyā vicinanto kicchatiyeva, na sakkoti sanniṭṭhātunti vecikicchī. Abhikaṅkhamānoti ativiya patthayamāno. Tesantakaroti tesaṃ pañhānaṃ antakaro. Bhavantova evaṃ bhavāhīti dassento āha ‘‘pañhe me puṭṭho…pe… byākarohi me’’ti. Tattha pañhe meti pañhe mayā. Puṭṭhoti pucchito. Anupubbanti pañhapaṭipāṭiyā anudhammanti atthānurūpaṃ pāḷiṃ āropento. Byākarohi meti mayhaṃ byākarohi.
517 “从远方来”:据说他四处游历,从远达七百由旬的路途之外来到这里。因此世尊说:“你从远方来。”又或者,因为他来自迦叶世尊的教法,世尊便对他说:“你从远方来。”巴利
517.Dūratoti so kira ito cito cāhiṇḍanto sattayojanasatamaggato āgato. Tenāha – bhagavā ‘‘dūrato āgatosī’’ti, kassapassa bhagavato vā sāsanato āgatattā ‘‘dūrato āgatosī’’ti naṃ āha.
518 问吧:他用这首偈颂发出一切知者的邀请。其中,你心中想要,就是以心所希望的。巴利
518.Puccha manti imāya panassa gāthāya sabbaññupavāraṇaṃ pavāreti. Tattha manasicchasīti manasā icchasi.
“我多么……”(Yaṃ vatāhanti)就是“我多么……”(yaṃ vata ahaṃ)。“满意”(Attamano)是指内心被喜悦、欢悦和满足所触动。“昂扬”(Udaggoti)是说身体和心都振奋向上。不过这个词并非所有版本里都有。现在,为了说明他是因为哪些法而满意,他说:“欢喜踊跃,喜悦和满足已生起。”巴利
Yaṃ vatāhanti yaṃ vata ahaṃ. Attamanoti pītipāmojjasomanassehi phuṭacitto. Udaggoti kāyena cittena ca abbhunnato . Idaṃ pana padaṃ na sabbapāṭhesu atthi. Idāni yehi dhammehi attamano, te dassento āha – ‘‘pamudito pītisomanassajāto’’ti.
519 “获得了什么”是指得到了什么、证得了什么。“寂静”是指完全平息下来。也有写成“善乐”的版本,意思是善加远离。“调伏”是指已被调伏。“佛陀”是指觉悟者,或者应当觉悟的人。就这样,萨毗耶把每一首偈颂各分成四个问题,用五首偈颂一共问了二十个问题。世尊则针对每一个问题各用一首偈颂来回答,以阿拉汉果为顶点,用二十首偈颂作了解答。巴利
519.Kiṃ pattinanti kiṃ pattaṃ kimadhigataṃ. Soratanti suvūpasantaṃ. ‘‘Surata’’ntipi pāṭho, suṭṭhu uparatanti attho. Dantanti damitaṃ. Buddhoti vibuddho, buddhaboddhabbo vā. Evaṃ sabhiyo ekekāya gāthāya cattāro cattāro katvā pañcahi gāthāhi vīsati pañhe pucchi. Bhagavā panassa ekamekaṃ pañhaṃ ekamekāya gāthāya katvā arahattanikūṭeneva vīsatiyā gāthāhi byākāsi.
520 在这里,因为断尽烦恼的胜义比丘,就是已经证得涅槃的人,所以世尊在回答“人们说比丘获得了什么”这个问题时,说了“通过道……”等话。它的意思是:一个人依靠自己修出来的道而进入般涅槃,证得烦恼的般涅槃;正因为他已进入般涅槃,所以超越了疑惑,舍弃了对衰败与成就、损减与增益、断灭与恒常、有福与无福的种种分别,也舍弃了非有与有。他已安住于道的修行,已灭尽后有,因此堪受这些称赞之语。这样的人,就是比丘。巴利
520. Tattha yasmā bhinnakileso paramatthabhikkhu, so ca nibbānappatto hoti, tasmā assa ‘‘kiṃ pattinamāhu bhikkhuna’’nti imaṃ pañhaṃ byākaronto ‘‘pajjenā’’tiādimāha. Tassattho – yo attanā bhāvitena maggena parinibbānagato kilesaparinibbānaṃ patto, parinibbānagatattā eva ca vitiṇṇakaṅkho vipattisampattihānibuddhiucchedasassataapuññapuññabhedaṃ vibhavañca bhavañca vippahāya, maggavāsaṃ vusitavā khīṇapunabbhavoti ca etesaṃ thutivacanānaṃ araho, so bhikkhūti.
521 由于远离错误的行持而彻底止息,又通过止息种种烦恼,他成为温和者。因此,为了说明这个道理,世尊以“于一切处保持舍……”等方式,回答了第二个问题。它的意思是:他在一切处、对色等所缘,依照“眼看见色后,既不喜悦,也不忧恼”这样生起的六支舍而安住于舍;他的念达到圆满,所以是具念者;他不伤害任何众生,在一切世界中,对任何世界,不论是有动或不动等种类的众生,都不伤害。因为已渡过瀑流,所以是已度脱者;因为已平息罪恶,所以是沙门;因为已舍弃污浊的意图,所以是清净无浊的。凡是属于他的那些贪、嗔、痴、慢、见、烦恼、恶行等结使,无论粗的或细的,都不存在。他正是由于这种安住于舍、念的圆满、不伤害,以及因远离错误行持而彻底止息,并通过止息瀑流等种种烦恼,所以是温和者。巴利
521. Yasmā pana vippaṭipattito suṭṭhu uparatabhāvena nānappakārakilesavūpasamena ca sorato hoti, tasmā tamatthaṃ dassento ‘‘sabbattha upekkhako’’tiādinā nayena dutiyapañhabyākaraṇamāha. Tassattho – yo sabbattha rūpādīsu ārammaṇesu ‘‘cakkhunā rūpaṃ disvā neva sumano hoti, na dummano’’ti evaṃ pavattāya chaḷaṅgupekkhāya upekkhako, vepullappattāya satiyā satimā, na so hiṃsati neva hiṃsati kañci tasathāvarādibhedaṃ sattaṃ sabbaloke sabbasmimpi loke, tiṇṇoghattā tiṇṇo, samitapāpattā samaṇo, āvilasaṅkappappahānā anāvilo. Yassa cime rāgadosamohamānadiṭṭhikilesaduccaritasaṅkhātā sattussadā keci oḷārikā vā sukhumā vā na santi, so imāya upekkhāvihāritāya sativepullatāya ahiṃsakatāya ca vippaṭipattito suṭṭhu uparatabhāvena iminā oghādinānappakārakilesavūpasamena ca soratoti.
522 522. 又因为已经修习诸根的人无所畏惧、不为所动、已被调御,所以为了说明这个道理,他以“谁的诸根……”这首偈颂回答了第三个问题。它的含义是:一个人通过行处修习,把无常等三相安立在眼等六根上,又通过熏习修习,让六根摄取念与正知的芳香,从而使他的诸根得到修习;而且,正如对内在通过行处修习那样,对外在的一切世界也是如此——在任何诸根有缺陷或缺陷之生起的地方,他都以离贪等方式修习诸根。这样,他洞悉、现证了此世和他世,也就是自身相续的蕴世界和他相续的蕴世界,欲求非迟滞之死,静待寿终之时,等候、期盼寿命灭尽之刻,对死亡无所畏惧。正如长老所说:巴利
522. Yasmā ca bhāvitindriyo nibbhayo nibbikāro danto hoti, tasmā tamatthaṃ dassento ‘‘yassindriyānī’’ti gāthāya tatiyapañhaṃ byākāsi. Tassattho – yassa cakkhādīni chaḷindriyāni gocarabhāvanāya aniccāditilakkhaṇaṃ āropetvā vāsanābhāvanāya satisampajaññagandhaṃ gāhāpetvā ca bhāvitāni, tāni ca kho yathā ajjhattaṃ gocarabhāvanāya, evaṃ pana bahiddhā ca sabbaloketi yattha yattha indriyānaṃ vekallatā vekallatāya vā sambhavo, tattha tattha nābhijjhādivasena bhāvitānīti evaṃ nibbijjha ñatvā paṭivijjhitvā imaṃ parañca lokaṃ sakasantatikkhandhalokaṃ parasantatikkhandhalokañca adandhamaraṇaṃ maritukāmo kālaṃ kaṅkhati, jīvitakkhayakālaṃ āgameti patimāneti, na bhāyati maraṇassa. Yathāha thero –
我对死亡没有恐惧,对生命也没有贪恋。
我不渴望死亡,也不渴望活着;
我等待着时机到来,就像佣人等着拿到工钱一样。巴利
‘‘Maraṇe me bhayaṃ natthi, nikanti natthi jīvite’’; (Theragā. 20); ‘‘Nābhikaṅkhāmi maraṇaṃ, nābhikaṅkhāmi jīvitaṃ; Kālañca paṭikaṅkhāmi, nibbisaṃ bhatako yathā’’ti. (theragā. 606);
他已修习,所以调伏了;像这样,他的诸根已修习,他就是调伏了的人。巴利
Bhāvito sa dantoti evaṃ bhāvitindriyo so dantoti.
523 523. 不过,被称为佛陀的人,具足智慧,并且已经从烦恼之眠中觉醒。因此,为了说明这个道理,他以“诸妄想”这首偈颂回答了第四个问题。其中,“诸妄想”指的是贪爱和邪见。因为它们以种种方式分别构想,所以被称为“妄想”。“通过审察”是指以无常等角度如实观照。“一切”是指全部。“轮回”是指……巴利
523. Yasmā pana buddho nāma buddhisampanno kilesaniddā vibuddho ca, tasmā tamatthaṃ dassento ‘‘kappānī’’ti gāthāya catutthapañhaṃ byākāsi. Tattha kappānīti taṇhādiṭṭhiyo. Tā hi tathā tathā vikappanato ‘‘kappānī’’ti vuccanti. Viceyyāti aniccādibhāvena sammasitvā. Kevalānīti sakalāni. Saṃsāranti yo cāyaṃ –
诸蕴的次第,以及界与处的次第;
无间断地流转着,这就被称为轮回。巴利
‘‘Khandhānañca paṭipāṭi, dhātuāyatanāna ca; Abbocchinnaṃ vattamānā, saṃsāroti pavuccatī’’ti. –
这样,以蕴等次第来说,就叫做轮回;而对那轮回要完全地审察辨别。到这里为止,他讲的是对三种轮转的观——也就是作为诸蕴根本的业与烦恼,以及诸蕴本身。死与结生这两者,就是指众生的死与再生;把这两者都审察辨别、如实了知,就是这个意思。以此,他讲了死生智。已离尘垢、没有瑕疵、清净:因为贪等尘垢已经远离,因为瑕疵不存在,也因为污秽已经离去,所以是已离尘垢、没有瑕疵、清净。已达生灭尽:就是已经到达涅槃。他们称他为佛陀:因为那位以这出世间观、以死生智为分别的觉智而具足,又因为如此离尘等而从烦恼之睡中觉醒,并依这条修行道路达到生灭尽,所以人们称他为佛陀。巴利
Evaṃ khandhādipaṭipāṭisaṅkhāto saṃsāro, taṃ saṃsārañca kevalaṃ viceyya. Ettāvatā khandhānaṃ mūlabhūtesu kammakilesesu khandhesu cāti evaṃ tīsupi vaṭṭesu vipassanaṃ āha. Dubhayaṃ cutūpapātanti sattānaṃ cutiṃ upapātanti imañca ubhayaṃ viceyya ñatvāti attho. Etena cutūpapātañāṇaṃ āha. Vigatarajamanaṅgaṇaṃ visuddhanti rāgādirajānaṃ vigamā aṅgaṇānaṃ abhāvā malānañca vigamā vigatarajamanaṅgaṇaṃ visuddhaṃ. Pattaṃ jātikhayanti nibbānaṃ pattaṃ. Tamāhu buddhanti taṃ imāya lokuttaravipassanāya cutūpapātañāṇabhedāya buddhiyā sampannattā imāya ca vigatarajāditāya kilesaniddā vibuddhattā tāya paṭipadāya jātikkhayaṃ pattaṃ buddhamāhu.
或者,“遍审察了诸劫”的意思是:依照“我在无数成劫坏劫中曾生在那里”这样的方式去审察。由此说了第一明。“死与结生这二者的轮回”的意思是:以“这些尊贵的众生啊”这样的方式,审察众生的死与结生以及这二者的轮回。由此说了第二明。剩下的部分说了第三明。因为依靠漏尽智,就有离尘等状态和证得涅槃。他们称这样的、具足三明差别之觉智的他为佛陀。巴利
Atha vā kappāni viceyya kevalānīti ‘‘anekepi saṃvaṭṭavivaṭṭakappe amutrāsi’’ntiādinā (itivu. 99; pārā. 12) nayena vicinitvāti attho. Etena paṭhamavijjamāha. Saṃsāraṃ dubhayaṃ cutūpapātanti sattānaṃ cutiṃ upapātanti imañca ubhayaṃ saṃsāraṃ ‘‘ime vata bhonto sattā’’tiādinā nayena vicinitvāti attho. Etena dutiyavijjamāha. Avasesena tatiyavijjamāha. Āsavakkhayañāṇena hi vigatarajāditā ca nibbānappatti ca hotīti. Tamāhu buddhanti evaṃ vijjattayabhedabuddhisampannaṃ taṃ buddhamāhūti.
525 这样用第一首偈颂回答了所问的问题之后,对于第二首偈颂所问的问题,因为证得梵的状态、最胜的状态的究竟婆罗门,已经舍断了一切恶,所以为了显示这个道理,用“已舍断”等偈颂先回答了第一个问题。它的意思是:以第四道舍断了一切恶而安住的人,就说为“安住”,也就是“站稳了”。正因为舍断了恶,所以是无垢;证得无垢的状态,就是梵的状态、最胜的状态;以止息了使定心散乱的烦恼垢染的最上果定,而善巧地安住于定;因为超越了轮回之因,所以超越了轮回;因为所作已办,所以是完全者;因为对渴爱和邪见无所依著,所以是无依;因为对世间法不动摇,所以称为“如者”。如此赞叹:他就是梵,就是婆罗门。巴利
525. Evaṃ paṭhamagāthāya vuttapañhe vissajjetvā dutiyagāthāya vuttapañhesupi yasmā brahmabhāvaṃ seṭṭhabhāvaṃ patto paramatthabrāhmaṇo bāhitasabbapāpo hoti, tasmā tamatthaṃ dassento ‘‘bāhitvā’’ti gāthāya paṭhamaṃ pañhaṃ byākāsi. Tassattho – yo catutthamaggena bāhitvā sabbapāpakāni ṭhitatto, ṭhito icceva vuttaṃ hoti. Bāhitapāpattā eva ca vimalo, vimalabhāvaṃ brahmabhāvaṃ seṭṭhabhāvaṃ patto, paṭippassaddhasamādhivikkhepakarakilesamalena aggaphalasamādhinā sādhusamāhito, saṃsārahetusamatikkamena saṃsāramaticca pariniṭṭhitakiccatāya kevalī, so taṇhādiṭṭhīhi anissitattā asito, lokadhammehi nibbikārattā ‘‘tādī’’ti ca pavuccati. Evaṃ thutiraho sa brahmā so brāhmaṇoti.
526 因为“已止息罪恶”所以叫沙门,“已洗净罪恶”所以叫沐浴者,又因为“不再造作罪过”所以叫龙象,所以为了说明这个道理,接着用三首偈颂回答了三个问题。其中“已寂止者”,是指通过圣道止息了烦恼而安住的人。“因为具有这样的性质,所以被称为沙门”,意思是具备这种样子的人就被称为沙门。到这里,问题就已经回答完了。剩下的部分是为了让萨毗亚对这位沙门生起极大的敬重而说的称赞话。因为那位已寂止的人,由于不再让福与罪产生结生,所以舍弃了福与罪;由于远离了尘垢,所以是离尘者;由于以无常等角度如实了知此世和他世,所以超越了生与死,成为“如者”。巴利
526. Yasmā pana samitapāpatāya samaṇo, nhātapāpatāya nhātako, āgūnaṃ akaraṇena ca nāgoti pavuccati, tasmā tamatthaṃ dassento tato aparāhi tīhi gāthāhi tayo pañhe byākāsi. Tattha samitāvīti ariyamaggena kilese sametvā ṭhito. Samaṇo pavuccate tathattāti tathārūpo samaṇo pavuccatīti. Ettāvatā pañho byākato hoti, sesaṃ tasmiṃ samaṇe sabhiyassa bahumānajananatthaṃ thutivacanaṃ. Yo hi samitāvī, so puññapāpānaṃ apaṭisandhikaraṇena pahāya puññapāpaṃ rajānaṃ vigamena virajo, aniccādivasena ñatvā imaṃ parañca lokaṃ jātimaraṇaṃ upātivatto tādi ca hoti.
527 在“已沐浴……沐浴者”这一句里,应该这样理解它的意思:对于被称为内、外的一切处世间,凡是以内、外为所缘而生起、可能生起的一切恶法,他都用道智彻底洗掉、洗净了。因为恶法已经被这样洗净,他就不再随着渴爱和邪见的分别,在天界和人间里流转受生,所以被称为沐浴者。巴利
527.Ninhāya…pe… nhātakoti ettha pana yo ajjhattabahiddhāsaṅkhāte sabbasmimpi āyatanaloke ajjhattabahiddhārammaṇavasena uppattirahāni sabbapāpakāni maggañāṇena ninhāya dhovitvā tāya ninhātapāpakatāya taṇhādiṭṭhikappehi kappiyesu devamanussesu kappaṃ na eti, taṃ nhātakamāhūti evamattho daṭṭhabbo.
528 在第四偈里,“于世间不作任何过恶”是说:一个人在世间,连一丁点算得上恶的过失都不造。因为他具有这样的品质,所以被称为龙象。到这里,问题就已经回答完了。剩下的部分,和前面一样,是称赞的话。确实,那位已经通过道断除了过失、不再造恶的人,已经放下并舍弃了欲轭等一切轭,以及属于十结的一切束缚;他对一切处的诸蕴等,不因任何执取而黏着;他以两种解脱而解脱,并且成为“如者”。巴利
528. Catutthagāthāyapi āguṃ na karoti kiñci loketi yo loke appamattakampi pāpasaṅkhātaṃ āguṃ na karoti, nāgo pavuccate tathattāti . Ettāvatā pañho byākato hoti, sesaṃ pubbanayeneva thutivacanaṃ. Yo hi maggena pahīnaāguttā āguṃ na karoti, so kāmayogādike sabbayoge dasasaññojanabhedāni ca sabbabandhanāni visajja jahitvā sabbattha khandhādīsu kenaci saṅgena na sajjati, dvīhi ca vimuttīhi vimutto, tādi ca hotīti.
530 这样,用第二首偈颂回答了所问的问题之后,对于第三首偈颂所问的问题也要说明:所谓“诸田”,指的就是诸处。正如经文所说:“这是眼,这是眼处……这是田,这是基地。”(《法集论》596-598)那些田,他已经战胜、征服、制伏,或者以无常等性质加以审察、仔细考察之后,完全地、毫无剩余地——尤其是作为执取基础的天田、人田和梵天田:所谓天田,是分为十二处的;人田也是如此;所谓梵天田,则是以眼处等十二处来划分的六处——这一切他都已战胜、已审察。由于一切田的根本束缚就是无明、有、渴爱等,所以他从一切田的根本束缚中解脱出来。这样,因为他战胜了或审察了这些田,所以名为“胜田者”。因此,他用“诸田”这首偈颂回答了第一个问题。在这里,有些人依据“业是田,识是种子,渴爱是润泽”(《增支部》3.77)的说法,主张诸业就是诸田。他们解释说:导向天界的业是天田,导向人界的业是人田,导向梵天界的业是梵天田。其余部分和前面所说的一样。巴利
530. Evaṃ dutiyagāthāya vuttapañhe vissajjetvā tatiyagāthāya vuttapañhesupi yasmā ‘‘khettānī’’ti āyatanāni vuccanti. Yathāha – ‘‘cakkhupetaṃ cakkhāyatanaṃpetaṃ…pe… khettampetaṃ vatthupeta’’nti (dha. sa. 596-598). Tāni vijeyya vijetvā abhibhavitvā, viceyya vā aniccādibhāvena vicinitvā upaparikkhitvā kevalāni anavasesāni, visesato pana saṅgahetubhūtaṃ dibbaṃ mānusakañca brahmakhettaṃ, yaṃ dibbaṃ dvādasāyatanabhedaṃ tathā mānusakañca, yañca brahmakhettaṃ chaḷāyatane cakkhāyatanādidvādasāyatanabhedaṃ, taṃ sabbampi vijeyya viceyya vā. Yato yadetaṃ sabbesaṃ khettānaṃ mūlabandhanaṃ avijjābhavataṇhādi, tasmā sabbakhettamūlabandhanā pamutto. Evametesaṃ khettānaṃ vijitattā vicinitattā vā khettajino nāma hoti, tasmā ‘‘khettānī’’ti imāya gāthāya paṭhamapañhaṃ byākāsi. Tattha keci ‘‘kammaṃ khettaṃ, viññāṇaṃ bījaṃ, taṇhā sneho’’ti (a. ni. 3.77) vacanato kammāni khettānīti vadanti. Dibbaṃ mānusakañca brahmakhettanti ettha ca devūpagaṃ kammaṃ dibbaṃ, manussūpagaṃ kammaṃ mānusakaṃ, brahmūpagaṃ kammaṃ brahmakhettanti vaṇṇayanti. Sesaṃ vuttanayameva.
531 531. 然而,因为诸业依其自身意义而类似于库藏,所以被称为“诸库”;而截断它们、彻底断除它们,就是善巧。因此,为了说明这个道理,他以“诸库”这首偈颂回答了第二个问题。它的意思是:以世间与出世间的观智,从所缘和作用两方面,依照无常等性质,全面审察了被称为善业与不善业的诸库。特别要审察的是作为执取基础的天库与人库——即八种欲界善思的差别,以及梵天库——即九种广大善思的差别。然后,通过这种道的修习,从无明、有、渴爱等所摄的一切库藏的根本束缚中解脱出来。像这样,因为截断这些库藏,所以称为“善巧者”;由于具备这样的状态,他也是“如者”。或者也可以这样理解:由于是众生与诸法的住处,类似于剑鞘与库藏,所以应当知道“诸库”是指三有和十二处。这里应当这样进行关联理解。巴利
531. Yasmā pana sakaṭṭhena kosasadisattā ‘‘kosānī’’ti kammāni vuccanti, tesañca lunanā samucchedanā kusalo hoti, tasmā tamatthaṃ dassento ‘‘kosānī’’ti gāthāya dutiyapañhaṃ byākāsi. Tassattho – lokiyalokuttaravipassanāya visayato kiccato ca aniccādibhāvena kusalākusalakammasaṅkhātāni kosāni viceyya kevalāni, visesato pana saṅgahetubhūtaṃ aṭṭhakāmāvacarakusalacetanābhedaṃ dibbaṃ mānusakañca navamahaggatakusalacetanābhedañca brahmakosaṃ viceyya. Tato imāya maggabhāvanāya avijjābhavataṇhādibhedā sabbakosānaṃ mūlabandhanā pamutto, evametesaṃ kosānaṃ lunanā ‘‘kusalo’’ti pavuccati, tathattā tādī ca hotīti. Atha vā sattānaṃ dhammānañca nivāsaṭṭhena asikosasadisattā ‘‘kosānī’’ti tayo bhavā dvādasāyatanāni ca veditabbāni. Evamettha yojanā kātabbā.
532 他并不只是靠“能辨别”这一点才被称为“智者”;更进一步说,他从此处出发,以审察的智慧亲近并安住于那些清净洁白的事物,也因此被称为“智者”。为了说明这个道理,他用“两者”这首偈颂回答了第三个问题。这首偈颂的意思是:向内和向外这样两者,都要依无常等性质加以全面审察。“洁白者”指的是诸处,因为它们本性清净,而且依照惯用法就这样称呼。对它们作了审察之后,通过这种修行,垢秽已被除尽,智慧清净,因为具备这样的特质,所以被称为智者。因为对那些洁白者,他是凭智慧从此处到达的;其余的话是对他的称赞。他确实已经超越了被称为恶与福的黑与白,并且成为那样的人,所以受到这样的称赞。巴利
532. Yasmā ca na kevalaṃ paṇḍatīti imināva ‘‘paṇḍito’’ti vuccati, apica kho pana paṇḍarāni ito upagato pavicayapaññāya allīnotipi ‘‘paṇḍito’’ti vuccati, tasmā tamatthaṃ dassento ‘‘dubhayānī’’ti gāthāya tatiyapañhaṃ byākāsi . Tassattho – ajjhattaṃ bahiddhā cāti evaṃ ubhayāni aniccādibhāvena viceyya. Paṇḍarānīti āyatanāni. Tāni hi pakatiparisuddhattā ruḷhiyā ca evaṃ vuccanti, tāni viceyya imāya paṭipattiyā niddhantamalattā suddhipañño paṇḍitoti pavuccati tathattā, yasmā tāni paṇḍarāni paññāya ito hoti, sesamassa thutivacanaṃ. So hi pāpapuññasaṅkhātaṃ kaṇhasukkaṃ upātivatto tādī ca hoti, tasmā evaṃ thuto.
533 因为经里说:“‘牟那’就是指智,也就是那种慧、了知……(中略)……正见,具备这种智的人就是牟尼。”所以,为了说明这个意思,他用“非真与真”这首偈颂回答了第四个问题。它的意思是:凡是这种分为不善与善的非真法和真法,无论内在还是外在,在这个整个世间里,用审察智了知了非真与真之后,因为已经了知了这些法,就超越了以贪等区分的七种染着、以渴爱和邪见区分的两种网,然后安住下来。他因为具备了那称为牟那的审察智,所以是牟尼。“应当被天和人供养”——这是对他的称赞语。因为这位诸漏已尽的牟尼,确实是天和人应当供养的对象,所以才受到这样的称赞。巴利
533. Yasmā pana ‘‘monaṃ vuccati ñāṇaṃ, yā paññā pajānanā…pe… sammādiṭṭhi, tena ñāṇena samannāgato munī’’ti vuttaṃ, tasmā tamatthaṃ dassento ‘‘asatañcā’’ti gāthāya catutthapañhaṃ byākāsi. Tassattho – yvāyaṃ akusalakusalappabhedo asatañca satañca dhammo, taṃ ajjhattaṃ bahiddhāti imasmiṃ sabbaloke pavicayañāṇena asatañca satañca ñatvā dhammaṃ tassa ñātattā eva rāgādibhedato sattavidhaṃ saṅgaṃ taṇhādiṭṭhibhedato duvidhaṃ jālañca aticca atikkamitvā ṭhito. So tena monasaṅkhātena pavicayañāṇena samannāgatattā muni. Devamanussehi pūjanīyoti idaṃ panassa thutivacanaṃ. So hi khīṇāsavamunittā devamanussānaṃ pūjāraho hoti, tasmā evaṃ thuto.
535 这样,解答了第三首偈颂所问的问题之后,对于第四首偈颂所问的问题也要说明:因为,凡是依四种道智灭尽烦恼而到达的人,从究竟意义上说,就叫做“极智者”。而任何人对于一切沙门、婆罗门所认为的诸明,正是通过这种道的修习,从作用上以无常等角度加以审察,在那里通过舍断欲贪,就超越了一切那样的明;并且对于以明为缘或以其他方式生起的诸受,在一切受中都离贪。因此,为了显示这个意义,没有说“已得此”,而是以“诸明”这首偈颂解答了第一个问题。又或者,因为任何人以审察慧审察了诸明之后,在那里通过舍断欲贪,超越一切明而安住,他就是已到达、已了知、已超越了那些所认为的诸明。凡是于诸受中离贪的人,他也是已到达、已超越了那些被称为受的明。“已到达诸明者”也可以称为“极智者”,所以为了显示那个意义,没有说“已得此”,而是用这首偈颂解答了第一个问题。巴利
535. Evaṃ tatiyagāthāya vuttapañhe vissajjetvā catutthagāthāya vuttapañhesupi yasmā yo catūhi maggañāṇavedehi kilesakkhayaṃ karonto gato, so paramatthato vedagū nāma hoti. Yo ca sabbasamaṇabrāhmaṇānaṃ satthasaññitāni vedāni, tāyeva maggabhāvanāya kiccato aniccādivasena viceyya. Tattha chandarāgappahānena tameva sabbaṃ vedamaticca yā vedapaccayā vā aññathā vā uppajjanti vedanā , tāsu sabbavedanāsu vītarāgo hoti, tasmā tamatthaṃ dassento ‘‘idaṃ pattina’’nti avatvā ‘‘vedānī’’ti gāthāya paṭhamapañhaṃ byākāsi. Yasmā vā yo pavicayapaññāya vedāni viceyya, tattha chandarāgappahānena sabbaṃ vedamaticca vattati, so satthasaññitāni vedāni gato ñāto atikkanto ca hoti. Yo vedanāsu vītarāgo, sopi vedanāsaññitāni vedāni gato atikkanto ca hoti. Vedāni gatotipi vedagū, tasmā tampi atthaṃ dassento ‘‘idaṃ pattina’’nti avatvā imāya gāthāya paṭhamapañhaṃ byākāsi.
536 536. 再者,在第二个问题里,“已随觉”就是指已经了知的人。他先随觉了内在自己相续中戏论的名色,也就是渴爱、慢、邪见这类戏论,以及以戏论为缘的名色,并以无常随观等方法随察、随知;不只是内在,在外也随觉了病根,以及他人相续中这名色之病的根源——无明、有、渴爱等;或者说,正是随觉了那戏论之后,通过那种修习,从一切病的根本束缚中解脱出来,也就是从无明、有、渴爱等病根中解脱出来。因此,为了显示这一点,他以“随觉已”这首偈颂解答了第二个问题。巴利
536. Yasmā pana dutiyapañhe ‘‘anuvidito’’ti anubuddho vuccati, so ca anuvicca papañcanāmarūpaṃ ajjhattaṃ attano santāne taṇhāmānadiṭṭhibhedaṃ papañcaṃ tappaccayā nāmarūpañca aniccānupassanādīhi anuvicca anuviditvā, na kevalañca ajjhattaṃ, bahiddhā ca rogamūlaṃ, parasantāne ca imassa nāmarūparogassa mūlaṃ avijjābhavataṇhādiṃ, tameva vā papañcaṃ anuvicca tāya bhāvanāya sabbesaṃ rogānaṃ mūlabandhanā, sabbasmā vā rogānaṃ mūlabandhanā, avijjābhavataṇhādibhedā, tasmā eva vā papañcā pamutto hoti, tasmā taṃ dassento ‘‘anuviccā’’ti gāthāya dutiyapañhaṃ byākāsi.
537 在“怎样才是精进者”这一句里,因为一个人如果以圣道远离了一切恶行,又由于这样远离,在未来不再受生,已经超越了地狱之苦,安住在精进中、以精进为归宿,那么这位漏已尽的圣者就配得上被称为“精进者”。所以,为了说明这个意思,就用“远离已”这首偈颂回答了第三个问题。“策励者、坚定者、如如者”这些,都是对他的称赞。因为他以道和禅那的策励而成为策励者,因为有能力摧毁烦恼怨敌而成为坚定者,因为没有变异而成为如如者,所以才受到这样的称赞。剩下的部分,应当连贯起来解说。巴利
537. ‘‘Kathañca vīriyavā’’ti ettha pana yasmā yo ariyamaggena sabbapāpakehi virato, tathā viratattā ca āyatiṃ apaṭisandhitāya nirayadukkhaṃ aticca ṭhito vīriyavāso vīriyaniketo, so khīṇāsavo ‘‘vīriyavā’’ti vattabbataṃ arahati, tasmā tamatthaṃ dassento ‘‘virato’’ti gāthāya tatiyapañhaṃ byākāsi. Padhānavā dhīro tādīti imāni panassa thutivacanāni. So hi padhānavā maggajhānapadhānena, dhīro kilesārividdhaṃsanasamatthatāya, tādī nibbikāratāya, tasmā evaṃ thuto. Sesaṃ yojetvā vattabbaṃ.
538 538. 关于“良马到底是怎样的”这个问题:在世间,人们把已经断除一切歪曲过失、能分辨该做与不该做的马或象称为“良马”,但那些过失在它们身上并没有完全断尽;而漏尽者则确实已经断尽了这些过失,所以从究竟意义上说,他才真正配得上“良马”这个称呼。为了说明这个道理,论主用“凡……”这首偈颂回答了第四个问题。它的意思是:所谓内外的结缚,就是那些在内、在外被称为结缚的束缚,他已经用智慧之刀斩断、劈开、摧毁了。所谓“染着之根”,是指在各种对象上成为染着、黏附、无法超越的根本;或者说,凡是他在内、在外作为染着之根的贪等结缚,都已经斩断。他从一切染着的根本中解脱出来,或者说从一切作为染着之根的结缚中解脱出来,所以被称为“良马”;又因为具有这样的品质,所以也是“如如者”。巴利
538. ‘‘Ājāniyo kinti nāma hotī’’ti ettha pana yasmā pahīnasabbavaṅkadoso kāraṇākāraṇaññū asso vā hatthī vā ‘‘ājāniyo hotī’’ti loke vuccati, na ca tassa sabbaso te dosā pahīnā eva, khīṇāsavassa pana te pahīnā, tasmā so ‘‘ājāniyo’’ti paramatthato vattabbataṃ arahatīti dassento ‘‘yassā’’ti gāthāya catutthapañhaṃ byākāsi. Tassattho – ajjhattaṃ bahiddhā cāti evaṃ ajjhattabahiddhāsaññojanasaṅkhātāni yassa assu lunāni bandhanāni paññāsatthena chinnāni padālitāni. Saṅgamūlanti yāni tesu tesu vatthūsu saṅgassa sajjanāya anatikkamanāya mūlaṃ honti, atha vā yassa assu lunāni rāgādīni bandhanāni yāni ajjhattaṃ bahiddhā ca saṅgamūlāni honti, so sabbasmā saṅgānaṃ mūlabhūtā sabbasaṅgānaṃ vā mūlabhūtā bandhanā pamutto ‘‘ājāniyo’’ti vuccati, tathattā tādi ca hotīti.
540 这样用第四首偈颂回答了所问的问题之后,对于第五首偈颂所问的问题:如果有人仅仅凭着喜好和背诵,就推敲字句而称赞某人是“通经者”,那他只是世俗意义上的通经者。而圣洁者因为多闻、因为远离恶法,才是真正意义上的通经者。为了说明这个道理,没有说“已得此”,而是用“闻已”这首偈颂来回答第一个问题。它的意思是:在这个世间,有人以闻所成慧的作用而“闻已”,或者以应当做的事的作用而“闻已”,对一切适合用来观照的法,以无常等方式彻底了知之后,对于世间存在的任何有罪或无罪的法,他通过这种修行方法战胜了烦恼以及烦恼的依处,获得了“征服者”的称号。人们说,这位征服者“闻已”——即彻底了知一切法之后,对于世间任何有罪或无罪的法,他是征服者,因为闻已——他就是“通经者”。再者,一个没有疑惑的人,已经从烦恼的束缚中解脱出来,对于一切法——蕴、处等——在一切处都没有贪等炽热的烦恼,所以是无恼者。因此,人们也称这位无疑惑者、解脱者、一切处无恼者为“通经者”,因为他远离了恶法。巴利
540. Evaṃ catutthagāthāya vuttapañhe vissajjetvā pañcamagāthāya vuttapañhesupi yasmā yaṃ chandajjhenamattena akkharacintakā sottiyaṃ vaṇṇayanti, vohāramattasottiyo so. Ariyo pana bāhusaccena nissutapāpatāya ca paramatthasottiyo hoti, tasmā tamatthaṃ dassento ‘‘idaṃ pattina’’nti avatvā ‘‘sutvā’’ti gāthāya paṭhamapañhaṃ byākāsi. Tassattho – yo imasmiṃ loke sutamayapaññākiccavasena sutvā kātabbakiccavasena vā sutvā vipassanūpagaṃ sabbadhammaṃ aniccādivasena abhiññāya sāvajjānavajjaṃ yadatthi kiñci, imāya paṭipadāya kilese kilesaṭṭhāniye ca dhamme abhibhavitvā abhibhūti saṅkhaṃ gato, taṃ sutvā sabbadhammaṃ abhiññāya loke sāvajjānavajjaṃ yadatthi kiñci, abhibhuṃ sutavattā sottiyoti āhu. Yasmā ca yo akathaṃkathī kilesabandhanehi vimutto, rāgādīhi īghehi anīgho ca hoti sabbadhi sabbesu dhammesu khandhāyatanādīsu, tasmā taṃ akathaṃkathiṃ vimuttaṃ anīghaṃ sabbadhi nissutapāpakattāpi ‘‘sottiyo’’ti āhūti.
541 因为想要利益他人的人,由于是应被亲近者而成为圣者,所以“圣者”的意思就是应当被亲近的人。因此,为了显示让他成为应当被亲近者的那些功德,用“已断”这一偈回答了第二个问题。它的意思是:用智慧之刀断除了四种漏和两种执著,这位明智者、有智慧的人、通达者、具备四道智的人,不再以再有生命的方式进入母胎,不会投生到任何一种胎中;他也排除了欲想等三种想,以及称为五欲的泥沼,不再落入渴爱、邪见等任何一种虚妄分别。像这样具备断漏等功德的人,人们称他为圣者。又或者,因为远离了种种恶法,所以是圣者;因为不在邪行中活动,所以是圣者。为了显示这个意思,也用这一偈回答了第二个问题。应当知道,漏等恶法被称为邪行,而这些已经被他断除、排除,他也不会被它们动摇。因此这些法远离他,他也不在其中活动。依“那些恶法远离他”以及“他不在邪行中活动”这两个意思,人们称他为圣者——这里的关联应当这样理解。至于“明智者他不入母胎”这一句,在这个义解中只是赞叹之语。巴利
541. Yasmā pana hitakāmena janena araṇīyato ariyo hoti, abhigamanīyatoti attho. Tasmā yehi guṇehi so araṇīyo hoti, te dassentā ‘‘chetvā’’ti gāthāya dutiyapañhaṃ byākāsi. Tassattho – cattāri āsavāni dve ca ālayāni paññāsatthena chetvā vidvā viññū vibhāvī catumaggañāṇī so punabbhavavasena na upetigabbhaseyyaṃ, kañci yoniṃ na upagacchati, kāmādibhedañca saññaṃ tividhaṃ. Kāmaguṇasaṅkhātañca paṅkaṃ panujja panuditvā taṇhādiṭṭhikappānaṃ aññatarampi kappaṃ na eti, evaṃ āsavacchedādiguṇasamannāgataṃ tamāhu ariyoti. Yasmā vā pāpakehi ārakattā ariyo hoti anaye ca anirīyanā, tasmā tampi atthaṃ dassento imāya gāthāya dutiyapañhaṃ byākāsi. Āsavādayo hi pāpakā dhammā anayasammatā, te cānena chinnā panunnā, na ca tehi kampati, iccassa te ārakā honti, na ca tesu irīyati tasmā ārakāssa honti pāpakā dhammāti imināpatthena. Anaye na irīyatīti imināpatthena tamāhu ariyoti ca evampettha yojanā veditabbā. ‘‘Vidvā so na upeti gabbhaseyya’’nti idaṃ pana imasmiṃ atthavikappe thutivacanameva hoti.
542 542. 关于“怎样才是行道者”这个问题,因为只有通过行道证得了应当证得之果的人,才配称为“行道者”,所以为了说明这一点,就用“凡在此”这一偈颂来回答第三个问题。其中,“凡在此”是指在佛陀的教法之中。“于诸行道”是指戒等法,也就是《雪山夜叉经》等经典中所说的十五种法。这里的格位是表示“在原因/缘由义上”的意思。“证得所应证得者”就是已经证得了应当证得的阿拉汉果。这句话的意思是:以行道为特征、以行道为因、以行道为缘,证得了应当证得的阿拉汉果的人。“行道者”就是说,他通过这种行道证得了所应证得之果,所以是行道者。到这里,问题已经回答完毕,剩下的部分是对他的赞叹。因为凡是依行道证得所应证得之果的人,他就是善巧者、聪敏者,而且任何时候都能了知涅槃之法;由于他的心始终倾向于涅槃,所以对一切处的蕴等诸法都不执著;他以两种解脱而心得解脱,心中没有丝毫嗔恚。巴利
542. ‘‘Kathaṃ caraṇavā’’ti ettha pana yasmā caraṇehi pattabbaṃ patto ‘‘caraṇavā’’ti vattabbataṃ arahati, tasmā taṃ dassento ‘‘yo idhā’’ti gāthāya tatiyapañhaṃ byākāsi. Tattha yo idhāti yo imasmiṃ sāsane. Caraṇesūti sīlādīsu hemavatasutte (su. ni. 153 ādayo) vuttapannarasadhammesu. Nimittatthe bhummavacanaṃ. Pattipattoti pattabbaṃ patto. Yo caraṇanimittaṃ caraṇahetu caraṇapaccayā pattabbaṃ arahattaṃ pattoti vuttaṃ hoti. Caraṇavā soti so imāya caraṇehi pattabbapattiyā caraṇavā hotīti. Ettāvatā pañho byākato hoti, sesamassa thutivacanaṃ. Yo hi caraṇehi pattipatto, so kusalo ca hoti cheko, sabbadā ca ājānāti nibbānadhammaṃ, niccaṃ nibbānaninnacittatāya sabbattha ca khandhādīsu na sajjati. Dvīhi ca vimuttīhi vimuttacitto hoti, paṭighā yassa na santīti.
543 因为通过远离业等法而成为游方者,所以为了说明这个道理,他用“苦报”这首偈颂回答了第四个问题。其中,异熟本身就是“报”,而苦就是它的报,所以叫“苦报”。由于能产生轮回中的苦,一切属于三界的业都这样称呼。“上”指过去,“下”指未来,“横向或中间”指现在。因为现在既不是上也不是下,而是横向的,又处在过去和未来两者之间,所以说为“中间”。“远离游方”是指驱逐出去、排除掉。“遍知行”是指以智慧判定之后而行。以上是先逐词解释。下面则是义理上的贯通:凡是属于三世、能生苦的业,无论有多少,他都以圣道使渴爱和无明的滋润干枯,让它不再能引生结生,以此而“远离游方”;正因为这样远离了,他再以遍知那业的方式而行,所以是“遍知行”。不仅对业,对幻、慢、贪、瞋这些法,他也以断遍知而成为“遍知行”;他已将名色推到尽头,意思是,他已令名色到达尽头、将其彻底远离。由于对业等的这种远离,人们称他为“游方者”。“证得所应证得者”这一句,则是对他的称赞。巴利
543. Yasmā pana kammādīnaṃ paribbājanena paribbājako nāma hoti, tasmā tamatthaṃ dassento ‘‘dukkhavepakka’’nti gāthāya catutthapañhaṃ byākāsi. Tattha vipāko eva vepakkaṃ, dukkhaṃ vepakkamassāti dukkhavepakkaṃ. Pavattidukkhajananato sabbampi tedhātukakammaṃ vuccati. Uddhanti atītaṃ. Adhoti anāgataṃ. Tiriyaṃ vāpi majjheti paccuppannaṃ. Tañhi na uddhaṃ na adho, tiriyaṃ ubhinnañca antarā, tena ‘‘majjhe’’ti vuttaṃ. Paribbājayitvāti nikkhāmetvā niddhametvā . Pariññacārīti paññāya paricchinditvā caranto. Ayaṃ tāva apubbapadavaṇṇanā. Ayaṃ pana adhippāyayojanā – yo tiyaddhapariyāpannampi dukkhajanakaṃ yadatthi kiñci kammaṃ, taṃ sabbampi ariyamaggena taṇhāvijjāsinehe sosento apaṭisandhijanakabhāvakaraṇena paribbājayitvā tathā paribbājitattā eva ca taṃ kammaṃ pariññāya caraṇato pariññacārī. Na kevalañca kammameva, māyaṃ mānamathopi lobhakodhaṃ imepi dhamme pahānapariññāya pariññacārī, pariyantamakāsi nāmarūpaṃ, nāmarūpassa ca pariyantamakāsi paribbājesi iccevattho. Imesaṃ kammādīnaṃ paribbājanena taṃ paribbājakamāhu. Pattipattanti idaṃ panassa thutivacanaṃ.
544 萨毗耶因为世尊解答了他的问题而心满意足。在“并且那三种”等赞叹偈颂里,“着处”就是进入处、门户,指的是邪见。这些邪见和萨迦耶见一起,再算上《梵网经》里说的六十二种恶见,合起来就成了六十三种。而且这些邪见是外道沙门们的教说,是作为他们的“教说”而被设立的——这是从可以被指称的角度说的,不是从生起的角度说的。如果从生起的角度来说,所谓“女人、男人”这种世间共许的名字,以及愚人因为邪思维、传闻等而生起“应该以这样的自我而存在”的颠倒想,这两种是所依;那些邪见就是依这两种而生起的,并不是各自亲证得来的。这些,世尊已经调伏、断除了,他到达了暴流的彼岸,超越了暴流的黑暗。也有读作“Oghantamagā”的,意思是到达了暴流的尽头。所以偈颂里说:“并且那三种……他已到达彼岸。”巴利
544. Evaṃ pañhabyākaraṇena tuṭṭhassa pana sabhiyassa ‘‘yāni ca tīṇī’’tiādīsu abhitthavanagāthāsu osaraṇānīti ogahaṇāni titthāni, diṭṭhiyoti attho. Tāni yasmā sakkāyadiṭṭhiyā saha brahmajāle vuttadvāsaṭṭhidiṭṭhigatāni gahetvā tesaṭṭhi honti, yasmā ca tāni aññatitthiyasamaṇānaṃ pavādabhūtāni satthāni sitāni upadisitabbavasena, na uppattivasena. Uppattivasena pana yadetaṃ ‘‘itthī puriso’’ti saññakkharaṃ vohāranāmaṃ, yā cāyaṃ micchāparivitakkānussavādivasena ‘‘evarūpena attanā bhavitabba’’nti bālānaṃ viparītasaññā uppajjati, tadubhayanissitāni tesaṃ vasena uppajjanti, na attapaccakkhāni. Tāni ca bhagavā vineyya vinayitvā oghatamagā oghatamaṃ oghandhakāraṃ agā atikkanto. ‘‘Oghantamagā’’tipi pāṭho, oghānaṃ antaṃ agā, tasmā āha ‘‘yāni ca tīṇi…pe… tamagā’’ti.
545 从此以后,为了说明轮回之苦的尽头和彼岸就是涅槃——因为到达那里就没有苦,而且它正好与苦相反——所以针对这一点说:“你是苦的尽头者、彼岸的到达者。”另一种解释是:世尊因为已经到达涅槃,所以是彼岸的到达者;这样称呼他时说:“你是彼岸的到达者、苦的尽头者。”这里的意思就是这样关联的。“正确地”并且“自己”觉悟,就是“正自觉者”。“认为是那个”,就是认为正是那一个,不是别的,这是带着极大的恭敬说的。“有光明”,是说通过破除他人的黑暗而具足光明。“有慧”,是说具足了能证得不依他人之所知智的慧。“大智慧”,就是智慧没有边际,这里指的是全知智。“作苦的尽头者”,是呼唤他时说的。“你度脱了我”,是说你把我从疑惑中度脱了出来。巴利
545. Tato paraṃ vaṭṭadukkhassa antaṃ pārañca nibbānaṃ tappattiyā dukkhābhāvato tappaṭipakkhato ca taṃ sandhāyāha, ‘‘antagūsi pāragū dukkhassā’’ti. Atha vā pāragū bhagavā nibbānaṃ gatattā, taṃ ālapanto āha, ‘‘pāragū antagūsi dukkhassā’’ti ayamettha sambandho. Sammā ca buddho sāmañca buddhoti sammāsambuddho. Taṃ maññeti tameva maññāmi, na aññanti accādarena bhaṇati. Jutimāti paresampi andhakāravidhamanena jutisampanno. Mutimāti aparappaccayañeyyañāṇasamatthāya mutiyā paññāya sampanno. Pahūtapaññoti anantapañño. Idha sabbaññutaññāṇamadhippetaṃ. Dukkhassantakarāti āmantento āha. Atāresi manti kaṅkhāto maṃ tāresi.
546-9 在“Yaṃ me”等偈颂里,他是在说礼敬的话。其中“所疑惑的”,是指依那二十个问题所说的道理,因为他曾对此生起疑惑。“于牟尼道”:就是于智慧之道。“已除榛荆”:就是已去除榛荆,意思是彻底断除。“龙象啊,于龙象”:前一个是呼唤语,后一个与“说话时随喜”相关联。“说法”是省略的文句。“一切天”:指住在虚空的和住在地上的天众。至于“那罗陀山”,据说那也是两位有智慧的天众,他们也随喜。他以全部的净信之心,说出这些礼敬的话。巴利
546-9.Yaṃ metiādigāthāya namakkārakaraṇaṃ bhaṇati. Tattha kaṅkhittanti vīsatipañhanissitaṃ atthaṃ sandhāyāha. So hi tena kaṅkhito ahosi. Monapathesūti ñāṇapathesu. Vinaḷīkatāti vigatanaḷā katā, ucchinnāti vuttaṃ hoti. Nāga nāgassāti ekaṃ āmantanavacanaṃ, ekassa ‘‘bhāsato anumodantī’’ti iminā sambandho. ‘‘Dhammadesana’’nti pāṭhaseso. Sabbe devāti ākāsaṭṭhā ca bhūmaṭṭhā ca. Nāradapabbatāti tepi kira dve devagaṇā paññavanto, tepi anumodantīti sabbaṃ pasādena ca namakkārakaraṇaṃ bhaṇati .
550-53 他听完那值得随喜的授记成就后,合掌说“礼敬您”,然后说道。“人中最胜者”,是指在人类中出身最殊胜的人。“对等者”,是指你堪为匹敌之人:凭通达四谛而成为佛陀,凭善教诫以及像商队首领一样引导众人而成为导师,凭战胜四魔而成为魔的征服者,牟尼即是佛陀牟尼。“依着”,指蕴、烦恼、欲乐、诸行这四种。“端正”,指形貌美好。“于福德,你不染着”,是说对于世间福德你全无染着,因为你已不造作它们;或者即便往昔造作过,未来也不会受用果报;又或者不以它们为缘而生起爱、见之染着。他一边这样说,一边握住世尊的脚踝,行五体投地之礼:“礼敬导师。”巴利
550-53. Anumodanārahaṃ byākaraṇasampadaṃ sutvā ‘‘namo te’’ti añjaliṃ paggahetvā āha. Purisājaññāti purisesu jātisampannaṃ. Paṭipuggaloti paṭibhāgo puggalo tuvaṃ buddho catusaccapaṭivedhena, satthā anusāsaniyā satthavāhatāya ca, mārābhibhū catumārābhibhavena, muni buddhamuni. Upadhīti khandhakilesakāmaguṇābhisaṅkhārabhedā cattāro. Vaggūti abhirūpaṃ. Puññe cāti lokiye na limpasi tesaṃ akaraṇena, pubbe katānampi vā āyatiṃ phalūpabhogābhāvena. Taṃnimittena vā taṇhādiṭṭhilepena. Vandati satthunoti evaṃ bhaṇanto gopphakesu pariggahetvā pañcapatiṭṭhitaṃ vandi.
原本是外道,就是本来就是外道。“渴望”,就是想要。“心已确立”,就是心已欢喜。还有,“在这里,人的差别已被了知”,意思是:我在这里已经了解了外道们在别住期间各人的差别,并不是所有人都必须别住。那么,谁不需要别住呢?事火苦行者、编发苦行者、释迦族出身的人、舍弃性别标志而来的人。即使没有舍弃性别标志而来,只要具备获得道果的因缘,也一样,比如游方者萨毗耶。所以世尊为了允许他出家,说:“萨毗耶,你不需要为了履行外道规矩而别住,你是为了真正的利益而来,具备获得道果的因缘——这一点我已经知道了。”接着又说:“而且在这里,人的差别已被了知。”萨毗耶为了表达自己的敬意,说:“尊者,如果……”所有这些内容以及其他类似的部分,因为意义浅显,而且前面已经讲过类似的方式,这里就不再解释了,应当依照前面的解释来理解。巴利
Aññatitthiyapubboti aññatitthiyo eva. Ākaṅkhatīti icchati. Āraddhacittāti abhirādhitacittā. Apica mettha puggalavemattatā viditāti apica mayā ettha aññatitthiyānaṃ parivāse puggalanānattaṃ viditaṃ, na sabbeneva parivasitabbanti. Kena pana na parivasitabbaṃ? Aggiyehi jaṭilehi, sākiyena jātiyā, liṅgaṃ vijahitvā āgatena. Avijahitvā āgatopi ca yo maggaphalapaṭilābhāya hetusampanno hoti, tādisova sabhiyo paribbājako. Tasmā bhagavā ‘‘tava pana, sabhiya, titthiyavattapūraṇatthāya parivāsakāraṇaṃ natthi, atthatthiko tvaṃ ‘maggaphalapaṭilābhāya hetusampanno’ti viditametaṃ mayā’’ti tassa pabbajjaṃ anujānanto āha – ‘‘apica mettha puggalavemattatā viditā’’ti. Sabhiyo pana attano ādaraṃ dassento āha ‘‘sace bhante’’ti. Taṃ sabbaṃ aññañca tathārūpaṃ uttānatthattā pubbe vuttanayattā ca idha na vaṇṇitaṃ, yato pubbe vaṇṇitānusārena veditabbanti.
7. 《谢拉经》的注释。巴利
7. Selasuttavaṇṇanā
如是我闻,即《沙罗经》。它的起因是什么?就是前面在序言部分已经讲过的那个起因。在解释经义的次第上,这部经也和前面类似的经一样,应当按照前面讲过的方式来理解。至于其中前面没有出现过的内容,我们会跳过那些容易懂的词句,直接加以解释。“在鸯伽人中”指的是:鸯伽本身就是那个地区,而因为恒河以北的那些水域离鸯伽不远,所以也叫“北方水”。“是哪条河的北部水域呢?”是大摩醯河。巴利
Evaṃme sutanti selasuttaṃ. Kā uppatti? Ayameva yāssa nidāne vuttā. Atthavaṇṇanākkamepi cassa pubbasadisaṃ pubbe vuttanayeneva veditabbaṃ. Yaṃ pana apubbaṃ, taṃ uttānatthāni padāni pariharantā vaṇṇayissāma. Aṅguttarāpesūti aṅgā eva so janapado, gaṅgāya pana yā uttarena āpo, tāsaṃ avidūrattā ‘‘uttarāpo’’tipi vuccati. Kataragaṅgāya uttarena yā āpoti? Mahāmahīgaṅgāya.
这里先从头开始,说明那条河是怎么形成的:据说这个赡部洲方圆一万由旬。其中,方圆四千由旬的地方被水覆盖,就叫作“海”。方圆三千由旬的地方,有人居住。方圆三千由旬的地方是雪山,高五百由旬,周围有八万四千座山峰点缀,四周有五百条河奔流交错,景色斑斓。在这里,长、宽、深各五十由旬,周长一百五十由旬的阿耨达等七大湖,正如《施食清净经注释》中所说,就坐落在其中。巴利
Tatrāyaṃ tassā nadiyā āvibhāvatthaṃ ādito pabhuti vaṇṇanā – ayaṃ kira jambudīpo dasasahassayojanaparimāṇo. Tattha catusahassayojanaparimāṇo padeso udakena ajjhotthaṭo ‘‘samuddo’’ti saṅkhaṃ gato. Tisahassayojanapamāṇe manussā vasanti. Tisahassayojanapamāṇe himavā patiṭṭhito ubbedhena pañcayojanasatiko caturāsītisahassakūṭehi paṭimaṇḍito samantato sandamānapañcasatanadīvicitto. Yattha āyāmavitthārena gambhīratāya ca paññāsapaññāsayojanā diyaḍḍhayojanasataparimaṇḍalā pūraḷāsasuttavaṇṇanāyaṃ vuttā anotattādayo satta mahāsarā patiṭṭhitā.
阿耨达池被善见峰、杂色峰、黑峰、香醉峰和凯拉斯峰这五座山围绕。其中,善见峰是黄金所成,高两百由旬,向内弯曲,形状像乌鸦嘴,正好挡住并遮住这个池子。杂色峰是一切宝石所成,黑峰是锑石所成,香醉峰是岩石所成,内部呈绿豆色,覆盖着各种药草,到了黑月布萨日,就像烧红的炭火一样燃烧着立在那里。凯拉斯峰是白银所成。这些山峰全都和善见峰一样高、一样形状,也同样挡住并遮住这个池子。它们全都依靠天众和龙众的神力降下雨来,河流也在其中流淌。那些水全都流入阿耨达池。太阳和月亮向南或向北运行时,从山与山之间照耀这个池子;径直经过时,就不照耀。因此,这个池子就得名为“阿耨达”。巴利
Tesu anotatto sudassanakūṭaṃ, citrakūṭaṃ, kāḷakūṭaṃ, gandhamādanakūṭaṃ, kelāsakūṭanti imehi pañcahi pabbatehi parikkhitto. Tattha sudassanakūṭaṃ suvaṇṇamayaṃ dviyojanasatubbedhaṃ antovaṅkaṃ kākamukhasaṇṭhānaṃ tameva saraṃ paṭicchādetvā ṭhitaṃ, citrakūṭaṃ sabbaratanamayaṃ, kāḷakūṭaṃ añjanamayaṃ, gandhamādanakūṭaṃ sānumayaṃ abbhantare muggavaṇṇaṃ nānappakāraosadhasañchannaṃ kāḷapakkhuposathadivase ādittamiva aṅgāraṃ jalantaṃ tiṭṭhati, kelāsakūṭaṃ rajatamayaṃ. Sabbāni sudassanena samānubbedhasaṇṭhānāni tameva saraṃ paṭicchādetvā ṭhitāni. Sabbāni devānubhāvena nāgānubhāvena ca vassanti, nadiyo ca tesu sandanti. Taṃ sabbampi udakaṃ anotattameva pavisati. Candimasūriyā dakkhiṇena vā uttarena vā gacchantā pabbatantarena taṃ obhāsenti, ujuṃ gacchantā na obhāsenti. Tenevassa ‘‘anotatta’’nti saṅkhā udapādi.
在那里,那些令人心生欢喜的石板地面没有鱼也没有鳖,水像水晶一样清澈纯净,一个个沐浴的渡口都整备齐全。诸佛、独觉佛、诸漏已尽的圣者之流的众仙人都在这些地方沐浴;天众、夜叉等则在这园林中嬉戏游玩。巴利
Tattha manoharasilātalāni nimmacchakacchapāni phalikasadisanimmalūdakāni nahānatitthāni suppaṭiyattāni honti, yesu buddhapaccekabuddhakhīṇāsavā isigaṇā ca nhāyanti, devayakkhādayo ca uyyānakīḷikaṃ kīḷanti.
这座池子的四面各有一个口:狮口、象口、马口、牛口,一共四个口,四条河从这些口流出来。从狮口流出的那条河,两岸狮子特别多;从象口等流出的河,两岸则是象、马、牛特别多。从东面流出的那条河,绕阿耨达池右绕三圈之后,不经过其余三条河,就沿着东雪山中人迹不到的非人之路,直接流入大海。从西面和北面流出的河也一样,右绕三圈后,分别沿着西雪山和北雪山中人迹不到的非人之路,流入大海。至于从南面流出的那条河,绕池右绕三圈后,径直向南在石板地面上流了六十由旬,撞上山后冲出来,形成周长三伽浮他的水柱,再从空中飞流六十由旬,落在一块叫“三闩”的岩石上,岩石被水流的冲力击碎。那里就形成了一个周长五十由旬的池塘,名叫“三闩池”。池水冲破池岸,穿入岩石,又流了六十由旬。然后冲破厚实的大地,以地下通道的方式流了六十由旬,撞上一座叫“毗阇”的横向山脉,分成像手掌上五根手指一样的五股水流。这条河绕阿耨达池右绕三圈后所经过的地方,叫做“旋恒河”;在石板地面上径直流过六十由旬的那一段,叫做“黑恒河”;在空中流过六十由旬的那一段,叫做“空恒河”;在三闩岩石处五十由旬的地方,叫做“三闩池”;冲破池岸穿入岩石后流过六十由旬的那一段,叫做“厚恒河”;冲破大地以地下通道流过六十由旬的那一段,叫做“隧道恒河”;撞上叫“毗阇”的横向山脉后分成五股水流的那一段,就叫做恒河、耶牟那河、阿夷罗跋提河、萨罗浮河、摩希河这五条。这样,这五条大河都从雪山发源。其中这第五条叫摩希河的,在这里指的就是“大摩希河”。在这条恒河以北的那些水域,因为离它们不远,所以那个地区应当知道叫做“央掘多罗波”。就在那个地区,央掘多罗波。巴利
Catūsu cassa passesu sīhamukhaṃ, hatthimukhaṃ, assamukhaṃ, usabhamukhanti cattāri mukhāni honti, yehi catasso nadiyo sandanti. Sīhamukhena nikkhantanadītīre sīhā bahutarā honti, hatthimukhādīhi hatthiassausabhā. Puratthimadisato nikkhantanadī anotattaṃ tikkhattuṃ padakkhiṇaṃ katvā itarā tisso nadiyo anupagamma pācīnahimavanteneva amanussapathaṃ gantvā mahāsamuddaṃ pavisati. Pacchimadisato ca uttaradisato ca nikkhantanadiyopi tatheva padakkhiṇaṃ katvā pacchimahimavanteneva uttarahimavanteneva ca amanussapathaṃ gantvā mahāsamuddaṃ pavisanti. Dakkhiṇadisato nikkhantanadī pana taṃ tikkhattuṃ padakkhiṇaṃ katvā dakkhiṇena ujukaṃ pāsāṇapiṭṭheneva saṭṭhiyojanāni gantvā pabbataṃ paharitvā vuṭṭhāya pariṇāhena tigāvutapamāṇā udakadhārā hutvā ākāsena saṭṭhi yojanāni gantvā tiyaggaḷe nāma pāsāṇe patitā, pāsāṇo udakadhārāvegena bhinno. Tatra paññāsayojanapamāṇā tiyaggaḷā nāma pokkharaṇī jātā. Pokkharaṇiyā kūlaṃ bhinditvā pāsāṇaṃ pavisiya saṭṭhi yojanāni gatā. Tato ghanapathaviṃ bhinditvā umaṅgena saṭṭhi yojanāni gantvā viñjhaṃ nāma tiracchānapabbataṃ paharitvā hatthatale pañcaṅgulisadisā pañcadhārā hutvā pavattati. Sā tikkhattuṃ anotattaṃ padakkhiṇaṃ katvā gataṭṭhāne ‘‘āvaṭṭagaṅgā’’ti vuccati . Ujukaṃ pāsāṇapiṭṭhena saṭṭhi yojanāni gataṭṭhāne ‘‘kaṇhagaṅgā’’ti vuccati. Ākāsena saṭṭhi yojanāni gataṭṭhāne ‘‘ākāsagaṅgā’’ti vuccati. Tiyaggaḷapāsāṇe paññāsayojanokāse ‘‘tiyaggaḷapokkharaṇī’’ti vuccati. Kūlaṃ bhinditvā pāsāṇaṃ pavisiya saṭṭhi yojanāni gataṭṭhāne ‘‘bahalagaṅgā’’ti vuccati. Pathaviṃ bhinditvā umaṅgena saṭṭhi yojanāni gataṭṭhāne ‘‘umaṅgagaṅgā’’ti vuccati. Viñjhaṃ nāma tiracchānapabbataṃ paharitvā pañcadhārā hutvā pavattaṭṭhāne ‘‘gaṅgā, yamunā, aciravatī, sarabhū, mahī’’ti pañcadhā vuccati. Evametā pañca mahāgaṅgā himavatā sambhavanti. Tāsu yā ayaṃ pañcamī mahī nāma, sā idha ‘‘mahāmahīgaṅgā’’ti adhippetā. Tassā gaṅgāya uttarena yā āpo, tāsaṃ avidūrattā so janapado ‘‘aṅguttarāpo’’ti veditabbo. Tasmiṃ janapade aṅguttarāpesu.
“游行”就是作长途旅行。这里世尊的游行有两种:赶时间的游行和不赶时间的游行。其中,看到即使远在别处但有得度潜力的人,就立刻赶过去,这叫赶时间的游行。这可以从迎接大迦叶等人这些事例中看出来。世尊为了迎接大迦叶,片刻之间就走了三伽浮他(拘卢舍);为了调伏旷野夜叉,走了三十由旬;为了度化央掘魔罗,也是这样;为了弗迦娑提,走了四十五由旬;为了摩诃劫宾那,走了一百二十由旬;为了陀尼耶,走了七百由旬的路。这就叫赶时间的游行。另一种,是按村落、集镇、城市的顺序,为了托钵乞食等而游行,以此利益世间众生,这叫不赶时间的游行。这里指的就是这一种。他就是这样在游行。“大”:指数量之多与功德之大。“与大比丘僧团”:就是与沙门团体一起。“一千二百五十人”:就是与一千二百五十位比丘一起,这是这句话的意思。“前往……那里”:那个集镇因为店铺很多,所以就得名“阿波那”。据说那里曾有两万间店铺门面。世尊朝着进入央掘多罗波国那个集镇的方向和道路,进入、抵达了那个集镇,这就是这句话的意思。巴利
Cārikaṃ caramānoti addhānagamanaṃ kurumāno . Tattha bhagavato duvidhā cārikā turitacārikā, aturitacārikā ca. Tattha dūrepi bhabbapuggale disvā sahasā gamanaṃ turitacārikā. Sā mahākassapapaccuggamanādīsu daṭṭhabbā. Taṃ paccuggacchanto hi bhagavā muhutteneva tigāvutaṃ agamāsi, āḷavakadamanatthaṃ tiṃsayojanaṃ, tathā aṅgulimālassatthāya. Pukkusātissa pana pañcattālīsayojanaṃ, mahākappinassa vīsayojanasataṃ, dhaniyassatthāya sattayojanasataṃ addhānaṃ agamāsi. Ayaṃ turitacārikā nāma. Gāmanigamanagarapaṭipāṭiyā pana piṇḍapātacariyādīhi lokaṃ anuggaṇhantassa gamanaṃ aturitacārikā nāma. Ayaṃ idha adhippetā. Evaṃ cārikaṃ caramāno. Mahatāti saṅkhyāmahatā guṇamahatā ca. Bhikkhusaṅghenāti samaṇagaṇena. Aḍḍhateḷasehīti aḍḍhena teḷasahi, dvādasahi satehi paññāsāya ca bhikkhūhi saddhinti vuttaṃ hoti. Yena…pe… tadavasarīti āpaṇabahulatāya so nigamo ‘‘āpaṇo’’ tveva nāmaṃ labhi. Tasmiṃ kira vīsatiāpaṇamukhasahassāni vibhattāni ahesuṃ. Yena disābhāgena maggena vā so aṅguttarāpānaṃ raṭṭhassa nigamo osaritabbo, tena avasari tadavasari agamāsi, taṃ nigamaṃ anupāpuṇīti vuttaṃ hoti.
给尼亚结发者:名叫给尼亚,是个结发苦行者。据说他本来是个大婆罗门富豪,为了守护财产,就接受了苦行出家,向国王献上礼物,求得一块地,在那里建了草庵住下来,成了上千户人家的依靠。据说在他的草庵里有一棵棕榈树,每天都会落下一颗金果。他白天穿袈裟、盘发髻,到了晚上就随心所欲地享受五种感官之乐。释迦子:这是为了说明他出身高贵种姓。从释迦族出家:这是为了说明他是出于信心才出家的,意思是说,他并不是被什么衰败所压倒,而是在那家族尚未衰败之时就舍弃它,出于信心而出家。然而那一位:这是以“如此存在”之义用的宾格,意思是“然而那位乔达摩尊者”。贤善:是具有贤善功德,意思是“最上”。名称之声:就是名声,或者赞叹之声。巴利
Keṇiyo jaṭiloti keṇiyoti nāmena, jaṭiloti tāpaso. So kira brāhmaṇamahāsālo, dhanarakkhaṇatthāya pana tāpasapabbajjaṃ samādāya rañño paṇṇākāraṃ datvā bhūmibhāgaṃ gahetvā tattha assamaṃ kāretvā vasati kulasahassassa nissayo hutvā. Assamepi cassa eko tālarukkho divase divase ekaṃ suvaṇṇaphalaṃ muñcatīti vadanti. So divā kāsāyāni dhāreti jaṭā ca bandhati, rattiṃ yathāsukhaṃ pañcahi kāmaguṇehi samappito samaṅgībhūto paricāreti. Sakyaputtoti uccākulaparidīpanaṃ. Sakyakulā pabbajitoti saddhāya pabbajitabhāvaparidīpanaṃ, kenaci pārijuññena anabhibhūto aparikkhīṇaṃyeva taṃ kulaṃ pahāya saddhāya pabbajitoti vuttaṃ hoti. Taṃ kho panāti itthambhūtākhyānatthe upayogavacanaṃ, tassa kho pana bhoto gotamassāti attho. Kalyāṇoti kalyāṇaguṇasamannāgato, seṭṭhoti vuttaṃ hoti. Kittisaddoti kittiyeva thutighoso vā.
“他确实是世尊”等语,开头这里的关联是这样:那位世尊,正是由于这些原因、这些理由,才被称为“他是阿拉汉,也是正自觉者……乃至是世尊”。其中,因为远离,因为杀灭敌人与轮辐,因为堪受资具等,因为不在隐秘处行恶——首先,由于这些原因,应当知道那位世尊是阿拉汉。也就是说,他确实以道连同习气彻底摧毁了一切烦恼,因此远离了一切烦恼,所以因为远离而是阿拉汉。那些名为敌人的烦恼,也被他以道杀灭,所以因为杀灭敌人也是阿拉汉。还有,那个以无明、有、爱为轴,以福行等为辐,以老死为轮辋,被漏集所成的轴贯穿,套在三有之车上、无始以来一直运转的轮回之轮,他在菩提树下,以精进的双足稳稳站在戒地上,以信之手拿起能灭尽诸业的智斧,斩断了一切轮辐,所以因为杀灭轮辐也是阿拉汉。又因为他是最上的应供者,所以应当受用衣服等资具以及恭敬、尊重等,所以因为堪受资具等也是阿拉汉。再者,就像世间有些自以为聪明的愚人,因为害怕恶名而在隐秘处作恶,但这位世尊任何时候都不会那样做,所以因为不在隐秘处行恶也是阿拉汉。这里有一首偈颂:巴利
Itipi so bhagavāti ādimhi pana ayaṃ tāva yojanā – so bhagavā itipi arahaṃ, itipi sammāsambuddho…pe… itipi bhagavāti, iminā ca iminā ca kāraṇenāti vuttaṃ hoti. Tattha ārakattā, arīnaṃ arānañca hatattā paccayādīnaṃ arahattā, pāpakaraṇe rahābhāvāti imehi tāva kāraṇehi so bhagavā arahanti veditabbo. Ārakā hi so sabbakilesehi maggena savāsanānaṃ kilesānaṃ viddhaṃsitattāti ārakattā arahaṃ. Te cānena kilesārayo maggena hatāti arīnaṃ hatattāpi arahaṃ. Yañcetaṃ avijjābhavataṇhāmayanābhi, puññādiabhisaṅkhārānaṃ jarāmaraṇanemi, āsavasamudayamayena akkhena vijjhitvā tibhavarathe samāyojitaṃ anādikālapavattaṃ saṃsāracakkaṃ. Tassānena bodhimaṇḍe vīriyapādehi sīlapathaviyaṃ patiṭṭhāya saddhāhatthena kammakkhayakarañāṇapharasuṃ gahetvā sabbe arā hatāti arānaṃ hatattātipi arahaṃ . Aggadakkhiṇeyyattā ca cīvarādipaccaye sakkāragarukārādīni ca arahatīti paccayādīnaṃ arahattāpi arahaṃ. Yathā ca loke keci paṇḍitamānino bālā asilokabhayena raho pāpaṃ karonti, evaṃ nāyaṃ kadāci karotīti pāpakaraṇe rahābhāvatopi arahaṃ. Hoti cettha –
因为已经远离,也因为已经杀灭,那些烦恼之敌——那个人就是牟尼。
已摧破轮回之轮,堪受资具等供养,
不在暗地里作恶,因此被称为阿罗汉。巴利
‘‘Ārakattā hatattā ca, kilesārīna so muni; Hatasaṃsāracakkāro, paccayādīna cāraho; Na raho karoti pāpāni, arahaṃ tena pavuccatī’’ti.
正自觉者:因为正确、亲自觉悟诸谛,所以称为正自觉者。明行足:因为具足极其清净的明与最殊胜的行,所以称为明行足。善逝:因为行得善妙、去得善妙、到达善妙之处、说得善妙,所以称为善逝。世间解:因为以一切方式了知世间。这位世尊确实以一切方式了知行世间,也就是从自性、集起、息灭、以及趣向息灭的方法这些方面,了知由蕴、处等分类构成的行世间。就像这样说:“一个世间:一切有情都依靠食物而住。两个世间:名与色。三个世间:三种受。四个世间:四种食。五个世间:五取蕴。六个世间:内六处。七个世间:七识住。八个世间:八种世间法。九个世间:九有情居。十个世间:十处。十二个世间:十二处。十八个世间:十八界。”他就是以这样一切方式了知行世间。他了知有情的倾向,了知随眠,了知性格行迹,了知胜解,了知哪些有情尘垢少、哪些尘垢多,哪些根性锐利、哪些根性迟钝,哪些性格善、哪些性格恶,哪些容易教化、哪些难以教化,哪些有能力、哪些没有能力,所以以一切方式了知有情世间。同样,他了知一个轮围世界:长宽各有一百二十万三千四百五十由旬,周围有三百六十一万零三百五十由旬。巴利
Sammā sāmañca saccānaṃ buddhattā sammāsambuddho. Atisayavisuddhāhi vijjāhi abbhuttamena caraṇena ca samannāgatattā vijjācaraṇasampanno. Sobhanagamanattā sundaraṃ ṭhānaṃ gatattā suṭṭhu gatattā sammā gadattā ca sugato. Sabbathāpi viditalokattā lokavidū. So hi bhagavā sabhāvato samudayato nirodhato nirodhūpāyatoti sabbathā khandhāyatanādibhedaṃ saṅkhāralokaṃ avedi, ‘‘eko loko sabbe sattā āhāraṭṭhitikā. Dve lokā nāmañca rūpañca. Tayo lokā tisso vedanā. Cattāro lokā cattāro āhārā. Pañca lokā pañcupādānakkhandhā. Cha lokā cha ajjhattikāni āyatanāni. Satta lokā satta viññāṇaṭṭhitiyo. Aṭṭha lokā aṭṭha lokadhammā. Nava lokā nava sattāvāsā. Dasa lokā dasāyatanāni. Dvādasa lokā dvādasāyatanāni. Aṭṭhārasa lokā aṭṭhārasa dhātuyo’’ti (paṭi. ma. 1.112) evaṃ sabbathā saṅkhāralokaṃ avedi. Sattānaṃ āsayaṃ jānāti, anusayaṃ jānāti, caritaṃ jānāti, adhimuttiṃ jānāti, apparajakkhe mahārajakkhe tikkhindriye mudindriye svākāre dvākāre suviññāpaye duviññāpaye bhabbe abhabbe satte jānātīti sabbathā sattalokaṃ avedi. Tathā ekaṃ cakkavāḷaṃ āyāmato vitthārato ca yojanānaṃ dvādasa satasahassāni tīṇi sahassāni aḍḍhapañcamāni ca satāni, parikkhepato chattiṃsa satasahassāni dasa sahassāni aḍḍhuḍḍhāni ca satāni.
二十万,还有四那由他;
因其厚度,这被称为大地。
四十万又八万。
水以这样的厚度,安立在风上。
九十万由风升上虚空;
又有六万,这便是世间的安立。巴利
Duve satasahassāni, cattāri nahutāni ca; Ettakaṃ bahalattena, saṅkhātāyaṃ vasundharā. Cattāri satasahassāni, aṭṭheva nahutāni ca; Ettakaṃ bahalattena, jalaṃ vāte patiṭṭhitaṃ. Nava satasahassāni, māluto nabhamuggato; Saṭṭhi ceva sahassāni, esā lokassa saṇṭhiti’’.
当这样安立之后,这里的由旬(yojana)计算如下:巴利
Evaṃ saṇṭhite cettha yojanānaṃ –
八万四千由旬,沉入大海之中;
须弥山当即高高耸立,是众山之中最高的一座。
自此,按照顺序,以一半又一半的量。
沉入水中又升起的那些天界之物,用种种宝石装饰着。
持双山、伊沙陀罗山、迦罗毗迦山、善见山,
尼民达罗山、毗那怛迦山,还有那座高大的马耳山。
这七座大山,围绕在须弥山四周;
四大天王的居所,是天众和夜叉居住的地方。
雪山高达一百由旬,有五座山峰。
长宽各有三千由旬。
三十二万座山峰将它装饰得庄严华丽。
树干周围十五由旬,名叫那伽树。
智慧五十由旬之干与枝,向四周伸展。
它宽达七由旬,高度也同样达到七由旬。
因为它的威力,阎浮洲才得以彰显。
十六万由旬,沉没在大海之中。
轮围石山顿时高耸而起。
把那一切都围起来后,他安立在整座轮围山之上。巴利
Caturāsīti sahassāni, ajjhogāḷho mahaṇṇave; Accuggato tāvadeva, sineru pabbatuttamo. Tato upaḍḍhupaḍḍhena, pamāṇena yathākkamaṃ; Ajjhogāḷhuggatā dibbā, nānāratanacittitā. Yugandharo īsadharo, karavīko sudassano; Nemindharo vinatako, assakaṇṇo giri brahā. Ete satta mahāselā, sinerussa samantato; Mahārājānamāvāsā, devayakkhanisevitā. Yojanānaṃ satānucco, himavā pañca pabbato; Yojanānaṃ sahassāni, tīṇi āyatavitthato. Caturāsītisahassehi, kūṭehi paṭimaṇḍito; Tipañcayojanakkhandha-parikkhepā nagavhayā. Paññāsayojanakkhandha-sākhāyāmā samantato; Sattayojanavitthiṇṇā, tāvadeva ca uggatā. Jambū yassānubhāvena, jambudīpo pakāsito; Dve asītisahassāni, ajjhogāḷho mahaṇṇave. Accuggato tāvadeva, cakkavāḷasiluccayo; Parikkhipitvā taṃ sabbaṃ, cakkavāḷamayaṃ ṭhito’’.
在这里,月轮是四十九由旬,日轮是五十由旬,三十三天居处是一万由旬,阿修罗居处、无间大地狱和阎浮洲也是这样。西牛货洲是七千由旬,东胜身洲也是七千由旬,北俱卢洲是八千由旬。而这里每一个大洲,都有五百个小洲围绕。这一切合起来,就是一个轮围,也就是一个世界。各个轮围之间,是世界间地狱。像这样,轮围无量,世界也无量,佛陀以无边的佛智了知这一切,所以完全了知空间世界。世尊就是这样,因为完全了知世界,应当知道他就是“世间解”。巴利
Tattha candamaṇḍalaṃ ekūnapaññāsayojanaṃ, sūriyamaṇḍalaṃ paññāsayojanaṃ, tāvatiṃsabhavanaṃ dasasahassayojanaṃ, tathā asurabhavanaṃ avīcimahānirayo jambudīpo ca. Aparagoyānaṃ sattasahassayojanaṃ, tathā pubbavideho, uttarakuru aṭṭhasahassayojano. Ekameko cettha mahādīpo pañcasatapañcasataparittadīpaparivāro. Taṃ sabbampi ekaṃ cakkavāḷaṃ ekā lokadhātu. Cakkavāḷantaresu lokantarikanirayā. Evaṃ anantāni cakkavāḷāni anantā lokadhātuyo, anantena buddhañāṇena aññāsīti sabbathā okāsalokaṃ avedi. Evaṃ so bhagavā sabbathā. Viditalokattā lokavidūti veditabbo.
因为他没有任何人在功德上比自己更殊胜,所以叫无上者。他用种种调伏的方法,引导应当受调伏的人,所以叫调御丈夫。他根据情况,用现世的利益、来世的利益和究竟的利益来教导、救度众生,所以叫导师。这里举出天和人,是按最上等的范围以及能受教化的众生来含摄的;不过,对龙等众生,他也以世间层面的利益来教导。凡有应当被引导者,因一切皆已觉悟,以解脱究竟智而成为佛陀。巴利
Attano pana guṇehi visiṭṭhatarassa kassaci abhāvā anuttaro. Vicittehi vinayanūpāyehi purisadamme sāretīti purisadammasārathi. Diṭṭhadhammikasamparāyikaparamatthehi yathārahaṃ anusāsati nitthāreti cāti satthā. Devamanussaggahaṇaṃ ukkaṭṭhaparicchedavasena bhabbapuggalapariggahavasena ca kataṃ, nāgādikepi pana esa lokiyatthena anusāsati. Yadatthi neyyaṃ nāma, sabbassa buddhattā vimokkhantikañāṇavasena buddho. Yato pana so –
他拥有祥瑞,也具有破坏,并执着于它们,且因为种种祥瑞而分别具足。
已受用者、已出离者,于诸有中为世尊,因此称为“世尊”。巴利
‘‘Bhagyavā bhaggavā yutto, bhagehi ca vibhattavā; Bhattavā vantagamano, bhavesu bhagavā tato’’ti.
这里只是简要说明。如果要详细解释,这些词句在《清净道论》(Visuddhi. 1.124-125)里已经讲过了。巴利
Ayamettha saṅkhepo, vitthārato panetāni padāni visuddhimagge (visuddhi. 1.124-125) vuttāni.
那位世尊于此世间。现在要说明接下来应当说的内容。“含天界”等语句,和《耕田婆罗堕阇经》《阿罗婆迦经》里所说的一样。“亲自”是指自己成为不需要别人引导的人。“以证智”就是以证智。“现证”就是亲自作证。“宣说”就是使人觉悟、使人知道、开示。世尊因为悲悯众生,即使舍弃了无上的远离之乐,也仍然宣说正法。而且无论说法少还是多,都是以初善等方式来宣说的。怎么说的呢?即使只有一首偈颂,因为法是全面圆满美善的,所以第一句是初善,第二、第三句是中善,最后一句是后善。对于单一连贯的经典,序分是初善,结分是后善,中间部分是中善。对于多个连贯的经典,第一个连贯是初善,最后一个连贯是后善,其余连贯是中善。就整个教法而言,以作为自身利益的戒为初善,以止、观、道、果为中善,以涅槃为后善。或者以戒、定为初善,以观、道为中善,以果、涅槃为后善。或者以佛陀的圆满正觉为初善,以法的善法性为中善,以僧的善修行为后善。或者听了这个法之后,依照它去实践而应当证得的正觉是初善,独觉菩提是中善,声闻菩提是后善。而且这个法在听闻时,因为能压伏五盖等,所以仅凭听闻也带来善利,因此是初善;在实践时,因为能带来止观之乐,所以仅凭实践也带来善利,因此是中善;这样实践之后,实践之果完成时,能带来如此的状态,所以仅凭实践之果也带来善利,因此是后善。又因为从导师而生起,所以依生起清净为初善,依义理清净为中善,依作用清净为后善。因此应当知道:无论说法少还是多,都是以初善等方式来宣说的。巴利
So imaṃ lokanti so bhagavā imaṃ lokaṃ. Idāni vattabbaṃ nidasseti. Sadevakantiādīni kasibhāradvājaāḷavakasuttesu vuttanayāneva. Sayanti sāmaṃ aparaneyyo hutvā. Abhiññāti abhiññāya. Sacchikatvāti paccakkhaṃ katvā. Pavedetīti bodheti ñāpeti pakāseti. So dhammaṃ deseti…pe… pariyosānakalyāṇanti so bhagavā sattesu kāruññataṃ paṭicca anuttaraṃ vivekasukhaṃ hitvāpi dhammaṃ deseti. Tañca kho appaṃ vā bahuṃ vā desento ādikalyāṇādippakārameva deseti. Kathaṃ? Ekagāthāpi hi samantabhaddakattā dhammassa paṭhamapādena ādikalyāṇā, dutiyatatiyapādehi majjhekalyāṇā, pacchimapādena pariyosānakalyāṇā. Ekānusandhikaṃ suttaṃ nidānena ādikalyāṇaṃ, nigamanena pariyosānakalyāṇaṃ, sesena majjhekalyāṇaṃ. Nānānusandhikaṃ paṭhamānusandhinā ādikalyāṇaṃ, pacchimena pariyosānakalyāṇaṃ, sesehi majjhekalyāṇaṃ. Sakalopi sāsanadhammo attano atthabhūtena sīlena ādikalyāṇo, samathavipassanāmaggaphalehi majjhekalyāṇo, nibbānena pariyosānakalyāṇo. Sīlasamādhīhi vā ādikalyāṇo, vipassanāmaggehi majjhekalyāṇo, phalanibbānehi pariyosānakalyāṇo. Buddhasubodhitāya vā ādikalyāṇo, dhammasudhammatāya majjhekalyāṇo, saṅghasuppaṭipattiyā pariyosānakalyāṇo . Taṃ sutvā tathattāya paṭipannena adhigantabbāya abhisambodhiyā vā ādikalyāṇo, paccekabodhiyā majjhekalyāṇo, sāvakabodhiyā pariyosānakalyāṇo . Suyyamāno cesa nīvaraṇādivikkhambhanato savanenapi kalyāṇameva āvahatīti ādikalyāṇo, paṭipajjamāno samathavipassanāsukhāvahanato paṭipattiyāpi kalyāṇameva āvahatīti majjhekalyāṇo, tathā paṭipanno ca paṭipattiphale niṭṭhite tādibhāvāvahanato paṭipattiphalenapi kalyāṇameva āvahatīti pariyosānakalyāṇo. Nāthappabhavattā ca pabhavasuddhiyā ādikalyāṇo, atthasuddhiyā majjhekalyāṇo, kiccasuddhiyā pariyosānakalyāṇo. Yato appaṃ vā bahuṃ vā desento ādikalyāṇādippakārameva desetīti veditabbo.
关于“有义、有文”等说法:世尊在宣说这个法的时候,既开示了教法梵行和道梵行,又用种种方式加以阐明;并且随其相应,因为义理圆满,所以是“有义”,因为文句圆满,所以是“有文”。由于宣示、开示、展露、分别、显明、施设等都与义理要点相应,所以是“有义”;由于字母、语句、文句、形态、语法、解说等都善巧完备,所以是“有文”。依义理甚深和证悟甚深,所以是“有义”;依法甚深和说法甚深,所以是“有文”。因为是义无碍解和辩才无碍解的所缘,所以是“有义”;因为是法无碍解和词无碍解的所缘,所以是“有文”。因为能令智者了知,能令同法者生信,所以是“有义”;因为能令人信受,能令世俗者生信,所以是“有文”。因为含深奥旨趣,所以是“有义”;因为用词显了,所以是“有文”。因为没有什么需要增添,以整体圆具的体性而完全圆满;因为没有什么需要去除,以无过的体性而清净。因为含摄三学,是最殊胜的梵行者——佛陀、独觉佛、声闻弟子——所应行、所行道,所以称为“梵行”。因此说:“有义、有文……阐明梵行。”巴利
Sātthaṃ sabyañjananti evamādīsu pana yasmā imaṃ dhammaṃ desento sāsanabrahmacariyaṃ maggabrahmacariyañca pakāseti, nānānayehi dīpeti, tañca yathāsambhavaṃ atthasampattiyā sātthaṃ, byañjanasampattiyā sabyañjanaṃ. Saṅkāsanapakāsanavivaraṇavibhajanauttānīkaraṇapaññattiatthapadasamāyogato sātthaṃ, akkharapadabyañjanākāraniruttiniddesasampattiyā sabyañjanaṃ. Atthagambhīratāpaṭivedhagambhīratāhi sātthaṃ, dhammagambhīratādesanāgambhīratāhi sabyañjanaṃ. Atthapaṭibhānapaṭisambhidāvisayato sātthaṃ, dhammaniruttipaṭisambhidāvisayato sabyañjanaṃ. Paṇḍitavedanīyato sarikkhakajanappasādakanti sātthaṃ, saddheyyato lokiyajanappasādakanti sabyañjanaṃ. Gambhīrādhippāyato sātthaṃ, uttānapadato sabyañjanaṃ. Upanetabbassābhāvato sakalaparipuṇṇabhāvena kevalaparipuṇṇaṃ, apanetabbassa abhāvato niddosabhāvena parisuddhaṃ. Sikkhattayapariggahitattā brahmabhūtehi seṭṭhehi caritabbato tesañca cariyabhāvato brahmacariyaṃ. Tasmā ‘‘sātthaṃ sabyañjanaṃ…pe… brahmacariyaṃ pakāsetī’’ti vuccati.
另外,因为世尊在说法时开示了有因有缘、有生起的道理,所以是“初善”;由于与所教化的众生根机相应,义理没有颠倒,并且结合因由和譬喻,所以是“中善”;由于能让听者获得信心,并以总结收尾,所以是“后善”。这样说法,就是在阐明梵行。而且,从修行的角度来说,因为证悟显明,所以是“有义”;从教理传承的角度来说,因为教法显明,所以是“有文”;因为具备戒等五法蕴,所以是“完全圆满”;因为没有烦恼杂染,又为了度脱而运作,不依赖世间利养,所以是“清净”;因为是最殊胜的,是佛陀、独觉佛、声闻这些梵者所行的行持,所以称为“梵行”。因此也说“他宣说法……阐明梵行”。巴利
Apica yasmā sanidānaṃ sauppattikañca desento ādikalyāṇaṃ deseti, vineyyānaṃ anurūpato atthassa aviparītatāya hetudāharaṇayogato ca majjhekalyāṇaṃ , sotūnaṃ saddhāpaṭilābhena nigamanena ca pariyosānakalyāṇaṃ. Evaṃ desento ca brahmacariyaṃ pakāseti. Tañca paṭipattiyā adhigamabyattito sātthaṃ, pariyattiyā āgamabyattito sabyañjanaṃ, sīlādipañcadhammakkhandhayuttato kevalaparipuṇṇaṃ, nirupakkilesato nittharaṇatthāya pavattito lokāmisanirapekkhato ca parisuddhaṃ, seṭṭhaṭṭhena brahmabhūtānaṃ buddhapaccekabuddhasāvakānaṃ cariyato brahmacariyanti vuccati, tasmāpi ‘‘so dhammaṃ deseti…pe… brahmacariyaṃ pakāsetī’’ti vuccati.
“善哉”的意思是:实在美好,能带来利益、带来安乐。这里说的是“以法谈”,也就是和饮料的功德有关的开示。因为这位给尼亚结发者在傍晚听说世尊来了,心里想:“空着手去拜见世尊,实在不好意思。再说,饮料对于离非时食的人来说也是可以用的。”于是他让人用五百个壶装上精心做好的枣汁,然后去了。就像《药犍度》里说的:“那时,给尼亚结发者这样想:‘我该拿什么去供养乔达摩沙门呢?’”(《大品》300)这些内容应当按那里所讲的来理解。接着,世尊就像在《有学经》(《中部》2.22等)中以和住处功德有关的开示教导释迦族人,在《牛角沙罗林》(《中部》1.325等)中以和和合安乐功德有关的开示教导三位良家子,在《车乘差别经》(《中部》1.252等)中以和十论事有关的开示教导本生地的比丘们那样,此时也以适合当时机缘的、和饮料功德有关的开示,向他指出布施饮料的利益——这就是“示”;鼓励他再次去做这样的福业,让他发起精进——这就是“教”;激发他的热忱——这就是“励”;用现前和来世的殊胜果报让他欢喜——这就是“喜”。所以说“以法谈……示、教、励、喜”。给尼亚对世尊的净信更加增长,于是邀请世尊;世尊三次拒绝后,默然接受了。所以说“那时,给尼亚结发者……世尊默然接受”。巴利
Sādhu kho panāti sundaraṃ kho pana, atthāvahaṃ sukhāvahanti vuttaṃ hoti. Dhammiyā kathāyāti pānakānisaṃsapaṭisaṃyuttāya. Ayañhi keṇiyo sāyanhasamaye bhagavato āgamanaṃ assosi. ‘‘Tucchahattho bhagavantaṃ dassanāya gantuṃ lajjamāno vikālabhojanā viratānampi pānakaṃ kappatī’’ti cintetvā pañcahi kājasatehi susaṅkhataṃ badarapānaṃ gāhāpetvā agamāsi. Yathāha bhesajjakkhandhake ‘‘atha kho keṇiyassa jaṭilassa etadahosi, kiṃ nu kho ahaṃ samaṇassa gotamassa harāpeyya’’nti (mahāva. 300) sabbaṃ veditabbaṃ. Tato naṃ bhagavā yathā sekkhasutte (ma. ni. 2.22 ādayo) sākiye āvasathānisaṃsapaṭisaṃyuttāya kathāya, gosiṅgasālavane (ma. ni. 1.325 ādayo) tayo kulaputte sāmaggirasānisaṃsapaṭisaṃyuttāya, rathavinīte (ma. ni. 1.252 ādayo) jātibhūmake bhikkhū dasakathāvatthupaṭisaṃyuttāya, evaṃ taṅkhaṇānurūpāya pānakānisaṃsapaṭisaṃyuttāya kathāya pānakadānānisaṃsaṃ sandassesi, tathārūpānaṃ puññānaṃ punapi kattabbatāya niyojento samādapesi, abbhussāhaṃ janento samuttejesi, sandiṭṭhikasamparāyikena phalavisesena pahaṃsento sampahaṃsesi. Tenāha ‘‘dhammiyā kathāya…pe… sampahaṃsesī’’ti. So bhiyyosomattāya bhagavati pasanno bhagavantaṃ nimantesi, bhagavā cassa tikkhattuṃ paṭikkhipitvā adhivāsesi. Tenāha ‘‘atha kho keṇiyo jaṭilo…pe… adhivāsesi bhagavā tuṇhībhāvenā’’ti.
世尊为什么又拒绝了呢?因为一次又一次地请求,他的福德会增长,而且他会准备得更多,这样一来,原本为一千二百五十位比丘准备的食物,就够一千五百五十位比丘吃了。那多出来的三百位是从哪里来的呢?因为食物还没准备好,塞拉婆罗门就会带着三百个年轻人一起出家,世尊预见到这件事,才那样说的。朋友、同事,指的是朋友和一起做事的人。亲戚、同血统者,指的是同一血统、有共同母系关系的儿女等,以及其他亲属。以……故,就是因为那个原因。为我,就是对我。身役务,就是用身体亲自服务。准备圆堂,就是搭起有白色顶盖的堂舍。巴利
Kimatthaṃ pana paṭikkhipi bhagavāti? Punappunaṃ yācanāya cassa puññavuḍḍhi bhavissati, bahutarañca paṭiyādessati, tato aḍḍhatelasānaṃ bhikkhusatānaṃ paṭiyattaṃ aḍḍhasoḷasannaṃ pāpuṇissatīti. Kuto aparāni tīṇi satānīti ce? Appaṭiyatteyeva hi bhatte selo brāhmaṇo tīhi māṇavakasatehi saddhiṃ pabbajissati, taṃ disvā bhagavā evamāhāti. Mittāmacceti mitte ca kammakare ca. Ñātisālohiteti samānalohite ekayonisambandhe puttadhītādayo avasesabandhave ca. Yenāti yasmā. Meti mayhaṃ. Kāyaveyyāvaṭikanti kāyena veyyāvaccaṃ. Maṇḍalamāḷaṃ paṭiyādetīti setavitānamaṇḍapaṃ karoti.
通达三吠陀,就是通达《梨俱吠陀》《夜柔吠陀》《娑摩吠陀》。连同字汇书和词源书一起,就是具有字汇与词源。字汇是阐明名称、字汇、树木等异名的论书。词源是为帮助诗人而抉择行为仪轨的论书。连同语音分析一起,就是具有语音分析。语音分析指音韵学和语法。以历史为第五:把《阿闼婆吠陀》算作第四,再把“所谓历史,所谓历史”这类说法所关联的往事称为历史,以此为第五,所以说以历史为第五。它们就是以历史为第五者。通达文句,就是研习并了知其余的语法等,所以称为通达文句的语法家。在顺世论和诡辩论书以及大人相论中,对那部一万二千颂的大人相论书,能够不欠缺、完整地践行,所以是于顺世论及大人相论中无减,意思就是成为无欠无缺的人。所谓有减,是指那些不能从义理和经卷上掌握、持守这些论书的人。巴利
Tiṇṇaṃ vedānanti irubbedayajubbedasāmavedānaṃ. Saha nighaṇḍunā ca keṭubhena ca sanighaṇḍukeṭubhānaṃ. Nighaṇḍūti nāmanighaṇḍurukkhādīnaṃ vevacanappakāsakaṃ satthaṃ. Keṭubhanti kiriyākappavikappo kavīnaṃ upakārāya satthaṃ. Saha akkharappabhedena sākkharappabhedānaṃ. Akkharappabhedoti sikkhā ca nirutti ca. Itihāsapañcamānanti athabbanavedaṃ catutthaṃ katvā ‘‘itiha āsa itiha āsā’’ti īdisavacanapaṭisaṃyutto purāṇakathāsaṅkhāto itihāso pañcamo etesanti itihāsapañcamā. Tesaṃ itihāsapañcamānaṃ. Padaṃ tadavasesañca byākaraṇaṃ ajjheti vedeti cāti padako veyyākaraṇo. Lokāyate vitaṇḍavādasatthe mahāpurisalakkhaṇādhikāre ca dvādasasahasse mahāpurisalakkhaṇasatthe anūno paripūrakārīti lokāyatamahāpurisalakkhaṇesu anavayo, avayo na hotīti vuttaṃ hoti. Avayo nāma yo tāni atthato ca ganthato ca sandhāretuṃ na sakkoti.
“经行”就是对小腿有益的走动,也就是为了消除久坐等引起的疲劳、为了活动小腿而走的一段路,这叫做经行。“正在经行”就是正在走来走去。“到处走动”就是从这边到那边地行走。“结尼耶结发者的庵”就是结尼耶的庵舍、住处。“迎娶”就是娶新娘。“出嫁”就是嫁女儿。“大祭祀”就是大供养。“摩揭陀王”就是摩揭陀的君主。因为拥有大军,所以叫“色尼耶”。“宾比”是金的意思,因为肤色像纯金一样,所以叫“宾比萨罗”。“他被我邀请”就是他被我邀请了。巴利
Jaṅghāya hitaṃ vihāraṃ jaṅghāvihāraṃ, cirāsanādijanitaṃ parissamaṃ vinodetuṃ jaṅghāpasāraṇatthaṃ adīghacārikanti vuttaṃ hoti. Anucaṅkamamānoti caṅkamamāno eva. Anuvicaramānoti ito cito ca caramāno. Keṇiyassa jaṭilassa assamoti keṇiyassa assamaṃ nivesanaṃ. Āvāhoti kaññāgahaṇaṃ. Vivāhoti kaññādānaṃ. Mahāyaññoti mahāyajanaṃ. Māgadhoti magadhānaṃ issaro. Mahatiyā senāya samannāgatattā seniyo. Bimbīti suvaṇṇaṃ, tasmā sārasuvaṇṇasadisavaṇṇatāya bimbisāro. So me nimantitoti so mayā nimantito.
这时,那位婆罗门因为过去生积累的善业,一听到“佛陀”这个声音,就像被甘露灌顶一样,由于惊叹的样子,说道:“贤者克尼亚,你说‘佛陀’吗?”对方如实说明,说道:“贤者舍拉,我说‘佛陀’。”于是为了让他更加坚定,又问他,他也同样地告知。接着,为了显示即使经过百千劫,“佛陀”这个声音也极难遇到,说道:“这声音在世间也难得,即所谓‘佛陀’。”其中,“即所谓”是虚词,意思是“那个”。巴利
Atha brāhmaṇo pubbe katādhikārattā buddhasaddaṃ sutvāva amatenevābhisitto vimhayarūpattā āha – ‘‘buddhoti, bho keṇiya, vadesī’’ti. Itaro yathābhūtaṃ ācikkhanto āha – ‘‘buddhoti, bho sela, vadāmī’’ti. Tato naṃ punapi daḷhīkaraṇatthaṃ pucchi, itaropi tatheva ārocesi. Atha kappasatasahassehipi buddhasaddassa dullabhabhāvaṃ dassento āha – ‘‘ghosopi kho eso dullabho lokasmiṃ yadidaṃ buddho’’ti. Tattha yadidanti nipāto, yo esoti vuttaṃ hoti.
这时,婆罗门听到“佛陀”这个名号后,心想:“他到底真的是佛陀,还是只是名字叫佛陀而已?”他想弄清楚这件事,便这样思量,也说了出来:“传承的吠陀中……已除去覆盖者。”这里说的“在秘典中”,就是指在吠陀中。据说,如来将要出现于世之前,净居天的天人早就化作婆罗门的模样,把大人相编入吠陀,让人诵读流传,他们说:“凭着这些相,具大威德的众生就能认出如来。”所以,过去大人相是收在吠陀里的。可是如来般涅槃之后,这些相就逐渐消失,因此现在没有了。“大人”是指具足愿受持、智受持、悲等功德的大丈夫。“只有两种去向”就是指只有两种归宿。这个“去向”一词,在“舍利弗,有这五种去向”等说法里,指的是生命形态的差别;在“兽的去向是树林”里,指的是居住的地方;在“如此有极强去向者”里,指的是智慧;在“已去向者”里,指的是散布的状态。但在这里,应当理解为归宿。虽然具足那些相的人会成为转轮王,但并不是凭着完全相同的相就能成佛。不过,从种姓相同这一点来说,就说那些相是一样的。因此说“具足那些相的人”。巴利
Atha brāhmaṇo buddhasaddaṃ sutvā ‘‘kiṃ nu kho so saccameva buddho, udāhu nāmamattamevassa buddho’’ti vīmaṃsitukāmo cintesi, abhāsi eva vā ‘‘āgatāni kho pana…pe… vivaṭṭacchado’’ti. Tattha ‘‘mantesū’’ti vedesu. ‘‘Tathāgato kira uppajjissatī’’ti paṭikacceva suddhāvāsadevā brāhmaṇavesena lakkhaṇāni pakkhipitvā vede vācenti ‘‘tadanusārena mahesakkhā sattā tathāgataṃ jānissantī’’ti. Tena pubbe vedesu mahāpurisalakkhaṇāni āgacchanti. Parinibbute pana tathāgate kamena antaradhāyanti, tena etarahi natthi. Mahāpurisassāti paṇidhisamādānañāṇasamādānakaruṇādiguṇamahato purisassa . Dveva gatiyoti dve eva niṭṭhā. Kāmañcāyaṃ gatisaddo ‘‘pañca kho imā, sāriputta, gatiyo’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.153) bhavabhede, ‘‘gatī migānaṃ pavana’’ntiādīsu (pari. 339) nivāsaṭṭhāne, ‘‘evaṃ adhimattagatimanto’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.161) paññāyaṃ, ‘‘gatigata’’ntiādīsu (cūḷava. 204) visaṭabhāve vattati, idha pana niṭṭhāyaṃ veditabbo. Tattha kiñcāpi yehi lakkhaṇehi samannāgato rājā hoti cakkavatti, na tehi eva buddho. Jātisāmaññato pana tāniyeva tānīti vuccanti. Tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘yehi samannāgatassā’’ti.
如果住在家里,就是说如果住在俗家。成为转轮王:因为用四种稀有的法和四种摄受他人的方式让世人欢喜,所以叫王。他转动轮宝,以四种成就之轮而转动,也让别人随之转动,并且为了利益他人而有威仪之轮的运转存在于他那里,所以叫转轮王。在这里,王是通称,转轮王是特称。依法而行,就是如法的意思,也就是依道理、公正地行事。依法获得王位而成为王,所以叫法王。或者可以说,以利益他人的法行而叫如法的,以利益自己的法行而叫法王。四境自在主:意思是对以四海为边界、以四洲为庄严的大地拥有自在权。已征服内外之敌:向内征服了瞋等怨敌,向外征服了一切国王,所以称为“战胜者”。得国境稳固:就是于国境中获得常住、稳固,不能被任何人动摇;或者国境在他那里达到稳固,不躁动、专注于自己的事务、不动摇、不颤动,所以叫得国境稳固。巴利
Sace agāraṃ ajjhāvasatīti yadi agāre vasati. Rājā hoti cakkavattīti catūhi acchariyadhammehi saṅgahavatthūhi ca lokaṃ rañjanato rājā. Cakkaratanaṃ vatteti, catūhi sampatticakkehi, vattati, tehi ca paraṃ vatteti, parahitāya ca iriyāpathacakkānaṃ vatto etasmiṃ atthīti cakkavatti. Ettha ca rājāti sāmaññaṃ, cakkavattīti visesanaṃ. Dhammena caratīti dhammiko, ñāyena samena vattatīti attho. Dhammena rajjaṃ labhitvā rājā jātoti dhammarājā. Parahitadhammakaraṇena vā dhammiko, attahitadhammakaraṇena dhammarājā. Caturantāya issaroti cāturanto, catusamuddantāya cattubbidhadīpavibhūsitāya ca pathaviyā issaroti attho. Ajjhattaṃ kodhādipaccatthike bahiddhā ca sabbarājāno vijesīti vijitāvī. Janapadatthāvariyappattoti janapade dhuvabhāvaṃ thāvarabhāvaṃ patto, na sakkā kenaci cāletuṃ, janapado vā tamhi thāvariyappatto anussukko sakammanirato acalo asampavedhītipi janapadatthāvariyappatto.
“Seyyathida”是一个不变词,意思是“这些是哪些呢?”轮宝……中间省略……引导宝就是第七宝。这七宝的一切种类,已经在《宝经》的注释中说过。其中,这位转轮王以轮宝征服尚未征服的疆域,以象宝和马宝在已征服的疆域内随心所欲地巡游,以引导宝守护已征服的疆域,以其余诸宝享受受用的快乐。轮宝使他具备精进力,象宝、马宝和居士宝使他具备统帅力,引导宝使他具备谋略力,女宝和摩尼宝则是这三种力量所结出的成果。他以女宝和摩尼宝享受财富之乐,以其余诸宝享受自在之乐。特别应当知道,前三宝是由无嗔善根所生之业的威力而成就,中间三宝是由无贪善根所生之业的威力而成就,最后一宝即引导宝,是由无痴善根所生之业的威力而成就。巴利
Seyyathidanti nipāto, tassa etāni katamānīti attho. Cakkaratanaṃ…pe… pariṇāyakaratanameva sattamanti tāni sabbappakārato ratanasuttavaṇṇanāyaṃ vuttāni. Tesu ayaṃ cakkavattirājā cakkaratanena ajitaṃ jināti, hatthiassaratanehi vijite yathāsukhamanuvicarati, pariṇāyakaratanena vijitamanurakkhati, sesehi upabhogasukhamanubhavati. Paṭhamena cassa ussāhasattiyogo, hatthiassagahapatiratanehi pabhusattiyogo, pariṇāyakaratanena mantasattiyogo suparipuṇṇo hoti, itthimaṇiratanehi ca tividhasattiyogaphalaṃ. So itthimaṇiratanehi bhogasukhamanubhoti, sesehi issariyasukhaṃ. Visesato cassa purimāni tīṇi adosakusalamūlajanitakammānubhāvena sampajjanti, majjhimāni alobhakusalamūlajanitakammānubhāvena, pacchimamekaṃ amohakusalamūlajanitakammānubhāvenāti veditabbaṃ.
“超过一千”就是一千以上。“勇士”指天性无所畏惧的人。“勇士之相的身形”:有人解释说,这是像天子一样的身体;不过,这里真正的意思是:“勇士”被称为最上等的勇者,“勇士之相”就是勇士的特征,也就是勇士的原因——精进。具有勇士特征之身形的人,就叫“勇士之相的身形”,意思是说,他们的身体就像是由精进所成的一样。“能粉碎敌军”:意思是假如敌军正面挡在前面,他们有能力把敌军粉碎。“依法”:指以“不杀生”等五戒之法。“阿拉汉、正自觉者、世间开覆者”:在这里,世间被贪、嗔、痴、慢、见、无明、恶行这七种覆盖所遮蔽,处在烦恼的黑暗中;佛陀把那覆盖掀开,从四面八方生起光明而安住,所以叫“开覆者”。其中,第一个词说的是应受供养之德;第二个词说的是它的原因,因为他是正自觉者;第三个词说的是成正觉的原因,也就是开覆之性,应当这样理解。或者,“开覆者”就是既已揭开、又无覆盖,意思是已离轮回、已无覆盖。这样一来,就是以离轮回说阿拉汉,以无覆盖说正自觉者,也就是为前面两个词各说了两个原因。在这里,以第二种无畏成就第一个词——阿拉汉;以第一种无畏成就第二个词——正自觉者;以第三、第四种无畏成就第三个词——开覆者。应当知道,第一个词成就法眼,第二个词成就佛眼,第三个词成就一切眼。巴利
Parosahassanti atirekasahassaṃ. Sūrāti abhīrukajātikā. Vīraṅgarūpāti devaputtasadisakāyā, evaṃ tāveke. Ayaṃ panettha sabhāvo vīrāti uttamasūrā vuccanti, vīrānaṃ aṅgaṃ vīraṅgaṃ, vīrakāraṇaṃ vīriyanti vuttaṃ hoti. Vīraṅgaṃ rūpaṃ etesanti vīraṅgarūpā, vīriyamayasarīrā viyāti vuttaṃ hoti. Parasenappamaddanāti sace paṭimukhaṃ tiṭṭheyya parasenā, taṃ pamaddituṃ samatthāti adhippāyo. Dhammenāti ‘‘pāṇo na hantabbo’’tiādinā (dī. ni. 2.244; ma. ni. 3.257) pañcasīladhammena. Arahaṃ hoti sammāsambuddho loke vivaṭṭacchadoti ettha rāgadosamohamānadiṭṭhiavijjāduccaritachadanehi sattahi paṭicchanne kilesandhakāre loke taṃ chadanaṃ vivaṭṭetvā samantato sañjātāloko hutvā ṭhitoti vivaṭṭacchado. Tattha paṭhamena padena pūjārahatā, dutiyena tassā hetu yasmā sammāsambuddhoti. Tatiyena buddhattahetu vivaṭṭacchadatā vuttāti veditabbā. Atha vā vivaṭṭo ca vicchado cāti vivaṭṭacchado, vaṭṭarahito chadanarahito cāti vuttaṃ hoti. Tena arahaṃ vaṭṭābhāvena sammāsambuddho chadanābhāvenāti evaṃ purimapadadvayasseva hetudvayaṃ vuttaṃ hoti. Dutiyena vesārajjena cettha purimasiddhi, paṭhamena dutiyasiddhi, tatiyacatutthehi tatiyasiddhi hoti. Purimañca dhammacakkhuṃ, dutiyaṃ buddhacakkhuṃ, tatiyaṃ samantacakkhuṃ sādhetīti veditabbaṃ.
这时,他想去世尊那里,就说:“贤者们,那位正自觉者在哪里……”在“这样说”等句里,“yenesā”是指那个方向、那个方位。“Nīlavanarājī”就是青色的树列。据说那片树林像云的行列一样。为了指出世尊当时住在哪里,他说:“贤者谢喇啊,那青色的树列所在之处。”这里,“他住在”是省略的文句,或者是以具格表达处格的意思。“Pade pada”就是在脚步旁边迈步,以此禁止急促行走。“Durāsadā hi”是说出原因:因为他们难以接近,所以诸位应当这样前来。那为什么难以接近呢?就像狮子一样独行。正如狮子因为没有同伴而独行,他们也是因为喜欢远离而独行。接着,用“当我说时……”等话教导那些青年适当的举止。其中,“mā opātetha”就是不要插话、不要出声的意思。“Āgamentu”是应当等待,直到谈话结束,保持沉默,这就是它的意思。巴利
Idāni bhagavato santikaṃ gantukāmo āha – ‘‘kahaṃ pana bho…pe… sammāsambuddho’’ti. Evaṃ vuttetiādīsu yenesāti yena disābhāgena esā. Nīlavanarājīti nīlavaṇṇarukkhapanti. Vanaṃ kira meghapantisadisaṃ. Yattha bhagavā tadā vihāsi, taṃ niddisanto āha – ‘‘yenesā bho, sela, nīlavanarājī’’ti. Tattha ‘‘so viharatī’’ti ayaṃ panettha pāṭhaseso, bhummatthe vā karaṇavacanaṃ. Pade padanti padasamīpe padaṃ. Tena turitagamanaṃ paṭisedheti. Durāsadā hīti kāraṇaṃ āha, yasmā te durāsadā, tasmā evaṃ bhonto āgacchantūti. Kiṃ pana kāraṇā durāsadāti ce? Sīhāva ekacarā. Yathā hi sīhā sahāyakiccābhāvato ekacarā, evaṃ tepi vivekakāmatāya. ‘‘Yadā cāha’’ntiādinā pana te māṇavake upacāraṃ sikkhāpeti. Tattha mā opātethāti mā pavesetha, mā kathethāti vuttaṃ hoti. Āgamentūti paṭimānentu, yāva kathā pariyosānaṃ gacchati, tāva tuṇhī bhavantūti attho.
他仔细考察,就是去寻找。大多数,就是见到了许多,未见到少数。为了说明那些没见到的,他说“除了两个”。他起疑,就是生起疑惑和渴望:“啊,但愿我能看见。”他犹豫不决,就是从各处一一分辨那些,弄得很吃力,却无法看见。他不能决断,就是因为那种犹豫,无法作出确定。他不能生起净信,就是不能生起“这位具足圆满相”这样对世尊的净信。或者可以说,“疑”是指极其微弱的犹豫,“犹豫不决”是指中等程度的,“不能决断”是指强烈的,而以不生净信,说明由那三种法,心变得浑浊不清。巴利
Samannesīti gavesi. Yebhuyyenāti bahukāni addasa, appakāni nāddasa. Tato yāni na addasa , tāni dīpento āha ‘‘ṭhapetvā dve’’ti. Kaṅkhatīti kaṅkhaṃ uppādeti patthanaṃ ‘‘aho vata passeyya’’nti. Vicikicchatīti tato tato tāni vicinanto kicchati na sakkoti daṭṭhuṃ. Nādhimuccatīti tāya vicikicchāya sanniṭṭhānaṃ na gacchati. Na sampasīdatīti tato ‘‘paripuṇṇalakkhaṇo aya’’nti bhagavati pasādaṃ nāpajjati. Kaṅkhāya vā sudubbalavimati vuttā, vicikicchāya majjhimā, anadhimuccanatāya balavatī, asampasādena tehi tīhi dhammehi cittassa kālussiyabhāvo.
Kosohite是指被衣鞘覆盖着。Vatthaguyhe是指密处。世尊的密处就像最上等的象王那样,收在鞘中,呈金色,如同莲花苞。他因为被衣服遮住而没看见,也没注意到舌头处于口内而广大的程度,所以对这两个特征生起了疑惑和犹豫。Tathārūpa是怎样的色?这问题我们该怎么说呢?那先长老被弥兰陀王问到时已经说过了:巴利
Kosohiteti vatthikosena paṭicchanne. Vatthaguyheti aṅgajāte. Bhagavato hi varavāraṇasseva kosohitaṃ vatthaguyhaṃ suvaṇṇavaṇṇaṃ padumagabbhasamānaṃ. Taṃ so vatthapaṭicchannattā apassanto antomukhagatāya ca jivhāya pahūtabhāvaṃ asallakkhento tesu dvīsu lakkhaṇesu kaṅkhī ahosi vicikicchī. Tathārūpanti kathaṃ rūpaṃ? Kimettha amhehi vattabbaṃ, vuttametaṃ nāgasenatthereneva milindaraññā puṭṭhena (mi. pa. 4.3.3) –
“尊者那先,世尊所做的真是难行啊。”“大王,是什么呢?”“尊者,世尊把令人羞耻的部位展示给大众看,也展示给梵摩婆罗门、雅瓦婆罗门和他的弟子优多罗看,展示给婆哇利婆罗门的十六位弟子婆罗门看,展示给施罗婆罗门的三百位青年弟子看。”“大王,世尊并不是展示密处,世尊展示的是影像。世尊以神通变化出穿着下衣、系着腰带、披着覆衣的影像之形而已,大王。”“既然见到了影像,那不就等于见到了如来吗,尊者?”“大王,这话先放一边。如果有众生见到心脏的形色就能觉悟,正自觉者难道会取出心脏的肉来展示吗?”“尊者那先,您说得好。”巴利
‘‘Dukkaraṃ, bhante nāgasena, bhagavatā katanti. Kiṃ, mahārājāti? Mahājanena hirikaraṇokāsaṃ brahmāyubrāhmaṇassa ca antevāsiuttarassa ca bāvarissa antevāsīnaṃ soḷasannaṃ brāhmaṇānañca selassa brāhmaṇassa antevāsīnaṃ tisatamāṇavānañca dassesi, bhanteti. Na, mahārāja, bhagavā guyhaṃ dasseti, chāyaṃ bhagavā dasseti, iddhiyā abhisaṅkharitvā nivāsananivatthaṃ kāyabandhanabaddhaṃ cīvarapārutaṃ chāyārūpakamattaṃ dasseti, mahārājāti. Chāyārūpe diṭṭhe sati diṭṭho eva nanu, bhanteti. Tiṭṭhatetaṃ, mahārāja, hadayarūpaṃ disvā bujjhanakasatto bhaveyya, hadayamaṃsaṃ nīharitvā dasseyya sammāsambuddhoti. Kallosi, bhante, nāgasenā’’ti (mi. pa. 4.3.3).
Ninnāmetvāti是抽出来。这里应当知道:以抚摸耳孔来显示舌头长,以抚摸鼻孔来显示舌头细,以覆盖前额来显示舌头宽。Ācariyapācariyānanti是指老师们以及老师的老师们。Sake vaṇṇeti是指自身的功德。巴利
Ninnāmetvāti nīharitvā. Kaṇṇasotānumasanena cettha dīghabhāvo, nāsikāsotānumasanena tanubhāvo, nalāṭacchādanena puthulabhāvo pakāsitoti veditabbo. Ācariyapācariyānanti ācariyānañceva ācariyācariyānañca. Sake vaṇṇeti attano guṇe.
554 身体圆满:因为具足诸相,而且四肢与肢节没有欠缺,所以身体圆满。好光:身体的光泽美好。善生:因为身高、体围和形态都圆满,所以生得美好。见可爱:即使看很久也看不厌,不会让人反感,令人欢喜,所见就是可爱,所以叫见可爱。不过有些人说:“见可爱,就是眼睛美好。”金色:肤色像黄金一样。你是:这是“你是”。这个意思要和上面每一个词连起来理解。齿极白:牙齿非常洁白。因为世尊的牙齿放出极其洁白的白光,就像月光一样,所以经中说:“你是齿极白者。”巴利
554.Paripuṇṇakāyoti lakkhaṇehi paripuṇṇatāya ahīnaṅgapaccaṅgatāya ca paripuṇṇasarīro . Surucīti sundarasarīrappabho. Sujātoti ārohapariṇāhasampattiyā saṇṭhānasampattiyā ca sunibbatto. Cārudassanoti sucirampi passantānaṃ atittijanakaṃ appaṭikūlaṃ ramaṇīyaṃ cāru eva dassanaṃ assāti cārudassano. Keci pana bhaṇanti ‘‘cārudassanoti sundaranetto’’ti. Suvaṇṇavaṇṇoti suvaṇṇasadisavaṇṇo. Asīti bhavasi. Etaṃ sabbapadehi yojetabbaṃ. Susukkadāṭhoti suṭṭhu sukkadāṭho. Bhagavato hi dāṭhāhi candakiraṇā viya ativiya paṇḍararaṃsiyo niccharanti. Tenāha – ‘‘susukkadāṭhosī’’ti.
555 “大人相”:就是先前已经说过的那些相,这里换一种说法来总结。巴利
555.Mahāpurisalakkhaṇāti pubbe vuttabyañjanāneva vacanantarena nigamento āha.
556 现在,他要用自己最中意的那些相来赞颂世尊,于是说出“眼目清净”等话。世尊因为具足五种色泽的清净,所以眼目清净;因为面容像圆满的月轮,所以面容端正;因为身高和体围都很圆满,所以高大;因为身体十分挺直,所以端正;因为充满光辉,所以威光显赫。这里前面已经说过的内容,他又用“在沙门众中”这一说法来赞叹,于是再次说出。像这样的人,确实就是这样在众人中放光。后面的偈颂也是同样的讲法。巴利
556. Idāni tesu lakkhaṇesu attano abhirucitehi lakkhaṇehi bhagavantaṃ thunanto āha – ‘‘pasannanetto’’tiādi. Bhagavā hi pañcavaṇṇapasādasampattiyā pasannanetto, paripuṇṇacandamaṇḍalasadisamukhattā sumukho, ārohapariṇāhasampattiyā brahā, bahmujugattatāya uju, jutimantatāya patāpavā. Yampi cettha pubbe vuttaṃ, taṃ ‘‘majjhe samaṇasaṅghassā’’ti iminā pariyāyena thunatā puna vuttaṃ. Īdiso hi evaṃ virocati. Esa nayo uttaragāthāyapi.
557-8 “最胜色者”,是指具足最胜妙色的人。“赡部洲”,就是阎浮提洲。他是用大家都熟悉的事物来显示那位转轮王的威势,于是说道:而且,转轮王就是四大洲的主人。巴利
557-8.Uttamavaṇṇinoti uttamavaṇṇasampannassa. Jambusaṇḍassāti jambudīpassa. Pākaṭena issariyaṃ vaṇṇayanto āha, apica cakkavatti catunnampi dīpānaṃ issaro hoti.
559 刹帝利:指出身刹帝利种姓的人。婆阇:指拥有财富的人。国王们:指任何执掌王权的人。随从:指跟随侍奉的仆从。王中之王:指成为诸王所敬奉的王,这里指的是转轮王。人主:指成为人类的君主、最高的自在者。巴利
559.Khattiyāti jātikhattiyā. Bhojāti bhogiyā. Rājānoti ye keci rajjaṃ kārentā. Anuyantāti anugāmino sevakā. Rājābhirājāti rājūnaṃ pūjaniyo rājā hutvā, cakkavattīti adhippāyo. Manujindoti manussādhipati paramissaro hutvā.
560 世尊听了这番话,为了满足施罗的心愿——那些阿罗汉、正自觉者,当自己的功德被称扬时,都会显现自身——便说道:“我是王。”
这里的意思是:施罗,你向我请求说“您堪当转轮王”,对此你不必挂心,我就是王。而且说到王权,别的国王即便是转轮王,他所统领的范围也有限:或者一百由旬,或者两三百、三四百、五百由旬,乃至一千由旬,最多也不过四大洲的边际。我的领域却不是这样有限的。因为我是法王、无上者,向上从有顶天,向下到无间地狱,横向无量无数的世界,都是我教化的范围。凡是无足、二足等各类众生,我都是他们中最殊胜的。从戒一直到解脱智见,没有任何人能和我相比。我就是这样的法王、无上者,以无上的、由四念处等菩提分法所摄的法,转动法轮——或是“舍此、住彼”这样的教诫之轮,或是“诸比丘,这是苦圣谛”这样的教法之轮。所谓不退转之轮,就是这轮不会被沙门乃至世间任何人所逆转。巴利
560. Evaṃ vutte bhagavā ‘‘ye te bhavanti arahanto sammāsambuddhā, te sake vaṇṇe bhaññamāne attānaṃ pātukarontī’’ti imaṃ selassa manorathaṃ pūrento āha ‘‘rājāhamasmī’’ti. Tatrāyamadhippāyo – yaṃ kho maṃ tvaṃ sela yācasi ‘‘rājā arahasi bhavituṃ cakkavattī’’ti, ettha appossukko hoti, rājāhamasmi, sati ca rājatte yathā añño rājā samānopi yojanasataṃ vā anusāsati, dve tīṇi vā cattāri vā pañca vā yojanasatāni yojanasahassaṃ vā cakkavatti hutvāpi catudīpapariyantamattaṃ vā, nāhamevaṃ paricchinnavisayo. Ahañhi dhammarājā anuttaro bhavaggato avīcipariyantaṃ katvā tiriyaṃ appameyyā lokadhātuyo anusāsāmi. Yāvatā hi apadadvipadādibhedā sattā, ahaṃ tesaṃ aggo. Na hi me koci sīlena vā…pe… vimuttiñāṇadassanena vā paṭibhāgo atthi. Svāhaṃ evaṃ dhammarājā anuttaro anuttareneva catusatipaṭṭhānādibhedabodhipakkhiyasaṅkhātena dhammena cakkaṃ vattemi ‘‘idaṃ pajahatha, idaṃ upasampajja viharathā’’tiādinā āṇācakkaṃ, ‘‘idaṃ kho pana, bhikkhave, dukkhaṃ ariyasacca’’ntiādinā (saṃ. ni. 5.1081; mahāva. 14) pariyattidhammena dhammacakkameva vā. Cakkaṃ appaṭivattiyanti yaṃ cakkaṃ appaṭivattiyaṃ hoti samaṇena vā…pe… kenaci lokasminti.
561-2 塞拉看见世尊这样显示自己,生起欢喜和愉悦,为了让信心更坚定,说出两首偈颂:“您承认自己是正觉者……”其中,“那么谁是将军呢?”他这样问:“尊贵的法王,那位随转您以法转动之法轮的将军是谁呢?”巴利
561-2. Evaṃ attānaṃ āvikarontaṃ bhagavantaṃ disvā pītisomanassajāto selo daḷhikaraṇatthaṃ ‘‘sambuddho paṭijānāsī’’ti gāthādvayamāha. Tattha ko nu senāpatīti dhammarañño bhoto, dhammena pavattitassa dhammacakkassa anuppavattako senāpati koti pucchi.
563 那时,尊者舍利弗坐在世尊的右边,像一堆金子一样散发着光辉。世尊指着他,说出“由我所转……”这首偈颂。其中,“随如来而生”的意思是:以如来为因而生,以如来为因出生。巴利
563. Tena ca samayena bhagavato dakkhiṇapasse āyasmā sāriputto nisinno hoti suvaṇṇapuñjo viya siriyā sobhamāno, taṃ dassento bhagavā ‘‘mayā pavattita’’nti gāthamāha. Tattha anujāto tathāgatanti tathāgatahetu anujāto, tathāgatena hetunā jātoti attho.
564 世尊这样回答了“到底谁是将军”这个问题之后,为了让他对塞拉所说的“您自称是正自觉者”这句话不再有疑惑,想让他明白:“我不是只凭自称就说自己是佛,而是有根据才说自己是佛”,于是说了“应证知”这首偈颂。其中,“应证知”指的是明和解脱。道谛和集谛虽然属于应当修习、应当断除的,但这里是通过说因来成立果,所以它们的果——灭谛和苦谛——也就同样被说到了。因此,应当证知的已经证知,应当遍知的已经遍知,这里所表达的就是这个意思。这样,世尊显示了四谛修证的果以及明和解脱,并用“应当觉悟的已经觉悟,所以我成为佛陀”这个合理的根据,成立了自己是佛陀。巴利
564. Evaṃ ‘‘ko nu senāpatī’’ti pañhaṃ byākaritvā yaṃ selo āha – ‘‘sambuddho paṭijānāsī’’ti, tatra naṃ nikkaṅkhaṃ kātukāmo ‘‘nāhaṃ paṭiññāmatteneva paṭijānāmi, apicāhaṃ iminā kāraṇena buddho’’ti ñāpetuṃ ‘‘abhiññeyya’’nti gāthamāha. Tattha abhiññeyyanti vijjā ca vimutti ca. Maggasaccasamudayasaccāni pana bhāvetabbapahātabbāni, hetuvacanena pana phalasiddhito tesaṃ phalāni nirodhasaccadukkhasaccānipi vuttāneva bhavanti. Yato sacchikātabbaṃ sacchikataṃ, pariññeyyaṃ pariññātanti evampettha vuttameva hoti. Evaṃ catusaccabhāvanāphalañca vijjāvimuttiṃ dassento ‘‘bujjhitabbaṃ bujjhitvā buddho jātosmī’’ti yuttena hetunā buddhattaṃ sādheti.
565-7 世尊这样以究竟的方式显示了自己之后,为了去除婆罗门心中的疑惑,就激励婆罗门,自己说出“请调伏”这三首偈颂。其中,“拔箭者”是指拔除贪箭等七种箭的人。“梵位者”是指达到最殊胜地位的人。“无等者”是指超越了比较、超越了譬喻,也就是无可比拟的意思。“摧破魔军者”是指摧破魔罗的军队——也就是像“欲是你的第一军”等经文里所说的、以及“轻视他人”等所说的那样,被称为魔罗眷属的魔军。“一切敌”是指五蕴魔、烦恼魔、诸行魔、死魔、天子魔等一切敌。“悉令臣服”是指令其服从于自己。“无畏惧者”是指于一切处皆不生起恐惧。巴利
565-7. Evaṃ nippariyāyena attānaṃ pātukatvā attani kaṅkhāvitaraṇatthaṃ brāhmaṇaṃ abhittharayamāno ‘‘vinayassū’’ti gāthāttayamāha. Tattha sallakattoti rāgasallādisattasallakattano. Brahmabhūtoti seṭṭhabhūto. Atituloti tulaṃ atīto upamaṃ atīto, nirūpamoti attho. Mārasenappamaddanoti ‘‘kāmā te paṭhamā senā’’tiādikāya ‘‘pare ca avajānātī’’ti (su. ni. 440; mahāni. 28; cūḷani. nandamāṇavapucchāniddesa 47) evaṃ vuttāya māraparisasaṅkhātāya mārasenāya pamaddano. Sabbāmitteti khandhakilesābhisaṅkhāramaccudevaputtamārādike sabbapaccatthike. Vasīkatvāti attano vase vattetvā. Akutobhayoti kutoci abhayo.
568-70 世尊这样说时,婆罗门塞拉当下就对世尊生起了净信,想要出家。于是他说出这三首偈颂:“诸位大德……”就像善根已经成熟、具足殊胜因缘的人,被正确地激励时那样。其中,“黑生种”是指出生在旃陀罗等低贱家族的人。巴利
568-70. Evaṃ vutte selo brāhmaṇo tāvadeva bhagavati sañjātappasādo pabbajjāpekkho hutvā ‘‘imaṃ bhavanto’’ti gāthāttayamāha yathā taṃ paripākagatāya upanissayasampattiyā sammā codiyamāno. Tattha kaṇhābhijātikoti caṇḍālādinīcakule jāto.
571 于是那些年轻人也同样生起了出家的意愿,便说出“若尊者您满意于此……”这首偈颂,正如那些曾与他一起积累善行的善男子们一样。巴利
571. Tato tepi māṇavakā tatheva pabbajjāpekkhā hutvā ‘‘etañce ruccati bhoto’’ti gāthamāhaṃsu yathā taṃ tena saddhiṃ katādhikārā kulaputtā.
572 这时,塞拉对那群年轻人满心欢喜,一边向他们展示,一边请求出家,便说出“婆罗门……”这首偈颂。巴利
572. Atha selo tesu māṇavakesu tuṭṭhacitto te dassento pabbajjaṃ yācamāno ‘‘brāhmaṇā’’ti gāthamāha.
573 573. 此后,世尊想到:过去在莲华上佛的教法时期,塞拉曾是那三百人的僧团首领,他和他们一起让人修建了精舍,做了布施等福德,然后依次享受人天的福报,在最后一生中,又投生为他们的老师;而他们所做的那些业,已经成熟到足以带来解脱,并且成为他们以“善来比丘”身份出家的亲依止缘。因此,世尊为了让他们全都以“善来比丘”的方式出家,便说了“善说……”这首偈颂。其中,“现见”是指亲眼可见、当下就能体验的。“无时”是指并非要经过一段时间后才得果,而是道果立即生起。“于此”是指以此作为原因。因为以道之梵行为缘由的出家,对于不放逸、不离失正念、在三学中修学的人而言是不虚妄的。因此说:“善说……中略……修学者”。巴利
573. Tato bhagavā yasmā selo atīte padumuttarassa bhagavato sāsane tesaṃyeva tiṇṇaṃ purisasatānaṃ gaṇaseṭṭho hutvā tehi saddhiṃ pariveṇaṃ kārāpetvā dānādīni puññāni ca katvā kamena devamanussasampattiṃ anubhavamāno pacchime bhave tesaṃyeva ācariyo hutvā nibbatto, tañca nesaṃ kammaṃ vimuttiparipākāya paripakkaṃ ehibhikkhubhāvassa ca upanissayabhūtaṃ, tasmā te sabbeva ehibhikkhupabbajjāya pabbājento ‘‘svākkhāta’’nti gāthamāha. Tattha sandiṭṭhikanti paccakkhaṃ. Akālikanti maggānantaraphaluppattito na kālantare pattabbaphalaṃ. Yatthāti yannimittā. Maggabrahmacariyanimittā hi pabbajjā appamattassa sativippavāsavirahitassa tīsu sikkhāsu sikkhato amoghā hoti. Tenāha – ‘‘svākkhātaṃ…pe… sikkhato’’ti.
说完这话,世尊说:“来吧,比丘们。”他们全都拿着衣钵,从空中来到世尊面前,向世尊顶礼。结集者们针对他们这种“善来比丘”的身份,这样说道:“塞拉尊者……中略……获得了具足戒。”巴利
Evañca vatvā ‘‘etha bhikkhavo’’ti bhagavā avoca. Te sabbe pattacīvaradharā hutvā ākāsenāgamma bhagavantaṃ abhivādesuṃ. Evamimaṃ tesaṃ ehibhikkhubhāvaṃ sandhāya saṅgītikārā ‘‘alattha kho selo…pe… upasampada’’nti āhaṃsu.
“食已”是指已经吃完饭。“置钵洗手”是指手已经从钵移开,也就是已经把手拿开的意思。这里应当理解为省略了“前往”一词。否则的话,说他在世尊旁边坐下就讲不通了。巴利
Bhuttāvinti bhuttavantaṃ. Onītapattapāṇinti pattato onītapāṇiṃ, apanītahatthanti vuttaṃ hoti. Tattha ‘‘upagantvā’’ti pāṭhaseso daṭṭhabbo. Itarathā hi bhagavantaṃ ekamantaṃ nisīdīti na yujjati.
574 “火供为首”这句话,是世尊为了随顺肯尼雅的心意而随喜说出的。在这里,因为婆罗门如果不事火就没有祭祀,所以偈中说“火供为首诸祭祀”,意思是火供最为殊胜、最为上首。在吠陀诵习中,因为最先要诵习萨维帝,所以说萨维帝是“韵律之首”。因为国王是众人中最殊胜的,所以说国王是“人之首”。因为大海是众河的容受处和归宿,所以说大海是“河之首”。凭借月亮的运行,人们能知道“今天昴宿值日”“今天罗希尼值日”,又因为它能照亮、性质柔和,所以说“月亮是星辰之首”。在一切发热之物中,太阳最为炽热,所以说太阳是“发热者之首”。而对于一切应受供养者,其中最上的——特别是在那个时候,以佛陀为首的僧团——所以说“渴求福德的人们啊,僧众确实是祭祀之首”。由此表明,僧团是福德的入口。巴利
574.Aggihuttamukhāti bhagavā keṇiyassa cittānukūlavasena anumodanto evamāha. Tattha aggiparicariyaṃ vinā brāhmaṇānaṃ yaññābhāvato ‘‘aggihuttamukhā yaññā’’ti vuttaṃ. Aggihuttaseṭṭhā aggihuttapadhānāti attho. Vede sajjhāyantehi paṭhamaṃ sajjhāyitabbato sāvittī ‘‘chandaso mukha’’nti vuttā. Manussānaṃ seṭṭhato rājā ‘‘mukha’’nti vutto. Nadīnaṃ ādhārato paṭisaraṇato ca sāgaro ‘‘mukha’’nti vutto. Candayogavasena ‘‘ajja kattikā ajja rohinī’’ti sañjānanato ālokakaraṇato sommabhāvato ca ‘‘nakkhattānaṃ mukhaṃ cando’’ti vutto. Tapantānaṃ aggattā ādicco ‘‘tapataṃ mukha’’nti vutto. Dakkhiṇeyyānaṃ pana aggattā visesena tasmiṃ samaye buddhappamukhaṃ saṅghaṃ sandhāya ‘‘puññaṃ ākaṅkhamānānaṃ, saṅgho ve yajataṃ mukha’’nti vutto. Tena saṅgho puññassa āyamukhanti dasseti.
576 另一首授记偈颂。它的意思是:具足五眼的世尊啊,因为我们在八天前皈依了您,所以在七个夜晚之内,就靠着您教法中无上的调御,得到了调伏。啊!皈依的威力真是不可思议!巴利
576.Yaṃ taṃ saraṇanti aññabyākaraṇagāthamāha. Tassattho – pañcahi cakkhūhi cakkhumā bhagavā, yasmā mayaṃ ito aṭṭhame divase taṃ saraṇaṃ agamamha, tasmā sattarattena tava sāsane anuttarena damathena dantamha. Aho te saraṇassa ānubhāvoti.
577-8 从那以后,他用两首偈颂赞叹世尊,接着又用第三首偈颂请求顶礼。巴利
577-8. Tato paraṃ bhagavantaṃ dvīhi gāthāhi thunitvā tatiyāya vandanaṃ yācati –
这三百位比丘,合掌而立;
大雄啊,请把双脚伸出来,让龙众向导师顶礼。巴利
‘‘Bhikkhavo tisatā ime, tiṭṭhanti pañjalīkatā; Pāde vīra pasārehi, nāgā vandantu satthuno’’ti.
8. 《箭经》的注释巴利
8. Sallasuttavaṇṇanā
580 580.“无相”指的是《箭经》。这部经的起因是什么?据说,世尊有一位在家弟子担任侍者,他的儿子死了。他因丧子之痛而崩溃,整整七天不吃不喝。世尊出于悲悯,来到他家,为了排遣他的悲伤而说了这部经。巴利
580.Animittanti sallasuttaṃ. Kā uppatti? Bhagavato kira upaṭṭhāko eko upāsako, tassa putto kālamakāsi. So puttasokābhibhūto sattāhaṃ nirāhāro ahosi. Taṃ anukampanto bhagavā tassa gharaṃ gantvā sokavinodanatthaṃ imaṃ suttamabhāsi.
在这里,“无相”是指没有能作为征兆的行动方式。比如在“等我眨眼或者抬眉毛的时候,你就用这个暗号把那件东西偷走”这类情况下,是有一个行动征兆的,但生命并不是这样。因为没办法得到这样的保证:“在我做完这个或那个之前,你得活着,不许死。”所谓“不可确知”,正是因此,无法断定生命到底能持续多久,无论从投生的趣向来看,还是从寿命的限度来看。比如四大王天等天界的寿命是有限的、确定的,而人类却不是这样,所以寿命无法确定。巴利
Tattha animattanti kiriyākāranimittavirahitaṃ. Yathā hi ‘‘yadāhaṃ akkhiṃ vā nikhaṇissāmi, bhamukaṃ vā ukkhipissāmi, tena nimittena taṃ bhaṇḍaṃ avaharā’’tiādīsu kiriyākāranimittamatthi, na evaṃ jīvite. Na hi sakkā laddhuṃ ‘‘yāvāhaṃ idaṃ vā idaṃ vā karomi, tāva tvaṃ jīva, mā mīyā’’ti. Anaññātanti ato eva na sakkā ekaṃsena aññātuṃ ‘‘ettakaṃ vā ettakaṃ vā kālaṃ iminā jīvitabba’’nti gatiyā āyupariyantavasena vā. Yathā hi cātumahārājikādīnaṃ parimitaṃ āyu, na tathā maccānaṃ, evampi ekaṃsena anaññātaṃ.
“困苦”:因为生命要靠许多条件才能维持运转,所以是困苦,不是能轻松安乐地养活的。它确实依赖入息、出息、四大种、段食、暖气和识。不吸气活不了,不呼气也活不了。在四界当中,身体就像被木口蛇等毒蛇咬了一样:只要地界一乱,身体就先变得僵硬,像枯木一样。正如所说:巴利
Kasiranti anekapaccayapaṭibaddhavuttibhāvato kicchaṃ na sukhayāpanīyaṃ. Tathā hi taṃ assāsapaṭibaddhañca, passāsapaṭibaddhañca, mahābhūtapaṭibaddhañca, kabaḷīkārāhārapaṭibaddhañca, usmāpaṭibaddhañca, viññāṇapaṭibaddhañca. Anassasantopi hi na jīvati apassasantopi. Catūsu ca dhātūsu kaṭṭhamukhādiāsīvisadaṭṭho viya kāyo pathavīdhātuppakopena tāva thaddho hoti kaliṅgarasadiso. Yathāha –
身体会变得僵硬,就像被木口蛇咬了一样;
因地界扰动,他就像木口一样。巴利
‘‘Patthaddho bhavatī kāyo, daṭṭho kaṭṭhamukhena vā; Pathavīdhātuppakopena, hoti kaṭṭhamukheva so’’ti. (dha. sa. aṭṭha. 584);
由于水界扰动,身体就腐败,脓、肉、血流淌出来,最后只剩下骨头和皮肤残余。正如所说:巴利
Āpodhātuppakopena pūtibhāvaṃ āpajjitvā paggharitapubbamaṃsalohito aṭṭhicammāvaseso hoti. Yathāha –
身体变得腐烂,或者被腐口(蛇)所咬;
水界紊乱时,那个人就会嘴巴溃烂发臭。巴利
‘‘Pūtiko bhavatī kāyo, daṭṭho pūtimukhena vā; Āpodhātuppakopena, hoti pūtimukheva so’’ti. (dha. sa. aṭṭha. 584);
火界一旦紊乱,就像被扔进火坑里一样,全身四周都被烧灼。正如经中所说:巴利
Tejodhātuppakopena aṅgārakāsuyaṃ pakkhitto viya samantā pariḍayhati. Yathāha –
身体变得滚烫,就像被火口咬到一样;
因为火界紊乱,那个人就像身处火口之中。巴利
‘‘Santatto bhavatī kāyo, daṭṭho aggimukhena vā; Tejodhātuppakopena, hoti aggimukheva so’’ti. (dha. sa. aṭṭha. 584);
风界紊乱时,关节与连接被切断,就像身体被石头砸碎、碾成粉末一样。正如经中所说:巴利
Vāyodhātuppakopena sañchijjamānasandhibandhano pāsāṇehi koṭṭetvā sañcuṇṇiyamānaṭṭhiko viya ca hoti. Yathāha –
身体被割裂,或者被刀口砍伤;
因风界激荡,他就像口中含剑一样。巴利
‘‘Sañchinno bhavatī kāyo, daṭṭho satthamukhena vā; Vāyodhātuppakopena, hoti satthamukheva so’’ti. (dha. sa. aṭṭha. 584);
身体里的界一旦紊乱失调,众生就活不下去。只有当这些界互相支撑,共同完成支撑等作用,彼此协调运行时,生命才能维持下去。所以,生命是依赖四大种的。
在饥荒等时候,因为食物断绝,众生的命就结束了,这是很明显的事。所以,生命是依赖段食的。
同样,当吃下去、喝下去的东西消化时,如果业生的火界耗尽了,众生也就走到寿命的尽头,这也很明显。所以,生命是依赖火界的。
而当识灭去时,从灭去的那一刻起,众生就不再活着了,这在世间也是显而易见的。所以,生命是依赖识的。
由此可见,生命要靠许多因缘条件和合才能存在,因此应当知道它是极其脆弱的。巴利
Dhātuppakopabyāpannakāyopi ca na jīvati. Yadā pana tā dhātuyo aññamaññaṃ patiṭṭhānādikiccaṃ sādhentāpi samaṃ vahanti, tadā jīvitaṃ pavattati. Evaṃ mahābhūtapaṭibaddhañca jīvitaṃ. Dubbhikkhādīsu pana āhārupacchedena sattānaṃ jīvitakkhayo pākaṭo eva. Evaṃ kabaḷīkārāhārapaṭibaddhañca jīvitaṃ. Tathā asitapītādiparipāke kammajateje khīṇe sattā jīvitakkhayaṃ pāpuṇantāpi pākaṭā eva. Evaṃ usmāpaṭibaddhañca jīvitaṃ. Viññāṇe pana niruddhe niruddhato pabhuti sattānaṃ na hoti jīvitanti evampi loke pākaṭameva. Evaṃ viññāṇapaṭibaddhañca jīvitaṃ. Evaṃ anekapaccayapaṭibaddhavuttibhāvato kasiraṃ veditabbaṃ.
所谓“小”,就是微少。跟诸天的寿命相比,就像草尖上的露珠一样;又因为过了心识刹那之后就不再存在,所以叫“小”。即使一个众生寿命极长,以过去心来说,他曾经活过,不是现在活着,也不会在未来活着;以未来心来说,他将在未来活着,不是现在活着,也不是曾经活过;以现在心来说,他此刻活着,不是曾经活过,也不会在未来活着。关于这一点,有这样的说法:巴利
Parittañcāti appakaṃ, devānaṃ jīvitaṃ upanidhāya tiṇagge ussāvabindusadisaṃ, cittakkhaṇato uddhaṃ abhāvena vā parittaṃ. Atidīghāyukopi hi satto atītena cittena jīvittha na jīvati na jīvissati, anāgatena jīvissati na jīvati na jīvittha, paccuppannena jīvati na jīvittha na jīvissati. Vuttañcetaṃ –
生命、自体,以及全部的苦与乐;
与单一心识相应的那一刹那,轻快地流转。
那些天神能活八万四千劫,
他们也不是与两种心相应而活着的。巴利
‘‘Jīvitaṃ attabhāvo ca, sukhadukkhā ca kevalā; Ekacittasamāyuttā, lahuso vattate khaṇo. ‘‘Cullāsītisahassāni , kappā tiṭṭhanti ye marū; Natveva tepi jīvanti, dvīhi cittehi saṃyutā’’ti. (mahāni. 10);
这个生命也是和苦绑在一起的:它这样没有标记、无法预知、艰难又短暂,却仍然伴随着冷、热、蚊虻等接触,以及饥渴,还有行苦、变易苦、苦苦这些苦。这话是什么意思呢?因为凡人的生命就是这样,所以只要它还没有耗尽,你就应当努力修行法行,不要为儿子悲伤。巴利
Tañca dukkhena saṃyutanti tañca jīvitaṃ evaṃ animittamanaññātaṃ kasiraṃ parittañca samānampi sītuṇhaḍaṃsamakasādisamphassakhuppipāsāsaṅkhāradukkhavipariṇāmadukkhadukkhadukkhehi saṃyutaṃ. Kiṃ vuttaṃ hoti? Yasmā īdisaṃ maccānaṃ jīvitaṃ, tasmā tvaṃ yāva taṃ parikkhayaṃ na gacchati, tāva dhammacariyameva brūhaya, mā puttamanusocāti.
581 就算你这样想:“我用尽一切办法保护儿子,他还是死了,所以我悲伤。”即便如此,也不要悲伤。因为根本没有任何办法能让已经出生的人不死。这句话的意思就是:不可能靠任何手段保护已生的众生,让他们不死。接着,因为他想:“尊者,活到老才死才算正常,可我的儿子太年轻就死了。”所以佛陀说:“就算活到老,死亡也一样会来,因为众生就是这个样子。”意思是说,活到老也好,没活到老也好,死亡都会发生,这件事并没有一定。巴利
581. Athāpi maññeyyāsi ‘‘sabbūpakaraṇehi puttaṃ anurakkhantassāpi me so mato, tena socāmī’’ti, evampi mā soci. Na hi so upakkamo atthi, yena jātā na miyyare, na hi sakkā kenaci upakkamena jātā sattā mā marantūti rakkhitunti vuttaṃ hoti. Tato yasmā so ‘‘jaraṃ patvā nāma, bhante, maraṇaṃ anurūpaṃ, atidaharo me putto mato’’ti cintesi, tasmā āha ‘‘jarampi patvā maraṇaṃ, evaṃdhammā hi pāṇino’’ti, jaraṃ patvāpi appatvāpi maraṇaṃ, natthi ettha niyamoti vuttaṃ hoti.
582 现在,为了用譬喻说明这个道理,就说了“犹如成熟的果实……”等话。它的意思是:譬如成熟的果实,从太阳升起开始,树木被阳光烘烤时,地味和水味从叶子到树枝、从树枝到树干、从树干到树根,这样一步步从树根进入大地;而从太阳落下开始,又从大地到树根、从树根到树干,这样一步步再上升到树枝、树叶、嫩芽等处,但在这样上升时,并不会进入已经成熟果实的果蒂根部。然后,当阳光烘烤果蒂根部时,那里就产生灼热。因此那些果实每天早晨、时时刻刻都在掉落,它们有早晨掉落的恐惧,也就是掉落的恐惧。同样,已经出生的众生,因为一直会死亡,所以有恐惧。众生确实就像成熟的果实一样。巴利
582. Idāni tamatthaṃ nidassanena sādhento ‘‘phalānamiva pakkāna’’ntiādimāha. Tassattho – yathā phalānaṃ pakkānaṃ yasmā sūriyuggamanato pabhuti sūriyātapena santappamāne rukkhe pathaviraso ca āporaso ca pattato sākhaṃ sākhato khandhaṃ khandhato mūlanti evaṃ anukkamena mūlato pathavimeva pavisati, ogamanato pabhuti pana pathavito mūlaṃ mūlato khandhanti evaṃ anukkamena sākhāpattapallavādīni puna ārohati, evaṃ ārohanto ca paripākagate phale vaṇṭamūlaṃ na pavisati. Atha sūriyātapena tappamāne vaṇṭamūle pariḷāho uppajjati. Tena tāni phalāni pāto pāto niccakālaṃ patanti, nesaṃ pāto patanato bhayaṃ hoti, patanā bhayaṃ hotīti attho. Evaṃ jātānaṃ maccānaṃ niccaṃ maraṇato bhayaṃ . Pakkaphalasadisā hi sattāti.
583-6 还有更进一步的,“犹如陶匠的……生命”。所以,应当这样理解:“年轻者……归趣”;这样理解之后,也应当这样理解:“对于他们,死亡……或者亲属对于亲属”。又因为父亲不能保护儿子,亲属也不能保护亲属,所以就在人们眼睁睁看着的时候……被带走。巴利
583-6. Kiñca bhiyyo ‘‘yathāpi kumbhakārassa…pe… jīvita’’nti. Tasmā ‘‘daharā ca…pe… parāyaṇā’’ti evaṃ gaṇha, evañca gahetvā ‘‘tesaṃ maccu…pe… ñātī vā pana ñātake’’ti evampi gaṇha. Yasmā ca na pitā tāyate puttaṃ, ñātī vā pana ñātake, tasmā pekkhataṃyeva…pe… nīyati.
在这里,文句的关联是这样:就在亲人们眼睁睁看着的时候,众生用“妈啊!爸啊!”等种种方式不停地哀号哭泣,而每一个众生就像一头被牵去宰杀的牛一样被带走。近事男,你要这样观察:世间何其没有庇护。巴利
Tattha ayaṃ yojanā – passamānānaṃyeva ñātīnaṃ ‘‘amma, tātā’’tiādinā nayena puthu anekappakārakaṃ lālapataṃyeva maccānaṃ ekameko macco yathā go vajjho evaṃ nīyati, evaṃ passa, upāsaka, yāva atāṇo lokoti.
587 在这里,像佛陀、独觉佛这些具足坚定信念的人,因为他们知道:“世间就是这样被死亡和衰老所困扰,谁也没法给它提供保护”,所以这些智者明白了世间的运行方式之后,就不悲伤。也就是说:了解了世间的这种本性之后,他们就不悲伤。巴利
587. Tattha ye buddhapaccekabuddhādayo dhitisampannā, te ‘‘evamabbhāhato loko maccunā ca jarāya ca, so na sakkā kenaci parittāṇaṃ kātu’’nti yasmā jānanti, tasmā dhīrā na socanti viditvā lokapariyāyaṃ. Imaṃ lokasabhāvaṃ ñatvā na socantīti vuttaṃ hoti.
588 你却在为一个人的来路与去处哭泣。这话说的是什么意思呢?你不知道他进入母胎时是从哪里来的,也不知道他死后离开这里去了哪里。你既然看不到这两个方面,那你的哭泣就是白费力气、毫无意义。而那些有智慧的人,因为看得清楚,明白了世间流转的真相,所以不会悲伤。巴利
588. Tvaṃ pana yassa maggaṃ…pe… paridevasi. Kiṃ vuttaṃ hoti? Yassa mātukucchiṃ āgatassa āgatamaggaṃ vā ito cavitvā aññattha gatassa gatamaggaṃ vā na jānāsi, tassa ime ubho ante asampassaṃ niratthaṃ paridevasi. Dhīrā pana te passantā viditvā lokapariyāyaṃ na socantīti.
589 现在,为了说明“徒劳地悲叹”这句话里所说的悲叹没有意义,他接着说了“若悲叹……”等话。其中,“能产生”是指能引起、能维持,也就是在自己身上生起的意思。“愚痴者伤害自己”:是说变成愚痴之后折磨自己。如果这样做真能带来什么利益,那么明智的人也会去悲叹了。巴利
589. Idāni ‘‘niratthaṃ paridevasī’’ti ettha vuttaparidevanāya niratthakabhāvaṃ sādhento ‘‘paridevayamāno ce’’tiādimāha. Tattha udabbaheti ubbaheyya dhāreyya, attani sañjaneyyāti attho. Sammūḷho hiṃsamattānanti sammūḷho hutvā attānaṃ bādhento. Kayirā ce naṃ vicakkhaṇoti yadi tādiso kañci atthaṃ udabbahe, vicakkhaṇopi naṃ paridevaṃ kareyya.
590 “确实不是靠哭泣”这句话应当这样理解:没有人能靠哭泣或忧愁得到内心的宁静;恰恰相反,正在哭泣、忧愁的人,苦只会越来越多,身体也会因为容貌变丑等而受到损害。巴利
590.Na hi ruṇṇenāti etthāyaṃ yojanā – na pana koci ruṇṇena vā sokena vā cetaso santiṃ pappoti, apica kho pana rodato socato ca bhiyyo assa uppajjate dukkhaṃ, sarīrañca dubbaṇṇiyādīhi upahaññatīti.
591 因为他们是亡灵,死者不会因亲人的悲叹而得到保护,也不会因此得到维持,悲叹对他们没有任何帮助。所以,悲叹毫无意义。巴利
591.Na tena petāti tena paridevanena kālakatā na pālenti na yāpenti, na taṃ tesaṃ upakārāya hoti. Tasmā niratthā paridevanāti.
592 592. 它不仅毫无意义,还会带来祸害。为什么?因为他不舍弃忧悲……(中略)……受其支配。其中,“anutthunanto”是指正在哀叹忧伤的人。“vasamanvagū”是指已经落入其掌控的人。巴利
592. Na kevalañca niratthā, anatthampi āvahati. Kasmā? Yasmā sokamappajahaṃ…pe… vasamanvagū. Tattha anutthunantoti anusocanto. Vasamanvagūti vasaṃ gato.
593 593. 这样说明了忧悲既没有意义、又带来损害之后,现在为了去除忧悲而教诫,说了“也看看别的”等话。其中,“行人”指要上路的人,也就是已经准备好前往他世的人。“在此颤抖的众生”指在这世间因死亡恐惧而颤抖的众生。巴利
593. Evampi niratthakattaṃ anatthāvahattañca sokassa dassetvā idāni sokavinayatthaṃ ovadanto ‘‘aññepi passā’’tiādimāha. Tattha gamineti gamike, paralokagamanasajje ṭhiteti vuttaṃ hoti. Phandantevidha pāṇinoti maraṇabhayena phandamāneyeva idha satte.
594 “以某种方式”是指:人们这样想:“他会长寿,他会无病。”可后来情况偏偏完全相反——那个被这样设想的人,照样会死,照样会生病。这种分离,恰恰与所设想的情形相反。看吧,近事男,这就是世间的本性。应当这样理解这里面的意趣。巴利
594.Yena yenāti yenākārena maññanti ‘‘dīghāyuko bhavissati, arogo bhavissatī’’ti. Tato taṃ aññathāyeva hoti, so evaṃ maññito maratipi, rogīpi hoti. Etādiso ayaṃ vinābhāvo maññitappaccanīkena hoti, passa, upāsaka, lokasabhāvanti evamettha adhippāyayojanā veditabbā.
596 “听闻阿拉汉”是指听闻了阿拉汉这样的说法。“这不可能由我得到”,是说那个亡者清楚地知道:“现在再让我活过来”是不可能的,这样就是在调伏悲叹。巴利
596.Arahato sutvāti imaṃ evarūpaṃ arahato dhammadesanaṃ sutvā. Neso labbhā mayā itīti so peto ‘‘idāni mayā puna jīvatū’’ti na labbhā iti parijānanto, vineyya paridevitanti vuttaṃ hoti.
597 还有更进一步:“就像着火的房屋……应当摧毁。”在这里,“坚定者”是因为具备坚定的品质而应被理解,“有智慧者”是因为具有与生俱来的智慧,“智者”是因为有多闻得来的智慧,“善巧者”是因为天生善于思考。或者,也可以配合思所成慧、闻所成慧、修所成慧来理解。巴利
597. Kiñca bhiyyo – ‘‘yathā saraṇamādittaṃ…pe… dhaṃsaye’’ti. Tattha dhīro dhitisampadāya, sapañño sābhāvikapaññāya, paṇḍito bāhusaccapaññāya, kusalo cintakajātikatāya veditabbo. Cintāmayasutamayabhāvanāmayapaññāhi vā yojetabbaṃ.
598-9 不只是悲伤,还有悲叹……自己的刺。这里,“pajappanti”指的是渴爱。“忧”指的是心所层面的苦。“拔除”就是拔出来。“刺”说的就是这三种,因为它难以拔出,又能从内部刺穿,所以叫刺。或者也可以指前面说过的七种贪等之刺。当这根刺被拔掉时,那已拔掉刺的人……就成为寂灭者。至此,世尊以阿拉汉果为顶点结束了这次说法。这里,“无所依”指不依止渴爱和邪见。“达到”指达到之后。其余部分因为前面已经解释过,意思很清楚,所以不再注释。巴利
598-9. Na kevalañca sokameva, paridevaṃ…pe… sallamattano. Tattha pajappanti taṇhaṃ. Domanassanti cetasikadukkhaṃ. Abbaheti uddhare. Sallanti etameva tippakāraṃ dunnīharaṇaṭṭhena antovijjhanaṭṭhena ca sallaṃ. Pubbe vuttaṃ sattavidhaṃ rāgādisallaṃ vā. Etasmiñhi abbūḷhe salle abbūḷhasallo…pe… nibbutoti arahattanikūṭena desanaṃ niṭṭhāpesi. Tattha asitoti taṇhādiṭṭhīhi anissito. Pappuyyāti pāpuṇitvā. Sesaṃ idha ito pubbe vuttattā uttānatthameva, tasmā na vaṇṇitaṃ.
9. 《婆悉咤经》的注释巴利
9. Vāseṭṭhasuttavaṇṇanā
“如是我闻”这一句,是《婆悉咤经》的开头。这部经的缘起是什么呢?就是它在序分里已经说过的那些。至于义注,我们会沿用已有的解释方式,跳过那些意思明显的词句来讲。“一奢能伽罗”是一个村子的名字。“商吉”“哆卢伽”“兜德耶”这些,是婆罗门富豪们常用的称呼。“沸伽罗娑罗”和“生闻”,是两位占相者的名字。据说他们当中,有一位是在雪山旁边的池塘里、从莲花中出生的。有个苦行者摘下那朵莲花,看见里面躺着一个男孩,就把他抚养长大,然后带去见国王。因为他躺在莲花里,就给他取名叫“沸伽罗娑罗”。另一位则是在别处做占相者。据说他得到了“生闻”这个国师职位,也因此以这个名字为人所知。巴利
Evaṃme sutanti vāseṭṭhasuttaṃ. Kā uppatti? Ayameva yāssa nidāne vuttā atthavaṇṇanaṃ panassa vuttanayāni uttānatthāni ca padāni pariharantā karissāma. Icchānaṅgaloti gāmassa nāmaṃ. Brāhmaṇamahāsālānaṃ caṅkī tārukkho todeyyoti vohāranāmametaṃ. Pokkharasāti jāṇussoṇīti nemittikaṃ. Tesu kira eko himavantapasse pokkharaṇiyā padume nibbatto, aññataro tāpaso taṃ padumaṃ gahetvā tattha sayitaṃ dārakaṃ disvā saṃvaḍḍhetvā rañño dassesi. Pokkhare sayitattā ‘‘pokkharasātī’’ti cassa nāmamakāsi. Ekassa ṭhānantare nemittikaṃ. Tena kira jāṇussoṇināmakaṃ purohitaṭṭhānaṃ laddhaṃ, so teneva paññāyi.
他们以及其他所有同样有名的婆罗门大富豪,为什么都住在伊车能伽罗村呢?是为了读诵和探究吠陀。据说当时在憍萨罗国,精通吠陀的婆罗门们为了读诵吠陀和探究其义理,都会聚集在那个村子里。因此,他们也时不时地从自己封赐的村庄来到这里住下。巴利
Te sabbepi aññe ca abhiññātā abhiññātā brāhmaṇamahāsālā kasmā icchānaṅgale paṭivasantīti? Vedasajjhāyanaparivīmaṃsanatthaṃ. Tena kira samayena kosalajanapade vedakā brāhmaṇā vedānaṃ sajjhāyakaraṇatthañca atthūpaparikkhaṇatthañca tasmiṃyeva gāme sannipatanti. Tena tepi antarantarā attano bhogagāmato āgamma tattha paṭivasanti.
“婆悉咤与婆罗堕阇”是指婆悉咤和婆罗堕阇两个人。“这是中间的话题”是说:他们以符合朋友身份的方式一边交谈一边漫步时,就在那个话题的中间,另一个话题突然冒了出来,所以这样说。这里,祖父和祖母合称“祖父们”,同样,外祖父和外祖母合称“外祖父们”,祖父们和外祖父们合称“祖父们”。祖父们的寿量叫“祖父寿量”。“寿量”指寿命。这只是言语上的表达,但从意义上看,祖父们本身就是“祖父寿量”。“清净胎藏”是指清净的母腹,意思是说,他纯粹是从清净的婆罗门母胎中出生的。因为在“良好消化的能力”这类说法里,腹内的火被称为“消化力”,但在这里指的是母胎。“直到第七代”是指母亲的母亲、父亲的父亲,这样一代代往上逆推,直到第七代。“不被轻视”是关于出身,不被任何人以“他算什么”而看不起。“不被非难”是指从未因出身缺陷的指责而被非难过。“具足仪律”是指具足行仪。“令了知”是使之知道、使之觉悟,也就是使之不中断。“来吧”即“我们去吧”。巴利
Vāseṭṭhabhāradvājānanti vāseṭṭhassa ca bhāradvājassa ca. Ayamantarākathāti yaṃ attano sahāyakabhāvānurūpaṃ kathaṃ kathentā anuvicariṃsu, tassā kathāya antarā vemajjheyeva ayaṃ aññā kathā udapādīti vuttaṃ hoti. Saṃsuddhagahaṇikoti saṃsuddhakucchiko, saṃsuddhāya brāhmaṇiyā eva kucchismiṃ nibbattoti adhippāyo. ‘‘Samavepākiniyā gahaṇiyā’’tiādīsu hi udaraggi ‘‘gahaṇī’’ti vuccati. Idha pana mātukucchi. Yāva sattamāti mātu mātā, pitu pitāti evaṃ paṭilomena yāva satta jātiyo. Ettha ca pitāmaho ca pitāmahī ca pitāmahā, tathā mātāmaho ca mātāmahī ca mātāmahā, pitāmahā ca mātāmahā ca pitāmahāyeva. Pitāmahānaṃ yugaṃ pitāmahayugaṃ. Yuganti āyuppamāṇaṃ. Abhilāpamattameva cetaṃ, atthato pana pitāmahāyeva pitāmahayugaṃ. Akkhittoti jātiṃ ārabbha ‘‘kiṃ so’’ti kenaci anavaññāto . Anupakkuṭṭhoti jātisandosavādena anupakkuṭṭhapubbo. Vatasampannoti ācārasampanno. Saññāpetunti ñāpetuṃ bodhetuṃ, nirantaraṃ kātunti vuttaṃ hoti. Āyāmāti gacchāma.
600 “被认可并自认”的意思是:我们被老师们认可为“你们是三明者”,自己也这样承认。“我们是”就是成为。“两者”指两个人。他说“我是沸伽罗娑罗的弟子,这位青年是哆卢伽的”,这是为了显示老师的成就和自己的成就,真正的意思是:我是沸伽罗娑罗座下最年长的弟子、上首弟子,而这位是哆卢伽的门人。巴利
600.Anuññātapaṭiññātāti ‘‘tevijjā tumhe’’ti evaṃ mayaṃ ācariyehi ca anuññātā attanā ca paṭijānimhāti attho. Asmāti bhavāma. Ubhoti dvepi janā. Ahaṃ pokkharasātissa, tārukkhassāyaṃ māṇavoti ahaṃ pokkharasātissa jeṭṭhantevāsī aggasisso, ayaṃ tārukkhassāti adhippāyena bhaṇati ācariyasampattiṃ attano sampattiñca dīpento.
601 “三明者”是指通达三部吠陀的人。“究竟者”是指已经达到终点、圆满的人。“我们是”就是我们确实如此。现在,为了详细说明那种究竟圆满的状态,他说:“是读诵者……等等”。在这里,“读诵”是指吠陀。“由业”是指由十种善业道所造的业。因为前面针对七种身业和语业,他说过“贤者们,只要成为具戒者……”;针对三种意业,他又说“具足仪律”。确实具足这些,就是具足行仪。巴利
601.Tevijjānanti tivedānaṃ. Kevalinoti niṭṭhaṅgatā. Asmaseti amha bhavāma. Idāni taṃ kevalibhāvaṃ vitthārento āha – ‘‘padakasmā…pe… sādisā’’ti. Tattha jappeti vede. Kammunāti dasavidhena kusalakammapathakammunā. Ayañhi pubbe sattavidhaṃ kāyavacīkammaṃ sandhāya ‘‘yato kho bho sīlavā hotī’’ti āha. Tividhaṃ manokammaṃ sandhāya ‘‘vatasampanno’’ti āha. Tena samannāgato hi ācārasampanno hoti.
602-5 现在,他用另一种说法来说明这一点,说道:“我也以业而说。” “超越毁灭”是指已经越过了欠缺的状态,意思是圆满无缺。“到来”是指前往、到达。“礼敬”就是行礼致敬。“世间生起的眼”是指在无明黑暗的世间中,破除那黑暗,通过为世人开示现世利益等义理,成为眼目而出现于世间。巴利
602-5. Idāni taṃ vacanantarena dassento āha – ‘‘ahañca kammunā brūmī’’ti. Khayātītanti ūnabhāvaṃ atītaṃ, paripuṇṇanti attho. Peccāti upagantvā. Namassantīti namo karonti. Cakkhuṃ loke samuppannanti avijjandhakāre loke, taṃ andhakāraṃ vidhamitvā lokassa diṭṭhadhammikādiatthasandassanena cakkhu hutvā samuppannaṃ.
606 婆悉咤这样赞叹之后,因婆悉咤的请求,为了摄受这两个人,世尊说道:“我将为你们解说……”等等。其中,“将为解说”就是我将要解说。“次第”的意思是:婆罗门的想法暂且放一边,我将从昆虫、爬虫、草、树开始,为你们依次解说。应当这样理解此处的用意:这两位年轻人需要靠详细说法才能调伏。“种姓分别”就是对种姓的详细说明。“因为种种姓互不相同”是说,那些有情的种姓各各不同,有种种差别。巴利
606. Evaṃ abhitthavitvā vāseṭṭhena yācito bhagavā dvepi jane saṅgaṇhanto āha – ‘‘tesaṃ vo ahaṃ byakkhissa’’ntiādi. Tattha byakkhissanti byākarissāmi. Anupubbanti tiṭṭhatu tāva brāhmaṇacintā, kīṭapaṭaṅgatiṇarukkhato pabhuti vo anupubbaṃ byakkhissanti evamettha adhippāyo veditabbo, evaṃ vitthārakathāya vinetabbā hi te māṇavakā. Jātivibhaṅganti jātivitthāraṃ. Aññamaññā hi jātiyoti tesaṃ tesañhi pāṇānaṃ jātiyo aññā aññā nānappakārāti attho.
607 接着,在应当解说众生的种姓差别时,他先从非执受的事物开始说起:“草木你们也要知道。”这是为了什么?是为了更容易说明执受的事物。因为一旦把握了非执受事物的种姓差别,执受事物的种姓差别就会更加清楚。其中,所谓“草”,是指内部有髓、外部有坚实心材的植物,所以棕榈、椰子等也归入草类。所谓“树”,是指外部有髓、内部有坚实心材的植物。草和树合起来就是“草木”。他用业格复数来指称它们,所以说“草木你们也要知道”。“它们并不宣称”,意思是它们不会说“我是草”“我是树”。“特征由种姓所成”,即使它们不宣称,它们的形态也正是由各自的种姓所决定,与它们所从属的草等根本类别相同。这是什么原因呢?因为各种种姓彼此不同,也就是说,草的种姓是一类,树的种姓是另一类;即使在草当中,棕榈的种姓是一类,椰子的种姓又是另一类,应当这样详细展开。巴利
607. Tato pāṇānaṃ jātivibhaṅge kathetabbe ‘‘tiṇarukkhepi jānāthā’’ti anupādinnakānaṃ tāva kathetuṃ āraddho. Taṃ kimatthamiti ce? Upādinnesu sukhañāpanatthaṃ. Anupādinnesu hi jātibhede gahite upādinnesu so pākaṭataro hoti. Tattha tiṇāni nāma antopheggūni bahisārāni. Tasmā tālanāḷikerādayopi tiṇasaṅgahaṃ gacchanti. Rukkhā nāma bahipheggū antosārā. Tiṇāni ca rukkhā ca tiṇarukkhā. Te upayogabahuvacanena dassento āha – ‘‘tiṇarukkhepi jānāthā’’ti. Na cāpi paṭijānareti ‘‘mayaṃ tiṇā, mayaṃ rukkhā’’ti evampi na paṭijānanti. Liṅgaṃ jātimayanti apaṭijānantānampi ca tesaṃ jātimayameva saṇṭhānaṃ attano mūlabhūtatiṇādisadisameva hoti. Kiṃ kāraṇaṃ? Aññamaññā hi jātiyo, yasmā aññā tiṇajāti, aññā rukkhajāti; tiṇesupi aññā tālajāti, aññā nāḷikerajātīti evaṃ vitthāretabbaṃ.
这说明了什么?凡是按出身而有差别的东西,不用靠自己声称,也不用靠别人教导,就能看出它和其他出身的不同。如果婆罗门是因为出身才成为婆罗门,那他也应该不用靠自己声称或别人教导,就能被认出和刹帝利、吠舍、首陀罗有差别,但事实上并不是这样,所以婆罗门并不是因为出身才成为婆罗门。接下来,他还会用“正如在这些出身当中”这个偈颂,直接用言语把这个意思讲出来。巴利
Tena kiṃ dīpeti? Yaṃ jātivasena nānā hoti, taṃ attano paṭiññaṃ paresaṃ vā upadesaṃ vināpi aññajātito visesena gayhati. Yadi ca jātiyā brāhmaṇo bhaveyya, sopi attano paṭiññaṃ paresaṃ vā upadesaṃ vinā khattiyato vessasuddato vā visesena gayheyya, na ca gayhati, tasmā na jātiyā brāhmaṇoti. Parato pana ‘‘yathā etāsu jātīsū’’ti imāya gāthāya etamatthaṃ vacībhedeneva āvikarissati.
608 608. 这样显示了非执受者的种类差别之后,显示执受者中的那种差别,他说“然后,昆虫”等。其中,kīṭa 就是蛆虫。paṭaṅga 就是蝗虫。所谓“直到 kunthakipillika”,意思是以 kunthakipillika 为终点。巴利
608. Evaṃ anupādinnesu jātibhedaṃ dassetvā upādinnesu taṃ dassento ‘‘tato kīṭe’’ti evamādimāha. Tattha kīṭāti kimayo. Paṭaṅgāti paṭaṅgāyeva. Yāva kunthakipilliketi kunthakipillikaṃ pariyantaṃ katvāti attho.
609 “小的”指黑刺蚁之类的;“大的”指兔、猫之类的。因为它们全都有种种颜色。巴利
609.Khuddaketi kāḷakakaṇḍakādayo. Mahallaketi sasabiḷārādayo. Sabbe hi te anekavaṇṇā.
610 “腹足”是指以腹部为足,说的就是腹部本身就是它们的足。“长背”是指蛇从头部一直到尾端都是背,因此它们被称为“长背”。它们也有很多种类,比如毒蛇等。巴利
610.Pādūdareti udarapāde, udaraṃyeva yesaṃ pādāti vuttaṃ hoti. Dīghapiṭṭhiketi sappānañhi sīsato yāva naṅguṭṭhā piṭṭhi eva hoti, tena te ‘‘dīghapiṭṭhikā’’ti vuccanti. Tepi anekappakārā āsīvisādibhedena.
611 水生,指生于水中者。鱼类也有种种,按罗希塔鱼等类别区分。巴利
611.Odaketi udakamhi jāte. Macchāpi anekappakārā rohitamacchādibhedena.
612 有翅者就是指鸟。它们因为拥有翅膀,所以被称为有翅者。靠翅膀行走,所以叫翼行者。在空中飞行,所以叫飞行者。这些鸟也有很多种类,比如乌鸦之类的差别。巴利
612.Pakkhīti sakuṇe. Te hi pakkhānaṃ atthitāya ‘‘pakkhī’’ti vuccanti. Pattehi yantīti pattayānā. Vehāse gacchantīti vihaṅgamā. Tepi anekappakārā kākādibhedena.
613 613. 这样显示了陆行、水行、空行众生的种类差别之后,现在为了说明他显示这些的用意,说出“如同在这些”这个偈颂。它的含义,简略地说,应当依照前面所说的用意解释方式来理解。巴利
613. Evaṃ thalajalākāsagocarānaṃ pāṇānaṃ jātibhedaṃ dassetvā idāni yenādhippāyena taṃ dassesi, taṃ āvikaronto ‘‘yathā etāsū’’ti gāthamāha. Tassattho saṅkhepato pubbe vuttādhippāyavaṇṇanāvaseneva veditabbo.
614-6 不过,这里详细来说应当说明的内容,他自己就已经显示出来了,所以说“不以头发等”。这里的连接是这样的:前面所说的“在人当中没有种种由出身决定的相”,应当理解为就是“没有”。也就是说,不以头发等。因为并没有一个定则说“婆罗门的头发是这样,刹帝利的头发是那样”,不像象、马、鹿等那样。按照这个方式,一切都可以连接起来。“相不是由出身决定的,并非如在其他生类中那样”,这一句应当理解为是对前面所说内容的总结。它的连接是:正因为凭借这些头发等,在人当中没有种种由出身决定的相,所以应当知道:“在婆罗门等各类人当中,相不是由出身决定的,并非如在其他生类中那样。”巴利
614-6. Vitthārato panettha yaṃ vattabbaṃ, taṃ sayameva dassento ‘‘na kesehī’’tiādimāha. Tatrāyaṃ yojanā – yaṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘natthi manussesu liṅgaṃ jātimayaṃ puthū’’ti, taṃ evaṃ natthīti veditabbaṃ. Seyyathidaṃ, na kesehīti. Na hi ‘‘brāhmaṇānaṃ īdisā kesā honti, khattiyānaṃ īdisā’’ti niyamo atthi yathā hatthiassamigādīnanti iminā nayena sabbaṃ yojetabbaṃ. Liṅgaṃ jātimayaṃ neva, yathā aññāsu jātisūti idaṃ pana vuttassevatthassa nigamananti veditabbaṃ. Tassa yojanā – tadeva yasmā imehi kesādīhi natthi manussesu liṅgaṃ jātimayaṃ puthu, tasmā veditabbametaṃ ‘‘brāhmaṇādibhedesu manussesu liṅgaṃ jātimayaṃ neva yathā aññāsu jātīsū’’ti.
617 现在,为了说明即使没有生来就有的种姓差别,“婆罗门、刹帝利”这种差别是怎样产生的,说了“各别”这首偈。它的意思是:就像畜生那样,毛发等形相上的差异是随着胎生自然就有的,而在人类当中,婆罗门等各自的身体上并不存在这种差异。不过,虽然这种差异并不存在,但“婆罗门、刹帝利”这一套区分种种差别的名目,在人类当中只是依约定俗成的称呼而说,只是停留在日常言说的层面上而已。巴利
617. Idāni evaṃ jātibhede asantepi brāhmaṇo khattiyoti idaṃ nānattaṃ yathā jātaṃ, taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘paccatta’’nti gāthamāha. Tassattho – etaṃ tiracchānānaṃ viya yonisiddhameva kesādisaṇṭhānānattaṃ manussesu brāhmaṇādīnaṃ attano attano sarīresu na vijjati. Avijjamānepi pana etasmiṃ yadetaṃ brāhmaṇo khattiyoti nānattavidhānapariyāyaṃ vokāraṃ, taṃ vokārañca manussesu samaññāya pavuccati, vohāramattena vuccatīti.
619-625 619-625. 世尊这样驳倒了婆罗堕阇的主张之后,接着说明:如果单凭出身就能成为婆罗门,那么生活、戒行、品行有缺陷的人也该是婆罗门了。可是古代的婆罗门以及世间其他有智慧的人,都不承认那种人具有婆罗门的资格。因此,为了支持婆悉咤的主张,世尊开示这一点时,说了“凡于人中任何人”等八首偈颂。其中,“护牛”是指守护田地,也就是从事农耕,因为大地被称为“牛”,由它分出来的部分就是田地。“种种技艺”是指纺织等各种手艺。“经商”是指做买卖。“受雇于人”是指为他人服劳役。“箭术”是指以武器谋生,也就是使用箭和矛。“国师业”是指担任国师的工作。巴利
619-625. Ettāvatā bhagavā bhāradvājassa vādaṃ niggahetvā idāni yadi jātiyā brāhmaṇo bhaveyya, ājīvasīlācāravipannopi brāhmaṇo bhaveyya. Yasmā pana porāṇā brāhmaṇā tassa brāhmaṇabhāvaṃ na icchanti loke ca aññepi paṇḍitamanussā, tasmā vāseṭṭhassa vādapaggahaṇatthaṃ taṃ dassento ‘‘yo hi koci manussesū’’tiādikā aṭṭha gāthāyo āha. Tattha gorakkhanti khettarakkhaṃ, kasikammanti vuttaṃ hoti. Pathavī hi ‘‘go’’ti vuccati, tappabhedo ca khettaṃ. Puthusippenāti tantavāyakammādinānāsippena. Vohāranti vaṇijjaṃ. Parapessenāti paresaṃ veyyāvaccena. Issatthanti āvudhajīvikaṃ, usuñca sattiñcāti vuttaṃ hoti. Porohiccenāti purohitakammena.
626 626. 这样,按照婆罗门的传统和世间的通称,已经论证了在谋生、戒行、品行上有缺陷的人不具有婆罗门的身份。既然如此,人就不是因为出身而成为婆罗门,而是因为功德才成为婆罗门。所以,不论出生在什么家族,只要具备功德,他就是婆罗门——这就是这里的正理。世尊从意义上确立了这一正理之后,又用言语把它表达出来,说道:“我不称他为婆罗门。”巴利
626. Evaṃ brāhmaṇasamayena ca lokavohārena ca ājīvasīlācāravipannassa abrāhmaṇabhāvaṃ sādhetvā evaṃ sante na jātiyā brāhmaṇo, guṇehi pana brāhmaṇo hoti. Tasmā yattha yattha kule jāto yo guṇavā, so brāhmaṇo, ayamettha ñāyoti evametaṃ ñāyaṃ atthato āpādetvā puna tadeva ñāyaṃ vacībhedena pakāsento āha ‘‘na cāhaṃ brāhmaṇaṃ brūmī’’ti.
它的意思是:而我呢,无论生在四种出生方式中的哪一种,即使特别是一位由被称为婆罗门的母亲所生的人,也就是按“两边都善生”等说法,婆罗门们所说的婆罗门清净出生的途径,即所谓的“生”,以及由“清净受胎”一语所说的母方圆满——因为是从那里出生,所以也说为“胎生、母生”。即使是这样胎生、母生的人,我也不仅凭胎生、母生这一点就称他为婆罗门。为什么?因为仅仅口称“贤者啊,贤者啊”,就使他与别的仍有执著的人不同,于是被称为“称贤者”,但这只是在他还有执著的时候。然而,如果有人无论生在什么家庭,都因没有贪等执著而成为无执著者,又因舍弃一切执取而成为无取著者,我就称这无执著、无取著者为婆罗门。为什么?因为他已断除诸恶。巴利
Tassattho – ahaṃ pana yvāyaṃ catūsu yonīsu yattha katthaci jāto, tatrāpi vā visesena yo brāhmaṇasamaññitāya mātari sambhūto, taṃ yonijaṃ mattisambhavaṃ yā cāyaṃ ‘‘ubhato sujāto’’tiādinā (dī. ni. 1.303; ma. ni. 2.424) nayena brāhmaṇehi brāhmaṇassa parisuddhauppattimaggasaṅkhātā yoni kathīyati, ‘‘saṃsuddhagahaṇiko’’ti iminā ca mātusampatti, tatopi jātasambhūtattā ‘‘yonijo mattisambhavo’’ti ca vuccati, tampi yonijaṃ mattisambhavaṃ iminā ca yonijamattisambhavamattena brāhmaṇaṃ na brūmi. Kasmā? Yasmā ‘‘bho bho’’ti vacanamattena aññehi sakiñcanehi visiṭṭhattā bhovādī nāma so hoti, sace hoti sakiñcano. Yo panāyaṃ yattha katthaci kule jātopi rāgādikiñcanābhāvena akiñcano, sabbagahaṇapaṭinissaggena ca anādāno, akiñcanaṃ anādānaṃ tamahaṃ brūmi brāhmaṇaṃ. Kasmā? Yasmā bāhitapāpoti.
627 还有进一步要说的,就是“断一切结”等二十七首偈颂。其中,“一切结”指十种结。“不战栗”指不因渴爱而战栗。“彼我”的意思是:我称那样的人为婆罗门——他因为超越了贪等执著,所以是“超越执著者”;因为四种轭都不存在了,所以是“离轭者”。巴利
627. Kiñca bhiyyo – ‘‘sabbasaṃyojanaṃ chetvā’’tiādikā sattavīsati gāthā. Tattha sabbasaṃyojananti dasavidhaṃ saṃyojanaṃ. Na paritassatīti taṇhāya na tassati. Tamahanti taṃ ahaṃ rāgādīnaṃ saṅgānaṃ atikkantattā saṅgātigaṃ, catunnampi yogānaṃ abhāvena visaṃyuttaṃ brāhmaṇaṃ vadāmīti attho.
628 系带是指以束缚的方式生起的瞋怒。皮绳是指以捆绑的方式生起的渴爱。锁链与次第连结是指伴随随眠次第的六十二种邪见的锁链。把这一切都断除而安住的人,因为已经拔掉了无明的门闩,所以是拔除门闩者;因为觉悟了四谛,所以是觉悟者——我说这样的人是婆罗门。这就是这段话的意思。巴利
628.Naddhinti nayhanabhāvena pavattaṃ kodhaṃ. Varattanti bandhanabhāvena pavattaṃ taṇhaṃ. Sandānaṃ sahanukkamanti anusayānukkamasahitaṃ dvāsaṭṭhidiṭṭhisandānaṃ, idaṃ sabbampi chinditvā ṭhitaṃ avijjāpalighassa ukkhittattā ukkhittapalighaṃ catunnaṃ saccānnaṃ buddhattā buddhaṃ ahaṃ brāhmaṇaṃ vadāmīti attho.
629 有人即使被十种骂人的方式辱骂,被拳头、手掌等殴打,被脚镣、枷锁等捆绑,内心也不生气,能够忍受下来。因为他具备忍耐的力量,所以是“具忍力者”;又因为他一次次受生时,都以这股忍耐之力作为不退的军阵,所以是“有军阵者”。我说这样的人就是婆罗门,这就是这段话的意思。巴利
629.Aduṭṭhoti evaṃ dasahi akkosavatthūhi akkosañca pāṇiādīhi pothanañca andubandhanādīhi bandhanañca yo akuddhamānaso hutvā adhivāsesi, khantibalena samannāgatattā khantībalaṃ, punappunaṃ uppattiyā anīkabhūtena teneva khantībalānīkena samannāgatattā balānīkaṃ taṃ evarūpaṃ ahaṃ brāhmaṇaṃ vadāmīti attho.
630 “持头陀支”是指具足头陀支的人。他因为具备四种清净戒而持戒圆满,因为渴爱不再增盛而无所增盛,因为调伏了六根而得到调伏,因为安住在最终的身体上而成为最后身者。我说这样的人就是婆罗门,这就是这段话的意思。巴利
630.Vatantanti dhutavatena samannāgataṃ, catupārisuddhisīlena sīlavantaṃ, taṇhāussadābhāvena anussadaṃ, chaḷindriyadamanena dantaṃ, koṭiyaṃ ṭhitena attabhāvena antimasārīraṃ tamahaṃ brāhmaṇaṃ vadāmīti attho.
631 就像莲叶不沾水一样,同样地,如果有人对内在的两种欲都不沾染,不在那些欲里停留,我就说这个人是婆罗门,这就是这段话的意思。巴利
631.Yona limpatīti evameva yo abbhantare duvidhepi kāme na limpati, tasmiṃ kāme na saṇṭhāti, tamahaṃ brāhmaṇaṃ vadāmīti attho.
632 “苦”是指五蕴的苦。“已放下负担”是指已经卸下五蕴的重担,从四种轭或一切烦恼中解脱出来。我说这样的人就是婆罗门——这就是这段话的意思。巴利
632.Dukkhassāti khandhadukkhassa. Pannabhāranti ohitakkhandhabhāraṃ catūhi yogehi sabbakilesehi vā visaṃyuttaṃ tamahaṃ brāhmaṇaṃ vadāmīti attho.
633 具有甚深智慧的人,是指他具备在五蕴等甚深之法上生起的智慧;以法抉择的智慧而成为智者;对道与非道善巧了知,也就是清楚地知道“这是通往恶趣的路,这是通往善趣的路,这是通往涅槃的路,这不是路”;达到了称为阿罗汉果的最上义。我说这样的人就是婆罗门。巴利
633.Gambhīrapaññanti gambhīresu khandhādīsu pavattāya paññāya samannāgataṃ, dhammojapaññāya medhāviṃ, ‘‘ayaṃ duggatiyā, ayaṃ sugatiyā, ayaṃ nibbānassa maggo, ayaṃ amaggo’’ti evaṃ magge amagge ca chekatāya maggāmaggassakovidaṃ, arahattasaṅkhātaṃ uttamatthamanuppattaṃ tamahaṃ brāhmaṇaṃ vadāmīti attho.
634 不杂处:因为完全没有见、闻、交谈、受用、身体接触这些交往,所以叫不杂处。两者:指在家人和出家人,跟这两类人都不杂处。无家屋而行:就是没有执著、没有贪恋地游行。我说这样的人才是婆罗门——这就是这句话的意思。巴利
634.Asaṃsaṭṭhanti dassanasavanasamullāpaparibhogakāyasaṃsaggānaṃ abhāvena asaṃsaṭṭhaṃ. Ubhayanti gihīhi ca anagārehi cāti ubhayehipi asaṃsaṭṭhaṃ. Anokasārinti anālayacāriṃ, taṃ evarūpaṃ ahaṃ brāhmaṇaṃ vadāmīti attho.
635 “放下”就是舍弃、卸下。“于战栗者与稳固者中”:因为被渴爱所战栗,所以是战栗者;因为渴爱已无、坚固不动,所以是稳固者。“他不杀”:像这样,对一切众生都没有嗔恨,已经放下了棍棒,自己既不杀害任何众生,也不让别人去杀害。我说这样的人就是婆罗门——这就是这段话的意思。巴利
635.Nidhāyāti nikkhipitvā oropetvā. Tasesu thāvaresu cāti taṇhātāsena tasesu taṇhābhāvena thiratāya thāvaresu. Yo na hantīti yo evaṃ sabbasattesu vigatapaṭighatāya nikkhittadaṇḍo neva kañci sayaṃ hanati, na aññena ghāteti, tamahaṃ brāhmaṇaṃ vadāmīti attho.
636 “不违”:世间大众因为嗔恨而彼此对立,但他在这些人当中没有嗔恨,所以是不违。即使别人手里没有拿着棍棒或刀剑,只要他们还不停止伤害他人,就仍然算是执杖者;而他在这些执杖者当中已经寂灭,已经放下棍棒。“于执取者中无执取”:有些人把五蕴执取为“我、我的”,所以是执取者;而他没有这种执取,所以是无执取。我说这样的人就是婆罗门——这就是这段话的意思。巴利
636.Aviruddhanti āghātavasena viruddhesupi lokiyamahājanesu āghātābhāvena aviruddhaṃ, hatthagate daṇḍe vā satthe vā avijjamānepi paresaṃ pahāradānato aviratattā attadaṇḍesu janesu nibbutaṃ nikkhittadaṇḍaṃ, pañcannaṃ khandhānaṃ ‘‘ahaṃ mama’’nti gahitattā sādānesu, tassa gahaṇassa abhāvena anādānaṃ taṃ evarūpaṃ ahaṃ brāhmaṇaṃ vadāmīti attho.
637 “针尖”:他的贪等烦恼以及这种以掩盖他人功德为特征的抹黑,就像从针尖上掉落的芥子。正如芥子无法驻留于针尖,这些烦恼也无法驻留于他的心中。我说这样的人就是婆罗门——这就是这段话的意思。巴利
637.Āraggāti yassete rāgādayo ayañca paraguṇamakkhaṇalakkhaṇo makkho āraggā sāsapo viya papatito, yathā sāsapo āragge na santiṭṭhati, evaṃ citte na tiṭṭhati, tamahaṃ brāhmaṇaṃ vadāmīti attho.
638 “不粗恶”就是不粗暴。“能使人知晓”就是能表达意义的话。“真实”就是如实的话。“不触怒”就是通过不会因令别人生气而触恼的言语。漏已尽的人只会说这样的话。因此,我说那个人就是婆罗门——这就是这段话的意思。巴利
638.Akakkasanti apharusaṃ. Viññāpaninti atthaviññāpaniṃ. Saccanti bhūtaṃ. Nābhisajeti yāya girāya aññaṃ kujjhāpanavasena na laggāpeyya. Khīṇāsavo nāma evarūpameva giraṃ bhāseyya. Tasmā tamahaṃ brāhmaṇaṃ vadāmīti attho.
639 不管是衣服、装饰品之类的东西,长的还是短的;不管是摩尼宝珠、珍珠之类的东西,细的还是粗的;不管是按价值高低而说好或不好的——在这个世间,如果有人不拿取任何属于他人所拥有的东西,我说这个人就是婆罗门。这就是这段话的意思。巴利
639. Sāṭakābharaṇādīsu dīghaṃ vā rassaṃ vā, maṇimuttādīsu aṇuṃ vā thūlaṃ vā mahagghaappagghavasena subhaṃ vā asubhaṃ vā yo puggalo imasmiṃ loke parapariggahitaṃ nādiyati, tamahaṃ brāhmaṇaṃ vadāmīti attho.
640 “无期望”就是没有渴爱。“离系”就是脱离一切烦恼。我说这样的人就是婆罗门。这就是这句话的意思。巴利
640.Nirāsāsanti nittaṇhaṃ. Visaṃyuttanti sabbakilesehi viyuttaṃ tamahaṃ brāhmaṇaṃ vadāmīti attho.
641 “执著处”就是渴爱。“了知之后不再疑惑”,是说如实了知八种事,因此对以这八种事为对象的疑惑已经不再疑惑。“到达不死之境”,是说已经深入不死,也就是涅槃,并且已经证得。我说这样的人就是婆罗门——这就是这段话的意思。巴利
641.Ālayāti taṇhā. Aññāya akathaṃkathīti aṭṭha vatthūni yathābhūtaṃ jānitvā aṭṭhavatthukāya vicikicchāya nibbicikiccho. Amatogadhamanuppattanti amataṃ nibbānaṃ ogahetvā anuppattaṃ tamahaṃ brāhmaṇaṃ vadāmīti attho.
642 “两者”是指把福行和恶行这两样都舍弃掉。 “系缚”是指贪等种种系缚。 “超越了”就是已经超越。 因为他超越了轮回之根——悲伤,所以是无悲伤;因为内心没有贪欲之尘等尘垢,所以是离尘;因为远离随烦恼,所以是清净。我说这样的人是婆罗门——这就是这段话的意思。巴利
642.Ubhoti dvepi puññāni pāpāni ca chaḍḍetvāti attho. Saṅganti rāgādibhedaṃ saṅgaṃ. Upaccagāti atikkanto. Tamahaṃ vaṭṭamūlasokena asokaṃ, abbhantare rāgarajādīnaṃ abhāvena virajaṃ, nirupakkilesatāya suddhaṃ brāhmaṇaṃ vadāmīti attho.
643 “无垢”是指远离像云翳那样的污垢。“清净”是指没有随烦恼。“明净”是指内心澄净。“不浊”是指没有烦恼的浑浊。“已耗尽喜有”是指对三有的渴爱已经彻底灭尽。我说这样的人是“婆罗门”——这就是这句话的意思。巴利
643.Vimalanti abbhādimalavirahitaṃ. Suddhanti nirupakkilesaṃ. Vippasannanti pasannacittaṃ. Anāvilanti kilesāvilattavirahitaṃ. Nandībhavaparikkhīṇanti tīsu bhavesu parikkhīṇataṇhaṃ tamahaṃ brāhmaṇaṃ vadāmīti attho.
644 如果有比丘已经超越了这贪欲的泥沼、烦恼的险难、轮回的流转,以及不能通达四圣谛的无明;他渡过了四种瀑流,到达了彼岸;他修习两种禅那,因为没有渴爱而无所动摇,因为没有疑惑而不再疑惑,因为没有执取而无所执取,由于烦恼的寂灭而寂灭——我说这样的人是婆罗门。这就是这段话的意思。巴利
644.Yo bhikkhu imaṃrāgapalipathañceva kilesaduggañca saṃsāravaṭṭañca catunnaṃ saccānaṃ appaṭivijjhanakamohañca atīto, cattāro oghe tiṇṇo hutvā pāraṃ anuppatto, duvidhena jhānena jhāyī, taṇhāya abhāvena anejo, kathaṃkathāya abhāvena akathaṃkathī, upādānānaṃ abhāvena anupādiyitvā kilesanibbānena nibbuto, tamahaṃ brāhmaṇaṃ vadāmīti attho.
645 如果有人在这世间舍弃了两种欲,出家成为无家的人而游行,那么,我说他就是已经耗尽欲贪、已经耗尽生存渴求的婆罗门。这就是这句话的意思。巴利
645.Yo puggalo, idha loke, ubhopi kāme hitvā anāgāro hutvā paribbajati, taṃ parikkhīṇakāmañceva parikkhīṇabhavañca ahaṃ brāhmaṇaṃ vadāmīti attho.
646 在这世间,如果有人舍弃了通过六门生起的渴爱,对居家生活毫无兴趣,成为无家者而游行出家,那么,因为渴爱和有都已彻底灭尽,我说这样的人就是婆罗门——他已经耗尽了渴爱和有。这就是这段话的意思。巴利
646.Yoidha loke chadvārikaṃ taṇhaṃ jahitvā gharāvāsena anatthiko anāgāro hutvā paribbajati, taṇhāya ceva bhavassa ca parikkhīṇattā taṇhābhavaparikkhīṇaṃ tamahaṃ brāhmaṇaṃ vadāmīti attho.
647 “人轭”指的是人间的寿命,以及五种欲的束缚。“天轭”也是同样的道理。“超越”的意思是:有人舍弃了人轭,超越了天轭,从所有四种轭中彻底解脱出来,我说这样的人是婆罗门。巴利
647.Mānusakaṃ yoganti mānusakaṃ āyuñceva pañcavidhakāmaguṇe ca. Dibbayogepi eseva nayo. Upaccagāti yo mānusakaṃ yogaṃ hitvā dibbaṃ atikkanto, taṃ sabbehi catūhi yogehi visaṃyuttaṃ ahaṃ brāhmaṇaṃ vadāmīti attho.
648 “喜”是指对五种欲的欢喜。“不喜”是指在阿兰若住处感到厌烦。“清凉”是指寂灭,“无依著”是指没有烦恼,“英雄”是指征服了一切五蕴世间之后安住不动、具足精进的人——我说这样的人是婆罗门。巴利
648.Ratinti pañcakāmaguṇaratiṃ. Aratinti araññavāse ukkaṇṭhitattaṃ. Sītibhūtanti nibbutaṃ, nirupadhinti nirupakkilesaṃ, vīranti taṃ evarūpaṃ sabbaṃ khandhalokaṃ abhibhavitvā ṭhitaṃ vīriyavantaṃ ahaṃ brāhmaṇaṃ vadāmīti attho.
649 凡是清楚知道一切众生以种种方式死亡和结生的人,我说他不执取,所以是不执著者;因为行道善妙,所以是善逝者;因为觉悟了四圣谛,所以是觉悟者——我说这样的人是婆罗门。巴利
649.Yo vedīti yo sattānaṃ sabbākārena cutiñca paṭisandhiñca pākaṭaṃ katvā jānāti, tamahaṃ alaggatāya asattaṃ, paṭipattiyā suṭṭhu gatattā sugataṃ, catunnaṃ saccānaṃ buddhatāya buddhaṃ brāhmaṇaṃ vadāmīti attho.
650 对于“他所……”这句:那些天神等都不知道他的趣向,因为他诸漏已尽,我说他是漏尽者;因为他已经远离烦恼,我说他是阿拉汉、是婆罗门。这就是这段的意思。巴利
650.Yassāti yassete devādayo gatiṃ na jānanti, tamahaṃ āsavānaṃ khīṇatāya khīṇāsavaṃ, kilesehi ārakattā arahantaṃ brāhmaṇaṃ vadāmīti attho.
651 “过去”是指在过去诸蕴上,“以后”是指在未来诸蕴上,“中间”是指在现在诸蕴上。“执取”是说:在这些情形里,他没有被称为渴爱执取的任何执取。因此,我说他因远离贪等执取而“无所有”;又因为没有任何抓取,所以是“无取”——我说这样的婆罗门。巴利
651.Pureti atītakkhandhesu. Pacchāti anāgatesu. Majjheti paccuppannesu. Kiñcananti yassetesu ṭhānesu taṇhāgāhasaṅkhātaṃ kiñcanaṃ natthi. Tamahaṃ rāgakiñcanādīhi akiñcanaṃ. Kassaci gahaṇassa abhāvena anādānaṃ brāhmaṇaṃ vadāmīti attho.
652 因为无所畏惧、像公牛一样,所以称他为“公牛”;因为最为殊胜,所以称他为“殊胜者”;因为精进圆满,所以称他为“勇者”;因为他寻求戒蕴等种种广大功德,所以称他为“大仙”;因为他战胜了三魔,所以称他为“胜利者”;因为烦恼已经洗净,所以称他为“沐浴者”;因为觉悟了四圣谛,所以称他为“觉悟者”——我说,这样的人就是婆罗门。巴利
652. Acchambhitattena usabhasadisatāya usabhaṃ, uttamaṭṭhena pavaraṃ, vīriyasampattiyā vīraṃ, mahantānaṃ sīlakkhandhādīnaṃ esitattā mahesiṃ, tiṇṇaṃ mārānaṃ vijitattā vijitāvinaṃ, ninhātakilesatāya nhātakaṃ, catusaccabuddhatāya buddhaṃ taṃ evarūpaṃ brāhmaṇaṃ vadāmīti attho.
653 如果有人能清楚地回忆起自己的过去世,又能用天眼看见二十六种天界和四种恶趣,并且已经证得被称为“生死已尽”的阿罗汉果,我说这样的人才是婆罗门。巴利
653.Yo pubbenivāsaṃ pākaṭaṃ katvā jānāti, chabbīsatidevalokabhedaṃ saggaṃ, catubbidhaṃ apāyañca dibbacakkhunā passati, atho jātikkhayasaṅkhātaṃ arahattaṃ patto, tamahaṃ brāhmaṇaṃ vadāmīti attho.
654 世尊这样从功德方面对婆罗门说完之后,为了指出那些坚持“婆罗门是由出身决定的”的人,并不知道这只是一种约定俗成的说法,他们的见解是错误见解,于是说了“这只是名称”等两首偈颂。它的意思是:所谓“婆罗门、刹帝利、婆罗堕阇、婆悉咤”这些姓名族姓,都是人为安立的,这在世间只是一种名称,应当理解为仅仅是约定俗成的称呼。为什么?因为这是依据共同认可而形成的。在各地,这些姓名族姓正是在出生时由亲戚们安立、造作出来的。如果不这样安立,那么任何人见到另一个人,都不会知道“这是婆罗门”或“这是婆罗堕阇”。巴利
654. Evaṃ bhagavā guṇato brāhmaṇaṃ vatvā ‘‘ye ‘jātito brāhmaṇo’ti abhinivesaṃ karonti, te idaṃ vohāramattaṃ ajānantā, sā ca nesaṃ diṭṭhi duddiṭṭhī’’ti dassento ‘‘samaññā hesā’’ti gāthādvayamāha. Tassattho – ‘‘yadidaṃ brāhmaṇo khattiyo bhāradvājo vāseṭṭho’’ti nāmagottaṃ pakappitaṃ, samaññā hesā lokasmiṃ, paññattivohāramattanti veditabbaṃ. Kasmā? Yasmā sammuccā samudāgataṃ samanuññāya āgataṃ. Tañhi tattha tattha jātakāleyevassa ñātisālohitehi pakappitaṃ kataṃ. No cetaṃ evaṃ pakappeyyuṃ, na koci kañci disvā ‘‘ayaṃ brāhmaṇo’’ti vā ‘‘bhāradvājo’’ti vā jāneyya.
655 那些不明事理的人,长久以来心中一直潜藏着这种被虚构出来的恶见。对于不知道“名号和族姓都是被虚构出来的,这不过是名号族姓而已,是为了世间交流才虚构出来的”的众生,这种恶见在他们心中长久潜藏。正因为这种潜藏,他们不了解那名号族姓的真相,就宣称“婆罗门是由出身决定的”——他们正是在无知中这样说的。巴利
655. Evaṃ pakappitañcetaṃ dīgharattamanusayitaṃ diṭṭhigatamajānataṃ, ‘‘pakappitaṃ nāmagottaṃ, nāmagottamattametaṃ saṃvohāratthaṃ pakappita’’nti ajānantānaṃ sattānaṃ hadaye dīgharattaṃ diṭṭhigatamanusayitaṃ, tassa anusayitattā taṃ nāmagottaṃ ajānantā te pabruvanti ‘‘jātiyā hoti brāhmaṇo’’ti, ajānantāyeva evaṃ vadantīti vuttaṃ hoti.
656-7 像这样,先说明“那些坚持‘婆罗门是由出身决定的’的人,不了解这不过是世间的称呼而已,他们的那种见解是错误见解”,接下来以毫无保留地直接否定出身论、确立业论的方式,说出了“不是因出身”等话。其中,为了详细解释“因业而成为婆罗门,因业而成为非婆罗门”这半首偈颂,又说了“农夫因业”等话。这里说的“因业”,是指由现在能生起耕田等业的思业。巴利
656-7. Evaṃ ‘‘ye ‘jātito brāhmaṇo’ti abhinivesaṃ karonti, te idaṃ vohāramattamajānantā, sā ca nesaṃ diṭṭhi duddiṭṭhī’’ti dassetvā idāni nippariyāyameva jātivādaṃ paṭikkhipanto kammavādañca niropento ‘‘na jaccā’’tiādimāha. Tattha ‘‘kammunā brāhmaṇo hoti, kammunā hoti abrāhmaṇo’’ti imissā upaḍḍhagāthāya atthavitthāraṇatthaṃ ‘‘kassako kammunā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha kammunāti paccuppannena kasikammādinibbattakacetanākammunā.
659 “见缘起”是指:因为“依靠这个条件,才会有这个结果”,这样看见缘起的人。“精通业果”是指:在应当受到恭敬或轻蔑的家族中,众生的投生是由业决定的;其他各种高贵或低贱的状态,也是在殊胜或低劣的业成熟时出现的——这样就是善巧于业果。巴利
659.Paṭiccasamuppādadassāti ‘‘iminā paccayena evaṃ hotī’’ti evaṃ paṭiccasamuppādadassāvino. Kammavipākakovidāti sammānāvamānārahe kule kammavasena uppatti hoti, aññāpi hīnapaṇītatā hīnapaṇīte kamme vipaccamāne hotīti evaṃ kammavipākakusalā.
660 在“依业而转”这首偈颂里,无论说“世间”、“众生”还是“有情”,意思其实只有一个,只是说法不同而已。这里的第一句,应当理解为是在否定“有一位梵天、大梵天……他是至高者、创造者、主宰者、一切已生与未生者之父”这种见解。因为世间依业而转,在各趣中依业而出生,那谁还能是它的创造者呢?第二句说明:这样依业而出生之后,在生命流转的过程中,也仍然是唯依业而转——由于过去业和现在业的差别,在体验苦乐时,呈现出低劣、殊胜等各种状态,持续不断地流转。第三句把同一个意思归纳为:这样,从一切方面来看,众生都被业所系缚,唯随业而流转,不会依其他方式。第四句用比喻把这个道理说清楚:就像行进中的车依靠车辖一样。正如车在行走时,车辖是系缚连接的关键,没有车辖连接,车就无法行走;同样,世间在生起和流转时,业就是系缚,离开业,既不会生起,也不会流转。巴利
660.‘‘Kammunāvattatī’’ti gāthāya pana ‘‘loko’’ti vā ‘‘pajā’’ti vā ‘‘sattā’’ti vā ekoyeva attho, vacanamattameva nānaṃ. Purimapadena cettha ‘‘atthi brahmā mahābrahmā…pe… seṭṭho sajitā vasī pitā bhūtabhabyāna’’nti (dī. ni. 1.42) imissā diṭṭhiyā nisedho veditabbo. Kammunā hi vattati tāsu tāsu gatīsu uppajjati loko, tassa ko sajitāti? Dutiyena ‘‘evaṃ kammunā uppannopi ca pavattiyampi atītapaccuppannabhedena kammunā eva pavattati, sukhadukkhāni paccanubhonto hīnapaṇītādibhāvaṃ āpajjanto pavattatī’’ti dasseti. Tatiyena tamevatthaṃ nigameti ‘‘evaṃ sabbathāpi kammanibandhanā sattā kammeneva baddhā hutvā pavattanti, na aññathā’’ti. Catutthena tamatthaṃ upamāya vibhāveti rathassāṇīva yāyatoti. Yathā rathassa yāyato āṇi nibandhanaṃ hoti, na tāya anibaddho yāti, evaṃ lokassa uppajjato ca pavattato ca kammaṃ nibandhanaṃ, na tena anibaddho uppajjati nappavattati.
661 现在,因为世间就是这样被业所系缚,所以为了说明凭借最殊胜的业而获得最殊胜的状态,世尊说了以“由苦行”开头的两首偈颂。其中,“由苦行”指的是通过守护诸根来修行。“由梵行”指的是依靠学处而修的其他种种殊胜修行。“由自制”指的是以戒律来约束自己。“由调御”指的是以智慧来调伏自己。凭借这种具有最殊胜意义、与梵性相应的业,一个人就成为婆罗门。为什么?因为这就是最上的婆罗门,也就是说,这种业就是最上的婆罗门性。另有一种读法是“brahmānaṃ”,它的意思是:能带来梵性,即带来、招感、给予梵性。巴利
661. Idāni yasmā evaṃ kammanibandhano loko, tasmā seṭṭhena kammunā seṭṭhabhāvaṃ dassento ‘‘tapenā’’ti gāthādvayamāha. Tattha tapenāti indriyasaṃvarena. Brahmacariyenāti sikkhānissitena vuttāvasesaseṭṭhacariyena. Saṃyamenāti sīlena. Damenāti paññāya. Etena seṭṭhaṭṭhena brahmabhūtena kammunā brāhmaṇo hoti. Kasmā? Yasmā etaṃ brāhmaṇamuttamaṃ, yasmā etaṃ kammaṃ uttamo brāhmaṇabhāvoti vuttaṃ hoti. ‘‘Brahmāna’’ntipi pāṭho, tassattho – brahmaṃ ānetīti brahmānaṃ, brahmabhāvaṃ āneti āvahati detīti vuttaṃ hoti.
662 在第二首偈颂中,“寂静”是指烦恼已经止息的人。“梵天”和“帝释”是说,他能成为梵天,也是梵天及帝释。凡是具备这种特质的人,就不只是婆罗门而已;在有智慧、有见识的贤者看来,他本身就是梵天,也是帝释。意思就是说:“婆悉咤,你应当这样去了解。”其余部分和前面所讲的一样。巴利
662. Dutiyagāthāya santoti santakileso. Brahmā sakkoti brahmā ca sakko ca. Yo evarūpo, so na kevalaṃ brāhmaṇo, apica kho brahmā ca sakko ca so vijānataṃ paṇḍitānaṃ, evaṃ vāseṭṭha jānāhīti vuttaṃ hoti. Sesaṃ vuttanayamevāti.
第十 拘迦利经的注释巴利
10. Kokālikasuttavaṇṇanā
“如是我闻”这句是《拘迦利迦经》的开头。它的起因是什么?这将在释义中说明。在释义里,“如是我闻”等部分,也按照前面所说的方式解释。至于“那时,拘迦利迦”这里——这个拘迦利迦是谁?他又为什么前来拜访?解释如下:据说,这位拘迦利迦是拘迦利迦国拘迦利迦城拘迦利迦富商之子,出家后住在他父亲所建的寺院里,名叫“小拘迦利迦”,不是提婆达多的弟子。而那位被称为“大拘迦利迦”的,则是婆罗门之子。巴利
Evaṃme sutanti kokālikasuttaṃ. Kā uppatti? Imassa suttassa uppatti atthavaṇṇanāyameva āvi bhavissati. Atthavaṇṇanāya cassa evaṃ me sutantiādi vuttanayameva. Atha kho kokālikoti ettha pana ko ayaṃ kokāliko, kasmā ca upasaṅkamīti? Vuccate – ayaṃ kira kokālikaraṭṭhe kokālikanagare kokālikaseṭṭhissa putto pabbajitvā pitarā kārāpite vihāreyeva paṭivasati ‘‘cūḷakokāliko’’ti nāmena, na devadattassa sisso. So hi brāhmaṇaputto ‘‘mahākokāliko’’ti paññāyi.
据说,世尊住在舍卫城的时候,两位上首弟子带着大约五百位比丘在乡间游行。临近雨安居时,他们想找个安静的地方住下来,就把那些比丘打发走了,自己拿着衣钵,来到那个地区的那座城市,进了那座精舍。在那里,他们和拘迦利互相问候之后,对他说:“贤友,我们要在这里住三个月,请不要告诉任何人。”他答应说:“好的。”三个月过后,第二天一早,他先进城去告诉大家:“你们不知道吧,两位上首弟子来到这里住着,也没有人用资具邀请他们。”城里的人说:“尊者,您为什么不告诉我们呢?”他说:“告诉你们有什么用?你们没看见有两位比丘住在这里吗?他们就是上首弟子啊。”于是大家赶紧聚集起来,带来酥、蜜丸、布料等,放在拘迦利面前。他心想:“两位上首弟子极为少欲,知道这是由暗示的话而得到的利养,一定不会接受;不接受的话,肯定会说‘给住在这里的人吧’。那我就让他们把这些利养收下,然后我拿走。”他就这么做了。长老们一看到,就知道这是由暗示的话而得到的利养,心想:“这些资具既不适合我们,也不适合拘迦利。”于是没有说“给住在这里的人吧”,直接拒绝了,然后离开。拘迦利因此生起忧恼:“他们自己不受,也不让我得到,这算怎么回事!”巴利
Bhagavati kira sāvatthiyaṃ viharante dve aggasāvakā pañcamattehi bhikkhusatehi saddhiṃ janapadacārikaṃ caramānā upakaṭṭhāya vassūpanāyikāya vivekavāsaṃ vasitukāmā te bhikkhū uyyojetvā attano pattacīvaramādāya tasmiṃ janapade taṃ nagaraṃ patvā taṃ vihāraṃ agamaṃsu. Tattha te kokālikena saddhiṃ sammoditvā taṃ āhaṃsu – ‘‘āvuso, mayaṃ idha temāsaṃ vasissāma, mā kassaci āroceyyāsī’’ti. So ‘‘sādhū’’ti paṭissuṇitvā temāse atīte itaradivasaṃ pageva nagaraṃ pavisitvā ārocesi – ‘‘tumhe aggasāvake idhāgantvā vasamāne na jānittha, na te koci paccayenāpi nimantetī’’ti. Nagaravāsino ‘‘kasmā no, bhante, nārocayitthā’’ti. Kiṃ ārocitena, kiṃ nāddasatha dve bhikkhū vasante, nanu ete aggasāvakāti. Te khippaṃ sannipatitvā sappiguḷavatthādīni ānetvā kokālikassa purato nikkhipiṃsu. So cintesi – ‘‘paramappicchā aggasāvakā ‘payuttavācāya uppanno lābho’ti ñatvā na sādiyissanti, asādiyantā addhā ‘āvāsikassa dethā’ti bhaṇissanti, handāhaṃ imaṃ lābhaṃ gāhāpetvā gacchāmī’’ti . So tathā akāsi, therā disvāva payuttavācāya uppannabhāvaṃ ñatvā ‘‘ime paccayā neva amhākaṃ na kokālikassa vaṭṭantī’’ti cintetvā ‘‘āvāsikassa dethā’’ti avatvā paṭikkhipitvā pakkamiṃsu. Tena kokāliko ‘‘kathañhi nāma attanā aggaṇhantā mayhampi na dāpesu’’nti domanassaṃ uppādesi.
他们来到世尊跟前。世尊在自恣之后,如果自己不亲自到乡间游行,就会派上首弟子去,说:“比丘们,为了大众的利益,去游行吧……”等等。这是诸佛的惯例。那时,世尊自己不想出行,于是又把他们打发走:“去吧,比丘们,去游行吧。”他们便和大约五百位比丘一起游行,逐渐又来到了那个国家的同一座城市。城里的居民认出了长老们,就备好连同资具的布施,在城中央搭起棚子,做了供养,并把资具献给长老们。长老们收下后,交给了比丘僧团。拘迦利看到这一幕,心想:“这些人以前看似少欲,如今却被贪欲压倒,变成了恶欲之人。以前他们像是少欲、知足、远离的样子,如今却是恶欲、宣扬虚假功德、是恶比丘。”他走到长老们面前说:“贤友们,你们以前好像是少欲、知足、远离的人,如今却成了恶比丘。”说完,他拿起衣钵,立刻匆忙离开,心想:“我要把这件事禀告世尊。”于是朝舍卫城方向走去,逐渐来到世尊面前。这就是这里的拘迦利,他是因为这个缘由而来的。因此经文说:“那时,拘迦利比丘来到世尊那里”等等。巴利
Te bhagavato santikaṃ agamaṃsu. Bhagavā ca pavāretvā sace attanā janapadacārikaṃ na gacchati, aggasāvake peseti – ‘‘caratha, bhikkhave, cārikaṃ bahujanahitāyā’’tiādīni (mahāva. 32) vatvā . Idamāciṇṇaṃ tathāgatānaṃ. Tena kho pana samayena attanā agantukāmo hoti. Atha kho ime punadeva uyyojesi – ‘‘gacchatha, bhikkhave, caratha cārika’’nti. Te pañcamattehi bhikkhusatehi saddhiṃ cārikaṃ caramānā anupubbena tasmiṃ raṭṭhe tameva nagaraṃ agamaṃsu. Nāgarā there sañjānitvā saha parikkhārehi dānaṃ sajjetvā nagaramajjhe maṇḍapaṃ katvā dānaṃ adaṃsu, therānañca parikkhāre upanāmesuṃ. Therā gahetvā bhikkhusaṅghassa adaṃsu. Taṃ disvā kokāliko cintesi – ‘‘ime pubbe appicchā ahesuṃ, idāni lobhābhibhūtā pāpicchā jātā, pubbepi appicchasantuṭṭhapavivittasadisā maññe, ime pāpicchā asantaguṇaparidīpakā pāpabhikkhū’’ti. So there upasaṅkamitvā ‘‘āvuso, tumhe pubbe appicchā santuṭṭhā pavivittā viya ahuvattha, idāni panattha pāpabhikkhū jātā’’ti vatvā pattacīvaramādāya tāvadeva taramānarūpo nikkhamitvā gantvā ‘‘bhagavato etamatthaṃ ārocessāmī’’ti sāvatthābhimukho gantvā anupubbena bhagavantaṃ upasaṅkami. Ayamettha kokāliko, iminā kāraṇena upasaṅkami. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘atha kho kokāliko bhikkhu yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkamī’’tiādi.
世尊看见他急匆匆地赶来,当下作意便知道:“他是来辱骂上首弟子的。”又作意:“能不能阻止他呢?”结果观察到:“阻止不了,他已经对上座长老犯了过错,必定会投生到莲花地狱。”虽然已经这样看清了,但世尊为了不让别人非议——“听到有人诽谤舍利弗和目犍连,世尊竟然不加以制止”——同时也为了显示诽谤圣者的罪过极其严重,便用“mā heva”等方式再三遮止。这里的“mā heva”意思是“不要这样说”,也就是“不要这样说”。Pesalā 意为可爱戒者。Saddhāyiko 意为起信者,也就是说能带来净信。Paccayiko 意为可信赖者,也就是说能带来“确实如此”的确定。巴利
Bhagavā taṃ turitaturitaṃ āgacchantaṃ disvāva āvajjetvā aññāsi – ‘‘aggasāvake akkositukāmo āgato’’ti. ‘‘Sakkā nu kho paṭisedhetu’’nti ca āvajjento ‘‘na sakkā, theresu aparajjhitvā āgato, ekaṃsena padumaniraye uppajjissatī’’ti addasa. Evaṃ disvāpi pana ‘‘sāriputtamoggallānepi nāma garahantaṃ sutvā na nisedhetī’’ti parūpavādamocanatthaṃ ariyūpavādassa mahāsāvajjabhāvadassanatthañca ‘‘mā heva’’ntiādinā nayena tikkhattuṃ paṭisedhesi. Tattha mā hevanti mā evamāha, mā evaṃ abhaṇīti attho. Pesalāti piyasīlā. Saddhāyikoti saddhāgamakaro, pasādāvahoti vuttaṃ hoti. Paccayikoti paccayakaro, ‘‘evameta’’nti sanniṭṭhāvahoti vuttaṃ hoti.
“刚离开不久”是指他离开后没过多久,整个身体就长满了脓疮,连毛发尖那么小的空隙都没留下;脓疮冒出来,穿透骨头,遍布全身。这里因为依靠佛陀的威德,那样的业在佛陀面前不会成熟结果,可一旦离开佛陀的视线范围,立刻就结果了。所以他才离开不久,脓疮就冒了出来。因此经文说“刚离开不久的拘迦利”。那他为什么不在那里多待一会儿呢?是业力的作用。业一旦得到机会,必定要成熟,那股业力不让他留在那里。他被业力逼迫,就从座位上起身离开了。“Kaḷāyamattiyo”是像鹰嘴豆那么大。“Beluvasalāṭukamattiyo”是像嫩木苹果那么大。“Pabhijjiṃsū”是破裂了。那些脓疮破裂之后,整个身体就像熟透的波罗蜜果一样。他身体溃烂,遭遇灾祸,被剧苦压垮,躺在祇园的门屋里。那时,前来听法的人们看到他,就说:“呸,拘迦利!呸,拘迦利!你做了不该做的事,就是因为你那张嘴,才遭了这样的灾祸。”听到这些话,守护神也纷纷斥责他;守护神的斥责又传到虚空中的天神那里,就这样一层层传上去,直到阿迦尼吒天,整个过程中只响起了一声斥责。巴利
Acirapakkantassāti pakkantassa sato na cireneva sabbo kāyo phuṭo ahosīti kesaggamattampi okāsaṃ avajjetvā sakalasarīraṃ aṭṭhīni bhinditvā uggatāhi pīḷakāhi ajjhotthaṭaṃ ahosi. Tattha yasmā buddhānubhāvena tathārūpaṃ kammaṃ buddhānaṃ sammukhībhāve vipākaṃ na deti, dassanūpacāre pana vijahitamatte deti, tasmā tassa acirapakkantassa pīḷakā uṭṭhahiṃsu. Teneva vuttaṃ ‘‘acirapakkantassa ca kokālikassā’’ti. Atha kasmā tattheva na aṭṭhāsīti ce? Kammānubhāvena. Okāsakatañhi kammaṃ avassaṃ vipaccati, taṃ tassa tattha ṭhātuṃ na deti. So kammānubhāvena codiyamāno uṭṭhāyāsanā pakkāmi. Kaḷāyamattiyoti caṇakamattiyo . Beluvasalāṭukamattiyoti taruṇabeluvamattiyo. Pabhijjiṃsūti bhijjiṃsu. Tāsu bhinnāsu sakalasarīraṃ panasapakkaṃ viya ahosi. So pakkena gattena anayabyasanaṃ patvā dukkhābhibhūto jetavanadvārakoṭṭhake sayi. Atha dhammassavanatthaṃ āgatāgatā manussā taṃ disvā ‘‘dhi kokālika, dhi kokālika, ayuttamakāsi, attanoyeva mukhaṃ nissāya anayabyasanaṃ pattosī’’ti āhaṃsu. Tesaṃ sutvā ārakkhadevatā dhikkāraṃ akaṃsu, ārakkhadevatānaṃ ākāsaṭṭhadevatāti iminā upāyena yāva akaniṭṭhabhavanā ekadhikkāro udapādi.
那时,有一位名叫都卢的比丘,是拘迦利的戒师,已经证得不来果,投生在净居天。他从定中出来后,听到那番呵责,就前来教导拘迦利,想让他对舍利弗和目犍连生起净信。但拘迦利连他的话也不接受,反而又冒犯了这位戒师,命终之后投生到莲花地狱。因此才说:“那时,拘迦利比丘就因为那病……(中略)……心怀怨恨。”巴利
Tadā ca turū nāma bhikkhu kokālikassa upajjhāyo anāgāmiphalaṃ patvā suddhāvāsesu nibbatto hoti. Sopi samāpattiyā vuṭṭhito taṃ dhikkāraṃ sutvā āgamma kokālikaṃ ovadi sāriputtamoggallānesu cittappasādajananatthaṃ. So tassāpi vacanaṃ aggahetvā aññadatthu tameva aparādhetvā kālaṃ katvā padumaniraye uppajji. Tenāha – ‘‘atha kho kokāliko bhikkhu tenevābādhena…pe… āghātetvā’’ti.
那时,娑婆主梵天——这位梵天是谁?他为什么来见世尊,说了这番话呢?原来,在迦叶世尊的教法时期,他是一位名叫萨哈咖的比丘,证得不来果后投生到净居天,那里的人称他为“娑婆主梵天”。他心想:“我去拜见世尊,把莲花地狱的情形讲给他听,这样世尊就会告诉比丘们。那些善于把握法义脉络的比丘会追问地狱的寿量,世尊在解说时就能揭示诽谤圣者的严重过患。”正是出于这个原因,他才来见世尊,说了这番话。世尊果然照此而行,另一位比丘也恰好提问。世尊被问到时,便说出了“诸比丘,譬如……”等一整段开示。巴利
Atha kho brahmā sahampatīti ko ayaṃ brahmā, kasmā ca bhagavantaṃ upasaṅkamitvā etadavocāti? Ayaṃ kassapassa bhagavato sāsane sahako nāma bhikkhu anāgāmī hutvā suddhāvāsesu uppanno, tattha naṃ ‘‘sahampati brahmā’’ti sañjānanti. So pana ‘‘ahaṃ bhagavantaṃ upasaṅkamitvā padumanirayaṃ kittessāmi, tato bhagavā bhikkhūnaṃ ārocessati. Kathānusandhikusalā bhikkhū tatthāyuppamāṇaṃ pucchissanti, bhagavā ācikkhanto ariyūpavāde ādīnavaṃ pakāsessatī’’ti iminā kāraṇena bhagavantaṃ upasaṅkamitvā etadavoca. Bhagavā tatheva akāsi, aññataropi bhikkhu pucchi. Tena ca puṭṭho ‘‘seyyathāpi bhikkhū’’tiādimāha.
在这里,所谓“二十迦利量”,是按摩揭陀的量制来算的:四个摩揭陀的“钵他”等于憍萨罗国的一个“钵他”;按憍萨罗的钵他来算,四个钵他等于一“阿罗迦”,四个阿罗迦等于一“东那”,四个东那等于一“摩尼迦”,四个摩尼迦等于一“迦利”;以这个迦利为单位,二十迦利就是“二十迦利量”。“一车芝麻”是指装满一车的芝麻。“阿浮陀地狱”并不是另外单独存在一个叫“阿浮陀”的地狱,而是在无间地狱里,按“阿浮陀”这个数量单位来算寿量所得到的那一段时间,就假立名为“阿浮陀地狱”。同样的道理也适用于“尼罗浮陀”等说法。巴利
Tattha vīsatikhārikoti māgadhakena patthena cattāro patthā kosalaraṭṭhe eko pattho hoti, tena patthena cattāro patthā āḷhakaṃ, cattāri āḷhakāni doṇaṃ, catudoṇā mānikā, catumānikā khārī, tāya khāriyā vīsatikhāriko. Tilavāhoti tilasakaṭaṃ. Abbudo nirayoti abbudo nāma koci paccekanirayo natthi, avīcimhiyeva abbudagaṇanāya paccanokāso pana ‘‘abbudo nirayo’’ti vutto. Esa nayo nirabbudādīsu.
在这里,年数的计算也应该这样理解:就像一百个十万是一俱胝,同样,一百个十万俱胝叫作一钵俱胝;一百个十万钵俱胝叫作一俱胝钵俱胝;一百个十万俱胝钵俱胝叫作一那由他;一百个十万那由他叫作一尼那由他;一百个十万尼那由他是一阿浮陀;阿浮陀的二十倍是一尼罗浮陀。这个计算方法适用于所有情况。不过有些论师说:“这些名称是根据各地狱中哭喊哀号的不同形态,以及造业方式的不同而得的。”另一些人则说:“这些全都是寒地狱。”巴利
Tattha vassagaṇanāpi evaṃ veditabbā – yatheva hi sataṃ satasahassāni koṭi hoti, evaṃ sataṃ satasahassakoṭiyo pakoṭi nāma hoti, sataṃ satasahassapakoṭiyo koṭippakoṭi nāma, sataṃ satasahassakoṭippakoṭiyo nahutaṃ, sataṃ satasahassanahutāni ninnahutaṃ, sataṃ satasahassaninnahutāni ekaṃ abbudaṃ, tato vīsatiguṇaṃ nirabbudaṃ. Esa nayo sabbattha. Keci pana ‘‘tattha tattha paridevanānattenapi kammakaraṇanānattenapi imāni nāmāni laddhānī’’ti vadanti, apare ‘‘sītanarakā eva ete’’ti.
接着“此后”这句话,是针对那些说明这一含义及其特殊差别的偈颂组而说的。因为在这里,按照原文所引的二十首偈颂当中,“一百万”这一首偈只是说明前面已经讲过的含义,其余的偈颂则都是说明特殊差别的。不过,最后两首偈在《大注疏》所审定的传本中是没有的。因此我们才说“在二十首偈颂中”。巴利
Athāparanti tadatthavisesatthadīpakaṃ gāthābandhaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Pāṭhavasena vuttavīsatigāthāsu hi ettha ‘‘sataṃ sahassāna’’nti ayamekā eva gāthā vuttatthadīpikā, sesā visesatthadīpikā eva, avasāne gāthādvayameva pana mahāaṭṭhakathāyaṃ vinicchitapāṭhe natthi. Tenāvocumha ‘‘vīsatigāthāsū’’ti.
663 这里,“斧头”是指粗恶语,因为它具有砍伤自己的作用,所以像斧头一样。“砍断”是指砍断自己那被称为善根的根本。巴利
663. Tattha kuṭhārīti attacchedakaṭṭhena kuṭhārisadisā pharusavācā. Chindatīti kusalamūlasaṅkhātaṃ attano mūlaṃyeva nikantati.
664 “应受谴责”就是指该被责备的事。或者,当一个人以最究竟的意义上值得称赞,却有人把邪欲等罪名强加到他身上来呵责他,这就是“谴责那应受称赞的人”。“他积聚”就是说他不断累积。“过失”就是罪过。巴利
664.Nindiyanti ninditabbaṃ. Taṃ vā nindati yo pasaṃsiyoti yo uttamaṭṭhena pasaṃsāraho puggalo, taṃ vā so pāpicchatādīni āropetvā garahati. Vicinātīti upacināti. Kalinti aparādhaṃ.
665 “这是罪过”就是指这个过失。“在骰子中”是指在赌博用的骰子游戏里。“连同自己的一切所有和自己本身”是说把自己的全部财产连同自己本人都一起押上。“对诸善逝”也是同样的道理:因为已经善巧地到达、并且到达了殊妙之处,所以称为善逝,也就是诸佛、独觉佛和声闻弟子。“若是使心生嗔恚”,意思是如果有人染污了自己的心。这里要说的是:这种心的嗔恨本身就是极大的罪过。巴利
665.Ayaṃ kalīti ayaṃ aparādho. Akkhesūti jūtakīḷanaakkhesu. Sabbassāpi sahāpi attanāti sabbena attano dhanenapi attanāpi saddhiṃ. Sugatesūpi suṭṭhu gatattā, sundarañca ṭhānaṃ gatattā sugatanāmakesu buddhapaccekabuddhasāvakesu. Manaṃ padosayeti yo manaṃ padūseyya. Tassāyaṃ manopadoso eva mahattaro kalīti vuttaṃ hoti.
666 为什么这么说?因为“即使有成百上千……”等等,说的是恶业;因为按年数来算,那段时间有那么长——在那段时间里,他把毁谤圣者的话和心念投向恶业,因此堕入恶道地狱,在那里受苦报。这就是简要说明莲花地狱中寿命的长短。巴利
666. Kasmā? Yasmā sataṃ sahassānaṃ…pe… pāpakaṃ, yasmā vassagaṇanāya ettako so kālo, yaṃ kālaṃ ariyagarahīvācaṃ manañca paṇidhāya pāpakaṃ nirayaṃ upeti, tattha paccatīti vuttaṃ hoti. Idañhi saṅkhepena padumaniraye āyuppamāṇaṃ.
667 现在,再用另一种方式来说明“对善逝心生嗔恨,这才是更大的罪过”这个道理,于是开始说“说不实语者”等话。其中,“说不实语者”是指因为毁谤圣者而说假话的人。“地狱”指莲花地狱等。“死后成为同类”是说从这个世界命终之后,因为投生到地狱,就成为那里的同类。“他世”指来世。巴利
667. Idāni aparenapi nayena ‘‘ayameva mahattaro kali, yo sugatesu manaṃ padūsaye’’ti imamatthaṃ vibhāvento ‘‘abhūtavādī’’ti ādimāha. Tattha abhūtavādīti ariyūpavādavasena alikavādī. Nirayanti padumādiṃ. Pecca samā bhavantīti ito paṭigantvā nirayūpapattiyā samā bhavanti. Paratthāti paraloke.
668 668. 接着还有什么呢——“若对无嗔害者……”。在这里应当知道:因为心中没有嗔恨,所以是“无嗔害者”;因为没有无明的垢染,所以是“清净者”;因为没有邪恶的欲望,所以是“无可责难者”。或者也可以这样连接:因为是无嗔害者,所以是清净者;因为是清净者,所以是无可责难者。巴利
668. Kiñca bhiyyo – yo appaduṭṭhassāti. Tattha manopadosābhāvena appaduṭṭho, avijjāmalābhāvena suddho, pāpicchābhāvena anaṅgaṇoti veditabbo. Appaduṭṭhattā vā suddhassa, suddhattā anaṅgaṇassāti evampettha yojetabbaṃ.
669 669. 这样说明了对于善逝起嗔心是更严重的罪过后,现在要说出名为“所遮止事偈”的十四首偈颂。据说这些偈是尊者大目犍连在拘迦利临终时教导他而说的,也有人说是大梵天说的。与这部经合在一起、具有同一含义的提要就是“yo lobhaguṇe anuyutto”等句。其中,在第一首偈里,首先因为被称为“guṇa”,又因为反复多次生起,所以贪本身就是“贪欲”,这是渴爱的同义词。“不纳言者”是指不能领受言语教导的人,因为他们连佛陀的教诫也不接受。“悭吝者”是指具有五种悭吝的人。“喜好离间语”是指想要离间上首弟子们。其余的意义都很明显。这里说的是:拘迦利贤友,像你这样的人,被与贪相应的渴爱所驱使,成为贪欲的追随者、无信者、吝啬者、不纳言者、悭吝者、喜好离间语者;你用言语辱骂其他甚至不应与之说话的人。因此我对你说“口恶者”等这三首偈。巴利
669. Evaṃ sugatesu manopadosassa mahattarakalibhāvaṃ sādhetvā idāni vāritavatthugāthā nāma cuddasa gāthā āha. Imā kira kokālikaṃ mīyamānameva ovadantenāyasmatā mahāmoggallānena vuttā, ‘‘mahābrahmunā’’ti eke. Tāsaṃ iminā suttena saddhiṃ ekasaṅgahatthaṃ ayamuddeso ‘‘yo lobhaguṇe anuyutto’’tiādi. Tattha paṭhamagāthāya tāva ‘‘guṇo’’ti niddiṭṭhattā anekakkhattuṃ pavattattā vā lobhoyeva lobhaguṇo, taṇhāyetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Avadaññūti avacanaññū buddhānampi ovādaṃ aggahaṇena. Maccharīti pañcavidhamacchariyena. Pesuṇiyaṃ anuyuttoti aggasāvakānaṃ bhedakāmatāya. Sesaṃ pākaṭameva. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – yo, āvuso kokālika, tumhādiso anuyuttalobhataṇhāya lobhaguṇe anuyutto assaddho kadariyo avadaññū maccharī pesuṇiyaṃ anuyutto, so vacasā paribhāsati aññaṃ abhāsaneyyampi puggalaṃ. Tena taṃ vadāmi ‘‘mukhaduggā’’ti gāthāttayaṃ.
670 这段里含义不清楚的词,意思是这样:口恶,就是嘴巴不干净、说话不善;口不平等,就是说话偏邪不公。已消失,就是已经离去、不复存在。说假话的人,就是说虚妄不实之言的人。非圣者,就是不是圣者,是凡夫。非善人,就是不是善人,是恶人。毁坏增长者,就是破坏已生起的善法、摧毁增长的人。破坏已生起者,就是毁坏他人善法增长的人。最下人,就是最卑劣的人、最末等的人。厄运者,就是不吉祥的人、倒霉的人。卑生子,就是对佛陀来说是卑劣之子。巴利
670. Tassāyaṃ anuttānapadattho – mukhadugga mukhavisama, vibhūta vigatabhūta, alikavādi, anariya asappurisa, bhūnahu bhūtihanaka, vuḍḍhināsaka, purisanta antimapurisa, kali alakkhipurisa, avajāta buddhassa avajātaputta.
671 你扬起了尘土:你把烦恼的尘垢撒到了自己身上。坑:所谓坑。也有写成Papāta的读法,意思一样,指悬崖。还有写成Papada的读法,意思是大地狱。巴利
671.Rajamākirasīti kilesarajaṃ attani pakkhipasi. Papatanti sobbhaṃ. ‘‘Papāta’’ntipi pāṭho, so evattho. ‘‘Papada’’ntipi pāṭho, mahānirayanti attho.
672 “已去”这句话里,“ha”是个语气词,“taṃ”指那些善业或不善业。或者,“已去”是指已经去做、已经走上那条路,也就是已经积聚起来的意思。“自有”是说,因为造了那个业,业就成了造作者自己的。他一定会承受那个业,那个业不会从他那里消失——这就是这句话要表达的意思。而且正因为他会承受,所以才说“愚人……中略……造恶业的人会见到苦”。巴利
672.Eti hatanti ettha ha-iti nipāto, tanti taṃ kusalākusalakammaṃ. Atha vā hatanti gataṃ paṭipannaṃ, upacitanti attho. Suvāmīti sāmi tassa kammassa katattā. So hi taṃ kammaṃ labhateva, nāssa taṃ nassatīti vuttaṃ hoti. Yasmā ca labhati, tasmā dukkhaṃ mando…pe… kibbisakārī.
673 现在,为了说明愚人所见到的那种苦,接着用“铁桩所击之处”等话来加以阐明。其中,前半首偈颂的意思是:世尊针对那个“铁桩所击之处”说过:“比丘们,地狱卒对他施行一种叫‘五缚’的刑罚。”他遭受的就是这个;当他这样遭受时,就被按倒在烧得通红的铁地上,地狱卒在五个部位捶打他,于是他遭受那根烧红的、被称为铁桩的锋利铁矛——对此世尊说过“他们把烧红的铁桩钉入他手中”等等。后半首偈颂,则是说他在那里被烧煮了许多千年之后,为了体验剩余的痛苦,逐渐来到苦咸水河边,世尊针对他到达那里后所受的“他们把烧红的铁球放进他嘴里,把烧红的铜液灌进他嘴里”之事而说。其中,ayo 就是铁。guḷasannibha 就是像木苹果一样的形状。这里,由 ayogahaṇa 应知是铜液,由另一个应知是铁球。patirūpa 就是与所造之业相应的。巴利
673. Idāni yaṃ dukkhaṃ mando passati, taṃ pakāsento ‘‘ayosaṅkusamāhataṭṭhāna’’ntiādimāha. Tattha purimaupaḍḍhagāthāya tāva attho – yaṃ taṃ ayosaṅkusamāhataṭṭhānaṃ sandhāya bhagavatā ‘‘tamenaṃ, bhikkhave, nirayapālā pañcavidhabandhanaṃ nāma kāraṇaṃ karontī’’ti (ma. ni. 3.250; a. ni. 3.36) vuttaṃ, taṃ upeti, evaṃ upento ca tattheva ādittāya lohapathaviyā nipajjāpetvā nirayapālehi pañcasu ṭhānesu ākoṭiyamānaṃ tattaṃ khilasaṅkhātaṃ tiṇhadhāramayasūlamupeti, yaṃ sandhāya bhagavatā vuttaṃ ‘‘tattaṃ ayokhilaṃ hatthe gamentī’’tiādi. Tato parā upaḍḍhagāthā anekāni vassasahassāni tattha paccitvā pakkāvasesānubhavanatthaṃ anupubbena khārodakanadītīraṃ gatassa yaṃ taṃ ‘‘tattaṃ ayoguḷaṃ mukhe pakkhipanti, tattaṃ tambalohaṃ mukhe āsiñcantī’’ti vuttaṃ, taṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Tattha ayoti lohaṃ. Guḷasannibhanti beluvasaṇṭhānaṃ. Ayogahaṇena cettha tambalohaṃ, itarena ayoguḷaṃ veditabbaṃ. Patirūpanti katakammānurūpaṃ.
674 接下来这些偈颂里说“不悦耳”,意思是:那些喊着“抓住他!打他!”之类话的地狱卒,不会说柔和动听的话。“不迎面奔来”,意思是:他们不会带着和善的表情迎面跑来,不会和颜悦色地靠近,而是带来灾祸和毁灭才靠近——这就是这句话要表达的意思。“不成为庇护而来”,意思是:他们不会作为保护者、遮蔽处、归依处而来,而是来抓、来杀才靠近——这就是这句话要表达的意思。“躺在铺开的炭火上”,意思是:被扔上炭山之后,在无数千年里躺在铺开的炭火上。“烈火炽燃”,意思是:从四周燃烧、在一切方向都猛烈燃烧的火。“进入”,意思是:被扔进大地狱,沉没其中。所谓大地狱,就是那个被称为“四角狱”的,站在一百由旬外看它的人,眼睛都会裂开。巴利
674. Tato parāsu gāthāsu na hi vaggūti ‘‘gaṇhatha, paharathā’’tiādīni vadantā nirayapālā madhuravācaṃ na vadanti. Nābhijavantīti na sumukhabhāvena abhimukhā javanti, na sumukhā upasaṅkamanti, anayabyasanamāvahantā eva upasaṅkamantīti vuttaṃ hoti. Na tāṇamupentīti tāṇaṃ leṇaṃ paṭisaraṇaṃ hutvā na upagacchanti, gaṇhantā hanantā eva upentīti vuttaṃ hoti. Aṅgāre santhate sayantīti aṅgārapabbataṃ āropitā samānā anekāni vassasahassāni santhate aṅgāre senti. Ginisampajjalitanti samantato jalitaṃ sabbadisāsu ca sampajjalitaṃ aggiṃ. Pavisantīti mahāniraye pakkhittā samānā ogāhanti. Mahānirayo nāma yo so ‘‘catukkaṇṇo’’ti (a. ni. 3.36) vutto, naṃ yojanasate ṭhatvā passataṃ akkhīni bhijjanti.
675 用铁网缠住后再打,就像猎鹿人打鹿那样杀害他们。这是《天使经》里没有说到的刑罚方式。像盲人一样走向黑暗:因为造作了黑暗,就像盲人一样,由于黑暗极为深重,所以被称为“黑暗”的,名叫烟焰地狱,他们投生到那里去。据说在那里,他们闻到刺鼻的浓烟,眼睛就破裂了,因此说“像盲人一样”。那黑暗如浓雾一般弥漫——意思是那盲目的黑暗,就像浓雾一样弥漫。也有读作“已展开”的。这也是《天使经》里没有说到的刑罚方式。巴利
675.Jālena ca onahiyānāti ayojālena paliveṭhetvā migaluddakā migaṃ viya hananti. Idaṃ devadūte avuttakammakāraṇaṃ. Andhaṃva timisamāyantīti andhakaraṇena andhameva bahalandhakārattā ‘‘timisa’’nti saññitaṃ dhūmaroruvaṃ nāma narakaṃ gacchanti. Tatra kira nesaṃ kharadhūmaṃ ghāyitvā akkhīni bhijjanti, tena ‘‘andhaṃvā’’ti vuttaṃ. Taṃ vitatañhi yathā mahikāyoti tañca andhatimisaṃ mahikāyo viya vitataṃ hotīti attho. ‘‘Vitthata’’ntipi pāṭho. Idampi devadūte avuttakammakāraṇameva.
676 接着是“铁制的”:这个铁锅深达地际,有二十四万由旬深,里面装满了铜液,与锅口齐平。所谓“在其中长夜”,就是在那些铜锅里长时间地被煎煮。“如火烧聚”,就是像火聚一样。“沸腾翻滚”,就是沸腾翻滚着,一时向上、一时向下,据说像在泡沫中翻滚一样被煎煮。这应当依照《天使经》所说的方式来理解。巴利
676.Atha lohamayanti ayaṃ pana lohakumbhī pathavipariyantikā catunahutādhikāni dveyojanasatasahassāni gambhīrā samatittikā tatralohapūrā hoti. Paccanti hi tāsu cirarattanti tāsu kumbhīsu dīgharattaṃ paccanti. Agginisamāsūti aggisamāsu . Samuppilavāteti samuppilavantā , sakimpi uddhaṃ sakimpi adho gacchamānā pheṇuddehakaṃ paccantīti vuttaṃ hoti. Devadūte vuttanayeneva taṃ veditabbaṃ.
677 在脓血混合的铜锅里。“在那里怎样呢”——就是在那里面。“无论哪个方向”——各方和四隅。“他躺卧”——就是前去。也有写成“abhiseti”的读法,那里的意思是无论哪个方向都紧紧依附、无法摆脱。“他受苦”——就是被逼迫。也有写成“kilijjati”的读法,意思是腐烂。“接触着”——就是被那脓血碰到。这也是《天使经》中没有提到的刑罚方式。巴利
677.Pubbalohitamisseti pubbalohitamissāya lohakumbhiyā. Tattha kinti tattha. Yaṃ yaṃ disakanti disaṃ vidisaṃ. Adhisetīti gacchati. ‘‘Abhisetī’’tipi pāṭho, tattha yaṃ yaṃ disaṃ allīyati apassayatīti attho. Kilissatīti bādhīyati. ‘‘Kilijjatī’’tipi pāṭho, pūti hotīti attho. Samphusamānoti tena pubbalohitena phuṭṭho samāno. Idampi devadūte avuttakammakāraṇaṃ.
678 “蛆虫的住处”:就是蛆虫居住的地方。这也是铜锅地狱,在《天使经》里称为“粪坑地狱”。掉进那里面的众生,被针嘴虫割开皮肤等,啃食骨髓。“无法离去,因为没有岸边”:没办法离开,因为没有岸。“tīravamatthi”也是一种读法,意思一样。这里说的“tīrava”就是指岸边。“因为四周完全像锅壁一样”:那口铜锅上方也是封闭的,四周完全像锅壁一样围住,所以说没有办法离开,没有岸边。巴利
678.Puḷavāvasatheti puḷavānaṃ āvāse. Ayampi lohakumbhīyeva devadūte ‘‘gūthanirayo’’ti vuttā, tattha patitassa sūcimukhapāṇā chaviādīni chinditvā aṭṭhimiñjaṃ khādanti. Gantuṃ na hi tīramapatthīti apagantuṃ na hi tīraṃ atthi. ‘‘Tīravamatthī’’tipi pāṭho, soyevattho. Tīrameva ettha ‘‘tīrava’’nti vuttaṃ. Sabbasamā hi samantakapallāti yasmā tassā kumbhiyā uparibhāgepi nikujjitattā sabbattha samā samantato kaṭāhā, tasmā apagantuṃ tīraṃ natthīti vuttaṃ hoti.
679 剑叶林也和《天使经》里说的一样。那片林子从远处看,就像一座可爱的芒果园,地狱众生因为贪心走进去,这时被风吹动的叶子纷纷落下,割断他们的四肢和身体各部分。所以说“他们走进去,身体被割碎”,意思是进去之后,身体被彻底割断。关于“钩住舌头,来回拖打”:在那剑叶林里,那些说妄语的地狱众生快速奔跑后跌倒,地狱卒用钩子把他们的舌头拉出来,就像人们把湿皮铺在地上,用木桩钉住捶打一样,钉住之后,又用斧头反复劈砍,把每一段都切碎打散;断碎的部分又会重新长出来。也有读作“āracayāracayā”的,意思是拖来拖去、拽来拽去。这也是《天使经》里没有提到的业行。巴利
679.Asipattavanaṃ devadūte vuttanayameva. Tañhi dūrato ramaṇīyaṃ ambavanaṃ viya dissati, athettha lobhena nerayikā pavisanti, tato nesaṃ vāteritāni pattāni patitvā aṅgapaccaṅgāni chindanti. Tenāha – ‘‘taṃ pavisanti samucchidagattā’’ti. Taṃ pavisanti tato suṭṭhu chinnagattā hontīti. Jivhaṃ baḷisena gahetvā ārajayārajayā vihanantīti tattha asipattavane vegena dhāvitvā patitānaṃ musāvādīnaṃ nerayikānaṃ nirayapālā jivhaṃ baḷisena nikkaḍḍhitvā yathā manussā allacammaṃ bhūmiyaṃ pattharitvā khilehi ākoṭenti, evaṃ ākoṭetvā pharasūhi phāletvā phāletvā ekamekaṃ koṭiṃ chindetvā vihananti, chinnachinnā koṭi punappunaṃ samuṭṭhāti. ‘‘Āracayāracayā’’tipi pāṭho, āviñchitvā āviñchitvāti attho. Etampi devadūte avuttakammakāraṇaṃ.
680 韦答拉尼河:就是《天使经》里说的那条“巨大的碱水河”。据说这条河看上去像恒河一样满是水。地狱众生想着“我们下去洗澡、喝水吧”,就掉了进去。锋利的刀刃:就是锐利的刀锋,意思是带有锋利刀锋的。据说那条河的上方、下方和两岸,都像排列着一排排锋利的刀刃一样,因此它被称为“锋刃之河”。他们因渴求水而接近那锋刃之河,“接近”就是依附上去的意思。当他们这样接近时,被恶业驱使,那些愚痴的人就沉坠到里面。巴利
680.Vetaraṇinti devadūte ‘‘mahatī khārodakā nadī’’ti (ma. ni. 3.269) vuttanadiṃ. Sā kira gaṅgā viya udakabharitā dissati. Athettha nhāyissāma pivissāmāti nerayikā patanti. Tiṇhadhārakhuradhāranti tiṇhadhāraṃ khuradhāraṃ, tikkhadhārakhuradhāravatinti vuttaṃ hoti. Tassā kira nadiyā uddhamadho ubhayatīresu ca tiṇhadhārā khurā paṭipāṭiyā ṭhapitā viya tiṭṭhanti, tena sā ‘‘tiṇhadhārā khuradhārā’’ti vuccati. Taṃ tiṇhadhārakhuradhāraṃ udakāsāya upenti allīyantīti attho. Evaṃ upentā ca pāpakammena coditā tattha mandā papatanti bālāti attho.
681 “黑色的、杂色的”:这个词要和后面的“狗”连起来理解。意思是黑色和杂色的狗在咬食。“鸦群”:就是黑乌鸦群。“贪婪的”:指生起了很强的贪欲,也有人说是指“大鹫”。“鹰”:就是鹰鸟,也有人说这是“鹰的名称”。“乌鸦”:指不是黑色的普通乌鸦。这些也是《天使经》里没有提到的业因。其中有些前面已经说过了,这里就不再重复,因为属于前后相关的内容,可以理解为已经讲过了。巴利
681.Sāmā sabalāti etaṃ parato ‘‘soṇā’’ti iminā yojetabbaṃ. Sāmavaṇṇā kammāsavaṇṇā ca soṇā khādantīti vuttaṃ hoti . Kākolagaṇāti kaṇhakākagaṇā. Paṭigiddhāti suṭṭhu sañjātagedhā hutvā, ‘‘mahāgijjhā’’ti eke. Kulalāti kulalapakkhino, ‘‘senānametaṃ nāma’’nti eke. Vāyasāti akaṇhakākā. Idampi devadūte avuttakammakāraṇaṃ. Tattha vuttānipi pana kānici idha na vuttāni, tāni etesaṃ purimapacchimabhāgattā vuttāneva hontīti veditabbāni.
682 如今,把这一切地狱里的生活状况展示出来之后,为了教导,说了“实在是困苦啊”这首偈颂。它的意思是:在这地狱里,造恶的人亲身感受到种种不同业行所感召的生存方式,实在是困苦。因此,在这里,当残余的寿命还在、生命相续还存在的时候,人既然还活在这个世上,就应当通过皈依等善法的修持,成为一个精勤尽责的人。成为尽责的人之后,还应当以持续不断地去做的方式来做,不应有片刻放逸,不应陷入放逸。这是这里的总括注释。至于其余那些文句,因为按照前面已说的方式,意义浅显易懂,所以就没有逐词注释。巴利
682. Idāni sabbamevetaṃ narakavuttiṃ dassetvā ovadanto ‘‘kicchā vatāya’’nti gāthamāha. Tassattho – kicchā vata ayaṃ idha narake nānappakārakammakaraṇabhedā vutti, yaṃ jano phusati kibbisakārī. Tasmā idha jīvitasese jīvitasantatiyā vijjamānāya idha loke ṭhitoyeva samāno saraṇagamanādikusaladhammānuṭṭhānena kiccakaro naro siyā bhaveyya. Kiccakaro bhavantopi ca sātaccakāritāvaseneva bhaveyya, na pamajje muhuttampi na pamādamāpajjeyyāti ayamettha samuccayavaṇṇanā. Yasmā pana vuttāvasesāni padāni pubbe vuttanayattā uttānatthattā ca suviññeyyāneva, tasmā anupadavaṇṇanā na katāti.
11. 《那罗迦经》的注释巴利
11. Nālakasuttavaṇṇanā
685 685.“喜悦生起”等偈颂,就是《那罗迦经》。它的来历是怎样的呢?据说,那罗迦过去看见莲华上佛的一位声闻弟子修习牟尼之道,心中渴望自己也能成就那样的境界。从那时起,他历经十万劫圆满诸波罗蜜,后来成为阿私陀仙人的外甥,名叫那罗迦的苦行者。在世尊初转法轮后的第七天,那罗迦用“所未知的……”等两首偈颂,向世尊请问牟尼之道。世尊便以“我将为你宣说牟尼之道……”等方式为他解答。世尊入般涅槃后,大迦叶尊者主持结集时,阿难尊者被问及同样的牟尼之道,以及那罗迦是在何时、因何因缘被劝导去请问世尊的。为了把这一切清楚揭示出来,阿难尊者先说了以“喜悦生起”等开头的二十首缘起偈颂,然后开示了这个法义。这些内容合在一起,就称为《那罗迦经》。巴利
685.Ānandajāteti nālakasuttaṃ. Kā uppatti? Padumuttarassa kira bhagavato sāvakaṃ moneyyapaṭipadaṃ paṭipannaṃ disvā tathattaṃ abhikaṅkhamāno tato pabhuti kappasatasahassaṃ pāramiyo pūretvā asitassa isino bhāgineyyo nālako nāma tāpaso bhagavantaṃ dhammacakkappavattitadivasato sattame divase ‘‘aññātameta’’ntiādīhi dvīhi gāthāhi moneyyapaṭipadaṃ pucchi. Tassa bhagavā ‘‘moneyyaṃ te upaññissa’’ntiādinā nayena taṃ byākāsi. Parinibbute pana bhagavati saṅgītiṃ karontenāyasmatā mahākassapena āyasmā ānando tameva moneyyapaṭipadaṃ puṭṭho yena yadā ca samādapito nālako bhagavantaṃ pucchi . Taṃ sabbaṃ pākaṭaṃ katvā dassetukāmo ‘‘ānandajāte’’tiādikā vīsati vatthugāthāyo vatvā abhāsi. Taṃ sabbampi ‘‘nālakasutta’’nti vuccati.
其中,“喜悦生起”指已经成就、达到增长。“满意”指愉悦。或者也可以说,“喜悦生起”指非常欢喜,“满意”指心生喜悦。“穿着洁净衣”指穿着没有染污的衣服。因为天界如意树所生的衣服,不会沾染灰尘或污垢。“拿起布”在这里,因为与布相似而被称为“布”,也就是把天衣拿起来。“阿西德仙人”指因为身体肤色黝黑而得此名的仙人。“在日间住处”指日间休息的地方。其余词句的意义,从字面上就能明白。巴利
Tattha ānandajāteti samiddhijāte vuddhippatte. Patīteti tuṭṭhe. Atha vā ānandajāteti pamudite. Patīteti somanassajāte. Sucivasaneti akiliṭṭhavasane. Devānañhi kapparukkhanibbattāni vasanāni rajaṃ vā malaṃ vā na gaṇhanti. Dussaṃ gahetvāti idha dussasadisattā ‘‘dussa’’nti laddhavohāraṃ dibbavatthaṃ ukkhipitvā. Asito isīti kaṇhasarīravaṇṇattā evaṃladdhanāmo isi. Divāvihāreti divāvihāraṭṭhāne. Sesaṃ padato uttānameva.
从关联关系来说:据说,这位是净饭王父亲师子颊王的国师。净饭王还没灌顶登基的时候,他就已经是净饭王的技艺老师;净饭王登基之后,他仍然是国师。他每天早晚都来觐见国王,但国王已经不像他小时候那样对他行恭敬之礼,只是合掌致意而已。据说,这已经是灌顶登基的释迦族国王们的惯例了。国师因此感到厌烦,就对国王说:“大王,我要出家。”国王知道他去意已决,便请求说:“既然如此,老师,请您就住在我的御苑里吧,这样我就能常常看到您。”他答应说“好”,就以苦行者的方式出家了。国王供养他,他住在御苑里,修习遍处禅观的前行,成就了八种等至和五种神通。从那时起,他在王宫用完早斋后,就去雪山、四天王天等处中的某一处,作日间休息。有一天,他去了三十三天,进入宝殿,坐在天界的宝座上,享受着禅定的安乐。傍晚时分,他从定中起来,站在殿门口四处张望,在六十由旬宽的大街上散花,唱起赞叹菩萨功德的赞歌,看见以帝释天为首的诸天众正在嬉戏游乐。因此阿难尊者说:“喜悦生起……在日间住处。”巴利
Sambandhato pana – ayaṃ kira suddhodanassa pitu sīhahanurañño purohito suddhodanassapi anabhisittakāle sippācariyo hutvā abhisittakāle purohitoyeva ahosi. Tassa sāyaṃ pātaṃ rājupaṭṭhānaṃ āgatassa rājā daharakāle viya nipaccakāraṃ akatvā añjalikammamattameva karoti. Dhammatā kiresā pattābhisekānaṃ sakyarājūnaṃ. Purohito tena nibbijjitvā ‘‘pabbajjāmahaṃ mahārājā’’ti āha. Rājā tassa nicchayaṃ ñatvā ‘‘tena hi, ācariya, mameva uyyāne vasitabbaṃ, yathā te ahaṃ abhiṇhaṃ passeyya’’nti yāci. So ‘‘evaṃ hotū’’ti paṭissuṇitvā tāpasapabbajjaṃ pabbajitvā raññā upaṭṭhahiyamāno uyyāneyeva vasanto kasiṇaparikammaṃ katvā aṭṭha samāpattiyo pañcābhiññāyo ca nibbattesi. So tato pabhuti rājakule bhattakiccaṃ katvā himavantacātumahārājikabhavanādīnaṃ aññataraṃ gantvā divāvihāraṃ karoti. Athekadivasaṃ tāvatiṃsabhavanaṃ gantvā ratanavimānaṃ pavisitvā dibbaratanapallaṅke nisinno samādhisukhaṃ anubhavitvā sāyanhasamayaṃ vuṭṭhāya vimānadvāre ṭhatvā ito cito ca vilokento saṭṭhiyojanāya mahāvīthiyā celukkhepaṃ katvā bodhisattaguṇapasaṃsitāni thutivacanāni vatvā kīḷante sakkappamukhe deve addasa. Tenāha āyasmā ānando – ‘‘ānandajāte…pe… divāvihāre’’ti.
686 686. 他这样看见天人之后……是依着什么原因呢?其中,“udagga(兴奋)”是指身体向上挺起的样子。“cittiṃ karitvāna(生起恭敬)”是指生起了恭敬心。“kalyarūpo(容色美好)”是指面现欢喜的样子。其余的意义都很浅显易懂。巴利
686. Tato so evaṃ disvāna deve…pe… kiṃ paṭicca. Tattha udaggeti abbhunnatakāye. Cittiṃ karitvānāti ādaraṃ katvā. Kalyarūpoti tuṭṭharūpo. Sesaṃ uttānatthameva.
687 现在,“yadāpi āsī”等偈颂的关联很清楚。至于第一首偈颂的词义:其中“saṅgamo”就是交战,“jayo surānaṃ”就是诸天获得了胜利。巴利
687. Idāni ‘‘yadāpi āsī’’tiādigāthā uttānasambandhā eva. Padattho pana paṭhamagāthāya tāva saṅgamoti saṅgāmo. Jayo surānanti devānaṃ jayo.
要说明这一点,应当了解下面这段次第故事:据说,帝释天过去是摩揭陀国马卡村人,名叫摩伽,是三十三人中的首领。他圆满实践了七种誓愿后,和随从们一起投生到三十三天。那时,原本住在那里的天人们说:“这些是新来的天众,我们该款待他们。”于是献上天界的莲花,并邀请他们共享半壁江山。帝释天不满足于只得到一半的统治权,就说服了自己的随从。有一天,趁那些原住天人喝醉时,他们抓住那些天人的脚,把他们扔到须弥山脚。那些天人在须弥山底层形成了一处方圆一万由旬的阿修罗住处,那里有一棵绚丽的彩画红檀树,被一棵巴利恰答咖树遮蔽着,显得格外庄严。后来他们清醒过来,找不到三十三天,就说:“唉!我们因为饮酒的过失而毁了自己!从今以后,我们喝的不是‘苏罗’(酒),而是‘阿修罗’(非酒);我们不再是‘苏罗’(天众),如今我们成了‘阿修罗’了。”从此以后,他们就以“阿修罗”这个名称闻名。他们又说:“来吧,现在我们要和天众开战!”于是从四面八方登上须弥山。帝释天便用战斗把他们击退,又把他们扔进大海,并在四座城门处造了与自己相似的帝释像安置在那里。于是阿修罗们心想:“这位帝释天确实不放逸,一直守护着啊!”便又回到了自己的城池。于是天众们宣扬自己的胜利,在大街上挥舞衣物,欢庆星祭。这时,阿私陀仙人因为有能力忆念过去未来四十劫,便思惟:“这些天众过去是否也曾这样欢庆过呢?”他观察时,看见了那场天与阿修罗之战中天众的胜利,便说道——巴利
Tassāvibhāvatthaṃ ayamanupubbikathā veditabbā – sakko kira magadharaṭṭhe macalagāmavāsī tettiṃsamanussaseṭṭho magho nāma māṇavo hutvā satta vattapadāni pūretvā tāvatiṃsabhavane nibbatti saddhiṃ parisāya. Tato pubbadevā ‘‘āgantukadevaputtā āgatā, sakkāraṃ nesaṃ karissāmā’’ti vatvā dibbapadumāni upanāmesuṃ, upaḍḍharajjena ca nimantesuṃ. Sakko upaḍḍharajjena asantuṭṭho sakaparisaṃ saññāpetvā ekadivasaṃ surāmadamatte te pāde gahetvā sinerupabbatapāde khipi. Tesaṃ sinerussa heṭṭhimatale dasasahassayojanaṃ asurabhavanaṃ nibbatti pāricchattakapaṭicchannabhūtāya citrapāṭaliyā upasobhitaṃ. Tato te satiṃ paṭilabhitvā tāvatiṃsabhavanaṃ apassantā ‘‘aho re naṭṭhā mayaṃ pānamadadosena, na dāni mayaṃ suraṃ pivimhā, asuraṃ pivimhā, na dānimhā surā, asurā dāni jātamhā’’ti. Tato pabhuti ‘‘asurā’’icceva uppannasamaññā hutvā ‘‘handa dāni devehi saddhiṃ saṅgāmemā’’ti sineruṃ parito ārohiṃsu. Tato sakko asure yuddhena abbhuggantvā punapi samudde pakkhipitvā catūsu dvāresu attanā sadisaṃ indapaṭimaṃ māpetvā ṭhapesi. Tato asurā ‘‘appamatto vatāyaṃ sakko niccaṃ rakkhanto tiṭṭhatī’’ti cintetvā punadeva nagaraṃ agamiṃsu. Tato devā attano jayaṃ ghosentā mahāvīthiyaṃ celukkhepaṃ karontā nakkhattaṃ kīḷiṃsu. Atha asito atītānāgate cattālīsakappe anussarituṃ samatthatāya ‘‘kiṃ nu kho imehi pubbepi evaṃ kīḷitapubba’’nti āvajjento taṃ devāsurasaṅgāme devavijayaṃ disvā āha –
每当与阿修罗众发生战斗时,
天众胜利了,阿修罗战败了;
那时也没有这样让人毛骨悚然的景象。巴利
‘‘Yadāpi āsī asurehi saṅgamo, Jayo surānaṃ asurā parājitā; Tadāpi netādiso lomahaṃsano’’ti.
那时也没有这样令人毛骨悚然的喜悦。天神们是见到了什么稀奇的事才这么高兴?意思是:今天到底见到了什么稀奇的事,让天神们这样欢喜?巴利
Tasmimpi kāle etādiso lomahaṃsano pamodo na āsi. Kimabbhutaṃ daṭṭhu marū pamoditāti ajja pana kiṃ abbhutaṃ disvā evaṃ devā pamuditāti.
688 688. 在第二首偈颂中,“seḷenti”的意思是:从口中发出高声欢呼。“gāyanti”是唱各种不同的歌,“vādayanti”是演奏六万八千件乐器,“phoṭenti”是拍手鼓掌。“pucchāmi vo”是说:自己虽然有能力思维了知,但因为想听他们的话,所以发问。“merumuddhavāsino”指住在须弥山顶的众生。因为须弥山的下层是一万由旬的阿修罗住处,中层是二千小岛围绕的四大部洲,上层是一万由旬的三十三天住处。所以诸天被称为“住在须弥山顶者”。“mārisā”是对那些天人的称呼,意思是“无苦无恼”。巴利
688. Dutiyagāthāya seḷentīti mukhena usseḷanasaddaṃ muñcanti. Gāyanti nānāvidhāni gītāni, vādayanti aṭṭhasaṭṭhi tūriyasahassāni, phoṭentīti apphoṭenti. Pucchāmi vohanti attanā āvajjetvā ñātuṃ samatthopi tesaṃ vacanaṃ sotukāmatāya pucchati. Merumuddhavāsineti sinerumuddhani vasante. Sinerussa hi heṭṭhimatale dasayojanasahassaṃ asurabhavanaṃ, majjhimatale dvisahassaparittadīpaparivārā cattāro mahādīpā, uparimatale dasayojanasahassaṃ tāvatiṃsabhavanaṃ. Tasmā devā ‘‘merumuddhavāsino’’ti vuccanti. Mārisāti deve āmanteti, nidukkhā nirābādhāti vuttaṃ hoti.
689 689. 接着,诸天为了说明这件事而说出第三首偈颂。“bodhisatto”(菩萨)指将要觉悟的众生,是值得证得无上正觉的众生;“ratanavaro”(最胜宝)指已成为最殊胜的珍宝。“tenamha tuṭṭhā”(我们因此欢喜),意思是由于这个原因我们欢喜。因为他成就佛位之后,会那样说法,使得我们和其他天众都能达到有学与无学的境地。人间的人听了他的法之后,那些无法证入般涅槃的,会通过布施等善行而在天界圆满投生——据说这就是他们的意图。其中,“tuṭṭhā kalyarūpā”(欢喜、美丽)这两个词虽然在意义上没有差别,但应当知道是为了回答这两个问题才说的:“见到了什么稀有之事,天众们欢喜?”以及“为什么天众们格外美丽?”巴利
689. Athassa tamatthaṃ ārocentehi devehi vuttāya tatiyagāthāya bodhisattoti bujjhanakasatto, sammāsambodhiṃ gantuṃ araho satto ratanavaroti vararatanabhūto. Tenamha tuṭṭhāti tena kāraṇena mayaṃ tuṭṭhā. So hi buddhattaṃ patvā tathā dhammaṃ desessati, yathā mayañca aññe ca devagaṇā sekkhāsekkhabhūmiṃ pāpuṇissāma. Manussāpissa dhammaṃ sutvā ye na sakkhissanti parinibbātuṃ, te dānādīni katvā devaloke paripūressantīti ayaṃ kira nesaṃ adhippāyo. Tattha ‘‘tuṭṭhā kalyarūpā’’ti kiñcāpi idaṃ padadvayaṃ atthato abhinnaṃ, tathāpi ‘‘kimabbhutaṃ daṭṭhu marū pamoditā, kiṃ devasaṅgho atiriva kalyarūpo’’ti imassa pañhadvayassa vissajjanatthaṃ vuttanti veditabbaṃ.
690 现在,为了说明诸天是因为什么意图而在菩萨出生时感到欢喜,他们用第四首偈颂来揭示这一点:偈颂中用“satta”(众生)这个词涵盖了天和人,用“pajā”(生类)这个词涵盖了其余各趣的众生。这样,通过这两个词就显示出菩萨在五趣中最为殊胜。因为即使是畜生趣中的狮子等,也具备无所畏惧等功德,但菩萨仍然超越它们,所以称他为“pajānamuttamo”(生类中最胜)。而在天和人当中,那些为自利而行等四种人里,菩萨是行自他两利的最上等人;在人类中,他像牛王一样,是“人中之牛王”(narāsabho)。因此,他们为了赞叹他而说出了这两个词。巴利
690. Idāni yena adhippāyena bodhisatte jāte tuṭṭhā ahesuṃ, taṃ āvikarontehi vuttāya catutthagāthāya sattaggahaṇena devamanussaggahaṇaṃ, pajāgahaṇena sesagatiggahaṇaṃ. Evaṃ dvīhi padehi pañcasupi gatīsu seṭṭhabhāvaṃ dasseti. Tiracchānāpi hi sīhādayo asantāsādiguṇayuttā, tepi ayameva atiseti. Tasmā ‘‘pajānamuttamo’’ti vutto. Devamanussesu pana ye attahitāya paṭipannādayo cattāro puggalā, tesu ubhayahitapaṭipanno aggapuggalo ayaṃ, naresu ca usabhasadisattā narāsabho. Tenassa thutiṃ bhaṇantā idampi padadvayamāhaṃsu.
691 在第五首偈颂里,“那声音”指的是天人们所说的话语声。“降临”就是下来的意思。“那时居所”指的是那时的居所。巴利
691. Pañcamagāthāya taṃ saddanti taṃ devehi vuttavacanasaddaṃ. Avasarīti otari. Tada bhavananti tadā bhavanaṃ.
692 第六偈中,“tato”(于是)是指紧接着阿私陀说完话之后。“Ukkāmukheva”就是“在熔炉口”,意思是说在坩埚口。“Sukusalasampahaṭṭhaṃ”(被善巧匠师锤炼)是指被善巧的金匠反复捶打,意思是金匠一边捶打一边加热。“Daddallamānaṃ”(闪耀)是指放射光芒。“Asitavhayassa”(阿私陀仙人)是指那位名叫阿私陀、第二个名字叫迦那提婆罗的仙人。巴利
692. Chaṭṭhagāthāya tatoti asitassa vacanato anantaraṃ. Ukkāmukhevāti ukkāmukhe eva, mūsāmukheti vuttaṃ hoti. Sukusalasampahaṭṭhanti sukusalena suvaṇṇakārena saṅghaṭṭitaṃ, saṅghaṭṭentena tāpitanti adhippāyo. Daddallamānanti vijjotamānaṃ. Asitavhayassāti asitanāmassa dutiyena nāmena kaṇhadevilassa isino.
693 在第七偈中,“如星中牛王”是指像群星中最殊胜的那头牛王,也就是指月亮。“清净”是指远离了云等垢染。“如秋月”是指像秋天时的月亮。“心生喜悦”是指仅仅听到就生起了欢喜。“获得喜悦”是指见到之后又再次得到了喜悦。巴利
693. Sattamagāthāya tārāsabhaṃ vāti tārānaṃ usabhasadisaṃ, candanti adhippāyo. Visuddhanti abbhādiupakkilesarahitaṃ. Saradarivāti sarade iva. Ānandajātoti savanamatteneva uppannāya pītiyā pītijāto. Alattha pītinti disvā punapi pītiṃ labhi.
694 此后,为了说明天神们恒常向菩萨献上供养,在第八首偈颂中说“anekasākhaṃ”,意思是“有许多伞枝和许多伞杆”。“Sahassamaṇḍalaṃ”是说伞盖上有上千个红金制成的圆环装饰。“Chattaṃ”是指天界的白色伞盖。“Vītipatantī”是说伞旋转着,使身体上下升降。巴利
694. Tato paraṃ bodhisattassa devehi sadā payujjamānasakkāradīpanatthaṃ vuttaaṭṭhamagāthāya anekasākhanti anekasalākaṃ. Sahassamaṇḍalanti rattasuvaṇṇamayasahassamaṇḍalayuttaṃ. Chattanti dibbasetacchattaṃ. Vītipatantīti sarīraṃ bījamānā patanuppatanaṃ karonti.
695 在第九偈中,jaṭī 就是结发修行者。Kaṇhasirivhayo 是用“迦那”和“尸利”这两个词来称呼他。据说人们也叫他“尸利迦那”,也就是用亲昵的称呼来叫他、招呼他。Paṇḍukambale 是红色毛毯。这里按上下文应该补上“童子”一词,或者理解为省略。前一偈是针对还没到伸手可及的地方而说“看见”,这里则是童子已被带到伸手可及之处,为了接过来,所以又说了一次“看见”。也可以这样理解:前一偈的“看见”偏重于见而生喜,因为偈末说“获得了广大喜悦”;这里的“看见”偏重于接取,因为末尾说“满心欢喜地接取”。前一偈只和童子有关,这一偈还和白伞盖有关。disvā 是看见童子像放在价值十万的健陀罗红色毛毯上的一枚金币一样,又看见头顶上撑着前面所说的那种白伞盖,也就是“天伞”。不过也有人说:“这里指的是人间的伞盖。”因为就像天人一样,人间的人也会手持伞盖、拂尘、孔雀羽扇、棕榈叶扇、布扇来走近这位大人。即便如此,这种说法也没有什么特别殊胜的地方,所以还是按前面那样解释更好。paṭiggaheti 是用双手接取。据说,人们为了让童子向仙人行礼,把他抱到仙人面前。这时童子的双脚翻转过来,踩在了仙人头顶上。仙人看到这一稀有之事,心生踊跃,满怀欢喜地接取了他。巴利
695. Navamagāthāya jaṭīti jaṭilo. Kaṇhasirivhayoti kaṇhasaddena ca sirisaddena ca avhayamāno. Taṃ kira ‘‘sirikaṇho’’tipi avhayanti āmantenti, ālapantīti vuttaṃ hoti. Paṇḍukambaleti rattakambale. Adhikārato cettha ‘‘kumāra’’nti vattabbaṃ, pāṭhaseso vā kātabbo. Purimagāthāya ca ahatthapāsagataṃ sandhāya ‘‘disvā’’ti vuttaṃ. Idha pana hatthapāsagataṃ paṭiggahaṇatthaṃ upanītaṃ, tasmā puna vacanaṃ ‘‘disvā’’ti. Purimaṃ vā dassanapītilābhāpekkhaṃ gāthāvasāne ‘‘vipulamalattha pīti’’nti vacanato, idaṃ paṭiggahāpekkhaṃ avasāne ‘‘sumano paṭiggahe’’ti vacanato. Purimañca kumārasambandhameva, idaṃ setacchattasambandhampi. Disvāti satasahassagghanake gandhārarattakambale suvaṇṇanikkhaṃ viya kumāraṃ ‘‘chattaṃ marū’’ti ettha vuttappakāraṃ setacchattaṃ dhāriyantaṃ muddhani disvā. Keci pana ‘‘idaṃ mānusakaṃ chattaṃ sandhāya vutta’’nti bhaṇanti. Yatheva hi devā, evaṃ manussāpi chattacāmaramorahatthatālavaṇṭavāḷabījanihatthā mahāpurisaṃ upagacchantīti. Evaṃ santepi na tassa vacanena kocipi atisayo atthi, tasmā yathāvuttameva sundaraṃ. Paṭiggaheti ubhohi hatthehi paṭiggahesi. Isiṃ kira vandāpetuṃ kumāraṃ upanesuṃ. Athassa pādā parivattitvā isissa matthake patiṭṭhahiṃsu. So tampi acchariyaṃ disvā udaggacitto sumano paṭiggahesi.
696 在第十偈中,“jigīsako(寻求者)”是指正在寻找、探索、仔细考察的人,这里说的就是这个意思。“Lakkhaṇamantapāragū(精通相术与圣典)”是指已经通达相法和吠陀经典的人。“Anuttarāyaṃ(此人是无上的)”是指这个人无与伦比、最为殊胜。据说,当这位大人迎面走来时,他看到了大人脚掌上的轮相,便顺着这个轮相去寻找其余的特征,见到所有大人相都圆满具足,于是确定“此人必定会成佛”,便说出了这番话。巴利
696. Dasamagāthāyaṃ jigīsakoti jigīsanto magganto pariyesanto, upaparikkhantoti vuttaṃ hoti. Lakkhaṇamantapāragūti lakkhaṇānaṃ vedānañca pāraṃ gato. Anuttarāyanti anuttaro ayaṃ. So kira attano abhimukhāgatesu mahāsattassa pādatalesu cakkāni disvā tadanusārena sesalakkhaṇāni jigīsanto sabbaṃ lakkhaṇasampattiṃ disvā ‘‘addhāyaṃ buddho bhavissatī’’ti ñatvā evamāha.
697 第十一偈中“而后自己的去处”,是指他依结生而将投生到无色界。“形容枯槁、泪流不止”,是指他回想起自己将来要投生到无色界,心想“我现在没法听到他说法了”,于是心生不满,被强烈的忧愁压垮,生起忧恼,泪水滚落。“garayati”也是一种读法,意思是自责。假如他把心转向色界,那为什么不在那里投生,却要这样哭泣呢?并不是不能投生到那里,而是因为不善巧,他不懂这个道理。即便如此,他既然已经靠禅定镇伏了烦恼,生起忧恼难道合理吗?并非不合理,正是因为只是镇伏而已。只有通过修道彻底断除的烦恼才不会再生起,而得定的人遇到强大的条件时,烦恼还是会生起。如果问:烦恼生起了,他的禅那不就退失了吗,那还怎么投生到无色界呢?因为他能毫不费力地再次证得。得定的人烦恼生起时,不会犯下严重的过失,只是烦恼的势头暂时平息下来,很快他就能轻轻松松地再次证得那种殊胜境界。这类人被称为“退失殊胜者”,甚至很难被人看出来,阿私陀仙人就是这样的人。若说“难道在这位王子身上不会有障碍吗”,那在这位王子身上怎么会有障碍呢?巴利
697. Ekādasāyaṃ athattano gamananti paṭisandhivasena arūpagamanaṃ. Akalyarūpo gaḷayati assukānīti taṃ attano arūpūpapattiṃ anussaritvā ‘‘na dānāhaṃ assa dhammadesanaṃ sotuṃ lacchāmī’’ti atuṭṭharūpo balavasokābhibhavena domanassajāto hutvā assūni pāteti gaḷayati. ‘‘Garayatī’’tipi pāṭho. Yadi panesa rūpabhave cittaṃ nameyya, kiṃ tattha na uppajjeyya, yenevaṃ rodatīti? Na na uppajjeyya, akusalatāya panetaṃ vidhiṃ na jānāti. Evaṃ santepi domanassuppattiyevassa ayuttā samāpattilābhena vikkhambhitattāti ce? Na, vikkhambhitattā eva. Maggabhāvanāya samucchinnā hi kilesā na uppajjanti, samāpattilābhīnaṃ pana balavapaccayena uppajjanti. Uppanne kilese parihīnajjhānattā kutassa arūpagamananti ce? Appakasirena punādhigamato. Samāpattilābhino hi uppanne kilese balavavītikkamaṃ anāpajjantā vūpasantamatteyeva kilesavege puna taṃ visesaṃ appakasirenevādhigacchanti, ‘‘parihīnavisesā ime’’tipi duviññeyyā honti, tādiso ca eso. No ce kumāre bhavissati antarāyoti na bhavissati nu kho imasmiṃ kumāre antarāyo.
698 第十二偈里的“na orakāyanti”是说:这并不是低劣、也不是狭小。他是就下一偈将要说的成佛状态才这样说的。巴利
698. Dvādasāyaṃ na orakāyanti ayaṃ orako paritto na hoti. Uttaragāthāya vattabbaṃ buddhabhāvaṃ sandhāyāha.
699 这里“正觉之最上”指的是一切知智。因为它以不颠倒的方式正确地觉知,所以称为正觉;又因为它在任何地方都没有障碍,在一切智中最为上首,所以称为“最上”。“将证得”就是将达到。“见最极清净者”就是见涅槃者,因为涅槃绝对清净,所以是最极清净。“他的梵行将广大流布”,意思是他的梵行将会广泛传播;“梵行”就是指教法。巴利
699. Terasāyaṃ sambodhiyagganti sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ. Tañhi aviparītabhāvena sammā bujjhanato sambodhi, katthaci āvaraṇābhāvena sabbañāṇuttamato ‘‘agga’’nti vuccati. Phusissatīti pāpuṇissati. Paramavisuddhadassīti nibbānadassī. Tañhi ekantavisuddhattā paramavisuddhaṃ. Vitthārikassāti vitthārikaṃ assa. Brahmacariyanti sāsanaṃ.
700 700. 这里的“中间”是指还在中途,也就是还没到达正觉之前,这样说。Na sossanti 是不会听到,也不会去听到。Asamadhurassa 是作为无等精进。Aṭṭo 是受苦的人。Byasanaṃ gato 是遭遇了灾祸,也就是快乐被毁掉了。Aghāvī 是痛苦的人,这里都是就忧的生起而说的。他因为忧而痛苦,而他的快乐遭遇灾祸,所以说是灾祸,也就是快乐的毁灭。正是由于这种属于心所的苦,他才成为有苦的人。巴利
700. Cuddasāyaṃ athantarāti antarāyeva assa, sambodhippattito orato evāti vuttaṃ hoti. Na sossanti na suṇissaṃ. Asamadhurassāti asamavīriyassa. Aṭṭoti āturo. Byasanaṃ gatoti sukhavināsaṃ patto. Aghāvīti dukkhito, sabbaṃ domanassuppādameva sandhāyāha. Domanassena hi so āturo. Tañcassa sukhabyasanato byasanaṃ, sukhavināsanatoti vuttaṃ hoti. Tena ca so cetasikaaghabhūtena aghāvī.
701 第十五颂里说的“生起广大”,意思是生起了广大。或者,这就是原文的读法。“出离”就是已经出离。这样出离之后,所谓“外甥”,就是他姐妹的儿子,也就是自己姐妹的儿子,意思是自己姐妹的儿子。所谓“他教导”,是说:他知道自己寿命不长,又凭自己的力量,知道小妹的儿子那拉卡青年已经积累了功德。他心想:“这孩子长大后,可能会变得放逸。”出于怜悯,他来到姐妹家里,问:“那拉卡在哪里?”家人回答:“尊者,他在外面玩。”他就吩咐:“把他带来。”当下就让他出家做了苦行者,然后教导他、教诫他、指导他。怎么教导的呢?他说了十六首偈:“佛陀之声……梵行……”巴利
701. Pannarasāyaṃ vipulaṃ janetvānāti vipulaṃ janetvā. Ayameva vā pāṭho. Niggamāti niggato. Evaṃ niggato ca so bhāgineyyaṃ sayanti sakaṃ bhāgineyyaṃ, attano bhaginiyā puttanti vuttaṃ hoti. Samādapesīti attano appāyukabhāvaṃ ñatvā kaniṭṭhabhaginiyā ca puttassa nālakassa māṇavakassa upacitapuññataṃ attano balena ñatvā ‘‘vuḍḍhippatto pamādampi āpajjeyyā’’ti naṃ anukampamāno bhaginiyā gharaṃ gantvā ‘‘kahaṃ nālako’’ti. ‘‘Bahi, bhante, kīḷatī’’ti. ‘‘Ānetha na’’nti āṇāpetvā taṅkhaṇaṃyeva tāpasapabbajjaṃ pabbājetvā samādapesi ovadi anusāsi. Kathaṃ? ‘‘Buddhoti ghosaṃ…pe… brahmacariya’’nti soḷasamagāthamāha.
702 这里,“何时从他处”就是指什么时候从别人那里。“法道”是指通向最上之法——涅槃的道路,或者是指最上之法连同修行的道路一起通向涅槃。“于他那里”是指在世尊面前。“梵行”是指沙门的修行。巴利
702. Tattha yada paratoti yadā parato. Dhammamagganti paramadhammassa nibbānassa maggaṃ, dhammaṃ vā aggaṃ saha paṭipadāya nibbānaṃ. Tasminti tassa santike. Brahmacariyanti samaṇadhammaṃ.
703 703. 第十七颂里的“如是者”,是指安住于那种境界的人。“安住”是指那时,他的烦恼已被镇伏,又获得了定力,所以是烦恼被镇伏、心住于定的人。“未来见最清净者”——这位仙人已经预见:“这个那拉卡将来会在世尊面前亲见最极清净的涅槃。”因为他已经这样洞见,所以用这个说法称他为“未来见最清净者”。颂中正是因此说“由那位未来见最清净者”。“积集资粮蕴”是指他从莲华上佛以来所累积的功德蕴。“期望”是指他一直殷切等待。“居住”是指出家后,他便以苦行者的方式居住。“防护根门”是指防护耳根而住。据说,他从那时起就不再潜入水中,心想:“若进入水中,会损坏耳根,那样就会失去听闻佛法的机会。”巴利
703. Sattarasāyaṃ tādināti tassaṇṭhitena, tasmiṃ samaye kilesavikkhambhane samādhilābhe ca sati vikkhambhitakilesena samāhitacittena cāti adhippāyo. Anāgate paramavisuddhadassināti ‘‘ayaṃ nālako anāgate kāle bhagavato santike paramavisuddhaṃ nibbānaṃ passissatī’’ti evaṃ diṭṭhattā so isi iminā pariyāyena ‘‘anāgate paramavisuddhadassī’’ti vutto. Tena anāgate paramavisuddhadassinā. Upacitapuññasañcayoti padumuttarato pabhuti katapuññasañcayo. Patikkhanti āgamayamāno. Parivasīti pabbajitvā tāpasavesena vasi. Rakkhitindriyoti rakkhitasotindriyo hutvā. So kira tato pabhuti udake na nimujji ‘‘udakaṃ pavisitvā sotindriyaṃ vināseyya, tato dhammassavanabāhiro bhaveyya’’nti cintetvā.
704 那拉卡就这样住着,次第地,在世尊证得正觉、于波罗奈转动法轮之后,听到诸天为了他的利益前来告诉他:“世尊已经转动法轮,那位世尊、正自觉者确实已经出现于世了”等等,以这样的方式听到了胜者转动法轮的消息。他去到那里,见到了诸仙之牛——世尊。诸天为牟尼出现的殊胜消息喧腾了七天,到第七天,他前往仙人堕处,看见世尊坐在殊胜的佛座上,像领头公牛一样,是诸仙之牛。他一见之下就生起了清净的信心。“牟尼最上”指智慧中最上者,说的就是道智。“名为阿私陀的圣教临至”指阿私陀仙人教诫他的时机已经到了。因为他曾被这样教导:“当他开示法道时,你就去他那里,随问时节,在世尊座下修习梵行。”而现在正是那个时候。因此颂中说“名为阿私陀的圣教临至”。其余的文义在这里已经很明白了。巴利
704. Aṭṭhārasāyaṃ sutvāna ghosanti so nālako evaṃ parivasanto anupubbena bhagavatā sambodhiṃ patvā bārāṇasiyaṃ dhammacakke pavattite taṃ ‘‘bhagavatā dhammacakkaṃ pavattitaṃ, sammāsambuddho vata so bhagavā uppanno’’tiādinā nayena jinavaracakkavattane pavattaghosaṃ attano atthakāmāhi devatāhi āgantvā ārocitaṃ sutvā. Gantvāna disvā isinisabhanti sattāhaṃ devatāhi moneyyakolāhale kayiramāne sattame divase isipatanaṃ gantvā ‘‘nālako āgamissati, tassa dhammaṃ desessāmī’’ti iminā ca abhisandhinā varabuddhāsane nisinnaṃ disvā nisabhasadisaṃ isinisabhaṃ bhagavantaṃ. Pasannoti saha dassaneneva pasannacitto hutvā. Moneyyaseṭṭhanti ñāṇuttamaṃ, maggañāṇanti vuttaṃ hoti. Samāgate asitāvhayassa sāsaneti asitassa isino ovādakāle anuppatte. Tena hi – ‘‘yadā vivarati dhammamaggaṃ, tadā gantvā samayaṃ paripucchamāno carassu tasmiṃ bhagavati brahmacariya’’nti anusiṭṭho, ayañca so kālo. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘samāgate asitāvhayassa sāsane’’ti. Sesamettha pākaṭameva.
以上是本事偈的注释。巴利
Ayaṃ tāva vatthugāthāvaṇṇanā.
705 在提问的两首偈颂里,“我已了知此事”意思是:此事我已知道。“如实”意思是不颠倒。他是什么意思呢?阿私陀知道“这位王子将会证到最高的正觉”,于是对我说:“当你从别人那里听到‘佛’这个声音时,他已经证得正觉,开显了法道。”如今我亲眼见到世尊,证实阿私陀的话确实“如实”,所以我说我已经了知。“那”这个词,意思是“因此,那个”。“到达一切法的彼岸”——按照《雪山经》里所说的方法,他以六种方式到达了一切法的彼岸。巴利
705. Pucchāgāthādvaye aññātametanti viditaṃ mayā etaṃ. Yathātathanti aviparītaṃ. Ko adhippāyo? Yaṃ asito ‘‘sambodhiyaggaṃ phusissatāyaṃ kumāro’’ti ñatvā ‘‘buddhoti ghosaṃ yada parato suṇosi, sambodhippatto vivarati dhammamagga’’nti maṃ avaca, tadetaṃ mayā asitassa vacanaṃ ajja bhagavantaṃ sakkhiṃ disvā ‘‘yathātathamevā’’ti aññātanti. Taṃ tanti tasmā taṃ. Sabbadhammāna pāragunti hemavatasutte vuttanayena chahi ākārehi. Sabbadhammānaṃ pāragataṃ.
706 “来到非家状态的人”,是指已经进入非家生活的人,也就是出家人。“寻求乞食生活”,是指寻求圣者们所惯行、没有染污的乞食生活。“牟尼性”,是指属于牟尼们的素质。“最上的行迹”,是指最上的修行道路。这里其余的意思都很清楚。巴利
706.Anagāriyupetassāti anagāriyaṃ upetassa, pabbajitassāti attho. Bhikkhācariyaṃ jigīsatoti ariyehi āciṇṇaṃ anupakkiliṭṭhaṃ bhikkhācariyaṃ pariyesamānassa. Moneyyanti munīnaṃ santakaṃ. Uttamaṃ padanti uttamapaṭipadaṃ. Sesamettha pākaṭameva.
707 707. 当他这样被问到时,世尊就以“我要为你开示心性”等这样的方式,回答了牟尼的修行道路。其中,“我要开示”的意思是:应当让人知道、应当揭示、应当说明。“难作、难达成”是说:做起来困难,正在做的时候要达成、要承受也很困难——这就是所说的意思。而这里还有这样的意图——我愿为你开示心性,如果去做或达成是容易的,那倒也罢,但它却如此难作、难达成,因为必须从凡夫阶段开始就不生起杂染心,并依此而修行。正因如此,一位佛陀就只有一位声闻弟子能行持和成就此道。巴利
707. Athassa evaṃ puṭṭho bhagavā ‘‘moneyyaṃ te upaññissa’’ntiādinā nayena moneyyapaṭipadaṃ byākāsi. Tattha upaññissanti upaññāpeyyaṃ, vivareyyaṃ paññāpeyyanti attho. Dukkaraṃ durabhisambhavanti kātuñca dukkhaṃ kayiramānañca sambhavituṃ sahituṃ dukkhanti vuttaṃ hoti. Ayaṃ panettha adhippāyo – ahaṃ te moneyyaṃ paññāpeyyaṃ, yadi naṃ kātuṃ vā abhisambhotuṃ vā sukhaṃ bhaveyya, evaṃ pana dukkaraṃ durabhisambhavaṃ puthujjanakālato pabhuti kiliṭṭhacittaṃ anuppādetvā paṭipajjitabbato. Tathā hi naṃ ekassa buddhassa ekova sāvako karoti ca sambhoti cāti.
世尊这样开示牟尼行的难行和难以成就,激发那拉卡的精进心之后,想为他说法,便说道:“来吧,我要为你宣说,你要振作起来,变得坚定。”其中,“来吧”是表示决意的语气词。“我要为你宣说”就是我要为你宣说那牟尼行。“你要振作起来”意思是:你要用堪能实行难行之事的精进力来支撑自己。“变得坚定”意思是:要以能忍受难成之事的、不松懈的勇猛而变得稳固。这话说的是什么?因为你已积集了福德资粮,所以我完全下定决心:虽然这牟尼行如此难行、如此难以成就,我仍要为你宣说,你要振作起来,变得坚定。巴利
Evaṃ bhagavā moneyyassa dukkarabhāvaṃ durabhisambhavatañca dassento nālakassa ussāhaṃ janetvā tamassa vattukāmo āha ‘‘handa te naṃ pavakkhāmi, santhambhassu daḷho bhavā’’ti. Tattha handāti byavasāyatthe nipāto. Te naṃ pavakkhāmīti tuyhaṃ taṃ moneyyaṃ pavakkhāmi. Santhambhassūti dukkarakaraṇasamatthena vīriyūpatthambhena attānaṃ upatthambhaya. Daḷho bhavāti durabhisambhavasahanasamatthāya asithilaparakkamatāya thiro hoti. Kiṃ vuttaṃ hoti? Yasmā tvaṃ upacitapuññasambhāro, tasmāhaṃ ekantabyavasitova hutvā evaṃ dukkaraṃ durabhisambhavampi samānaṃ tuyhaṃ taṃ moneyyaṃ pavakkhāmi, santhambhassu daḷho bhavāti.
708 欲宣说这极为严苛的牟尼行持者,先劝励那拉卡于坚固与坚定之后,首先显示断除与村落相关联的烦恼,便说出“同等对待”这半首偈颂。其中,“同等对待”是指平等、一样、没有差别。“被辱骂与被恭敬”是指被辱骂与被恭敬。巴利
708. Evaṃ paramasallekhaṃ moneyyavattaṃ vattukāmo nālakaṃ santhambhane daḷhībhāve ca niyojetvā paṭhamaṃ tāva gāmūpanibaddhakilesappahānaṃ dassento ‘‘samānabhāga’’nti upaḍḍhagāthamāha. Tattha samānabhāganti samabhāgaṃ ekasadisaṃ ninnānākaraṇaṃ. Akkuṭṭhavanditanti akkosañca vandanañca.
现在,为了说明怎样做到平等对待,他接着说出“心的嗔恨”这半首偈颂。它的意思是:被人辱骂时,应当守护自己的心,不让心中生起嗔恨;被人礼敬时,也要保持平静,不因此变得骄慢;就算是国王来礼敬自己,心里也不该冒出“他在礼敬我”的念头而变得浮躁散乱。巴利
Idāni yathā taṃ samānabhāgaṃ kayirati, taṃ upāyaṃ dassento ‘‘manopadosa’’nti upaḍḍhagāthamāha. Tassattho – akkuṭṭho manopadosaṃ rakkheyya, vandito santo anuṇṇato care, raññāpi vandito samāno ‘‘maṃ vandatī’’ti uddhaccaṃ nāpajjeyya.
709 现在,为了说明如何断除与森林有关的烦恼,他诵出了“高低种种”这首偈颂。它的意思是:在被称为森林的林野中,因为对象有可爱和不可爱的区别,所以高低、种种不同的所缘不断生起,进入眼等诸根的范围。而这些所缘之所以能引生热恼,就好比火焰一样。或者说,就像森林燃烧时,火焰因为种类繁多而呈现出高低、种种不同的形态——有的带烟,有的不带烟,有的蓝色,有的黄色,有的红色,有的小,有的大;同样地,在林野中,由于狮子、老虎、人、非人、各种鸟类的叫声,以及花、果、嫩叶等类别的不同,种种所缘不断生起:有的令人恐惧,有的令人贪染,有的令人嗔恨,有的令人愚痴。因此说:“种种所缘在林野中生起,犹如火焰。”当种种所缘这样生起时,那些到园林树林中游走的妇女,或者本性就在林中游走的拾柴女之类,看见那位牟尼独自待在僻静处,就用嬉笑、闲谈、哭泣、衣衫不整等方式来引诱他。愿她们不要引诱他,愿那些妇女不要引诱他。意思是:你要做到让她们无法引诱你。巴利
709. Idāni araññūpanibaddhakilesappahānaṃ dassento ‘‘uccāvacā’’ti gāthamāha. Tassattho – araññasaññite dāyepi iṭṭhāniṭṭhavasena uccāvacā nānappakārā ārammaṇā niccharanti, cakkhādīnaṃ āpāthamāgacchanti, te ca kho aggisikhūpamā pariḷāhajanakaṭṭhena. Yathā vā ḍayhamāne vane aggisikhā nānappakāratāya uccāvacā niccharanti, sadhūmāpi, vidhūmāpi, nīlāpi, pītāpi, rattāpi, khuddakāpi, mahantāpi, evaṃ sīhabyagghamanussāmanussavividhavihaṅgavirutapupphaphalapallavādibhedavasena nānappakāratāya dāye uccāvacā ārammaṇā niccharanti bhiṃsanakāpi, rajanīyāpi, dosanīyāpi, mohanīyāpi. Tenāha – ‘‘uccāvacā niccharanti, dāye aggisikhūpamā’’ti. Evaṃ niccharantesu ca uccāvacesu ārammaṇesu yā kāci uyyānavanacārikaṃ gatā samānā pakatiyā vā vanacāriniyo kaṭṭhahārikādayo rahogataṃ disvā hasitalapitaruditadunnivatthādīhi nāriyo muniṃ palobhenti, tā su taṃ mā palobhayuṃ, tā nāriyo taṃ mā palobhayuṃ. Yathā na palobhenti, tathā karohīti vuttaṃ hoti.
710-11 世尊这样开示了在村落和森林中的修行方式之后,现在为了开示戒的防护,说出“远离淫欲之法”这两首偈颂。其中,“舍断诸欲,无论胜劣”的意思是:除了淫欲之法以外,其余五种欲乐对象,无论好看的还是不好看的,也都一并舍断。因为只有舍断那五种欲乐对象,不淫欲的远离才算圆满具备。所以说“舍断诸欲,无论胜劣”。这是这里的用意。“无有敌意”等词句,则是为了显示前面“不应杀,不应令杀”那里所说的远离杀生的成就。这里的简要解释是:对敌方阵营的有情没有敌意,对己方阵营不贪着;对一切有情——无论有渴爱的还是无渴爱的,胆怯的还是安住的——因为都有想活、不想死、想要快乐、厌恶痛苦的心,所以想“就像我一样,他们也是这样”,以这种与自己相同的同理心,消除对他们的敌意;同样以“就像他们一样,我也是这样”,以与他人相同的同理心,消除对自己的偏袒。这样从两方面都舍断了偏袒和敌意之后,以自己对死亡的厌恶为譬喻,对任何有情,无论胆怯的还是安住的,都不应亲手去杀,也不应教令他人去杀。巴利
710-11. Evamassa bhagavā gāme ca araññe ca paṭipattividhiṃ dassetvā idāni sīlasaṃvaraṃ dassento ‘‘virato methunā dhammā’’ti gāthādvayamāha. Tattha hitvā kāme paropareti methunadhammato avasesepi sundare ca asundare ca pañca kāmaguṇe hitvā. Tappahānena hi methunavirati susampannā hoti. Tenāha – ‘‘hitvā kāme paropare’’ti. Ayamettha adhippāyo. ‘‘Aviruddho’’tiādīni pana padāni ‘‘na haneyya, na ghātaye’’ti ettha vuttāya pāṇātipātāveramaṇiyā sampattidassanatthaṃ vuttāni. Tatrāyaṃ saṅkhepavaṇṇanā – parapakkhiyesu pāṇesu aviruddho, attapakkhiyesu asāratto, sabbepi sataṇhanittaṇhatāya tasathāvare pāṇe jīvitukāmatāya amaritukāmatāya sukhakāmatāya dukkhapaṭikūlatāya ca ‘‘yathā ahaṃ tathā ete’’ti attasamānatāya tesu virodhaṃ vinento teneva pakārena ‘‘yathā ete tathā aha’’nti paresaṃ samānatāya ca attani anurodhaṃ vinento evaṃ ubhayathāpi anurodhavirodhavippahīno hutvā maraṇapaṭikūlatāya attānaṃ upamaṃ katvā pāṇesu ye keci tase vā thāvare vā pāṇe na haneyya sāhatthikādīhi payogehi, na ghātaye āṇattikādīhīti.
712 712. 世尊这样以远离淫欲和远离杀生为切入点,简要地讲了巴帝摩卡防护戒,又用“舍断诸欲”等话开示了根律仪之后,现在为了开示活命遍净,便说出“舍断那欲求与贪爱”等话。它的意思是:有一种渴爱,得到一个就想得到第二个,得到两个就想得到第三个,得到十万还想得到更多——因为这样贪求还没得到的东西,所以叫“欲求”;而对已经得到的东西贪染不舍,那就是“贪爱”。舍断那欲求和贪爱之后——凡夫有情对衣服等资具,正是因为这些欲求和贪爱而被系缚、黏着、捆绑而安住——牟尼应当在那些资具上把这两者都舍断,既不违背以资具为基础的活命遍净,又以智慧之眼成为具眼者,然后依此修行牟尼之道。因为这样修行,就能渡越这个地狱。也就是说:那个难以填满、被称为地狱的、作为邪命之因的对资具的渴爱,他能渡越;或者说,他就是以这条行道而得以渡越。巴利
712. Evamassa methunaviratipāṇātipātaviratimukhena saṅkhepato pātimokkhasaṃvarasīlaṃ vatvā ‘‘hitvā kāme’’tiādīhi indriyasaṃvarañca dassetvā idāni ājīvapārisuddhiṃ dassento ‘‘hitvā icchañcā’’tiādimāha. Tassattho – yāyaṃ taṇhā ekaṃ laddhā dutiyaṃ icchati, dve laddhā tatiyaṃ, satasahassaṃ laddhā taduttarimpi icchatīti evaṃ appaṭiladdhavisayaṃ icchanato ‘‘icchā’’ti vuccati, yo cāyaṃ paṭiladdhavisayalubbhano lobho. Taṃ hitvā icchañca lobhañca yattha satto puthujjano, yasmiṃ cīvarādipaccaye tehi icchālobhehi puthujjano satto laggo paṭibaddho tiṭṭhati, tattha taṃ ubhayampi hitvā paccayatthaṃ ājīvapārisuddhiṃ avirodhento ñāṇacakkhunā cakkhumā hutvā imaṃ moneyyapaṭipadaṃ paṭipajjeyya. Evañhi paṭipanno tareyya narakaṃ imaṃ, duppūraṇaṭṭhena narakasaññitaṃ micchājīvahetubhūtaṃ imaṃ paccayataṇhaṃ tareyya, imāya vā paṭipadāya tareyyāti vuttaṃ hoti.
713 世尊这样从舍断对资具的渴爱入手,开示了活命遍净之后,现在又以对饮食知量为切入点,开示资具受用戒,并顺着这个次第,一直讲到证得阿罗汉果的修行道路,于是诵出“腹不过满”这首偈颂。它的意思是:对于以如法、公正的方式得来的各种衣服等资具,首先在进食的时候——巴利
713. Evaṃ paccayataṇhāpahānamukhena ājīvapārisuddhiṃ dassetvā idāni bhojane mattaññutāmukhena paccayaparibhogasīlaṃ tadanusārena ca yāva arahattappatti, tāva paṭipadaṃ dassento ‘‘ūnūdaro’’ti gāthamāha. Tassattho – dhammena samena laddhesu itarītaracīvarādīsu paccayesu āhāraṃ tāva āhārento –
取四五口食物,不咀嚼即喝水;
这足以让心志坚定的比丘安住于安乐。巴利
‘‘Cattāro pañca ālope, abhutvā udakaṃ pive; Alaṃ phāsuvihārāya, pahitattassa bhikkhuno’’ti. (theragā. 983) –
按上面所说的方式,他应当腹不满,也就是不空腹,不像被风灌满的皮囊那样肚子鼓起来;这是说,要避免因为吃得太饱而引生昏沉睡眠。即使腹不满,他在饮食上也应当知量,也就是对食物有节制,通过“不是为了嬉戏”等这样的省察,从功德和过患两方面来限定自己的饮食。这样饮食知量之后,他还应当依资具少欲、头陀支少欲、教理少欲、证得少欲这四种少欲,成为少欲的人。因为一个行于牟尼道的比丘,确实应当这样少欲。其中,对每一种资具都以三种知足而满足,这是资具少欲。虽然自己持守头陀支,却不希望别人知道“我持头陀”,这是头陀支少欲。虽然自己多闻,却不希望别人知道“这人多闻”,就像末阐提长老那样,这是教理少欲。虽然自己具备证得,却不希望别人知道“这人已证得善法”,这是证得少欲。这种证得少欲,应当知道是在证得阿拉汉果之前,因为这条行道正是为了证得阿拉汉果。这样成为少欲的人之后,再通过阿拉汉果道断除渴爱的贪求,成为无贪求的人。如此无贪求的人,因为永远因渴爱而满足、无欲、寂静;众生因渴爱而饥饿,就像受饥渴折磨的人那样不知足,而他对这种渴爱无欲,因为无欲而满足、无病,达到最上的满足。这样因为无渴爱而寂静,一切烦恼的热恼都已止息。这里应当知道,是按逆序来作连接的。巴利
Vuttanayena ūnaudaro assa, na vātabharitabhastā viya uddhumātudaro, bhattasammadapaccayā thinamiddhaṃ parihareyyāti vuttaṃ hoti. Ūnūdaro hontopi ca mitāhāro assa bhojane mattaññū, ‘‘neva davāyā’’tiādinā paccavekkhaṇena guṇato dosato ca paricchinnāhāro. Evaṃ mitāhāro samānopi paccayadhutaṅgapariyattiadhigamavasena catubbidhāya appicchatāya appiccho assa. Ekaṃsena hi moneyyapaṭipadaṃ paṭipannena bhikkhunā evaṃ appicchena bhavitabbaṃ. Tattha ekekasmiṃ paccaye tīhi santosehi santussanā paccayappicchatā. Dhutaṅgadharasseva sato ‘‘dhutavāti maṃ pare jānantū’’ti anicchanatā dhutaṅgappicchatā. Bahussutasseva sato ‘‘bahussutoti maṃ pare jānantū’’ti anicchanatā pariyattiappicchatā majjhantikattherassa viya. Adhigamasampannasseva sato ‘‘adhigato ayaṃ kusalaṃ dhammanti maṃ pare jānantū’’ti anicchanatā adhigamappicchatā. Sā ca arahattādhigamato oraṃ veditabbā. Arahattādhigamatthañhi ayaṃ paṭipadāti. Evaṃ appicchopi ca arahattamaggena taṇhāloluppaṃ hitvā alolupo assa. Evaṃ alolupo hi sadā icchāya nicchāto aniccho hoti nibbuto, yāya icchāya chātā honti sattā khuppipāsāturā viya atittā, tāya icchāya aniccho hoti anicchattā ca nicchāto hoti anāturo paramatittippatto. Evaṃ nicchātattā nibbuto hoti vūpasantasabbakilesapariḷāhoti evamettha uppaṭipāṭiyā yojanā veditabbā.
714 世尊这样一直讲到证得阿拉汉果,把修行方法说完之后,现在要说明一位依照这个修行方法实践的比丘,以证得阿拉汉果为最终目标的头陀支受持和坐卧处规矩,于是说了“他游行乞食”这两首偈颂。其中,“他游行乞食后”,意思是那位比丘乞食之后,或者做完吃饭的事情之后。“前往林野”,意思是远离在家的种种纷扰,直接往森林里去。“立于树下”,意思是站在树下,或者说安住在树下。“坐于座处”,意思是走到座位那里或者坐下来,也就是安坐的意思。“牟尼”,意思是已经走上牟尼之道的人。在这里,“游行乞食后”这句话,说的是常乞食支。不过,最上等的常乞食者,本身自然就是次第乞食者、一座食者、钵食者、午后不食者,也自然受持三衣支和粪扫衣支,所以这六种头陀支也就一并说到了。“前往林野”这句话,说的是阿兰若支;“立于树下”说的是树下住支;“坐于座处”说的是常坐支。按照顺序对应下来,露地住支、随处住支、冢间住支也就同样说到了。这样,通过这首偈颂,世尊对那罗迦长老讲述了十三种头陀支。巴利
714. Evaṃ yāva arahattappatti, tāvapaṭipadaṃ kathetvā idāni taṃ paṭipadaṃ paṭipannassa bhikkhuno arahattappattiniṭṭhaṃ dhutaṅgasamādānaṃ senāsanavattañca kathento ‘‘sa piṇḍacāra’’nti gāthādvayamāha. Tattha sa piṇḍacāraṃ caritvāti so bhikkhu bhikkhaṃ caritvā bhattakiccaṃ vā katvā. Vanantamabhihārayeti apapañcito gihipapañcena vanaṃ eva gaccheyya. Upaṭṭhito rukkhamūlasminti rukkhamūle ṭhito vā hutvā. Āsanūpagatoti āsanaṃ upagato vā hutvā, nisinnoti vuttaṃ hoti. Munīti moneyyapaṭipadaṃ paṭipanno. Ettha ca ‘‘piṇḍacāraṃ caritvā’’ti iminā piṇḍapātikaṅgaṃ vuttaṃ. Yasmā pana ukkaṭṭhapiṇḍapātiko sapadānacārī ekāsaniko pattapiṇḍiko khalupacchābhattiko ca hotiyeva, tecīvarikapaṃsukūlampi ca samādiyateva, tasmā imānipi cha vuttāneva honti. ‘‘Vanantamabhihāraye’’ti iminā pana āraññikaṅgaṃ vuttaṃ, ‘‘upaṭṭhito rukkhamūlasmi’’nti iminā rukkhamūlikaṅgaṃ, ‘‘āsanūpagato’’ti iminā nesajjikaṅgaṃ. Yathākkamaṃ pana etesaṃ anulomattā abbhokāsikayathāsanthatikasosānikaṅgāni vuttāniyeva hontīti evametāya gāthāya terasa dhutaṅgāni nālakattherassa kathesi.
715 那位专注于禅那的人被称为智者:他通过让尚未生起的禅那生起,以及通过转向、入定、决意、出定和省察已生起的禅那,精勤地投入于诸禅那之中。所谓智者,就是具备坚定毅力的人。应当在林野中感到喜乐:意思是说,应当欢喜住在森林里,而不应贪恋靠近村落的住处。他应当在树下修禅,让自己充满极大的喜悦:他不只应当专注于世间禅那,还应当在那样一棵树下,以与入流道等相应的出世间禅那来修禅,让自己感到极大的满足。因为只有出世间禅那才能让心达到最高的安稳与喜悦,别的禅那做不到。所以说让自己充满极大的喜悦。就这样,通过这首偈颂,讲说了因专注禅那而乐于住在林野坐卧处,以及阿拉汉果。巴利
715.Sa jhānapasuto dhīroti so anuppannassa jhānassa uppādanena uppannassa āvajjanasamāpajjanādhiṭṭhānavuṭṭhānapaccavekkhaṇehi ca jhānesu pasuto anuyutto. Dhīroti dhitisampanno. Vanante ramito siyāti vane abhirato siyā, gāmantasenāsane nābhirameyyāti vuttaṃ hoti. Jhāyetharukkhamūlasmiṃ, attānamabhitosayanti na kevalaṃ lokiyajjhānapasutoyeva siyā, apica kho tasmiṃyeva rukkhamūle sotāpattimaggādisampayuttena lokuttarajjhānenāpi attānaṃ atīva tosento jhāyetha. Paramassāsappattiyā hi lokuttarajjhāneneva cittaṃ atīva tussati, na aññena. Tenāha – ‘‘attānamabhitosaya’’nti. Evamimāya gāthāya jhānapasutatāya vanantasenāsanābhiratiṃ arahattañca kathesi.
716 716. 现在,因为那罗迦长老听了这个说法之后,将供养送往林野,即使不吃东西也极其热心地要圆满修行,可是不吃东西就没法修沙门法。因为那样做的话,命就活不下去;但为了不生起烦恼,还是应该去寻求食物,这就是这里的道理。所以,世尊为了说明他在往后几天里也应当去乞食,而不应生起烦恼,就讲了以证得阿罗汉果为最终目标的乞食规范,说了“于是,过了夜……”等六首偈颂。其中,“于是”是指在“他乞食后,前往林野”那里所说的;“在夜间过后”是指夜间已过,即第二天;“不应欣喜于邀请”是指对于像‘尊者,请来我家用餐’这样的邀请,以及‘他给不给呢?给的好不好呢?’这类寻思和食物,行于行道圆满的比丘不应欣喜、不应接受,这是这句话的意思。然而,如果他们强行取钵装满而给,则应食用后修沙门法,头陀支不失坏,但因此不应进入那个村庄。对于从村庄送来的供养,如果进入村庄后,即使有数百盘饭食送来,也不应欣喜,从那里连一粒也不应接受,而应唯次第沿户乞食。巴利
716. Idāni yasmā imaṃ dhammadesanaṃ sutvā nālakatthero vanantamabhihāretvā nirāhāropi paṭipadāpūraṇe atīva ussukko ahosi, nirāhārena ca samaṇadhammaṃ kātuṃ na sakkā. Tathā karontassa hi jīvitaṃ nappavattati, kilese pana anuppādentena āhāro pariyesitabbo, ayamettha ñāyo. Tasmā tassa bhagavā aparāparesupi divasesu piṇḍāya caritabbaṃ, kilesā pana na uppādetabbāti dassanatthaṃ arahattappattiniṭṭhaṃyeva bhikkhācāravattaṃ kathento ‘‘tato ratyā vivasāne’’tiādikā cha gāthāyo abhāsi. Tattha tatoti ‘‘sa piṇḍacāraṃ caritvā, vanantamabhihāraye’’ti ettha vuttapiṇḍacāravanantābhihārato uttaripi. Ratyā vivasāneti rattisamatikkame, dutiyadivaseti vuttaṃ hoti. Gāmantamabhihārayeti ābhisamācārikavattaṃ katvā yāva bhikkhācāravelā, tāva vivekamanubrūhetvā gatapaccāgatavatte vuttanayena kammaṭṭhānaṃ manasi karonto gāmaṃ gaccheyya. Avhānaṃ nābhinandeyyāti ‘‘bhante, amhākaṃ ghare bhuñjitabba’’nti nimantanaṃ, ‘‘deti nu kho na deti nu kho sundaraṃ nu kho deti asundaraṃ nu kho detī’’ti evarūpaṃ vitakkaṃ bhojanañca paṭipadāpūrako bhikkhu nābhinandeyya, nappaṭiggaṇheyyāti vuttaṃ hoti. Yadi pana balakkārena pattaṃ gahetvā pūretvā denti, paribhuñjitvā samaṇadhammo kātabbo, dhutaṅgaṃ na kuppati, tadupādāya pana taṃ gāmaṃ na pavisitabbaṃ. Abhihārañca gāmatoti sace gāmaṃ paviṭṭhassa pātisatehipi bhattaṃ abhiharanti , tampi nābhinandeyya, tato ekasitthampi nappaṭiggaṇheyya, aññadatthu gharapaṭipāṭiyā piṇḍapātameva careyyāti.
717 牟尼到了村里,不应该在人家之间急匆匆地走。这里说的是:那位为了牟尼的目的而修行的牟尼,进村之后,不应该在人家之间匆忙走动,不应该卷入匆忙赶路、东张西望之类和在家人打交道的、不合出家人身份的行为。为了乞食而说话时,要像断了话头一样,不说那些带着暗示、绕着弯子、打手势来讨要食物的话。如果确实有需要,生病时可以为了治病而说。除了为了住处可以明确表白索求之外,对住处也不得说涉及暗示、旁敲侧击、做标记等语;对其他资具,没病的人就什么都不该说。巴利
717.Namunī gāmamāgamma, kulesu sahasā careti so ca monatthāya paṭipannako muni gāmaṃ gato samāno kulesu sahasā na care, sahasokitādiananulomikaṃ gihisaṃsaggaṃ na āpajjeyyāti vuttaṃ hoti. Ghāsesanaṃ chinnakatho, na vācaṃ payutaṃ bhaṇeti chinnakatho viya hutvā obhāsaparikathānimittaviññattipayuttaṃ ghāsesanavācaṃ na bhaṇeyya. Sace ākaṅkheyya, gilāno samāno gelaññapaṭibāhanatthāya bhaṇeyya. Senāsanatthāya vā viññattiṃ ṭhapetvā obhāsaparikathānimittapayuttaṃ, avasesapaccayatthāya pana agilāno neva kiñci bhaṇeyyāti.
718-9 “我得到了这个”这句偈颂的意思是:进村乞食时,哪怕只得到一点点东西,也这样想:“我得到了,这很好”;如果什么都没得到,也这样想:“我没得到,这也是善的”,把它也看成“美好的”。无论得到还是没得到,这两种情况他都一样,内心不为所动,像树一样退回去。就像一个人去找果子,走到树下,不管有没有得到果子,都不因此欢喜或抗拒,只是保持平静地离开。同样,他走到施主家,不管有没有得到供养,都只是保持平静地离开。“他手持钵”这句偈颂意思很浅显,不用再多解释。巴利
718-9.Alatthaṃ yadidanti imissā pana gāthāya ayamattho – gāmaṃ piṇḍāya paviṭṭho appamattakepi kismiñci laddhe ‘‘alatthaṃ yaṃ idaṃ sādhū’’ti cintetvā aladdhe ‘‘nālatthaṃ kusala’’nti tampi ‘‘sundara’’nti cintetvā ubhayeneva lābhālābhena so tādī nibbikāro hutvā rukkhaṃvupanivattati, yathāpi puriso phalagavesī rukkhaṃ upagamma phalaṃ laddhāpi aladdhāpi ananunīto appaṭihato majjhattoyeva hutvā gacchati, evaṃ kulaṃ upagamma lābhaṃ laddhāpi aladdhāpi majjhattova hutvā gacchatīti. Sa pattapāṇī ti gāthā uttānatthāva.
720 “高低”这一说法和这首偈颂的关联是这样的:即使已经圆满具备乞食的修行规范,也不该仅仅因此就满足,而应当继续提升修行之道。因为教法的核心就在于修行实践。而这条修行之道,有高有低……乃至……“并非一次”。它的意思是:这条修行之道,从殊胜与低劣的差别来看,有高有低,是佛陀沙门所开示的。乐行道且能快速证得神通智慧,这是“高”;苦行道且证悟迟缓,这是“低”。其余两种行道,在某一个方面算高,在另一个方面算低。也可以说,只有第一种算高,其余三种都算低。凭借这条或高或低的道,他们不会两次到达彼岸。或者写作“两次”,意思是:不可能凭同一条道两次证得涅槃。为什么?因为某条道已经断除的烦恼,不需要再断一次。由此说明不存在退失的情况。“并非一次”:而那个彼岸,也不是只接触一次就能到达的。为什么?因为仅凭一条道不可能断尽一切烦恼。由此说明,不能只靠一条道就证得阿罗汉果。巴利
720.Uccāvacāti imissā gāthāya sambandho – evaṃ bhikkhācāravattasampanno hutvāpi tāvatakeneva tuṭṭhiṃ anāpajjitvā paṭipadaṃ ārodheyya. Paṭipattisārañhi sāsanaṃ. Sā cāyaṃ uccāvacā…pe… mutanti. Tassattho – sā cāyaṃ maggapaṭipadā uttamanihīnabhedato uccāvacā buddhasamaṇena pakāsitā. Sukhāpaṭipadā hi khippābhiññā uccā, dukkhāpaṭipadā dandhābhiññā avacā. Itarā dve ekenaṅgena uccā, ekena avacā. Paṭhamā eva vā uccā, itarā tissopi avacā. Tāya cetāya uccāya avacāya vā paṭipadāya na pāraṃ diguṇaṃ yanti. ‘‘Duguṇa’’nti vā pāṭho, ekamaggena dvikkhattuṃ nibbānaṃ na yantīti attho. Kasmā? Yena maggena ye kilesā pahīnā, tesaṃ puna appahātabbato. Etena parihānadhammābhāvaṃ dīpeti. Nayidaṃ ekaguṇaṃ mutanti tañca idaṃ pāraṃ ekakkhattuṃyeva phusanārahampi na hoti. Kasmā? Ekena maggena sabbakilesappahānābhāvato. Etena ekamaggeneva arahattābhāvaṃ dīpeti.
721 现在,为了说明这种修行的利益,说了“若人已……”这首偈颂。它的意思是:对于这样修行的比丘,因为通过这条修行道已经断除了渴爱,那种以一百零八种渴爱行相而称为“蔓延”的渴爱,在他身上确实不存在了;这样一位比丘,已经截断烦恼之流,已经舍弃善与不善,已经断除应做与不应做之事,无论是贪所生的还是嗔所生的热恼,哪怕极其微细,也都不会生起。巴利
721. Idāni paṭipadānisaṃsaṃ dassento ‘‘yassa ca visatā’’ti gāthamāha. Tassattho – yassa ca evaṃ paṭipannassa bhikkhuno tāya paṭipadāya pahīnattā aṭṭhasatataṇhāvicaritabhāvena visatattā visatā taṇhā natthi, tassa kilesasotacchedena chinnasotassa kusalākusalappahānena kiccākiccappahīnassa rāgajo vā dosajo vā appamattakopi pariḷāho na vijjatīti.
722 现在,因为那罗迦长老听了这些偈颂之后,心里生起了这样的念头:“如果牟尼道就这么点程度,那也太容易了,并不难行,稍微用点功就能圆满。”所以,世尊为了向他表明“牟尼道恰恰是难行的”,接着又说了“我将为你开示牟尼……”等话。其中,“将开示”的意思是令他了知,也就是要宣说。“以剃刀锋为喻”:就像剃刀的锋刃一样。“应修习”就是应当去实践。要旨是什么?修持牟尼道的比丘,应当以剃刀锋为比喻,在受用资具方面谨慎行事。就像有人舔食涂了蜜的剃刀锋,必须小心别割伤舌头;同样,在受用如法得来的资具时,应当守护自心,不让烦恼生起——这就是所说的意思。因为资具既要以清净的方式获得,又要以无可指责的方式受用,这并不容易,所以世尊反复围绕资具来说。“舌抵上腭,于腹知量”:用舌抵住上腭,以此驱除对味道的贪爱,不享用以染污方式得来的资具,对腹部也要有所节制。巴利
722. Idāni yasmā imā gāthāyo sutvā nālakattherassa cittaṃ udapādi – ‘‘yadi ettakaṃ moneyyaṃ sukaraṃ na dukkaraṃ, sakkā appakasirena pūretu’’nti, tasmāssa bhagavā ‘‘dukkarameva moneyya’’nti dassento puna ‘‘moneyyaṃ te upaññissa’’ntiādimāha. Tattha upaññissanti upaññāpeyyaṃ, kathayissanti vuttaṃ hoti. Khuradhārā upamā assāti khuradhārūpamo. Bhaveti bhaveyya. Ko adhippāyo? Moneyyaṃ paṭipanno bhikkhu khuradhāraṃ upamaṃ katvā paccayesu vatteyya. Yathā madhudiddhaṃ khuradhāraṃ lihanto, chedato, jivhaṃ rakkhati, evaṃ dhammena laddhe paccaye paribhuñjanto cittaṃ kilesuppattito rakkheyyāti vuttaṃ hoti. Paccayā hi parisuddhena ñāyena laddhuñca anavajjaparibhogena paribhuñjituñca na sukhena sakkāti bhagavā paccayanissitameva bahuso bhaṇati. Jivhāya tālumāhacca, udare saññato siyāti jivhāya tāluṃ uppīḷetvāpi rasataṇhaṃ vinodento kiliṭṭhena maggena uppannapaccaye asevanto udare saṃyato siyā.
723 内心不退缩,并且要始终不懈地修习善法,以不松懈的心持续用功;也不应多想,不要以对亲属、对地方、对恐惧的寻思而思绪纷繁。成为无世间气味、无所执取的人,以清净的修行生活为最终归宿——也就是要摆脱一切烦恼,不执著于任何存在中的渴爱和邪见,唯独以三学、整个教法和清净的修行生活作为最终的依归。巴利
723.Alīnacitto ca siyāti niccaṃ kusalānaṃ dhammānaṃ bhāvanāya aṭṭhitakāritāya akusītacitto ca bhaveyya. Na cāpi bahu cintayeti ñātijanapadāmaravitakkavasena ca bahuṃ na cinteyya. Nirāmagandho asito, brahmacariyaparāyaṇoti nikkileso ca hutvā taṇhādiṭṭhīhi kismiñci bhave anissito sikkhāttayasakalasāsanabrahmacariyaparāyaṇo eva bhaveyya.
724-5 “一坐”就是指独坐一处。这里用“坐”来代表,实际上已经说到了所有威仪。应当知道,这是说:应当在一切威仪中修习独一的状态。“一坐”这个词在这里是与格用法。“亲近沙门”是指沙门应当修习的三十八种所缘的禅修,或者是指作为沙门亲近对象的三十八种所缘的类别。这也是与格用法,意思是“为了亲近”。在这里应当知道:通过“一坐”说的是身远离,通过“亲近沙门”说的是心远离。“独一被称为牟尼行”:这样,依于身远离和心远离,就称为“独一就是牟尼行”。至于“若你独住而欢喜”这一句,是关联到后面偈颂的句子,和“那时你将宣说于十方”这一句相连。巴利
724-5.Ekāsanassāti vivittāsanassa. Āsanamukhena cettha sabbairiyāpathā vuttā. Yato sabbairiyāpathesu ekībhāvassa sikkheyyāti vuttaṃ hotīti veditabbaṃ. Ekāsanassāti ca sampadānavacanametaṃ. Samaṇūpāsanassacāti samaṇehi upāsitabbassa aṭṭhatiṃsārammaṇabhāvanānuyogassa, samaṇānaṃ vā upāsanabhūtassa aṭṭhatiṃsārammaṇabhedasseva. Idampi sampadānavacanameva, upāsanatthanti vuttaṃ hoti. Ettha ca ekāsanena kāyaviveko, samaṇūpāsanena cittaviveko vutto hotīti veditabbo. Ekattaṃ monamakkhātanti evamidaṃ kāyacittavivekavasena ‘‘ekattaṃ mona’’nti akkhātaṃ. Eko ce abhiramissasīti idaṃ pana uttaragāthāpekkhaṃ padaṃ, ‘‘atha bhāhisi dasadisā’’ti iminā assa sambandho.
你将宣说,意思是:你将宣讲、将彰显。你修习这条道路,将在各方各处因为名声而广为人知,这就是这句话要表达的意思。接着“听闻了贤者们……”这四词的含义是:你将以那种称誉之声在十方宣说,听闻了那些贤者、修禅者、舍离欲者的那种称誉之声后,你不应因此心生掉举,反而要更加增长惭愧与信心。对那种名声感到羞惭,生起“这是能导向解脱的修行道路”的信心之后,应当进一步精勤修行。“我的”:因为若能如此,他就是我的弟子。巴利
Bhāhisīti bhāsissasi pakāsessasi. Imaṃ paṭipadaṃ bhāvento sabbadisāsu kittiyā pākaṭo bhavissasīti vuttaṃ hoti. Sutvā dhīrānantiādīnaṃ pana catunnaṃ padānaṃ ayamattho – yena ca kittighosena bhāhisi dasadisā taṃ dhīrānaṃ jhāyīnaṃ kāmacāginaṃ nighosaṃ sutvā atha tvaṃ tena uddhaccaṃ anāpajjitvā bhiyyo hiriñca saddhañca kareyyāsi, tena ghosena harāyamāno ‘‘niyyānikapaṭipadā aya’’nti saddhaṃ uppādetvā uttari paṭipattimeva brūheyyāsi. Māmakoti evañhi sante mama sāvako hotīti.
726 “那些河流”:我说“应当更加增长惭与信”“不应有掉举”,这些话,你们通过这条河的比喻也能明白;反过来,通过沟渠和岩缝也能明白。“沟渠中”指水渠。“岩缝中”指洞穴。怎么明白呢?小水哗哗地流,大海静静地流。因为小沟、岩缝等一切小水,都是哗哗作响、带着掉举而流;而恒河等大河,则静静地流。同样,若人想着“我已圆满牟尼行”而变得掉举,那就不是佛弟子;佛弟子则生起惭与信,心就谦下。巴利
726.Taṃ nadīhīti yaṃ taṃ mayā ‘‘hiriñca saddhañca bhiyyo kubbethā’’ti vadatā ‘‘uddhaccaṃ na kātabba’’nti vuttaṃ, taṃ iminā nadīnidassanenāpi jānātha, tabbipariyāyañca sobbhesu ca padaresuca jānātha. Sobbhesūti mātikāsu . Padaresūti darīsu. Kathaṃ? Saṇantā yanti kusobbhā, tuṇhī yanti mahodadhīti. Kusobbhā hi sobbhapadarādibhedā sabbāpi kunnadiyo saṇantā saddaṃ karontā uddhatā hutvā yanti, gaṅgādibhedā pana mahānadiyo tuṇhī yanti, evaṃ ‘‘moneyyaṃ pūremī’’ti uddhato hoti amāmako, māmako pana hiriñca saddhañca uppādetvā nīcacittova hoti.
727-9 再说,为什么说“若是有所不足……是智者”等等。这里可能会有人问:如果愚者像没装满的瓶子一样哗哗作响,智者像满湖的水一样寂静,那为什么佛陀沙门却这样忙于说法,说这么多话呢?正是基于这个关联,说了“凡沙门”这一偈。它的意思是:佛陀沙门虽然说得很多,但所说的话都与义利相应、与法相应、与利益相连。这不是出于掉举,而是了知之后才说法,即使说上一整天,也毫无戏论。因为他的一切语业都跟随智慧而行。这样说法时,他了知“这个对这个人有利益,那个对那个人有利益”,以种种方式了知,所以多说,并不是因为单纯话多。结尾偈颂的关联是:如此,具足一切知智的佛陀沙门,了知之后说法,了知之后多说。然而,对于他所开示的法,如果有人能以抉择分智了知,又能自制,了知之后并不多说,那样的牟尼才配得上牟尼行,那样的牟尼才算证得了牟尼行。它的意思是:他了知那个法,却能自制、守护其心,凡是知道说了对众生的利益与安乐没有帮助的,就不多说。像这样,为成就牟尼之义而修行的人,才配得上称为牟尼道的“牟尼”。不仅如此,他还证得了称为阿罗汉道智的“牟尼”。应当这样理解。于是以阿罗汉为顶点结束了这段开示。巴利
727-9. Kiñca bhiyyo – yadūnakaṃ…pe… paṇḍitoti. Tattha siyā – sace aḍḍhakumbhūpamo bālo saṇantatāya, rahado pūrova paṇḍito santatāya, atha kasmā buddhasamaṇo evaṃ dhammadesanābyāvaṭo hutvā bahuṃ bhāsatīti iminā sambandhena ‘‘yaṃ samaṇo’’ti gāthamāha. Tassattho – yaṃ buddhasamaṇo bahuṃ bhāsati upetaṃ atthasañhitaṃ, atthupetaṃ dhammupetañca hitena ca saṃhitaṃ, taṃ na uddhaccena, apica kho jānaṃ so dhammaṃ deseti divasampi desento nippapañcova hutvā. Tassa hi sabbaṃ vacīkammaṃ ñāṇānuparivatti. Evaṃ desento ca ‘‘idamassa hitaṃ idamassa hita’’nti nānappakārato jānaṃ so bahu bhāsati, na kevalaṃ bahubhāṇitāya. Avasānagāthāya sambandho – evaṃ tāva sabbaññutaññāṇena samannāgato buddhasamaṇo jānaṃ so dhammaṃ deseti, jānaṃ so bahu bhāsati. Tena desitaṃ pana dhammaṃ nibbedhabhāgiyeneva ñāṇena yo ca jānaṃ saṃyatatto, jānaṃ na bahu bhāsati, sa muni monamarahati, sa muni monamajjhagāti. Tassattho – taṃ dhammaṃ jānanto saṃyatatto guttacitto hutvā yaṃ bhāsitaṃ sattānaṃ hitasukhāvahaṃ na hoti, taṃ jānaṃ na bahu bhāsati. So evaṃvidho monatthaṃ paṭipannako muni moneyyapaṭipadāsaṅkhātaṃ monaṃ arahati. Na kevalañca arahatiyeva, apica kho pana sa muni arahattamaggañāṇasaṅkhātaṃ monaṃ ajjhagā icceva veditabboti arahattanikūṭena desanaṃ niṭṭhāpesi.
那罗迦长老听了这番话后,在三个方面都做到了少欲:见上少欲、闻上少欲、问上少欲。原来,他在说法结束时,以清净的信心顶礼世尊后就走进了森林,之后再也没有生起“但愿我能再见世尊”这种贪求。这就是他在见上的少欲。同样,他也没有生起“但愿我能再听一次说法”这种贪求。这就是他在闻上的少欲。同样,他也没有生起“但愿我能再请教牟尼行”这种贪求。这就是他在问上的少欲。巴利
Taṃ sutvā nālakatthero tīsu ṭhānesu appiccho ahosi dassane savane pucchāyāti. So hi desanāpariyosāne pasannacitto bhagavantaṃ vanditvā vanaṃ paviṭṭho, puna ‘‘aho vatāhaṃ bhagavantaṃ passeyya’’nti lolabhāvaṃ na janesi. Ayamassa dassane appicchatā. Tathā ‘‘aho vatāhaṃ puna dhammadesanaṃ suṇeyya’’nti lolabhāvaṃ na janesi. Ayamassa savane appicchatā. Tathā ‘‘aho vatāhaṃ puna moneyyapaṭipadaṃ puccheyya’’nti lolabhāvaṃ na janesi. Ayamassa pucchāya appicchatā.
他就这样少欲,进入山脚后,不在同一片密林里住两天,不在同一棵树下坐两天,也不在同一座村庄里连续两天去托钵。就这样,从一片林到另一片林,从一棵树到另一棵树,从一座村到另一座村,四处游行,依照适合的行道去修行,最后立足于最高的果位。那时,因为把牟尼道当作上等来圆满的比丘,只活七个月;当作中等来圆满的,活七年;当作下等来圆满的,活十六年。而这位长老是当作上等来圆满的,所以住了七个月后,知道自己寿命行将耗尽,就沐浴、穿好下衣、系好腰带、披上双层僧伽梨衣,面向十力世尊的方向,五体投地礼拜,合掌,靠着欣伽拉卡山站着,就在无余涅槃界中般涅槃了。世尊知道他已般涅槃,便和比丘僧团一起到那里,办理遗体之事,让人收取舍利,建起塔庙,然后才离去。巴利
So evaṃ appiccho samāno pabbatapādaṃ pavisitvā ekavanasaṇḍe dve divasāni na vasi , ekarukkhamūle dve divasāni na nisīdi, ekagāme dve divasāni piṇḍāya na pāvisi. Iti vanato vanaṃ, rukkhato rukkhaṃ, gāmato gāmaṃ āhiṇḍanto anurūpapaṭipadaṃ paṭipajjitvā aggaphale patiṭṭhāsi. Atha yasmā moneyyapaṭipadaṃ ukkaṭṭhaṃ katvā pūrento bhikkhu satteva māsāni jīvati, majjhimaṃ katvā pūrento satta vassāni, mandaṃ katvā pūrento soḷasa vassāni. Ayañca ukkaṭṭhaṃ katvā pūresi, tasmā satta māse ṭhatvā attano āyusaṅkhāraparikkhayaṃ ñatvā nhāyitvā nivāsetvā kāyabandhanaṃ bandhitvā diguṇaṃ saṅghāṭiṃ pārupitvā dasabalābhimukho pañcapatiṭṭhitaṃ vanditvā añjaliṃ paggahetvā hiṅgulakapabbataṃ nissāya ṭhitakova anupādisesāya nibbānadhātuyā parinibbāyi. Tassa parinibbutabhāvaṃ ñatvā bhagavā bhikkhusaṅghena saddhiṃ tattha gantvā sarīrakiccaṃ katvā dhātuyo gāhāpetvā cetiyaṃ patiṭṭhāpetvā agamāsīti.
第十二 双观经的注释巴利
12. Dvayatānupassanāsuttavaṇṇanā
“如是我闻”这一段,是《双观经》。它的起因是什么?这部经的起因,来自世尊自己的意愿。因为世尊是随自己的意愿而宣说这部经的。这里是简要说明,详细的解释会在义释中显现出来。其中“如是我闻”等语句,都和前面解释过的方式一样。“东园”是指舍卫城东边的园林。“在鹿子母的殿堂”这里:近事女毗舍佉因为被自己的公公弥伽罗长者安置在母亲的位置上,所以被称为“鹿子母”。这位鹿子母舍弃了价值九千万的大蔓饰,建造了这座殿堂,下面和上面各造了五百个房间,共有一千间尖顶阁楼的房间,所以它被称为“鹿子母殿堂”。就在那座鹿子母殿堂中。巴利
Evaṃme sutanti dvayatānupassanāsuttaṃ. Kā uppatti? Imassa suttassa attajjhāsayato uppatti. Attajjhāsayena hi bhagavā imaṃ suttaṃ desesi. Ayamettha saṅkhepo, vitthāro panassa atthavaṇṇanāyameva āvi bhavissati. Tattha evaṃ me sutantiādīni vuttanayāneva. Pubbārāmeti sāvatthinagarassa puratthimadisāyaṃ ārāme. Migāramātu pāsādeti ettha visākhā upāsikā attano sasurena migārena seṭṭhinā mātuṭṭhāne ṭhapitattā ‘‘migāramātā’’ti vuccati. Tāya migāramātuyā navakoṭiagghanakaṃ mahālatāpiḷandhanaṃ vissajjetvā kārāpito pāsādo heṭṭhā ca upari ca pañca pañca gabbhasatāni katvā sahassakūṭāgāragabbho, so ‘‘migāramātupāsādo’’ti vuccati. Tasmiṃ migāramātu pāsāde.
那时,世尊依止舍卫城,住在东园弥伽罗母的殿堂里,就是指那个时间。“那天是布萨日”:在那一天正好是布萨日,意思是说那天是布萨的日子。“十五日”:这是通过点明布萨日,排除了其他布萨日期的说法。“在圆满的望月之夜”:因为是十五日,按日子来算,已经远离了云雾等污垢,夜晚的功德也圆满,所以叫“圆满”;又因为月亮圆满,所以叫“望月之夜”。“被比丘僧团围绕”:就是被比丘僧团环绕着。“在露天处坐着”:是指在弥伽罗母宝殿的庭院里,一个露天的、上方没有遮盖的地方,世尊坐在已经铺设好的殊胜佛座上。“默然,默然”:意思是极其寂静,世尊无论看向哪里,那里都是默然寂静的,而且是言语上默然,身体上也默然。“观察比丘僧团后”:世尊环顾这围绕而坐、数千比丘之多的、极其寂静默然的比丘僧团,为了确定适合他们的法义开示,心里思量:“这里面有这么多入流者,这么多一来者,这么多不来者,这么多已开始修观、具足善根的凡夫?对于这个比丘僧团来说,什么样的法义开示才最合适?”——这样从这边到那边地观察之后。巴利
Tena kho pana samayena bhagavāti yaṃ samayaṃ bhagavā sāvatthiṃ nissāya pubbārāme migāramātu pāsāde viharati, tena samayena. Tadahuposatheti tasmiṃ ahu uposathe, uposathadivaseti vuttaṃ hoti. Pannaraseti idaṃ uposathaggahaṇena sampattāvasesuposathapaṭikkhepavacanaṃ. Puṇṇāya puṇṇamāya rattiyāti pannarasadivasattā divasagaṇanāya abbhādiupakkilesavirahattā rattiguṇasampattiyā ca puṇṇattā puṇṇāya, paripuṇṇacandattā puṇṇamāya ca rattiyā. Bhikkhusaṅghaparivutoti bhikkhusaṅghena parivuto. Abbhokāse nisinno hotīti migāramātu ratanapāsādapariveṇe abbhokāse upari appaṭicchanne okāse paññattavarabuddhāsane nisinno hoti. Tuṇhībhūtaṃ tuṇhībhūtanti atīva tuṇhībhūtaṃ, yato yato vā anuviloketi , tato tato tuṇhībhūtaṃ, tuṇhībhūtaṃ vācāya, puna tuṇhībhūtaṃ kāyena. Bhikkhusaṅghaṃ anuviloketvāti taṃ parivāretvā nisinnaṃ anekasahassabhikkhuparimāṇaṃ tuṇhībhūtaṃ tuṇhībhūtaṃ bhikkhusaṅghaṃ ‘‘ettakā ettha sotāpannā, ettakā sakadāgāmino, ettakā anāgāmino ettakā āraddhavipassakā kalyāṇaputhujjanā, imassa bhikkhusaṅghassa kīdisī dhammadesanā sappāyā’’ti sappāyadhammadesanāparicchedanatthaṃ ito cito ca viloketvā.
比丘们,所谓“这些是善法”,就是指那些以无病之义、无过失之义、可爱果报之义、从善巧而生之义而称为善的三十七菩提分法,或者指阐明这些法的教法。“圣的、能出离的、导向正觉的”:以应当亲近之义为“圣”,以从世间出离之义为“能出离”,以导向称为正觉的阿拉汉果之义为“导向正觉”。比丘们,对于这些……听闻:这段话是说——比丘们,对于这些善的……导向正觉的法,什么是你们听闻它们的近因?什么是原因?什么是目的?你们听闻它们是为了什么?你们为什么听闻这些法?所谓“仅仅是为了如实地了知二法”:这里“仅仅”是限定和决断的说法。具有两个组成部分的,就是“二”;二本身就是“二法”,指那些二法。也有文本读作“二法”。“为了如实地了知”:就是为了无颠倒的智慧。说的是什么呢?那些按世间、出世间等分类而分为两类的诸法,为了对它们生起称为观的如实智慧,正是为了这个目的,不再超出这个。因为靠听闻就能达到这个程度,更上的殊胜证得则要靠修习。至于“那么,你们说二法是什么呢?”:这里的意思是——比丘们,如果你们会这样问:“那么,尊者,您说的二法是什么呢?”但字面意思则是“那么,你们说二法性是什么吧”。巴利
Yete, bhikkhave, kusalā dhammāti ye te ārogyaṭṭhena anavajjaṭṭhena iṭṭhaphalaṭṭhena kosallasambhūtaṭṭhena ca kusalā sattatiṃsabodhipakkhiyadhammā, tajjotakā vā pariyattidhammā. Ariyāniyyānikā sambodhagāminoti upagantabbaṭṭhena ariyā, lokato niyyānaṭṭhena niyyānikā, sambodhasaṅkhātaṃ arahattaṃ gamanaṭṭhena sambodhagāmino. Tesaṃ vo bhikkhave…pe… savanāya, tesaṃ bhikkhave kusalānaṃ…pe… sambodhagāmīnaṃ kā upanisā, kiṃ kāraṇaṃ, kiṃ payojanaṃ tumhākaṃ savanāya, kimatthaṃ tumhe te dhamme suṇāthāti vuttaṃ hoti. Yāvadeva dvayatānaṃ dhammānaṃ yathābhūtaṃ ñāṇāyāti ettha yāvadevāti paricchedāvadhāraṇavacanaṃ. Dve avayavā etesanti dvayā, dvayā eva dvayatā, tesaṃ dvayatānaṃ. ‘‘Dvayāna’’ntipi pāṭho. Yathābhūtaṃ ñāṇāyāti aviparītañāṇāya. Kiṃ vuttaṃ hoti? Yadetaṃ lokiyalokuttarādibhedena dvidhā vavatthitānaṃ dhammānaṃ vipassanāsaṅkhātaṃ yathābhūtañāṇaṃ, etadatthāya na ito bhiyyoti, savanena hi ettakaṃ hoti, taduttari visesādhigamo bhāvanāyāti. Kiñca dvayataṃ vadethāti ettha pana sace, vo bhikkhave, siyā, kiñca tumhe, bhante, dvayataṃ vadethāti ayamadhippāyo. Padattho pana ‘‘kiñca dvayatābhāvaṃ vadethā’’ti.
此后,世尊为了说明“二法”,说了“这是苦”等话。其中,二法就是四圣谛法:通过指出“这是苦,这是苦的集起”——也就是属于世间那一部分、有原因的苦——这是第一种随观;通过指出另一部分——出世间的、有方法可达到的灭——这是第二种随观。这里,第一种随观依靠第三和第四种清净成就,第二种随观依靠第五种清净成就。像这样,能按照所说的方式正确随观二法的人,以正念不离开、不放逸,以身体和心的精进热忱而具足热忱,对身体和生命都不顾恋,心已转向。可以期望:在现世中就证知,也就是在这同一个生命体里证得阿罗汉果。或者,如果还有余依,就证得不来果。“有余依”是指因为还要再有生死而应当执取的诸蕴的残余;如果那个还存在,就可以期望不来者的状态。这是所显示的意思。在这里,虽然较低的各果位也是这样随观二法,但为了在更高的果位上激发精勤,世尊才这样说。巴利
(1) Tato bhagavā dvayataṃ dassento ‘‘idaṃ dukkha’’nti evamādimāha. Tattha dvayatānaṃ catusaccadhammānaṃ ‘‘idaṃ dukkhaṃ, ayaṃ dukkhasamudayo’’ti evaṃ lokiyassa ekassa avayavassa sahetukassa vā dukkhassa dassanena ayaṃ ekānupassanā, itarā lokuttarassa dutiyassa avayavassa saupāyassa vā nirodhassa dassanena dutiyānupassanā. Paṭhamā cettha tatiyacatutthavisuddhīhi hoti, dutiyā pañcamavisuddhiyā. Evaṃ sammā dvayatānupassinoti iminā vuttanayena sammā dvayadhamme anupassantassa satiyā avippavāsena appamattassa, kāyikacetasikavīriyātāpena ātāpino kāye ca jīvite ca nirapekkhattā , pahitattassa. Pāṭikaṅkhanti icchitabbaṃ. Diṭṭheva dhamme aññāti asmiṃyeva attabhāve arahattaṃ. Sati vā upādisese anāgāmitāti ‘‘upādisesa’’nti punabbhavavasena upādātabbakkhandhasesaṃ vuccati, tasmiṃ vā sati anāgāmibhāvo paṭikaṅkhoti dasseti. Tattha kiñcāpi heṭṭhimaphalānipi evaṃ dvayatānupassinova honti, uparimaphalesu pana ussāhaṃ janento evamāha.
“世尊说了这些”等等,是结集者的话。其中,“这个”是指前面所说的“诸比丘,那些……”等内容。“此”是指现在要以偈颂的形式来说“哪些是苦……”等内容。而这些偈颂因为阐明了四圣谛,所以正是在阐明前面所说的义理。尽管如此,这些偈颂是为那些喜欢偈颂、后来才到的人说的——他们没能掌握前面所说的内容,心里盼着“现在如果能再说一遍就好了”——也是为那些心思散乱的人说的。或者说,是为了显示特别的义理:通过指出没有观照的人和正在观照的人,让他们看到轮回与还灭,因此就是为了显示特别的义理而说的。这个道理也适用于此后所有偈颂的宣说。巴利
Idamavocātiādi saṅgītikārānaṃ vacanaṃ. Tattha idanti ‘‘ye te, bhikkhave’’tiādivuttanidassanaṃ. Etanti idāni ‘‘ye dukkha’’nti evamādivattabbagāthābandhanidassanaṃ. Imā ca gāthā catusaccadīpakattā vuttatthadīpikā eva, evaṃ santepi gāthārucikānaṃ pacchā āgatānaṃ pubbe vuttaṃ asamatthatāya anuggahetvā ‘‘idāni yadi vadeyya sundara’’nti ākaṅkhantānaṃ vikkhittacittānañca atthāya vuttā. Visesatthadīpikā vāti avipassake vipassake ca dassetvā tesaṃ vaṭṭavivaṭṭadassanato, tasmā visesatthadassanatthameva vuttā. Esa nayo ito parampi gāthāvacanesu.
730 这里,“在哪里”这个词是在指示涅槃。因为在涅槃中,苦彻底止息,一切种类的苦都止息,有因的苦也止息,毫无残余地完全止息。“那条道”则是指八支圣道。巴利
730. Tattha yattha cāti nibbānaṃ dasseti. Nibbāne hi dukkhaṃ sabbaso uparujjhati, sabbappakāraṃ uparujjhati, sahetukaṃ uparujjhati, asesañca uparujjhati. Tañca magganti tañca aṭṭhaṅgikaṃ maggaṃ.
731-3 他们缺少心解脱,但具有慧解脱。在这里应当知道:阿拉汉果的定,因为离贪,所以叫心解脱;阿拉汉果的慧,因为离无明,所以叫慧解脱。或者说,贪行者依靠安止定的力量压伏了烦恼之后所证得的阿拉汉果,因为离贪,所以叫心解脱;见行者只生起近行定,然后修观而证得的阿拉汉果,因为离无明,所以叫慧解脱。或者说,不来果是针对欲贪而说的,因为离贪,所以叫心解脱;阿拉汉果则从一切方面来说,因为离无明,所以叫慧解脱。“为了终结”——就是为了终结轮回之苦。“经历生老”——他们到达了生老,或者被生老所触及,他们不能从生老中解脱——应当这样理解。这里其余的内容,从一开始就很清楚。偈颂结束时,大约有六十位比丘领受了这个教法,修观之后,就在那个座位上证得了阿拉汉果。就像这里一样,一切处也都是如此。巴利
731-3.Cetovimuttihīnā te, atho paññāvimuttiyāti ettha arahattaphalasamādhi rāgavirāgā cetovimutti, arahattaphalapaññā avijjāvirāgā paññāvimuttīti veditabbā. Taṇhācaritena vā appanājhānabalena kilese vikkhambhetvā adhigataṃ arahattaphalaṃ rāgavirāgā cetovimutti, diṭṭhicaritena upacārajjhānamattaṃ nibbattetvā vipassitvā adhigataṃ arahattaphalaṃ avijjāvirāgā paññāvimutti. Anāgāmiphalaṃ vā kāmarāgaṃ sandhāya rāgavirāgā cetovimutti, arahattaphalaṃ sabbappakārato avijjāvirāgā paññāvimuttīti. Antakiriyāyāti vaṭṭadukkhassa antakaraṇatthāya . Jātijarūpagāti jātijaraṃ upagatā, jātijarāya vā upagatā, na parimuccanti jātijarāyāti evaṃ veditabbā. Sesamettha ādito pabhuti pākaṭameva. Gāthāpariyosāne ca saṭṭhimattā bhikkhū taṃ desanaṃ uggahetvā vipassitvā tasmiṃyeva āsane arahattaṃ pāpuṇiṃsu. Yathā cettha, evaṃ sabbavāresu.
正因为这样,世尊才用“也许还有别的说法”这类方式,从各种角度讲说了二法随观。其中,在第二组里,“以所依为缘”是指以有漏业为缘。这里所说的“所依”,指的就是有漏业。“无余离贪灭尽”是指通过离贪而彻底灭尽,或者是指被称为无余离贪的灭尽。巴利
(2) Ato eva bhagavā ‘‘siyā aññenapi pariyāyenā’’tiādinā nayena nānappakārato dvayatānupassanaṃ āha. Tattha dutiyavāre upadhipaccayāti sāsavakammapaccayā. Sāsavakammañhi idha ‘‘upadhī’’ti adhippetaṃ. Asesavirāganirodhāti asesaṃ virāgena nirodhā, asesavirāgasaṅkhātā vā nirodhā.
734 以依为因,即由业为缘。随观苦的生起根源,即随观轮回之苦的生起原因就是“依”。这里其余的内容都很清楚。这样一来,这一轮次也阐明了四圣谛,并且是直到证得阿罗汉果为顶点才宣说的。就像这一轮次一样,所有轮次也都是如此。巴利
734.Upadhinidānāti kammapaccayā. Dukkhassa jātippabhavānupassīti vaṭṭadukkhassa jātikāraṇaṃ ‘‘upadhī’’ti anupassanto. Sesamettha pākaṭameva. Evaṃ ayampi vāro cattāri saccāni dīpetvā arahattanikūṭeneva vutto. Yathā cāyaṃ, evaṃ sabbavārā.
在这里的第三轮中,“无明为缘”是指:以能导致有的、属于业资粮的无明为缘。而苦,在一切情况下都只是轮回之苦。巴利
(3) Tattha tatiyavāre avijjāpaccayāti bhavagāmikammasambhāraavijjāpaccayā. Dukkhaṃ pana sabbattha vaṭṭadukkhameva.
735 经历生、死、轮回:指诸蕴的生起是“生”,诸蕴的坏灭是“死”,诸蕴的相续是“轮回”。“去往”:就是走向、到达。“如是状态与异状态”:就是现在这个人的状态,以及从此以后转生为其他种类众生的状态。“趣”:就是作为缘的状态。巴利
735.Jātimaraṇasaṃsāranti khandhanibbattiṃ jātiṃ khandhabhedaṃ maraṇaṃ khandhapaṭipāṭiṃ saṃsārañca. Vajantīti gacchanti upenti. Itthabhāvaññathābhāvanti imaṃ manussabhāvaṃ ito avasesaaññanikāyabhāvañca. Gatīti paccayabhāvo.
736 无明会消失,因为这就是无明。而那些已到达明的人,是指那些以阿罗汉道的明击破烦恼、因而到达的漏尽众生。其余内容容易理解。巴利
736.Avijjā hāyanti avijjā hi ayaṃ. Vijjāgatā ca ye sattāti ye ca arahattamaggavijjāya kilese vijjhitvā gatā khīṇāsavasattā. Sesamuttānatthameva.
在第四种情况里,所谓“以行为缘”,就是以福行、非福行、不动行、行为缘。巴利
(4) Catutthavāre saṅkhārapaccayāti puññāpuññāneñjābhisaṅkhārapaccayā.
738-9 知道这个过患,就是知道由行作缘所生的这个苦就是过患。一切行的寂止,就是所有上面所说的那些行,通过道智而寂止;意思是说,以被摧毁故、以果堪能故。想之灭,就是欲想等想,只通过道而被止息。知道这个之后如实,就是如实、不颠倒地知道这个苦的灭尽。正见,就是正确的看见。正智,就是了知有为法是无常等,了知无为法是常等。魔的系缚,指三界轮回。其余部分意思浅显易懂。巴利
738-9.Etamādīnavaṃ ñatvāti yadidaṃ dukkhaṃ saṅkhārapaccayā, etaṃ ādīnavanti ñatvā. Sabbasaṅkhārasamathāti sabbesaṃ vuttappakārānaṃ saṅkhārānaṃ maggañāṇena samathā, upahatatāya phalasamatthatāyāti vuttaṃ hoti. Saññānanti kāmasaññādīnaṃ maggeneva uparodhanā. Etaṃ ñatvā yathātathanti etaṃ dukkhakkhayaṃ aviparītaṃ ñatvā. Sammaddasāti sammādassanā. Sammadaññāyāti saṅkhataṃ aniccādito, asaṅkhatañca niccādito ñatvā. Mārasaṃyoganti tebhūmakavaṭṭaṃ. Sesamuttānatthameva.
在第五种情况里,“由识为缘”是指以与业俱生的行识为缘。巴利
(5) Pañcamavāre viññāṇapaccayāti kammasahajātaabhisaṅkhāraviññāṇapaccayā.
741 “无渴爱者”就是没有渴爱的人。“已寂灭者”就是通过烦恼的寂灭而寂灭。剩下的部分意思很清楚。巴利
741.Nicchātoti nittaṇho. Parinibbutoti kilesaparinibbānena parinibbuto hoti. Sesaṃ pākaṭameva.
第六种情况里,“由触为缘”是指与行识相应的触作为缘。这里没有按词语顺序说名色和六处,而是直接说了触。因为名色和六处夹杂着色法,决不是与业相应;而这道轮回之苦,要么从业产生,要么从与业相应的法产生。巴利
(6) Chaṭṭhavāre phassapaccayāti abhisaṅkhāraviññāṇasampayuttaphassapaccayāti attho. Evaṃ ettha padapaṭipāṭiyā vattabbāni nāmarūpasaḷāyatanāni avatvā phasso vutto. Tāni hi rūpamissakattā kammasampayuttāneva na honti, idañca vaṭṭadukkhaṃ kammato vā sambhaveyya kammasampayuttadhammato vāti.
742-3 随有流者:就是跟随渴爱之流的人。遍知:就是通过三种遍知来了知。了知:就是通过阿罗汉道智来了知。乐于寂止:就是通过证得果定而乐于涅槃。触现观:就是触的灭尽。其余内容已经很清楚。巴利
742-3.Bhavasotānusārinanti taṇhānusārinaṃ. Pariññāyāti tīhi pariññāhi parijānitvā. Aññāyāti arahattamaggapaññāya ñatvā. Upasame ratāti phalasamāpattivasena nibbāne ratā. Phassābhisamayāti phassanirodhā. Sesaṃ pākaṭameva.
第七种情况:以受为缘,指的是以与业相应的受为缘。巴利
(7) Sattamavāre vedanāpaccayāti kammasampayuttavedanāpaccayā.
744-5 与不苦不乐受同时存在:就是和不苦不乐受在一起。“知道这是苦”:就是知道这一切感受都是“苦的成因”,或者通过变坏、暂时停留、无明这些苦的性质,而知道它是苦。“虚妄法”:就是会坏灭的法。“坏灭”:就是会被老和死破坏的法。“触了又触”:就是用生灭智反复触证。“看见灭”:就是在最后只看见坏灭本身。“他这样了知”:就是这样的受他了知,或者他了知其中苦的性质。“受的灭尽”:从此以后,通过道智,与业相应的受灭尽。其余的意思已经清楚了。巴利
744-5.Adukkhamasukhaṃ sahāti adukkhamasukhena saha. Etaṃ dukkhanti ñatvānāti etaṃ sabbaṃ vedayitaṃ ‘‘dukkhakāraṇa’’nti ñatvā, vipariṇāmaṭṭhitiaññāṇadukkhatāhi vā dukkhaṃ ñatvā. Mosadhammanti nassanadhammaṃ. Palokinanti jarāmaraṇehi palujjanadhammaṃ. Phussa phussāti udayabbayañāṇena phusitvā phusitvā. Vayaṃ passanti ante bhaṅgameva passanto. Evaṃ tattha vijānatīti evaṃ tā vedanā vijānāti, tattha vā dukkhabhāvaṃ vijānāti. Vedanānaṃ khayāti tato paraṃ maggañāṇena kammasampayuttānaṃ vedanānaṃ khayā. Sesamuttānameva.
第八种情况里说的“以渴爱为缘”,指的是以作为业资粮的渴爱为缘。巴利
(8) Aṭṭhamavāre taṇhāpaccayāti kammasambhārataṇhāpaccayā .
747 明白了“渴爱是苦的生起”这个过患之后,也就是知道了苦的生起正是渴爱的过患。其余内容已经清楚。巴利
747.Etamādīnavaṃ ñatvā, taṇhaṃ dukkhassa sambhavanti etaṃ dukkhassa sambhavaṃ taṇhāya ādīnavaṃ ñatvā. Sesamuttānameva.
第九种情况里说的“以取为缘”,是指以作为业资粮的取为缘。巴利
(9) Navamavāre upādānapaccayāti kammasambhāraupādānapaccayā.
748-9 “有”是指果报的存在,也就是诸蕴的出现。“已生是苦”:已经产生、已经形成的事物,就落入轮回之苦。“生者必有死”:愚人以为“已经存在的人能获得快乐”,为了说明即便在那里也唯有苦,所以经文说“生者必有死”。第二首偈的衔接是:智者以正智如实了知无常等,由于取著灭尽,证知“生已灭尽的涅槃”,就不再走向下一世的生命。巴利
748-9.Bhavoti vipākabhavo khandhapātubhāvo. Bhūto dukkhanti bhūto sambhūto vaṭṭadukkhaṃ nigacchati. Jātassa maraṇanti yatrāpi ‘‘bhūto sukhaṃ nigacchatī’’ti bālā maññanti, tatrāpi dukkhameva dassento āha – ‘‘jātassa maraṇaṃ hotī’’ti. Dutiyagāthāya yojanā – aniccādīhi sammadaññāya paṇḍitā upādānakkhayā jātikkhayaṃ nibbānaṃ abhiññāya na gacchanti punabbhavanti.
在第十种情况里,所谓“以精进为缘”,指的是以和业相应的精进为缘。巴利
(10) Dasamavāre ārambhapaccayāti kammasampayuttavīriyapaccayā.
751 在无造作中得解脱,说的是在无造作的涅槃中得解脱的人。其余的已经清楚。巴利
751.Anārambhe vimuttinoti anārambhe nibbāne vimuttassa. Sesamuttānameva.
第十一次问答里说的“以食为缘”,是指以和业相应的食为缘。还有一种解释:众生可以分为四种——依止色的、依止受的、依止想的、依止行的。其中,在十一种欲界里,众生因为受用段食,所以是依止色的。在色界里,除了无想天的众生之外,众生因为受用触食,所以是依止受的。在下面的三种无色界里,众生因为受用想所生的思食,所以是依止想的。在有顶天,众生因为受用行所生的识食,所以是依止行的。这样也可以知道:任何苦的生起,全都是以食为缘。巴利
(11) Ekādasamavāre āhārapaccayāti kammasampayuttāhārapaccayā. Aparo nayo – catubbidhā sattā rūpūpagā, vedanūpagā, saññūpagā, saṅkhārūpagāti. Tattha ekādasavidhāya kāmadhātuyā sattā rūpūpagā kabaḷīkārāhārasevanato. Rūpadhātuyā sattā aññatra asaññehi vedanūpagā phassāhārasevanato. Heṭṭhā tividhāya arūpadhātuyā sattā saññūpagā saññābhinibbattamanosañcetanāhārasevanato . Bhavagge sattā saṅkhārūpagā saṅkhārābhinibbattaviññāṇāhārasevanatoti. Evampi yaṃ kiñci dukkhaṃ sambhoti, sabbaṃ āhārapaccayāti veditabbaṃ.
755 “无病”指涅槃。“审察而受用”指先审察四种资具再受用,或者如此审察世间为“五蕴、十二处、十八界”,以智慧了知“无常、苦、无我”而受用。“安住于法”指安住于四圣谛之法。“不纳入计数”指不纳入“天人”或“人”等名称的计数。其余内容同上。巴利
755.Ārogyanti nibbānaṃ. Saṅkhāya sevīti cattāro paccaye paccavekkhitvā sevamāno, ‘‘pañcakkhandhā dvādasāyatanāni aṭṭhārasadhātuyo’’ti evaṃ vā lokaṃ saṅkhāya ‘‘aniccaṃ dukkhaṃ anattā’’ti ñāṇena sevamāno. Dhammaṭṭhoti catusaccadhamme ṭhito. Saṅkhyaṃ nopetīti ‘‘devo’’ti vā ‘‘manusso’’ti vā ādikaṃ saṅkhyaṃ na gacchati. Sesamuttānameva.
第十二次问答里说的“以动转为缘”,是指在渴爱、慢、见、业、烦恼这些动转之中,以任何一种业资粮的动转为缘。巴利
(12) Dvādasamavāre iñjitapaccayāti taṇhāmānadiṭṭhikammakilesaiñjitesu yato kutoci kammasambhāriñjitapaccayā.
757 舍弃动摇,就是舍弃渴爱。制止诸行,就是灭尽业以及和业相应的诸行。其余部分和前面说的一样。巴利
757.Ejaṃ vossajjāti taṇhaṃ cajitvā. Saṅkhāre uparundhiyāti kammaṃ kammasampayutte ca saṅkhāre nirodhetvā. Sesamuttānameva.
在第十三组问答中,“有依者动摇”:这里的“有依者”是指执取五蕴的人——要么带着渴爱执取,要么带着渴爱、邪见和慢执取。这样的人会生起恐惧和动摇,就像《狮子经》(相应部3.78)里所说的那些天神一样。其余内容跟前面说的一样。巴利
(13) Terasamavāre nissitassa calitanti taṇhāya taṇhādiṭṭhimānehi vā khandhe nissitassa sīhasutte (saṃ. ni. 3.78) devānaṃ viya bhayacalanaṃ hoti. Sesamuttānameva.
在第十四次问答中,“以色”:是指色界的存在,或者色界禅定;“无色”:是指无色界的存在,或者无色界禅定;“灭”:是指涅槃。巴利
(14) Cuddasamavāre rūpehīti rūpabhavehi rūpasamāpattīhi vā. Arūpāti arūpabhavā arūpasamāpattiyo vā. Nirodhoti nibbānaṃ.
761 “超越死神”是指超越死亡死神、烦恼死神和天子死神;这里说的是舍弃这三种死神之后继续前进的人。其余内容就和前面所说的一样。巴利
761.Maccuhāyinoti maraṇamaccu kilesamaccu devaputtamaccuhāyino, tividhampi taṃ maccuṃ hitvā gāminoti vuttaṃ hoti. Sesamuttānameva.
在第十五次问答中,说到“凡是”时,是针对名色而说的。因为世人以恒常、清净、快乐、自我的方式去审察思惟这名色,认为“这是真实的”,把它看成已见、已观。而“那是圣者们的”意思是“这是圣者们的”,这里省略了鼻音和元音i而这样说。“此是虚妄”:这名色即使被执取为恒常等,它也不是那样的,所以是虚妄。后面又说“凡是”,是针对涅槃而说的。因为世人认为色、受等不存在,便审察思惟说“这是虚妄,什么都没有”。而“那是圣者们的,这是真实的”:对于圣者们来说,涅槃具有无烦恼的清净性、与流转之苦相对的乐性、以及究竟寂静的恒常性,由于从不变异,所以从究竟义上被正慧如实彻底照见为“真实”。巴利
(15) Pannarasamavāre yanti nāmarūpaṃ sandhāyāha. Tañhi lokena dhuvasubhasukhattavasena ‘‘idaṃ sacca’’nti upanijjhāyitaṃ diṭṭhamālokitaṃ. Tadamariyānanti idaṃ ariyānaṃ, anunāsikaikāralopaṃ katvā vuttaṃ. Etaṃ musāti etaṃ dhuvādivasena gahitampi musā, na tādisaṃ hotīti. Puna yanti nibbānaṃ sandhāyāha. Tañhi lokena rūpavedanādīnamabhāvato ‘‘idaṃ musā natthi kiñcī’’ti upanijjhāyitaṃ. Tadamariyānaṃ etaṃ saccanti taṃ idaṃ ariyānaṃ etaṃ nikkilesasaṅkhātā subhabhāvā, pavattidukkhapaṭipakkhasaṅkhātā sukhabhāvā, accantasantisaṅkhātā niccabhāvā ca anapagamanena paramatthato ‘‘sacca’’nti yathābhūtaṃ sammappaññāya sudiṭṭhaṃ.
762-3 在无我的名色里,却认为有一个我。“认为这是真实的”:就是以恒常等方式,认为这个名色是“真实的”。“无论以何种方式”:就是无论以何种方式,比如对色或受,按“我的色、我的受”这样的方式去执取。由于那种执取方式,那个名色就变成了另外的样子。这是什么原因呢?因为那种执取对它是虚妄的。也就是说,它并不像被执取时那样存在,所以它变成了另外的样子。为什么它是虚妄的呢?因为它是虚妄之法、短暂之法。凡是短暂的、现起微劣的,就是虚妄之法、坏灭之法,而名色正是这样。“由于现观谛”:由于觉悟圣谛。其余内容如前所述。巴利
762-3.Anattani attamāninti anattani nāmarūpe attamāniṃ. Idaṃ saccanti maññatīti idaṃ nāmarūpaṃ dhuvādivasena ‘‘sacca’’nti maññati. Yena yena hīti yena yena rūpe vā vedanāya vā ‘‘mama rūpaṃ, mama vedanā’’tiādinā nayena maññanti. Tato tanti tato maññitākārā taṃ nāmarūpaṃ hoti aññathā. Kiṃ kāraṇaṃ? Tañhi tassa musā hoti, yasmā taṃ yathāmaññitākārā musā hoti, tasmā aññathā hotīti attho. Kasmā pana musā hotīti? Mosadhammañhi ittaraṃ, yasmā yaṃ ittaraṃ parittapaccupaṭṭhānaṃ, taṃ mosadhammaṃ nassanadhammaṃ hoti, tathārūpañca nāmarūpanti. Saccābhisamayāti saccāvabodhā. Sesamuttānameva.
在第十六次问答中,所谓“行”,是就六种可爱的所缘来说的。世间人就像飞蛾、鱼、猴子等被灯火、钓钩、胶饵之类引诱那样,把这六种所缘思量成“这是乐”。而“那是非圣者们的,这是苦”是说:圣者们依据“诸欲确实绚丽、甜蜜、悦意,却以种种形相搅乱人心”等道理,以正智如实观见,这就是“苦”。再次所谓“行”,则是针对涅槃而说。世间人因为没有了五欲,就把涅槃思量成“苦”。“那是圣者们的”意思是:圣者们从究竟乐的角度,以正智如实观见,这就是“乐”。巴利
(16) Soḷasamavāre yanti chabbidhamiṭṭhārammaṇaṃ sandhāyāha. Tañhi lokena salabhamacchamakkaṭādīhi padīpabaḷisalepādayo viya ‘‘idaṃ sukha’’nti upanijjhāyitaṃ. Tadamariyānaṃ etaṃ dukkhanti taṃ idaṃ ariyānaṃ ‘‘kāmā hi citrā madhurā manoramā, virūparūpena mathenti citta’’ntiādinā (su. ni. 50; cūḷani. khaggavisāṇasuttaniddesa 136) nayena ‘‘etaṃ dukkha’’nti yathābhūtaṃ sammappaññāya sudiṭṭhaṃ. Puna yanti nibbānameva sandhāyāha. Tañhi lokena kāmaguṇābhāvā ‘‘dukkha’’nti upanijjhāyitaṃ. Tadamariyānanti taṃ idaṃ ariyānaṃ paramatthasukhato ‘‘etaṃ sukha’’nti yathābhūtaṃ sammappaññāya sudiṭṭhaṃ.
765-6 “全部的”就是没有剩余。“可爱的”是指想要的、盼望的。“可意的”是指亲爱的、让人喜欢的。“令心增长的”是指能使心增长的。所谓“如其所存”,是说这六种所缘只要存在,就这样称呼。要知道这只是用词上的差别。至于“vo”这个词,在这里只是一个语气助词而已。巴利
765-6.Kevalāti anavasesā. Iṭṭhāti icchitā patthitā. Kantāti piyā. Manāpāti manavuḍḍhikarā. Yāvatatthīti vuccatīti yāvatā ete cha ārammaṇā atthīti vuccanti. Vacanabyattayo veditabbo. Ete voti ettha voti nipātamattaṃ.
767-8 所谓“乐”,是圣者们所见的;“自身灭尽”是说,圣者们见到五蕴的灭就是“乐”,也就是涅槃。“此是相反的”,是说这是颠倒的见解。“对于见者”,是说对于见者们,也就是所说的智者。这里前一个“凡”,是就事欲而说的;后一个“凡”,是指涅槃。巴利
767-8.Sukhanti diṭṭhamariyehi, sakkāyassuparodhananti ‘‘sukha’’miti ariyehi pañcakkhandhanirodho diṭṭho, nibbānanti vuttaṃ hoti. Paccanīkamidaṃ hotīti paṭilomamidaṃ dassanaṃ hoti. Passatanti passantānaṃ, paṇḍitānanti vuttaṃ hoti. Yaṃ pareti ettha yanti vatthukāme sandhāyāha. Puna yaṃ pareti ettha nibbānaṃ.
769-71 “看吧”是在呼唤听众。“法”指涅槃法。“在此蒙昧无见者”是说在这里蒙昧、没有见识的愚人。他们为什么蒙昧?因为被覆盖的人面前就是黑暗,看不见的人面前就是漆黑。愚人被无明覆盖、遮蔽,变得像盲人一样,那就是黑暗,因此他们看不见涅槃法。而对圣者们来说,它是敞开的,就像光明对于能看见的人一样:对于善士们,以智慧之见来看,涅槃就像光明一样敞然显现。“它近在眼前,他们却不知道;像野兽一样,不懂法理”:涅槃就在自己身体里,只隔着薄薄的五层皮肤,或者就在自身五蕴灭尽之处,如此近在眼前,他们却浑然不知。那些人就像野兽一样,分不清正道和非正道,也分不清真实之法,在一切处……善自觉者。其中,“随入魔境者”指随入三界轮回的人。巴利
769-71.Passāti sotāraṃ ālapati. Dhammanti nibbānadhammaṃ. Sampamūḷhetthaviddasūti sampamūḷhā ettha aviddasū bālā. Kiṃkāraṇaṃ sampamūḷhā? Nivutānaṃ tamo hoti, andhakāro apassataṃ, bālānaṃ avijjāya nivutānaṃ otthaṭānaṃ andhabhāvakaraṇo tamo hoti, yena nibbānadhammaṃ daṭṭhuṃ na sakkonti. Satañca vivaṭaṃ hoti, āloko passatāmivāti satañca sappurisānaṃ paññādassanena passataṃ ālokova vivaṭaṃ hoti nibbānaṃ. Santike na vijānanti, magā dhammassakovidāti yaṃ attano sarīre tacapañcakamattaṃ paricchinditvā anantarameva adhigantabbato, attano khandhānaṃ vā nirodhamattato santike nibbānaṃ, taṃ evaṃ santike santampi na vijānanti magabhūtā janā maggāmaggadhammassa saccadhammassa vā akovidā, sabbathā bhavarāga…pe… susambudho. Tattha māradheyyānupannehīti tebhūmakavaṭṭaṃ anupannehi.
772 第772段:最后一首偈颂的关联是:“这样,未被善觉知的(涅槃),除了圣者,还有谁能(了知)呢?”它的意思是:除了圣者,还有别的什么人能够了知涅槃位呢?那涅槃位,通过第四圣道正确了知之后,紧接着就成为无漏者,以烦恼般涅槃而般涅槃;或者,正确了知之后成为无漏者,最后在无余涅槃界中般涅槃。说法就以阿罗汉果为顶点而结束了。巴利
772. Pacchimagāthāya sambandho ‘‘evaṃ asusambudhaṃ ko nu aññatra mariyehī’’ti. Tassattho – ṭhapetvā ariye ko nu añño nibbānapadaṃ jānituṃ arahati, yaṃ padaṃ catutthena ariyamaggena sammadaññāya anantarameva anāsavā hutvā kilesaparinibbānena parinibbanti, sammadaññāya vā anāsavā hutvā ante anupādisesāya nibbānadhātuyā parinibbantīti arahattanikūṭena desanaṃ niṭṭhāpesi.
“满心欢喜”是指内心满足、喜悦。“他们欢喜”是指他们感到欣喜。当这第十六种记说被宣说时,其余内容本来就是清楚明白的。巴利
Attamanāti tuṭṭhamanā. Abhinandunti abhinandiṃsu. Imasmiñca pana veyyākaraṇasminti imasmiṃ soḷasame veyyākaraṇe. Bhaññamāneti bhaṇiyamāne. Sesaṃ pākaṭameva.
就这样,在全部十六种解说中,每一处各有整整六十位比丘,总共九百六十位比丘的心不执取,从诸漏中解脱。在这里,十六次各说四谛,合计六十四谛,是随所应度者,以种种方式开示的。巴利
Evaṃ sabbesupi soḷasasu veyyākaraṇesu saṭṭhimatte saṭṭhimatte katvā saṭṭhiadhikānaṃ navannaṃ bhikkhusatānaṃ anupādāya āsavehi cittāni vimucciṃsu, soḷasakkhattuṃ cattāri cattāri katvā catusaṭṭhi saccānettha veneyyavasena nānappakārato desitānīti.